Toshiba DK424 I M Manual 9 to

Toshiba DK424 I M Manual 9 to
9
Universal Slot PCBs
This chapter contains information on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) which can be used in the
universal slots of either the Strata DK40i Expansion KSU, the Strata DK424 or DK424i cabinets.
Although the system architecture of these systems is very different, the PCBs described in this
chapter are common to both systems.
When installing these circuit boards in the DK40i Expansion KSU, you must install
them in the universal slots designated in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.
PCBs which are not installed in the universal slots of the system can be found in the installation
chapter for the system. For example, the TCOU PCB for the DK40i system appears in Chapter 3 –
DK40i Installation. Paragraph headings identify information which is specific to a particular
system and minor exceptions are mentioned in text.
Note
Prior to PCB installation, the power supply must be tested and the ground checked.
Universal Slot PCBs
Important!
PCB Compatibility
The following is a list of PCBs that appear in this chapter:
Compatible with:
PCB
Function
DK40i
DK424
DK424i
BVPU
X
X
X
Voice Over Internet Protocol (IP) Gateway Unit.
EOCU
X
X
X
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit
(See PEKU for installation/programming instructions.)
IMDU
X
X
X
Remote Maintenance Modem Unit
(See PIOU2, PIOUS2 for installation/programming
instructions.)
KCDU
X
PCOU1,2
X
X
X
(See RCOU for installation/programming instructions.)
PDKU2
X
X
X
Digital Telephone Interface Unit
PEKU
X
X
X
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
PEMU
X
X
X
See REMU.
PEPU
X
X
X
External Page Interface Unit
PESU
X
X
X
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
Strata DK I&M
5/00
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit
9-1
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Compatibility
Compatible with:
PCB
Function
DK40i
DK424
DK424i
PIOU2,
PIOUS2
X
X
X
PSTU
X
X
X
(See RSTU2 for installation/programming instructions.)
X
X
Attendant Console Interface Unit
X
X
Adds four additional Caller ID lines to RCIU2.
X
X
(See RCIU2 for installation/programming instructions.)
X
X
Caller ID Interface
X
X
Adds two ports per card (maximum of two) to E911 CAMA
Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU)
RATU
RCIS
X
RCIU1
RCIU2
X
RCMS
RCOS
X
X
X
Adds four loop start lines. (See RCOU for installation/
programming instructions.)
RCOU
X
X
X
Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit
RDDU
X
X
X
Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit
RDSU
X
X
X
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit
X
X
T1 Interface Unit
RDTU
9-2
Option Interface Units
REMU
X
X
X
E&M Tie Line Unit
RGLU2
X
X
X
Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit
RMCU
X
X
CAMA E911 Trunk Direct Interface card
RMDS
X
X
Optional built-in modem. (See RSIU for installation/
programming instructions.)
RSIS
X
X
Optional RS-232 ports. (See RSIU for installation/
programming instructions.)
RSIU
X
X
RS-232/Modem Interface Unit
RSSU
X
X
X
PC Interface Unit
RSTS
X
X
X
Optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit
(See RDSU for installation/programming instructions.)
RSTU2
X
X
X
Standard Telephone Interface Unit
RWIU
X
X
X
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (see Strata AirLink
Installation Guide)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PCB Chapter Layout
Each PCB outline begins with the PCB’s designation and title (the outline appears in the chapter in
alphabetical order by designation). A brief synopsis of the PCB appears next and includes a
notation of the system(s) that the PCB can be used in, the circuits supplied by the PCB, what
equipment the PCB interfaces with, and a list of the PCB’s older version(s) with a brief description
of their differences.
Installation and programming instructions follow the synopsis with a table showing the PCB’s
controls, indicators and connectors and an illustration of the board.
DK40i/DK424 Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PCB Title
RDDU - Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit
System:
Circuits per PCB:
Interfaces with:
Older Versions:
DK16e Expansion KSU, DK424
four DID lines
DID lines
None
The RDDU provides four Direct Inward dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single
office code along with a block of extensions. If an RDDU is installed, an RRCS must be
installed for DTMF operation, but not for dial pulse operation.
Gives the type of system that is
compatible with the given PCB. Be
sure to read this information before
attempting to use a PCB with your
system application.
RDDU controls, indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 7-10 and described in
Table 7-8.
Circuits per PCB:
RDDU Hardware Option
Type and number of circuits
available on the PCB.
There are no hardware options supported by the RDDU.
Interfaces with:
Type of line/hardware the PCB can
accept.
Universal Slot PCBs
Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations,
Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK424 only), or an external telephone number selected in
system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or
group of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each
RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI
features.
System:
Older Version(s):
Describes older version or versions
of the PCB.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-3
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits; one 10BaseT Ethernet connection
Interfaces with:
Appears as:
H.323 terminals over an IP network
4 E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
Type I and II Signaling
Immediate and Wink Start
Older Version(s): none
BVPU Configuration
With DK424, Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS/
ANI assignments (see Program 17).
Note
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming Tie lines, a DTMF
DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3 or
on any DK424 or DK424i processor PCB.
BVPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-1 and described in
Table 9-1.
BVPU Installation
1. Insert the BVPU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the BVPU can be installed only
in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.)
2. Attach the 10BaseT Ethernet connection to the LAN Connector.
3. Connect a PC equipped with Maintenance Console Software (MCS) to the Serial Port
according to the drawing below. A serial connection is necessary to establish the IP address of
the BVPU. Once the IP address is established, maintenance may be conducted over the
Ethernet port.
9-4
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
4. After installing the BVPU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight
resistance is felt.
BVPU
PC with maintenance
console software
Monitor jack
PC DB9 or
DB25 Com port
Dealer-supplied
6-wire telephone
modular cord
(cross-pinned)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Call-monitor jack (RJ12)
pin numbering
5243
Figure 9-1
BVPU Monitor Jack
Universal Slot PCBs
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
Toshiba PPTC9 or
PPTC25F
BVPU Programming
Note
For programming purposes, the Strata DK regards the BVPU card as an REMU and
identifies it as such. Programming instructions for the gateway component are included in
the Voice Over IP Installation Guide.
♦
Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support REMUs (BVPUs) and make sure RRCS is
enabled for DTMF operation.
♦
Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming
Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones (see Program 17, LED 05).
♦
Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference.
♦
Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines.
♦
Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to BVPU Tie lines.
Important!
Note
Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return.
When a BVPU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive
CO line and station port numbers.
♦
Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation.
♦
Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DID DNIS assignments.
♦
Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DID to [DN] ringing assignments.
♦
Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-5
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-1
BVPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/
Connector
Type of Component
Serial Port
Description
RS-232C Maintenance Connection
LAN Connector
RJ45
SW0
Dipswitch
10BaseT Ethernet Connection
LED 1
Green LED
On = Tie trunk 4 active
LED 2
Green LED
On = Tie trunk 3 active
LED 3
Green LED
On = Tie trunk 2 active
LED 4
Green LED
On = Tie trunk 1 active
LED 5
Green LED
Power On/Off
LED 6
Yellow LED
Line Status (On=Busy / Off = Idle)
LED 7
Red LED
Unused. All switches = Off
Alarm (On = Abnormal)
On-Line
On = Operating
LED 8
Green LED
Off = Starting up or Off
Slow Flash = Detected error in BVPU
Fast Flash = Shut down mode
9-6
LED 9
Yellow LED
Link Indication (On = Normal)
LED 10
Green LED
Data (On = Data communication in progress)
LED 11
Yellow LED
Collision (On = collisions occurring)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
4
3
2
1
VPIS1A
Line in Use
LEDs
UP
CN2
SPORT
Serial Port
LEDs
JTAG
LINK
ONLINE
ALARM
BUSY
POWER
BDM
Backplane
Connector
LAN
ON
CN1
5031
TBO Ground Terminal
Figure 9-2
Strata DK I&M
Universal Slot PCBs
LSB
12345678
MSB
LED7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BVPU1A
BVPU PCB
5/00
9-7
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
KCDU – CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU
Circuits per PCB: two CO loop start/four digital telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
central office loop start lines
digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM)
PDIU-DS
DDCB
cordless digital telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT)
Older Version(s): none
Up to four KCDU PCBs may be installed in the Expansion KSU. For controls, connectors, and
indicators, see Figure 9-3 and Table 9-2.
KCDU Configuration
The KCDU may have to be configured to control excessive loudness if the system is close to a CO
or installed behind a PBX telephone system. It does not have to be configured for anything else.
The decibel (dB) PAD switches, SW501 (CO1) and SW601 (CO2), control the loudness by
providing a 3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position. The
switch comes from the factory set at NOR (for normal) meaning no PAD loss.
KCDU Installation
1. If the system is located within one mile of the CO or PBX telephone system, set dB PAD
switches SW501 and SW601 to the PAD position.
2. Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot in the Expansion KSU, per tables in Chapter 2 –
DK40i Configuration. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors.
3. After installing the KCDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
Note
If KCDU CO lines receive Caller ID, RCIU2 must be installed.
KCDU Programming
See “RCOU Programming” on Page 9-33 and “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 9-10 for KCDU
programming information. When running Program 03 for the KCDU slot(s), specify code 65 if the
KCDU does not support OCA or PDIU-DI telephones or code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or
PDIU-DI telephones. Do not specify code 11, 61, 62, or 64.
9-8
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-2
KCDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
CO line circuit 1
indicator SW501
Red LED
CO line circuit 2
indicator SW601
Red LED
J7 connectors
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits,1 and 2.
PAD switch SW501
Two-position slide
Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 1 (when set in PAD position).
PAD switch SW601
Two-position slide
Enables 3 dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 2 (when set in PAD position).
Lights to indicate CO line circuit is in operation.
25-Pair Amphenol Connector (Female)
J7
CO1
SW601
(CO2)
PAD NOR
Universal Slot PCBs
CO2
SW501
(CO1)
PAD NOR
1857
Backplane Connector
Figure 9-3
Strata DK I&M
KCDU PCB
5/00
9-9
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PDKU2 – Digital Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM)
DDSS console (circuit 8 only)
PDIU-DS (must have dedicated circuit)
DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028)
cordless digital telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT)
DKT2001 single line digital telephones (see Note below)
Older Version(s): PDKU1 (identical to PDKU2 except it does not support continuous DTMF tones
w/DKT2000-series telephones, DIUs can only be connected to circuits 1~7)
PDKU2 Hardware Options
PDKU2 does not have to be configured for any option. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for
instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the PDKU2, as
well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: an Integrated Data Interface Unit
(PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI), a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (DVSU), and a Headset/Loud
Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU). Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation to connect the Standalone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) to the PDKU.
Note
DKT2001 telephones do not support HHEUs, DADMs, DDSSs, RPCI-DIs, or DVSUs.
There are no controls or indicators on the PDKU (Figure 9-4).
PDKU2 Installation
1. Insert the PDKU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, PDKU2 must be installed per
tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.)
2. After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
PDKU2 Programming
Program 03
♦
Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU2.
♦
Specify Code 62 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
and/or DIUs and RPCI-DI Data mode.
♦
Specify Code 64 to indicate a PDKU2 supporting a DDSS console, Speaker OCA, DIUs, and
RPCI-DI Data mode.
♦
For RPCI-DI TAPI mode only and Handset OCA, code 61 can be used and the PDKU2 can be
in any universal cabinet slot.
Note
If there are no PDKU2 options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can
be run instead.
Programs 20, 21, and 22: Configures DIUs and RPCIs.
Programs 28 and 29: Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS) assignments.
9-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Program *29: Enables ADMs on 2000-series digital telephones.
Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets.
Programs 30, 31: Enables OCA.
Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) and door phone
ringing assignments.
Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital
telephones.
Backplane Connector
Universal Slot PCBs
1371
50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector
Figure 9-4
Strata DK I&M
PDKU2 PCB
5/00
9-11
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PEKU – Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: eight electronic telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
electronic telephones
HDSS console (circuits 7 and 8 only–each console requires two circuits)
alternate BGM source (circuit 3 only)
EOCU PCB for OCA
external conference amplifier (circuits 2 and 3 only–ports 09 and 10, 17 and 18, 25 and
26, 33 and 34–each amplifier requires two circuits)
HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028)
Older Version(s): none
PEKU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-6 and described in Table 9-3.
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU
(Internal Option)
Note
PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the
EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 9-5).
1. Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and
J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50,
and P60.
2. Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.
J60
J40
J50
3. Use a three-pair cable for making connections
between the PEKU and the speaker OCA
electronic telephone.
4. Refer to “Electronic Telephone Upgrades” on
Page 11-19 for procedures to upgrade electronic
telephones for Speaker OCA.
J20
Note
Electronic telephones do not support handset
OCA.
External Options
Note
J10
1373
Figure 9-5
Off-Hook Call Announce
Unit (EOCU) Installation
Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus and Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for
installation of electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU,
HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or loud ringing bell
interface) and external options, respectively.
PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option
1. Set the SW1 switch to DSS.
2. See “HDSS Console” on Page 11-24 for console installation instructions. Each HDSS console
requires dedicated use of circuits 7 and 8 of a particular PEKU PCB.
9-12
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PEKU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB)
1. Cut the W9 Door Phone jumper wire on the PEKU PCB.
2. Refer to “Door Phone (MDFB)” on Page 11-25 for HDCB, associated Door Phones (MDFBs)
and door lock control installation procedures. Only circuit 5 of a PEKU associated with ports
004, 012, 020, and 028 can support HDCBs.
PEKU Configuration to Support Separate BGM Source Connection
1. Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper wire on the PEKU PCB.
2. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for installation procedures for BGM connection.
Only circuit 3 can support a BGM source.
3. In Program 10-2, set LED 09 on to enable the PEKU (Port 002) BGM source to be sent to
digital and electronic telephone speakers and/or PIOU2, PIOUS2, PEPU PCBs.
4. Use Program 19 to identify the slot in which the PEKU supporting the BGM source will be
installed.
PEKU Installation
2. Insert the PEKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the PEKU can be installed only
in place of the RSTU2, PDKU, or RDSU. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.)
3. After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
Universal Slot PCBs
1. Make sure the PEKU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. See previous
pages for more information.
PEKU Programming
Program 03: Door phones, the BGM source connection, and external amplifiers do not require a
special code.
➤
Specify Code 21 to indicate a non-optioned station line PEKU.
➤
Specify Code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA.
➤
Specify Code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured for an HDSS console.
➤
Specify Code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA and an HDSS console.
Note
If there are no PEKU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run
instead.
Programs 10-2 and 19: BGM connection.
Programs 10-3: Assigns external amplifiers to ports.
Programs 28 and 29: HDSS console assignments.
Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79: HDCB and door phone ringing assignments.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-13
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-3
PEKU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Off-hook call announce P10
Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call
Announce subassembly connector (used with
P20, P40, P50, and P60).
Off-hook call announce P20
Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P40
10-pin connector
Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P50
Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P60
Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call
Announce subassembly connector (used with
P10, P20, P40, and P50).
DSS/EKT HDSS Console/
Electronic Telephone SW1 Switch
2-position slide switch
Door phone W9 jumper wire
BGM source connection W5
jumper wire
White jumper wire
Configures PEKU for operation with an HDSS
console or electronic telephones.
When cut, configures PEKU for installation of
an optional HDCB.
When cut, configures PEKU for BGM source
connection.
Backplane Connector
P60 P50
P20
W9, cut for HDCB option
P10
P40
W5, cut for BGM option
EKT
DSS
SW1
1372
50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female)
Figure 9-6
9-14
PEKU PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PEPU2 – External Page Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: see interfaces)
Interfaces with:
built-in paging amplifier or page speaker
door lock control
external amplifier control
external paging 600 ohm (duplex) interface (one zone)
MOH control
night relay control
Older Version(s): none
The PEPU is similar to the PIOU2 and PIOUS2, but supports fewer peripherals than both PCBs.
PEPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are illustrated in Figure 9-7 and described in
Table 9-4.
PEPU does not support the following PIOU2 and PIOUS2 options:
Alarm sensor
♦
Four-zone page
♦
SMDR port
♦
Remote maintenance modem or ASCII terminal connector
♦
IMDU connection
Note
Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation
for installation of external options.
Universal Slot PCBs
♦
PEPU2 Installation
1. Make sure P15 is in the Mu Law position for U.S. and Canada.
2. Ensure the PEPU2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to
Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation.)
3. Insert the PEPU2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (S16) of the Base KSU/
cabinet if the system has only a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there
are Expansion KSU/cabinets, install the PEPU2 in the highest slot number of the highest
numbered KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
4. After installing the PEPU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
PEPU2 Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 41 for the slot that will support a PEPU.
Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code only, not with
$OO&DOO3DJH button).
Program 77-1: Assigns relay control options.
Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-15
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-4
PEPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
M/B make/break jumper plug P10
3-terminal jumper plug
M/B make/break jumper plug P11
Description
External page/door lock control relay make or
break jumper plug.
Night/hold relay make or break jumper plug.
SPI/SPO internal/external
amplifier switch SW4
2-position slide switch
Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM
operation.
Volume control VR1
Trim potentiometer
Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier.
Backplane Connector
SPO
SW4
P10
M
M
SPI P11
B
B
VR1
1390
50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector
Figure 9-7
9-16
PEPU PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PESU – Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone or two-wire device circuits (circuits 1,2)/
four electronic telephone circuits (circuits 5~8)
Interfaces with:
standard telephone circuits
standard telephones
voice mail ports
off-premises stations
alternate BGM source
auto attendant digital announcer
electronic telephone circuits
electronic telephones
alternate BGM source (circuit 8 only)
EOCU PCB for OCA
HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028)
external conference amplifier
Older Version(s): none
Note
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any
other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF receiver unit (RRCS4, 8, or
12) must be installed on the DK40i K4RCU3, DK424 or DK424i processor PCB.
Universal Slot PCBs
The PESU provides a ring generator that can be set for either 130V P-P or 190V P-P for the two
standard interface circuits. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are nonfunctional, but they are each assigned a
port in system programming.
PESU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-8 and described in Table 9-5.
DK40i General Information
The PESU must be installed in the DK40i Expansion KSU in place of RDSU, RSTU or PDKU.
See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the
DK40i system.
Installing the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) (Internal Option)
1. Mate the EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 (Figure 9-8) with the PESU connectors
P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60.
Note
PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the
EOCU only in the proper position.
2. Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors.
3. Use three-pair cable for connecting the PESU and the Speaker OCA electronic telephone.
Refer to Chapters 10 for wiring/ interconnecting details.
4. See “PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone” on Page 11-10 for procedures
to add required speaker OCA upgrade to electronic telephones.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-17
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
External Options
Note
Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus to connect electronic telephones (including the
following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for
headset and/or Loud Ringing Bell interface), standard telephones, and HDCBs to the
PESU. See Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation to connect peripherals.
PESU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB)
1. Cut the W9 door phone jumper wire on the PESU PCB.
2. See “Door Phone/Lock Programming” on Page 11-27 for installation procedures for the
HDCB and associated door phones (MDFBs) and door lock control.
3. Each HDCB requires dedicated use of circuit 5 of a particular PESU PCB.
PESU Configuration to Support Background Music (BGM) Source
1. Cut the W7 (BGM) jumper wire on the PESU.
2. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for BGM installation procedures.
PESU Configuration for Square Wave Ring Generator
➤
Ensure the P90 jumper plug is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The
“L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or PSTU2 experience ring
trip.
PESU Installation
1. Make sure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is securely attached to the PESU (Figure 9-8).
WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the PESU is designed to protect the
installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield.
2. Ensure the PESU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. “PESU Controls,
Indicators, and Connectors” on Page 9-19.
3. Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the
DK40i system.
4. After installing the PESU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight
resistance will be felt.
9-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PESU Programming
Enter Code 25 in Program 03 for a non-optioned PESU or Code 26 for a PESU supporting Offhook Call Announce. To program the PESU standard telephone ports, see “PESU Programming”
on Page 9-19. To program the PESU electronic telephone ports, see “PESU Programming” on
Page 9-19. If there are no PESU options, skip Program 03 and run Program 91 instead.
Table 9-5
PESU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call
Announce subassembly connector (used with
P20, P40, P50, and P60).
Off-hook call announce P10
Off-hook call announce P20
Description
10-pin connector
Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P40
Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P50
Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60.
Off-hook call announce P60
Used with P10, P20, P40, and P50.
3-terminal jumper
When cut, configures PESU, circuit 5 for
installation of an optional HDCB.
Door phone W9 jumper wire
White jumper wire
BGM W7 jumper pack
Strata DK I&M
5/00
H=190V P-P (factory setting)
L=130V P-P
When cut, configures PESU, port 07, circuit 8,
for BGM source connection (slot 01 only with
PCTU2 and PCTU1).
Universal Slot PCBs
Ring voltage jumper plug P90
Sets ring generator voltage level for circuits 1
and 2.
9-19
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Cut W7 Only if BGM Is Connected to
Port 07, Circuit 8
P60
W7
PESU
P40
P50
Optional
EOCU, Equip.
for OCA
Feature
Cut W9 for
Door Phone
Option (HDCB
on Circuit 5)
W9
P10
P20
ESTS
50-Pin
Amphenol
Connector
(Female)
P80
Backplane
Connector
P70
Up
L
H
P90
PESU
1378
Ring Voltage Option (Ports 1 & 2):
L = Low Level (130V P-P)
H = High Level (190V P-P)
ESTS: Standard Telephone
Interface, Always Equipped
From Factory
Note Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L).
Figure 9-8
9-20
PESU PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
PIOU2, PIOUS2 – Option Interface Units
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces)
Interfaces with:
night transfer/music hold control relay
door lock/external amplifier control relay
remote maintenance (IMDU)
TTY port–terminal, modem, SMDI, ACD/MIS (DK424 only)
SMDR output
alarm sensor
zone page interface–four zones (PIOU2 only)
built-in paging amplifier (PIOU2 only)
unamplified page output
Older Version(s): none
The PIOU2 and PIOUS2 both provide a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. A
maximum of three PIOU2 or PIOUS2 PCBs can be installed in the system. (see “PIOU2, PIOUS2
Installation” on Page 9-22).
PIOU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-10 and described in
Table 9-7. PIOUS2 information is provided in Figure 9-11 and Table 9-8.
IMDU Compatibility with PIOU and PIOUS
The compatibility of the IMDU1 and IMDU2A PCBs are shown in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6
Universal Slot PCBs
DK40i General Information: On the DK40i, the Base KSU provides the 600 ohm page output;
the 600 ohm page output on the PIOU2, PIOUS2 is not used on the DK40i.
IMDU and PIOU/PIOUS Compatibility
PIOU/PIOUS
IMDU1
IMDU2A
PIOU1A/PIOUS1A
Available
Available
PIOU2A/PIOUS2A
N/A
Available
IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option)
1. Make sure IMDU2 P3 is set for PCM
Mu Law operation in the U.S and
Canada.
Mu A
P3
H
J1
H M L
P1
J2
3. Make sure IMDU2 P2, modem receive
gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada.
4. On the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, set the SW3
switch to the “MODEM” position for
IMDU2 operation.
5. Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU2
or PIOUS2 to the “BELL.”
L
P2
2. Make sure IMDU2 P1, modem transmit
gain is set on L in the U.S and Canada.
3651
Figure 9-9
Remote Maintenance Modem
(IMDU2) Installation
6. Mate IMDU2 connector J1 with PIOU2
or PIOUS2 connector P1 and IMDU2
J2 with P2 and P3 (see Figure 9-9).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-21
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Note
PIOU2 or PIOUS2 connectors P1, P2, and P3 are positioned to allow installation of the
IMDU2 only in the proper position.
7. Refer to the Strata DK Programming Manual and turn LED 14 on in Program 77-1 to enable
IMDU2 operation.
Note
The IMDU2 default station intercom or [DN] is #19.
8. Apply firm, even pressure to the IMDU2 to ensure proper mating of connectors.
9. Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the PCB
has been installed in the KSU/cabinet (in for 300 bps, out for 1200 bps).
Note
Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for external option installation procedures.
PIOU2, PIOUS2 Installation
1. Make sure that P15 is in the Mu Law position for USA and Canada.
2. Ensure that the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options.
(Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for more details.)
3. Insert the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the
Base KSU/cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/
cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the PIOU2 or PIOUS2 in the highest
slot number in any KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of
connectors.
Note
In DK40i, PIOU2 or PIOUS2 can be installed in any available Expansion KSU.
4. After installing the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are
properly mated, a slight resistance is felt.
PIOU2, PIOUS2 Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 41, 42, or 43 for the slot that will support a PIOU2 or PIOUS2. (See
“Multiple Serial Port Installation” on Page 13-2.)
Note
Program 76 assignments for RSIU, RSIS, RMDS will override Program 03 assignments
(41, 42, and 43) for SMDI, SMDR, TTY, and maintenance modem.
Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code #39 only, not with $OO
&DOO3DJH button).
Program 60: Assigns SMDR options.
Program 77-1: Assigns relay control and IMDU2 options.
Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page
9-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
3692
Backplane
Connector
P15
P2
P1
Mu A
P3
N.C N.O
MODEM
P12
SP1
SW3
CCITT BELL
SP0
SW1
J3
TTY
600/600
1200
SW2
Universal Slot PCBs
PIOU2A
M B
P10
P11
M
300
B
P13
SW4
TTY
SMDR
ON 300
OFF 1200
PIOU2
Figure 9-10 PIOU2 PCB
3719
Backplane
Connector
P2
P1
P15
MODEM
Mu A
IMDU2
P3
SW3
N.C N.O
TTY
P12
300
P13
P10
M B
M
P11
SW1
B
CCITT BELL
SW2
600/600
SPT
CD4
PIOUS2
SPR
DET
DER
NHT
NHR
ALMT ALMR
PIOUS2
1200
ON 300
OFF 1200
Figure 9-11 PIOUS2 PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-23
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-7
PIOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
SMDR/TTY interface connector J3
Dual modular connector
IMDU2 connector P1
10-pin connector
IMDU2 connector P2
9-pin connector
IMDU2 connector P3
3-pin connector
Interface connector for remote maintenance
modem piggy-back module.
External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make
or Break jumper plug.
M/B make/break jumper plug P10
M/B make/break jumper plug P11
Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper
plug P12
Description
Interface connector for SMDR printer/call
accounting device and maintenance terminal/
modem.
Night/Hold Relay Make or Break jumper.
Plastic jumper
Alarm sensor normally open or closed jumper.
IMDU2 or external modem operating
specification jumper plug.
CCITT/BELL plug P13
SMDR baud rate switch SW1
2-position slide switch
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR
printer or call accounting device.
TTY baud rate switch SW2
2-position locking pushbutton switch
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module
(IMDU2) or external TTY jack.
Enables PIOU2 for operation with IMDU2
modem or TTY jack.
Modem/TTY switch SW3
SPO/SP1 internal/external
amplifier switch SW4
Volume control VR1
PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15
2-position slide switch
Selects built-in 3-watt amplifier (SPI) or 600ohm output (SPO) for external page/BGM
operation.
Trim potentiometer
Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier.
3-terminal jumper plug
Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the
U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in
Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of
Europe and Asia.
*Most modems in USA require BELL specification.
**Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR.
9-24
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-8
PIOUS2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
SMDR/TTY interface connector J3
Dual modular connector
(top modular is TTY,
bottom is SMDR)
IMDU2 connector P1
10-pin connector
IMDU2 connector P2
9-pin connector
IMDU2 connector P3
3-pin connector
Interface connector for remote maintenance
modem piggy-back module.
External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make
or Break jumper plug.
M/B make/break jumper plug P10
M/B make/break jumper plug P11
Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper
plug P12
Description
Interface connector for SMDR printer/call
accounting device and maintenance terminal/
modem.**
Night/Hold relay make or break jumper plug.
3-terminal jumper plug
Alarm sensor normally open or normally closed
jumper plug.
IMDU2 or external modem operating
specification jumper plug.
CCITT/BELL jumper plug P13
2-position slide switch
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR
printer or call accounting device.
TTY baud rate switch SW2
2-position locking pushbutton switch
Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module
(IMDU) or external TTY jack.
Modem/TTY switch SW3
2-position slide switch
Enables PIOUS2 for operation with IMDU2
modem or TTY jack.
3-terminal jumper plug
Default set for Mu Law standard (applies to the
U.S., Canada and Japan). A Law is used in
Mexico, the United Kingdom, and other parts of
Europe and Asia.
PCM A Law/Mu Law option P15
Universal Slot PCBs
SMDR baud rate switch SW1
*Most modems in USA require BELL specification.
**Top modular is TTY and Bottom modular is SMDR.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-25
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RATU – Attendant Console Interface Unit
System:
DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four attendant console circuits
Interfaces with:
up to four conventional and/or PC attendant consoles
Older Version(s): none
RATU controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 9-12 and described in Table 9-9.
RATU Installation
1. Insert the RATU (component side facing right) into the slot following the last station PCB.
Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors (consoles will assume the
next four station port numbers). (See Worksheets in DK424 or DK424i Configuration
Chapters 4 or 6 for RATU slot assignment recommendations.
2. After installing the RATU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
Table 9-9
RATU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Console 1 indicator CD3
Console 2 indicator CD4
Console 3 indicator CD5
Red LED
Console 4 indicator CD6
Description
Lights when a PC or conventional console is
not operating. The LED will turn off when the
console is operational. The LED temporarily
flashes when the console is first installed and
the DK424 RCTU processor or DK424i BCU
and attendant console or RATI initialize.
1391
Backplane Connector
4 3 2 1
CD3
CD4
CD5
CD6
Female
Amphenol
Connector
Figure 9-12 RATU PCB
9-26
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface
System:
RCIU1–DK424, DK424i
RCIU2 –DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
RCIS–DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four Caller ID circuits
Interfaces with:
loop or ground start lines w/Caller ID (requires RCOU or RGLU2)
Older Version(s): none
The RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB provides the Caller ID feature, also known as Calling Number Delivery
(CND). There are two types of RCIU PCBs, RCIU1 and RCIU2. RCIU1 can be used in DK424
and DK424i systems. RCIU2 can be used in DK40i, DK424 and DK424i systems.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install RCIU1 in the DK40i system.
➤
An RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available in addition to each RCOU, RGLU,
etc., line that is to receive Caller ID. When ordered from the factory, the RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB
comes equipped with four caller ID circuits.
Universal Slot PCBs
Caller ID can be provided on analog loop start lines (PCOU, KCDU, RCOU PCBs) and analog
ground start lines (RGLU2 PCB) only. It is not available on any other type of analog lines (RDDU/
DID and/or REMU, PEMU Tie) or any type of digital lines (RDTU- T1, including ground start,
loop start, DID and Tie lines).
RCIS PCB
An RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed onto the RCIU to provide an additional four caller ID
circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU/RCIS can provide a maximum of eight caller ID circuits per
cabinet slot.
To provide up to eight circuits, always install RCIS onto RCIU1 (DK424 and DK424i only) or
RCIU2 (DK40i, DK424 and DK424i) instead of installing two RCIU PCBs (Program 03 code 81
always assigns each RCIU slot with eight software caller ID circuits).
Each RCIU/RCIS Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired
across its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring on the MDF (see Figure 10-28 on
Page 10-30). Each RCIU/RCIS modular jack provides interface for two Caller ID circuits.
DK40i RCIU2 Installation
➤
Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only (see Figure 9-14 and Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.)
DK424 and DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation
➤
Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the DK424 and DK424i
(except slot 11 or slot 12 if the RSIU is installed in slot 11).
Note
It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in
the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines.
DK424i RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation
➤
Strata DK I&M
Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the DK424i.
5/00
9-27
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation
1. Install the RCIS onto the RCIU1 or RCIU2 as required (see Figures 9-13 and 9-15).
2. Install the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS into the appropriate cabinet slot. The circuit modular
jack numbering and the tip/ring cross connect wiring of RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS to
RCOU, PCOU, or RGLU is shown in Figure 10-26 on Page 10-28.
Note
It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in
the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines.
RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS Programming
Program 03: Program each RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS (four or eight Caller ID
circuit) slot with code 81.
Note
RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS caller ID circuits are numbered automatically in numerical
order starting with the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS installed in the lowest slot number.
Slots with code 81 increment the Caller ID circuit numbers by eight circuits even if RCIS
is not installed on the RCIU1 or RCIU2.
Program *50: Assigns CO lines that will receive Caller ID to an associated RCIU1/RCIS or
RCIU2/RCIS Caller ID circuit number. This assignment is flexible, i.e., any RCOU, PCOU,
RGLU Caller ID CO line can be assigned to any RCIU1, RCIU2 or RCIS caller ID circuit number.
Note
After assigning CO lines to caller ID circuits, turn system power Off for approximately
five seconds and then back On or run Program 91-2 to activate Program *50 assignments.
Program *51: Sets the Caller ID (CLID)/Automatic Dialed Number Identification (ANI) memory
allocation for the appropriate stations. This memory is used to save CLID/ANI telephone numbers
for calls that are received but not answered (abandoned calls). CLID/ANI numbers are not saved in
station memory if they are answered. Stations can be allocated with memory to save up to 100
numbers in 10-number increments.
The total memory allocated to all stations in a system is:
♦
RCTUE/F and B5CAU/BU = 2000 numbers
♦
RCTUC/D, B3CAU/BU and B2CAU/BU = 1000 numbers
♦
RCTUBA/BB, B1CAU = 400 numbers
♦
RCTUA and DK40i = 200 numbers
Note
When a CO line rings multiple stations, a station must be the owner of the Caller ID or
ANI CO line to be able to save abandoned call (Caller ID and/or ANI) telephone numbers.
(See Program *52.)
Program *52: Assigns stations as owners of Caller ID CO lines. These stations will store the Caller
ID telephone numbers received on abandoned (not answered) calls for the lines which they own.
Typically all common CO lines are assigned to one designated telephone or attendant console and
private lines are assigned to individual private line telephones.
9-28
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
J12
J13
RCIU1
P12
P13
20K/20K
J4
Secondary
Protectors
RCIS1A
(reverse)
20K/20K
RCIU1A or RCIU2A
(front)
J3
20K/20K
J2
20K/20K
J11
J1
P11
P10
RCIU1A
V.1
1392
Universal Slot PCBs
J10
Figure 9-13 DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or DK40i RCIU2/RCIS PCB
P12
P13
20K/20K
RCIU2
Secondary
Protectors
20K/20K
RCIU2A
(front)
20K/20K
20K/20K
J2
J1
P10
RCIU2A
P11
V.1
1862
Figure 9-14 DK40i RCIU2 PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-29
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RCIS
RCIU1 or RCIU2
4-wire
Modular Jack (4)
Not Used
T2
T1
R1
R2
Not Used
CKT 7 & 8
CKT 3 & 4
CKT 5 & 6
CKT 1 & 2
SXX
1393
Figure 9-15 DK424 and DK424i RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS PCB Modular Jack Positions
Note
A station must also be allocated with Caller ID/ANI storage memory in Program *51 to
store abandoned call telephone numbers.
Program 39, Code 462: Assigns the Caller ID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to LCD
telephones that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A user can scroll
through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number using this
button.
Program 59, Code 462: Assigns the CLID/ANI /RVW&DOO$XWR'LDO button to the attendant
consoles that store Caller ID and/or ANI abandoned call telephone numbers. A console user can
scroll through the stored abandoned call telephone numbers and auto dial the selected number
using this button.
Program 10-3, Key 08: Determines if CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers will be sent out the
system SMDI port:
➤
Turn LED 08 On if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should be sent out the system
SMDI port.
➤
Turn LED 08 Off if the CLID and/or ANI numbers received should not be sent out the system
SMDI port.
Note
9-30
The system will initialize with LED 01 Off, i.e., no CLID/ANI information will be sent
out the SMDI port.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Program 60-1, Key 01: Determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port, i.e.,
system Account Codes or CLID and/or ANI telephone numbers:
➤
Turn LED 01 On if CLID and/or ANI information should be sent out the system SMDR port.
➤
Turn LED 01 Off if Account Codes information should be sent out the system SMDR port.
Note
The system will initialize with LED 01 Off, i.e., Account Codes information will be sent
out the SMDR port.
Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02 (DK424 Release 3.2 and above, and DK424i): Enables CLID,
ANI, and/or Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) information to be sent from the RSIU
Open Architecture (OA) port on ACD calls only:
➤
Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information.
➤
Turn LED 01 Off if the OA port should not send Caller ID/ANI.
➤
Turn LED 02 On if the off port should send DNIS information.
➤
Turn LED 02 Off if the OA port should not send DNIS information.
●
●
Strata DK I&M
Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously to allow CLID,
ANI, and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port on ACD calls.
The system will initialize with LED 01 and LED 02 Off, i.e., no CLID, ANI, or DNIS
information will be sent from the OA port on ACD calls.
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
Notes
9-31
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RCOU, RCOS – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line
Interface Unit
System:
RCOU–DK40Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
RCOS–DK40i, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits
Interfaces with:
loop start lines
Older Version(s): PCOU2 (does not have ABR circuitry, uses RCTU, K4RCU ABR circuits)
PCOU1(has ABR circuitry, identical and interchangeable w/PCOU2)
The RCOU also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold circuitry. Each RCOU line can
be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection.
RCOU PCBs are shown in Figure 9-16 and described in Table 9-10.
RCOS Installation (Internal Option)
An RCOS PCB can be installed on the RCOU of the DK40i, DK424 and DK424i for four more
loop start lines (for a total of eight lines–the RCOS circuits provide the same options as the
RCOU). Each RCOS circuit has gas tube secondary protection.
Excessive loudness which is caused by close proximity to a CO or PBX telephone can be fixed
through the RCOS and RCOU decibel (dB) PAD switches. RCOS dB switches SW501, SW601,
SW701, and SW801 and RCOU dB switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 provide a -3
dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO when set to position 3. Switches are factory-set at
the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position.
See Figure 9-14 and Table 9-11 for RCOS controls, indicators, and interface connectors.
➤ To install an RCOS PCB
1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or CO, set the RCOS dB PAD switches
SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. Set the
RCOU dB PAD switches to position 3 also.
Note
RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 are positioned to allow installation of the
RCOS only in the proper position.
2. Mate the RCOS female connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 (Figure 9-18) to the RCOU male
connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 (Figure 9-16).
3. Apply firm, even pressure to the RCOS to ensure proper mating of connectors.
9-32
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RCOU Installation
Note
The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive
loudness resulting from close proximity to a Central Office or PBX telephone office by
providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position.
Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position.
➤ To install an RCOU PCB
1. If the Strata DK system is within one mile of the PBX or Central Office, set the RCOU dB
PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop)
position.
2. Insert the RCOU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. PCOU2 can be installed in place of RCOU,
see the appropriate Configuration chapter.
3. After installing the RCOU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
Program 03: Specify Code 11 for each slot that will support an a four-circuit RCOU (without an
RCOS). Specify Code 17 for each slot that will support an RCOU equipped with an RCOS.
Note
Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Program 91 recognizes
the RCOS.
Universal Slot PCBs
RCOU Programming
Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access
(DISA).
Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialing, DISA, and additional attributes to each line.
Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines; AR is
automatically enabled for ground start CO lines.
Program *15: Makes tenant assignments.
Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups.
Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones.
Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing).
Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only).
Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line.
Programs 45 ~ 48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line.
Programs 50 ~ 56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments.
Program *50: Assigns Caller ID circuits (RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS) to CO lines.
Program *52: Caller ID line owner station assignment.
Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote
Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant.
Programs 81 ~ 89:
♦
Assigns lines to ring selected stations and DH groups.
♦
Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-33
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Programs *81, *84, *87: Assigns which [DN] will flash when the CO line rings a telephone.
Program 93: Assigns names to lines.
Table 9-10
RCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
CO line circuit 1~4 indicators
Red LED
Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation.
(CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is
connected to a CO line).
J1 connector
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2.
J2 connector
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4.
2-position slide switch
Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit.
10-pin male connector
Interface connector for RCOS 4-circuit loop
start CO line unit.
PAD switch SW101 (circuits 1)
PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2)
PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3)
PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4)
RCOS connector P11, P12, P13,
P14
Backplane Connector
P12
P14
SW401
SW301
SW201
SW101
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
P11
P13
RCOS
Connectors
CO Line Modular
Jack Circuits
3 and 4
RCOS
Connectors
CO Line Modular
Jack Circuits
1 and 2
4 3 2 1
Red LEDs
J2
J1
1379
Figure 9-17 RCOU PCB
9-34
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-11
RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
CO line circuit 5~8
Red LED
Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation.
(CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is
connected to a CO line).
J3 connector
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits 5 and 6.
J4 connector
Modular connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits 7 and 8.
2-position slide switch
Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit.
Female connector
Interface connector for RCOU 4-circuit loop
start CO line unit.
PAD switch SW501 (circuit 1)
PAD switch SW601 (circuit 2)
PAD switch SW701 (circuit 3)
PAD switch SW801 (circuit 4)
RCOU connector J11, J12, J13,
J14
Backplane Connector
Universal Slot PCBs
SW101
SW401
0
3
PAD
4
3
2
SW301
SW201
0
3
PAD
0
3
PAD
0
3
PAD
1
1381
CO Line LEDs
CO Line Modular
Jack Circuits 3 and 4
CO Line Modular
Jack Circuits 1 and 2
Figure 9-18 RCOS Controls, Indicators, and Connector
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-35
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-12
PCOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
CO line circuit 1 CD112
Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation.
CO line circuit 2 CD212
Red LED
CO line circuit 3 CD312
CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is
connected to a CO.
CO line circuit 4 CD412
J1 connector
Modular connector
J2 connector
Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2.
Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4.
PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1)
PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2)
2-position slide switch
PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3)
Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit.
PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4)
Red LEDs
Trunk Modular
Jack Circuits
7 and 8
8 7 6 5
Trunk Modular
Jack Circuits
5 and 6
J4
J3
J13
J11
RCOU
Connectors
3
J14
RCOU
CONNECTORS
0
SW801
3
0
SW701
3
0
SW601
3
0
SW501
J12
1380
Figure 9-19 PCOU2 PCB
9-36
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four DID lines
Interfaces with:
DID (one or two-way) lines
Older Version(s): none
The RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single
office code along with a block of extensions.
Note
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF
Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3,
or on any DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU.
BRCS is not required for RDDU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11).
RDDU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-20 and described in
Table 9-13.
Universal Slot PCBs
Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations,
Distributed Hunt or ACD Group (DK40i, Release 4.2 and higher or DK424 or DK424i), or an
external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line
to be routed to different stations or groups of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring
the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU
lines support DNIS and ANI features.
RDDU Installation
Note
Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position.
1. If the KSU is located within one mile of the PBX or CO, set dB PAD switches SW101 through
SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position to control excessive loudness resulting from
close proximity to the PBX or CO.
2. Sensitivity jumpers P101~P401 are used mostly for dial pulse operation, to adjust for dial
pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the central office, the sensitivity should be set for
low (L); as the loop length increases, it should be set to medium (M), then high (H).
3. Insert the RDDU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
Important!
Each RDDU PCB does not use uses four station ports in software with DK40i,
DK424 or DK424i Release 4.0 and higher. DK40i must be installed per Chapter 2 –
DK40i Configuration (see Configuration Worksheets for recommended RDDU slot
assignments).
4. After installing the RDDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-37
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RDDU Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 16 for slots that support RDDUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for
DTMF operation. Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead.
Program *09: Assigns DID line extensions to route to station [PDNs] and IMDU or RMDS
Remote Maintenance (see Program 17 below).
Program 10-1: Enables or disables two-line conference.
Program 15: Assigns DTMF/dial pulse dialing, and additional attributes to each line.
Program *15: Makes tenant assignments.
Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups.
Program *17: Assigns intercept port for DID calls to wrong or vacant numbers.
Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to DID lines. Also used to assign Auto camp-on and
no-dial tone return for DID lines. Program 17 also Assigns DID lines to route per DNIS and ANI
options (Program 71 and 72) or DID numbers (Program *09).
Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation.
Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones.
Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing).
Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only).
Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX/Centrex operation to each line.
Programs 45~48: Defines toll restriction for any line.
Programs 50~56: Defines least cost routing assignments.
Programs 71 (1~5): Assigns DNIS or ANI option to DID lines.
Programs *71~*73: Assigns telephone to ring called [DN].
Program 93: Assigns names to lines.
9-38
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
Table 9-13
RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1)
PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2)
3-position slide switch
Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit.
J1 connector
Modular connection
Interface connector for DID line circuits 1 & 2
J2 connector
Modular connection
Interface connector for DID line circuits 3 & 4
DID line circuit 1 CD122
Red LED (top)
DID line circuit 2 CD222
Red LED
PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3)
PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4)
Lights to indicate line circuit is in operation.
(Trunk indicator will not light unless RDDU is
connected to a DID line.)
DID line circuit 3 CD322
Red LED
DID line circuit 4 CD422
Red LED (bottom)
Jumper plug P101
Jumper plug P201
3-terminal jumper plug
Jumper plug P301
Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop lengths.
Universal Slot PCBs
Jumper plug P401
Backplane Connector
P401
3 0
P201 3 0
HML
SW201
P101 3 0
HML
SW101
RDDU
HML
SW401
P301 3 0
HML
SW301
4 3 2 1
RDDU
J2
LEDs
J1
1385
Figure 9-20 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-39
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU only, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: (with RSTS) four standard telephone (circuits 1~4)/four digital telephone (circuits 5~8)
(without RSTS) two standard telephone circuits (1 and 2)/four digital telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
digital circuits
digital telephones (with or w/o RPCI-DI or ADM)
PDIU-DS
DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, 028)
cordless digital telephone (DKT2004-CT)
standard circuits
standard telephones
voice mail ports
off-premises stations
other similar devices
alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only)
auto attendant digital announcer
message waiting lamp
Older Version(s): none
An optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (RSTS) can be attached to the RDSU to provide
two more standard telephone ports (circuits 3 and 4).
RDSU and RSTS controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-21. RDSU interface
connectors are described in Table 9-14.
Note
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF
Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3,
or on any DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU.
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the
DK40i system.
Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option)
An optional R48S unit can be connected to the RDSU or RSTU to change the standard telephone
loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the standard telephone circuit loop length
(including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. The features provided by the
R48S apply to the RSTS circuits as well as the basic RDSU standard telephone circuits.
➤ To install the R48S on the RDSU
➤
Mate the R48S connectors R6 and R7 with the RDSU connectors R6 and R7. RDSU
connectors P6 and P7 are positioned to allow installation of the R48S only in the proper
position (Figure 9-28).
Installing RSTS (Internal Option)
➤
9-40
Mate the RSTS connectors P2~P5 with the RDSU connectors P2~P5. RDSU connectors
P2~P5 are positioned to allow installation of the RSTS only in the proper position (Figure
9-21).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
PCB Chapter Layout
RDSU Installation
1. Ensure the SSTU subunit and optional subassemblies are securely attached to the RDSU
(Figure 9-21).
WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the RDSU is designed to protect the
installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield.
2. Insert the RDSU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors. (See Figure 10-23 on Page 10-25.)
CAUTION!
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in slot 18 of the
DK40i system. See Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.
3. After installing the RDSU gently pull the RDSU outward. If the connectors are properly
mated, a light resistance is felt.
➤
Enter Code 27 in Program 03 for a non-optioned RDSU, or enter Code 28 for an RDSU that
support off-hook call announce and data interface units. To program the RDSU standard
telephone ports (including the RSTS), see “RDSU Programming” on Page 9-41. To program
the RDSU digital telephone ports, see “PDKU2 Programming” on Page 9-10.
➤
If there are no RDSU options, skip Program 03 can be skipped, and run Program 91 instead.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDSU Programming
9-41
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-14
RDSU, RSTS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
RSTS connector P2/P3
Description
Connector for RSTS subassembly that provides
two standard telephone circuits.
10-pin connector
RSTS connector P4/P5
R48S connector to P6
8-pin connector
R48S connector to P7
6-pin connector
Interface connector for R48S.
P3
P2
RSTS
P5
P4
P6
R48S
P7
P6
P3
P2
P7
P5
P4
RDSU1
1377
Figure 9-21 RDSU, RSTS PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
See Chapter 8 – T1 for RDTU PCB installation and programming information.
9-42
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
REMU – Tie Line Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits
Interfaces with:
E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
Type I and II Signaling
Immediate and Wink Start
Older Version(s): PEMU (Type I signaling & immediate start only,
does not provide PAD switches)
Tie lines can route per Program 04 [DN] assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS/ANI
assignments (see Program 17).
The REMU has four decibel (dB) PAD switches which can be set to reduce excessive loudness
resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to
the PBX or central office. (PAD is for Transmit and Receive for 2W operation, and Transmit only
is for 4W operation.)
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF
Receiver Unit (BRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the DK40i Base KSU K4RCU3
or on any DK424 or DK424i processor PCB.
BRCS is not required for REMU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11).
REMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-22 and described in
Table 9-15.
Universal Slot PCBs
Note
PEMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-23 and described in
Table 9-16.
REMU Installation
Important!
Each REMU decreases the maximum system CO lines by four. REMU circuits do not
use station ports with DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.0 and higher. See
Worksheets in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for recommended REMU slot
assignments.
1. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs SW103~SW403 to the appropriate positions.
2. Set the P102/104, P202/204, P302/304, and P402/404 jumper plugs for Type 1 or Type 2
signaling.
3. If the system is located within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the REMU dB PAD
switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position.
4. Insert the REMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be
installed only in place of the RDDU per configuration chapter.)
5. After installing the REMU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a
slight resistance is felt.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-43
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
PEMU Installation
1. Determine if the E&M Tie lines will be configured for 2- or 4-wire transmission.
2. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs P103, P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions.
3. Set the FG jumper plug P3 to the “2-3” position.
4. Set all GND/BAT jumper plugs to the “BAT” position for connection to the telephone
network.
Note
The “GND” position is used to connect PEMU circuits back-to-back on premises only,
1000 feet maximum (E&M lead wires must be crossed).
5. Insert the PEMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.(For DK40i, the REMU, PEMU can be
installed only in place of the RDDU per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.)
Important!
Each PEMU decreases the maximum system CO lines by four. Tie lines do not use
station ports in DK40i, DK424 and DK424i in Release 4.0 and higher. See
Worksheets in the appropriate configuration chapter for recommended PEMU slot
assignments.
6. After installing, gently pull the PEMU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight
resistance is felt.
PEMU, REMU Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support PEMUs and make sure RRCS is enabled for
DTMF operation.
Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie
lines to route calls to the proper telephones (see Program 17, LED 05).
Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference.
Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines.
Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to REMU Tie lines.
Important!
Note
Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return.
When a PEMU or REMU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four
consecutive CO line and station port numbers.
Program 30: Disables RRCS for dial pulse operation.
Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DID DNIS assignments.
Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DID to [DN] ringing assignments.
Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line
9-44
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-15
REMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Tie trunk circuits 1~4 (CD102, 202,
302, and 402)
Red LED
Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation.
E&M Tie trunk connector circuits
1~4 (J101, 201, 301, and 401)
Modular connector
Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit.
2-position slice switch
Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit.
3-terminal jumper
Enables line circuit to be set for Type 1 or Type
2 signaling.
2-position slice switch
Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie
line circuit.
PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1)
PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2)
PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3)
PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4)
TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P102/
104
TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P202/
204
TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P302/
304
2W/4W switch 102 (circuit 1)
2W/4W switch 202 (circuit 2)
2W/4W switch 302 (circuit 3)
2W/4W switch 402 (circuit 4)
Universal Slot PCBs
TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P402/
404
Backplane Connector
SW102
SW202
SW302
SW402
4W
2W
2W
4W
4W
2W
4W
P304
P202
P204
P104
P302
P404
TYP1
TYP1
P402
TYP1
TYP2
TYP2
TYP2
3
SW401
TYP1
TYP2
0
4 3 2 1
3
0
TYP1
TYP1
TYP2
TYP2
SW301
SW201
3
TYP1
TYP2
TYP1
TYP2
0
SW101
3
0
REMU
2W
P102
LEDs
J401
J301
J201
J101
1383
Figure 9-22 REMU PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-45
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-16
PEMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Tie trunk circuit 1~4 (CD102, 202,
302, and 402)
Red LED
Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation.
E&M Tie line connector J101, 201,
301,and 401 (circuit 1~4)
Modular connector
Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit.
FG jumper P3
3-terminal jumper
Enables or disables -48VDC ground to FG.
GND/BAT jumper P101
3-terminal jumper
(Tie line 1)
GND/BAT jumper P102
Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit.
GND/BAT jumper P201
3-terminal jumper
(Tie line 2)
GND/BAT jumper P202
GND/BAT jumper P301
3-terminal jumper
(Tie line 3)
GND/BAT jumper P302
GND/BAT jumper P401
M-lead origination for Tie line (must be in BAT
position per FCC requirements.
3-terminal jumper
(Tie line 4)
GND/BAT jumper P402
2W/4W switch P103, 203, 303,
and 402 (circuit 1~4)
Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie
line circuit.
3-terminal jumper
Backplane Connector
2W
P403
4W
2W
P303
4W
P203 P103
2W
4W
2W
4W
SP1020
-48 Volt
Supply
Ground/Battery
Jumpers
(Leave In
Factory Positions)
P401
P402
P202 P201
P102
P302 P301
FG
LEDs
P3
P101
123
4
3
2
1
J401
J301
J201
J101
1384
Tie Line 4
Tie Line 3
Tie Line 2
Tie Line 1
Figure 9-23 PEMU PCB
9-46
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four line circuits
Interfaces with:
loop or ground start lines
Older Version(s): RGLU1 (does not have hookflash to CO)
The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold. Each RGLU2 line can be
programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection.
RGLU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-24 and described in
Table 9-17.
RGLU2 Installation
Note
➤ To install an RGLU2 PCB
1. If the DK KSU is within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the dB PAD switches
SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position.
2. Set each line for ground start (GND) or loop start (LOOP) by setting the following jumper
plugs: SW103 for line 1, SW203 for line 2, SW303 for line 3, and SW403 for line 4.
Universal Slot PCBs
The decibel (dB) PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive
loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX telephone office by
providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or central office when set to the 3
position. Switches are factory set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position.
3. Insert the RGLU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RGLU2 can be installed in place of RCOU,
per tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration.
4. After installing the RGLU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly
mated, a slight resistance is felt.
RGLU2 Programming
Programming for the RCOU and RGLU2 is essentially the same. See “RCOU Programming” on
Page 9-33, for an overview of RGLU2 programming.
Table 9-17
RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Line circuit 1
Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation.
Line circuit 2
Red LED
Line circuit 3
CO line indicator will not light unless RGLU2 is
connected to a line.
Line circuit 4
J1 connector
Modular connector
RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk
circuits 1 and 2.
J2 connector
Modular connector
RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk
circuits 3 and 4.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-47
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-17
RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (continued)
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1)
PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2)
PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3)
2-position slice switch
Enables -3dB signal level drop for trunk circuits.
3-terminal jumper
Used to configure line for loop or ground start.
PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4)
LOOP/GND jumper SW103
(configures line 1)
LOOP/GND jumper SW203
(configures line 2)
LOOP/GND jumper SW303
(configures line 3)
LOOP/GND jumper SW403
(configures line 4)
Backplane Connector
LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND
SW403 SW303 SW203 SW103
Red LEDs
4
3 PAD 0
3 PAD 0
3 PAD 0
3 PAD 0
SW401
SW301
SW201
SW101
3
2
1
RGLU
J2
J1
1382
Figure 9-24 RGLU2 PCB
9-48
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RSIU, RSIS, RMDS – RS-232/Modem Interface Unit
System:
DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four interface ports
Interfaces with:
SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 voice mail
ACD SMIS computer
SMDR printer or SMDR call accounting machine
DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC or maintenance terminal (locally or remotely)
Open-architecture application computer system–receives ANI, DNIS or CLID digits from
the DK424 and DK424i on ACD calls
Older Version(s): none
The RSIU is a standard plug-in type PCB that must be installed into the first universal slot of the
DK424 or DK424i base cabinet. The RSIU PCB provides one standard RS-232 port (modular
jack) when ordered from the factory; this port can be configured in system programming to
support any one of the hardware options listed above.
The RSIS PCB can support any one of the hardware devices listed above via its RS-232 modular
jack. The RMDS PCB can function two ways: the RMDS can operate like an RSIS allowing it to
support any one of the hardware devices listed above locally from its RS-232 modular jack; or, the
RMDS can operate as a 1200 bps (bits-per-second) or 2400 bps system remote maintenance
modem.
Universal Slot PCBs
The RSIU can be equipped with up to three more optional RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232
ports) or with two optional RS-232 ports and one modem port (total of three RS-232 ports and one
modem port). The optional RS-232 ports are provided by installing RSIS piggy-back PCBs onto
the RSIU PCB. The optional built-in modem is provided by installing an RMDS piggy-back PCB
onto the RSIU (see Figure 10-37 on Page 10-40).
The RMDS PCB function (modem or RS-232 port) is set in a system program option. The RMDS
can be set for one function only; it cannot support both functions simultaneously. When configured
as a modem, the RMDS PCB supports only the DK424 and DK424i remote maintenance, ASCII
terminal, or DKi Backup, and DKi Admin functions, and does not simultaneously support SMDI,
SMIS, SMDR, etc. (See Figure 10-37 on Page 10-40.)
The total bits-per-second (bps) data rate of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS (RS-232/modem) ports
combined cannot exceed 9600 bps. The RSIU, RSIS RS-232 ports can be individually set in
system programming to operate at 1200 bps, 4 ports max.; 2400 bps, 3 ports max.; 4800 bps, 2
ports max.; or 9600 bps, 1 port max.; or, any other combination that does not exceed 9600 bps. The
RMDS modem function can be set to operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps; however, if the RMDS port
is used as a RS-232 port instead of a modem, it can also be set for 4800 bps or 9600 bps.
The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports
simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function
of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active.The
communication parameters for all RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port function types except the SMDR are:
♦
Data word bits = 7
♦
Parity = even
♦
Stop bits = 1
The communication parameters for an RSIU, RSIS SMDR port is:
♦
Data word bits = 8
♦
Parity = none
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-49
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
♦
Stop bits = 1
Only one RSIU can be installed per DK424 or DK424i system. When the RSIU PCB is installed,
the RSSU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, IMDU modem, and PEPU PCBs can still be installed with all of their
respective paging, modem, and RS-232 port functions available; however, five RS-232/modem
ports can be installed in one DK424 or DK424i system.
When installed together in the same DK424 or DK424i system, the RSIU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU
port functions are identified and enabled (turned On/Off) in system programming. If the same
function is programmed for an RSIU port and a PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port, only the RSIU port
will function.
RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation
1. Install all RSIS and RMDS PCBs on the RSIU PCB before installing the RSIU into the DK424
or DK424i. Each RSIS or RMDS piggy-back PCB is installed on the RSIU PCB as shown in
Figure 4-38.
Up to three RSIS PCBs can be installed on the RSIU PCB; only one RMDS PCB can be
installed on the RSIU. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of each RSIS and
RMDS circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Programming Part that follows.
2. After installing all RSIS, RMDS PCBs, install the RSIU into the DK424 or DK424i per the
following instructions.
RSIU Installation
1. The RSIU must be installed only in slot 11 of the base cabinet (see Figure 9-25 to install the
RSIU PCB).
2. A PDKU or PEKU PCB must be installed in slot 12 of the base cabinet to support the
programming telephone.
3. The first 8-station ports (000-007) appear on the PDKU or PEKU as installed in slot 12. The
programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03
Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12.
The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of the RSIU or RMDS, RS-232 circuit port is
set in Program 76 as described in the Strata DK Programming Manual.
All information provided in the “RSIU Installation” on Page 9-50 applies to installing an RSIU in
an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot.
9-50
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Each position on the RSIU card can
accept either an RSIS or RMDS (Note 1)
card. Only one RMDS card can be used
per RSIU. (See Note 1)
1
UP
17
J2
J3
J4
RSIS or RMDS (Note 1)
P4
Port #1
3-Pair
Modular
Jack
1
Port #2
3-Pair
Modular
Jack
UP
J1
P5
J1
P3
17
1
UP
17
J2
1
RSIU1
Port #3
3-Pair
Modular
Jack
17
1
J3
J4
RSIS or RMDS (Note 1)
P7
UP
J1
1
17
1
UP
17
J4
J3
RSIS or RMDS (Note 1)
P2
UP
P11
J1
17
1
17
Bottom View (solder side)
Universal Slot PCBs
J2
1
Port #4
3-Pair
Modular
Jack
17
P8
P9
RSIU1A
V.1
RMDS Top View
RSIS Top View
J3
J1
17
J3
J1
J4
CAUTION:
RSIS1A
1
1
17
1
RMDS1A
1
J4
Do not connect
telephone circuit
Tip/Ring to J4
(See Note 2)
J2
J2
1
17
17
17
17
1
1814
Notes
1. Maximum of one RMDS per RSIU, maximum of three RSIS per RSIU.
2. On RMDS, is not used for modem, operation. It is used when RMDS is configured for TTY, SMDI, or
MIS operation like RSIS.
Figure 9-25 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS PCB Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-51
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
DK424 Base Cabinet
with RCTUA3
DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUC3 / D3
or RCTUBA3 / RCTUBB3 / RCTUE3 / RCTUF3
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Port 2
Ribbon Cable
Install ribbon
cables as shown
2-connector Ribbon Cable
(supplied with RCTU)
Ribbon Cable
Port 3
Port 3
Install ribbon
cables as shown
3-connector Ribbon Cable
(supplied with RSIU)
Port 4
Port 4
SLOT
PCB
TYPE
R11
RCTU
RCTUC3 or
RCTUBA3
or
RCTUE3
S11
RSIU
RSIS
or
RMDS
S12
PDKU
or
PEKU
S13
SLOT
R11
RCTU
RCTUA3
PCB
TYPE
RCTUD3
or RCTUBB3
or RCTUF3
S11
RSIU
RSIS
or
RMDS
S12
S13
PDKU
or
PEKU
1815
Figure 9-26 RSIU Installed into an Existing System without DID and/or Tie Lines
➤ To move the PCB to the next highest slot
1. Identify (mark) the attendant console and all station PCB wiring connectors so they can be
removed and then reinstalled on the same PCB later (console station PCBs include: PDKU,
RDSU, PEKU, PESU, RSTU, PSTU and RATU PCBs).
2. Turn system power Off.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the attendant console and all station PCBs listed in Step 1.
4. Remove all station PCBs listed in Step 1.
5. Install each PCB that was removed in Step 4 into the next highest empty station PCB slot
number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. Example: If a PDKU was
originally in slot 11 and a PSTU was in slot 12, the PDKU is moved to slot 12 and the PSTU is
moved to slot 13. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013
until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12.
6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs they were removed
from in Step 3.
7. Turn the system power On and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other
ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the
appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03.
Next, cycle system power Off (five seconds) and On, or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program
03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes
from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports.
9-52
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
➤ To install an RSIU PCB into an existing system with DID and/or Tie lines
Note
The steps in “RSIU Installation” on Page 9-50 apply to installing an RSIU into an existing
system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot using the following
steps.
1. Identify (mark) all PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled onto
the same station PCB later.
2. Turn system power Off.
3. Disconnect the connectors from all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and
RCIS.
4. Remove all PCBs except PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU, PEPU, RCIU, and RCIS.
5. Each PCB that was removed must be installed into the next highest empty PCB slot number.
Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed.
Note
This step may have to be modified for the RDTU PCB, depending on the configuration to
meet the requirements of RDTU slot assignments per tables in Chapter 8 – T1.
7. Turn the system power on and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other
ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the
appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03.
Next, cycle system power Off (5 seconds) and on or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03
data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes
from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports.
Universal Slot PCBs
6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs from which they
were removed.
RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming
Program 03: Programs slot 11 with code 49 to identify that the RSIU PCB is installed in slot 11.
Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed RSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the RSIU
port no. 1~4 (see Figure 9-25 for RSIU port number configuration) and Y identifies the RSIU port
function:
♦
Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 Off)
♦
Y=1, RMDS modem (Program 77-1, LED14 On)
♦
Y=2, SMDR
♦
Y=3, MIS or SMIS
♦
Y=4, SMDI
♦
Y=5, Open Architecture
♦
Y=0, No function - this should be used for any of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports that are
not used.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-53
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Notes
●
●
●
Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y will override RSSU, PIOU2, and/or PIOUS2 function
codes (41, 42, 43) set in Program 03.
The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports
simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the
function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active.
When uploading Program 76-1 with DKi Admin or DKi Backup, the data will not change until
the system power is cycled.
Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate.
Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 9-25 for RSIU port number configuration)
and Z identifies the RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps).
Notes
●
●
The sum of the used RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports transmission rates cannot exceed 9600 bps.
Ports assigned as “non-function” (code 0) in Program 76-2X-Y will not be included in the
transmission rate sum. The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps.
When uploading Program 76-2 with DKi Admin or DKi Backup make sure that Program 76-2
bps rate for the TTY/ modem port is set the same in: DKi Admin communications setup,
DKi Admin customer database, and any DK424 and DK424i RCTU. If the bps rate is not the
same in all three areas, uploading will fail on Program 76
Program 77-1, LED 14: Enables the RMDS modem function. If the RMDS should function as a
modem, turn On LED 14. If the RMDS should function as a RS-232 port, turn Off LED 14.
Program 77-1, LED 15: Sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT/V.22bis (2400
bps) or Bell 212A (1200 bps). The standard set in this program must match the standard of the
modem communicating with the DK424 and DK424i RMDS.
If the RMDS modem standard should be CCITT/V.22bis, turn LED 15 On. If the RMDS standard
should be Bell 212A, turn LED 15 Off. Most Hayes compatible modems will function with either
standard. Check with the modem manufacturer’s documentation to verify which protocol should
be used. When the system is initialized the Bell 212A standard is set (LED 15 Off).
Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02: Enables CLID, ANI, and/or DNIS information for ACD calls to
be sent from the RSIU OA port.
➤
Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLID and/or ANI information for ACD calls.
➤
Turn LED 02 On if the OA port should send DNIS information for ACD calls.
Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously, allowing CLID, ANI,
and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port for ACD calls.
The system will initialize with LED 01 and 02 Off—no CLID, ANI, or DNIS information will be
sent from the OA port for ACD calls.
9-54
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RSSU – PC Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: one RS-232 connection
Interfaces with:
TTY jack
Older Version(s): none
The RSSU contains one RS-232 serial port for connecting an SMDI, SMIS processor,
DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC or external modem.
One optional RSSU maintenance interface PCB can be used for connecting a maintenance PC or
external modem (local or remote) to the DK40i.
A maximum of three RSSU cards can be supported per DK424 or DK424i.
The RSSU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 9-27 and described in
Table 9-18.
1. Insert the RSSU (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S16”) of the Base KSU/
cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there
are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the RSSU in the highest slot number in any KSU/
cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
Note
In DK40i, RSSU can be installed in any available Expansion KSU.
Universal Slot PCBs
RSSU Installation
2. After installing the RSSU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance is felt.
RSSU Programming
Program 03–Specify Code 41, 42 and 43 for slots that support RSSUs.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-55
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-18
RSSU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
TTY interface connector J3
Type of Component
Dual modular connector
Description
Interface connector for maintenance terminal/
external modem.
1878
Backplane Connector
J3
RSSU
TTY
SMDR (not used)
Figure 9-27 RSSU PCB
9-56
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RSTU2 – Standard Telephone Interface Unit
System:
DK40i Expansion KSU, DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: eight standard telephone circuits
Interfaces with:
standard telephones
voice mail ports
off-premises stations
other similar devices
alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only)
auto attendant digital announcer
message waiting lamp (RSTU2 only)
Older Version(s): RSTU1–80-VRMS sine wave ring generator, optional R48S unit increases the loop voltage
from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the loop length (including the resistance of the phones
from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms.
PSTU2–190V P-P or 130V P-P W1 jumper
PSTU1 v.3–square wave ring generator fixed at 190V P-P
PSTU1 v.4–square wave ring generator set at 190V P-P or 130V P-P with the W1 jumper
Notes
●
●
For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other
device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS-4, -8, or -12)
must be installed on any DK424i BCU, DK424 RCTU or the DK40i K4RCU3.
Universal Slot PCBs
Only one telephone (or device) can be connected to a RSTU2 port. If more than one telephone or
device is connected to a port, ringing or message waiting may not function. RSTU2 only provides
a 90-volt square wave message waiting generator to drive standard telephone 90V message
waiting lamps.
Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; however, some
devices may experience ring-trip with 190V P-P and should be set for 130V P-P.
See Figure 9-29 for an illustration of the PSTU1, PSTU2. Figure 9-30 shows the RSTU2. See
Table 9-19, for details of the PSTU and RSTU2 controls and indicators.
R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option)
➤
Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 (Figure 9-28 and Figure 9-30) with the R48S connectors
P6 and P7 on the RSTU or RSTU2.
Note
RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned so that the R48S only fits in the proper
position.
P6
1374
P7
Figure 9-28 R48S Interface Connectors
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-57
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
External Options
W1 Ring Generator Switch Configuration (PSTU1 and PSTU2)
➤
On the PSTU1 or PSTU2, ensure the W1 switch is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for
initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU1 or
PSTU2 experience ring trip.
Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Control
No steps required here.
RSTU2 Installation
1. Make sure the factory-installed SSTS or SSTU subunit is securely attached to the RSTU2
(Figure 9-29 and Figure 9-30).
WARNING! The shield on the back of the RSTU2 is designed to protect the installer from
potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do NOT remove this shield.
2. Insert the RSTU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. RSTU2 must be installed per tables in Chapter
2 – DK40i Configuration.
3. After installing the RSTU2, gently pull the RSTU2 outward. If the connectors are properly
mated, a light resistance is felt.
Table 9-19
RSTU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Control/Indicator/Connector
Type of Component
Description
Ring voltage W1 jumper (PSTU1
(V.4) and PSTU2 only)
3-terminal jumper
Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits.
H=190V P-P, L=130V P-P.
R48S connector P6 (RSTU or
RSTU2 only)
9-pin connector
Interface connector to P6 of R48S.
R48S connector P7 (RSTU or
RSTU2 only)
6-pin connector
Interface connector to P7 of R48S.
Backplane Connector
W1 Ring Voltage
H = 190V P-P
L = 130V P-P
(for PSTU (V.4)
and PSTU2 only)
SSTU
Subunit
W1
H
L
1375
50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female)
Figure 9-29 PSTU and Subunit (SSTU)
9-58
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
SSTU
Subunit
Backplane Connector
R48S
Installed
on RSTU1
P6
P7 UP
R48S
R48S
P6
P7 UP
RSTU
OR
RSTU2
R48S
Installed
on RSTU2
1376
Optional
Figure 9-30 RSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors
RSTU2 Programming
Universal Slot PCBs
50-Pin Amphenol
Connector (Female)
Program 03: Specify code 31 for all slots that have RSTUs and PSTUs installed.
Note
If there are no RSTU, RSTU2 or PSTU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program
91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead.
Program 10-2: Sets standard telephone ringing option.
Program 19: Used for BGM connection.
Program 21: Assigns standard telephone ports to modem pools.
Programs 10-3, 23, 24, 25, 26: Integrated Auto Attendant Digital Announcer assignments.
Program 31: Configures all RSTU, RSTU2 and PSTU ports connected to voice mail or external
Auto attendant devices.
Program *34, LED 01: Standard telephone Camp-on/Busy Override tone option.
Program 35, LED 03: Standard telephone message waiting lamp control option.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
9-59
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface
System:
DK424, DK424i
Circuits per PCB: four circuits
Interfaces with:
enhanced 911 locator services
Older Version(s): none
The E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) enables cost-effective connection to the
Enhanced 911 locator services without third-party equipment. Figure 9-33 shows the RMCU. The
RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports as shown in
Figure 73.
The RMCU has no CAMA circuits. It requires one RCMS subassembly to provide one or two
CAMA trunks and two RCMS PCBs to provide up to four CAMA trunks.
When RMCU code 19 is entered for a slot in Program 03, that slot assumes the next four
consecutive CO line numbers in the system. Only one RMCU PCB can be installed in a DK424
system. If more than one slot is programmed with code 19 in Program 03, the lowest slot having
code 19 will be the CAMA trunk active slot.
The controls, indicators, and connectors for the RCMS are listed in Table 90.
Location of the RCMS LEDs are shown in Figure 76.
Functions of the RCMS LEDs are given in Table 91.
A wiring diagram is shown in “RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone)” on Page 9-61.
RCMS Subassemblies Installation
1. Attach one or two subassemblies (RCMS) to the connectors on the RMCU as shown in Figure
9-31. If only one RCMS is to be installed, install it in the bottom position.
2. Apply firm even pressure to ensure that the connectors are properly seated in the RMCU
connector blocks. If they are seated properly, a light resistance is felt when you pull the units
away from the RMCU.
9-60
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RCMS1A
®
UP
RMCU1A
RMCU1A
ABCDEFGHK
P6
P5
UP
P7
P3
RCMS1A
P2
®
UP
ABCDEFGHK
P4
R MC U 1 A
- C M V.1
UP
2758
Universal Slot PCBs
Figure 9-31 Placement of RCMS Subassemblies on the RMCU Interface Card
RCMS1A
RCMS1A -CM V.1
CB
J2
NB
600 / 600
0
3
J1
SW101
PAD
J5
CB
NB
600 / 600
RCMS1
0
J3
SW201
J4
PAD
3
2762
Figure 9-32 RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone)
Table 9-20
RCMS Subassembly Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Controls, Indicators, &
Connectors
Type of
Component
SW101
Switch
3-dB PAD switch for circuit 1 or 3.
SW201
Switch
3-dB PAD switch for circuit 2 or 4.
Jacks to connect to RMCU.
J1
J2
Connector Blocks
5/00
Jacks to connect to RMCU.
Jacks to connect to RMCU.
J3
RJ11
Strata DK I&M
Description
6-pin modular connector
Network interface jack to CAMA trunk.
9-61
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
RMCU Installation
1. Insert the RMCU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors.
2. Gently pull the unit outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a light resistance is felt.
3. Wire the RCMS jacks, J4 and J5, to the network CAMA trunks per Figure 10-27 on Page
10-29.
4. Test the CAMA trunk and set the 3-dB PAD switches, SW101 and SW 201, for the appropriate
volume level.
RMCU1A
R MC U 1 A
P6
P5
RMCUV.1
P7
TC35354F
P3
P2
RMC21B
P4
RMCU1A
-C M V.1
3005
Figure 9-33 RMCU Interface Card
TOP
RMCU1A
RCMS1A (2/2)
RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector
CAMA #4
Network Busy (NB) LED
Customer Busy (CB) LED
CAMA #3
LEDs (indicate Trunk Condition)
NB LED
CB LED
RCMS1A (1/2)
CAMA #2
NB LED
CB LED
CAMA #1
NB LED
CB LED
2796
Figure 9-34 Location of the RCMS LEDs
9-62
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Table 9-21
LED Indications (Normal Operation)
NB LED
CB LED
1
No network connection.
RMCU is in stand-by mode.
Status
On
Off
2
Network connected.
RMCU is in stand-by mode.
Off1
Off
Off
On
Flashing
On
On
On
3
4
5
Network is in stand-by mode and the RMCU is off
hook.
Network is connected and the RMCU MF sending
dial tone.
Network is seizing and the RMCU is off- hook.
Network is connecting, before ANI is sent, and the
RMCU is sending.
Network is connecting and the RMCU is
communicating.
Network is disconnecting first and then the RMCU
disconnects.
On then Off
On then Off
7
RMCU is disconnecting first and then the network
disconnects.
On then Off
On then Off
1. If the NB LED stays On, even if the modular connector of the network is connected, check the following:
Tip and Ring could be reversed.
Network could be busy.
Universal Slot PCBs
6
RMCU/RCMS Programming
Program 03: Specify code 19 for the RMCU slot.
Program *11, *12, *13: Refer to the E911, CAMA trunk tab in the Strata DK Programming
Manual and set Programs *11, *12, and *13 as required.
Note
Strata DK I&M
Program *10 is required only when using third-party adjunct CAMA interface and not
used with RMCU CAMA interface.
5/00
9-63
Universal Slot PCBs
RDTU – T1 Interface Unit
Network Requirements
The system network requirements are provided in Table 9-22.
Table 9-22
DK424i Network Requirements
PCB/Interface
Network Jack
Ringer
Equivalence
Universal Service
Order Code
RJ21X
N/A
9.0F
02LS2
RJ14C/RJ21X
0.3B
N/A
02RV2-T
RJ14C/RJ21X
0.0B
AS.2
TL11M, 2-wire
TL31M, 4-wire
TL12M, type 2, 2-wire
TL32M, type 2, 4-wire
RJ2EX
RJ2GX
RJ2FX
RJ2HX
Not Available
(N/A)
9.0F
02GS2 (ground)
02LS2 (loop)
RJ14C/RJ1CX
0.3B
N/A
(See last bullet note on Note 2
below.)
RJ48C/RJ48X/
RJ48M
N/A
6.0P
N/A
RJ21X/RJ14C
0.3B
N/A
04DU9-1SN
RJ48C/RJ48M
N/A
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
02IS5
RJ48C/RJ48X
N/A
02RV2-O
RJ11C/RJ21-X
N/A
Facility Interface Code
OL13A (PESU)
1
PESU/RSTU2/RDSU
(Off-premises Station)
OL13B (RSTU2, –24V)
OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with
R48S-48V)
RCOU/RCOS
(loop start line)
RDDU
REMU type 1 or type 2
RGLU2 (ground or loop start
line)
RDTU (DS-1/T1)2
RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID)
RPTU (PRI)
3
RBSU/RBSS (S/T, BRI)
RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI)
3
RCMU/RCMS (CAMA)
3
6.0P
1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or
equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If
equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection.
2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified:
●
The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels.
Unused channels must be bit-stuffed.
●
Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or
Immediate).
●
Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame
Format to be used, either is adequate for DK424i CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance
monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU.
●
Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally
specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424i T1 CO digital voice lines.
●
The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424i T1 circuit to the Telco T1
circuit. (CSUs are a Telco requirement.)
●
RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN.
3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits
may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs
must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified.
9-64
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
10
This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines,
peripheral equipment, and power supplies for the universal slot PCBs of the Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU, DK424 and DK424i systems.
Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or
controls the operation of, the associated equipment, as listed below:
♦
Station Wiring:
♦
Digital Stations
♦
Electronic Stations
♦
Attendant Consoles
♦
Analog Stations
Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Pin-outs
♦
CO Line Wiring
♦
DID and Tie Line Wiring
♦
Option Interface PCBs
Note
Before using the Connect Record Sheets (following each Wiring Diagram), make copies
for future use.
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
♦
Diagrams which apply to only one system (e.g., DK40i) are in the installation chapter which
relates to the system. Wiring diagrams appear at the end of these two chapters:
♦
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation
♦
Chapter 2 – DK40i Installation
The RDTU cable connection information for DK40i, DK424 and DK424i is in Chapter 8 – T1.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-1
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Cable Lengths
In a single site installation, the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets must be placed within the
allowed maximum distance of each other as designated by Table 10-1.
Table 10-1
Station Loop Requirements
Device
Digital telephones1
Interface PCB
Circuits
PDKU (8)
PDIU-DS
PDKU (1~8)
or
RDSU (5~8)
DDCB
PDKU or
RDSU (5)
Attendant Console
RATU (1~4)
HDCB
PEKU (5) or
PESU (5)2
PEKU or PESU
RPCI-DI
or
PDIU-D12
PDKU (1~8)
or
RDSU (5~8)
DADM
PDKU (1~8)
or
RDSU (5~8)
RATI
RATU (1~4)
HDSS consoles
PEKU (7 & 8)
Maximum Distance from
Cabinet to Device
40 ohms
1000 ft. (303 m)
20 ohms
500 ft. (152 m)
300 ohms
Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m)
with 150 ohm device.3
600 ohms
Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m)
with 150 ohm device.3
1,200 ohms
Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m)
with 150 ohm device.3
1-pair
2-pair
2-pair (3-pair
required for OCA)
Shares digital
telephone wirepair1
1 or 2-pair
2-pair
PSTU (1~8)
or
PESU (1 & 2)1
Standard telephones,
voice mail, Auto
Attendant, etc.
Max Loop
Resistance
(including
device)
PDKU (1~8)
or
RDSU (5~8)
DDSS consoles
Electronic telephones
No. of Wire Pairs
(use 24 AWG
twisted pair)
RSTU (1~8)
RDSU/RSTS (1~4)
without R48S
option
1-pair
RSTU (1~8)
RDSU/RSTS (1~4)
with R48S option
1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM, OCA, Headset, or
Data Interface Unit.
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.
3. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device.
10-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Building #1
Building #2
HESB
PSTU
RSTU/RSTU2
RDSU/RSTS
Standard
Telephone
HDSS or DDSS
Console
PEKU
PESU
PDKU
RDSU
Electronic
or Digital
Telephone
Electronic or Digital
Telephone or Cordless Base
POW
DTR
PC
Attendant
Console
DSR
RATI
RATU
Conventional
Attendant
Console
HDCB
or DDCB
MDFB
DDCB or
HDCB
RDTU or
RPTU
MDFB
2077
CSU
T1 Span Line or ISDN PRI Line
E&M Tie Line
REMU
PCOU, RCOU/RCOS
RGLU, RCIU/RCIS,
RBUU/RBUS,
RBSU/RBSS,
RMCU/RCMS
Ground/Loop/ISDN BRI/
E911 CAMA Lines
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
Earth Ground
DID Line
RDDU
Secondary protectors – standard voltage
Earth Ground
Important!
Figure 10-1
Strata DK I&M
Secondary protectors – low voltage
To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary
protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M
Tie lines. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses,
shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication
circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded
to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast
Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801.
Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions
of thee manufacturer.
DK424i Secondary Protector Diagram
5/00
10-3
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Station Wiring Diagrams
Digital Station Wiring
25-Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector
To PDKU
W/Female Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN 38
GN-BK 13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Station Cabling
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T1 (Voice/Data)
R1 (Voice/Data)
PT1 (Add. Power)
PR1 (Add. Power)
Circuit 2 to DKT 2
or PDIU-DS
Circuit 3 to DKT 3
or PDIU-DS
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R1
T1
PT1
PR1
6 5 4 3 2 1
Circuit 4 to DKT 4
or PDIU-DS
2 3 4 5
PR
Circuit 5 to DKT 5
or PDIU-DS
or DDCB
TR
PT
Modular
Cord
Circuit 6 to DKT 6
or PDIU-DS
(-)
T
GND
R
(-)
PT
Circuit 7 to DKT 7
or PDIU-DS
T8 (Voice/Data)
R8 (Voice/Data)
PT (Add. Power)
PR (Add. Power)
(See Note 1)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R8
T8
PT8
Not Used
PR8
RJ11
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
PR
TR
PT
Modular
Cord
GND
PR
(-)
T
GND
R
(-)
PT
DDSS Console
(Circuit 8 Only)
or...
Notes
1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required
only for long station runs per Table 10-1. PT/PR may be used with normal
station runs also.
2. Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground.
10-4
GND
PR
Digital Telephone
(With or Without PDIU-DI)
66M150 Split Block
Figure 10-2
RJ11
Digital
Telephone (DKT 8)
or...
PDIU-DS (with PDKU2)
1593
MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones (DKTs) and DDSS Console to PDKU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
To PDKU with
Female Connector
25-pair Cable W/male Amp Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24AWG (1 or 2 Pair, See Note 1)
Station Cabling
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T8
R8
PT8
PR8
T1 (Voice/Data)
R1 (Voice/Data)
PT1 (Add Power)
PR1 (Add Power)
Circuit 2 to DKT 2
or PDIU-DS
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
T1
PT1
Circuit 3 to DKT 3
or PDIU-DS
PR1
RJ11
6 5 4 3 2 1
Circuit 4 to DKT 4
or PDIU-DS
2- Or 4-Wire
Modular Cord
to RJ11 Jack
on Bottom
of RPCI-DI
Circuit 5 to DKT 5
or PDIU-DS
Circuit 6 to DKT 6
or PDIU-DS
R
R1
DB25
Female
Connector
GND
PR
(-)
T
GND (-)
R
PT
To PC or ASCII
Terminal, etc.
RS-232
Cable2
(See Note 1)
T7 (Voice/Data)
R7 (Voice/Data)
PT (Add Power)
PR (Add Power)
Digital
Telephone
(with or without
PDIU or RPCI-DI)
Circuit 8 to DKT8
or DDSS
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R8
T8
PR8
PT8
Not Used
RJ11
6 5 4 3 2 1
GND (-)
DB-25
PR
T
Female
Connector
2- or 4-wIre Modular Cord
To RJ11 Jack on the
Back Side of PDIU-DS
(-)
PT
To Modem, Printer,
or Host Computer
etc.
DIU
POWER
GND
R
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
GN-R
Bridging
Clips
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
RS-232
Cable2
PDIU-DS
1594
Notes
1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires
required only for long station runs per Table 10-1 on Page 10-2. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
2. RS-232 cable length is max 50 ft. with 24 AWG wire. See Figure 10-31 on Page 10-33.
General Notes
●
●
●
●
Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground.
DIUs can be connected to Circuits 1~7 only if connected to PDKU1; or Circuits 1~8 on PDKU2.
DK40i: Slots 15 and 16 only support data applications.
KCDU provides circuits 1~4 only. Configuration chapters 4 or 6 for allowed data slots.
Figure 10-3
MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones with RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS to PDKU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-5
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25 Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector
To PDKU With
Female Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN 38
GN-BK 13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
Figure 10-4
10-6
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
2
1
Circuit 2
L1 L2
Not
Used
6 5 4 3 2 1
Door Phone A
MDFB (Rear View)
3 4
DDCB
Circuit 3
Door Phone
MDFB
Modular
Cord
Circuit 4
- T5 (Voice/Data)
(GND) R5 (Voice/Data)
PT
PR
Circuit 6
HKSU
2-pair
Modular
Cords
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
MDFB Door
Phone B
or
Door Lock
Control
Circuit 7
Circuit 8
ABC
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
MDFB Door
Phone C
Modular
Cord
See Note 1
MDFB (Door Phone) Station #s
Not Used
See Note 2
Port #
A
B
C
43
004
#151
#152
#153
44
44
012
#154
#155
#156
45
45
46
46
020
#157
#158
#159
47
47
028
#161
#162
#163
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
1596
Circuit 1
R
Screw
Terminals
Notes
1. DDCB “B” output options:
● SW1: Always in DOOR position.
● SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK
position; “B” connects to door lock.
2. Door phones may be connected to circuit 5 on ports 04, 012, 0202,
and 028 only.
3. See Table 10-1 on Page 10-2 for loop lengths.
MDF Wiring-DDCB/Door Phone/Lock to PDKU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR
PDKU Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN 38
GN-BK 13
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
(-)
T1 (Voice/Data)
(GND) R1 (Voice/Data)
PT1
(Not Used)
RT2
T2
DC Output
R2
CKT 2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
T8
R8
PT8
PR8
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R1
AC/DC External
Power Source
CKT 3
T1
AC Input
6 5 4 3 2 1
CKT 4
To 120VAC Commercial
Power Outlet
2 3 4 5
TR
2-Pair
Modular Cord
Required
CKT 5
RJ11
CKT 6
CKT 7
(-)
T
GND
R
CKT 8
Digital (1000 or 2000 Series)
Telephone
(With Or Without RPCI-DI)
or...
DDSS, DDCB, PDIU-DS
AC/DC External Power Source Specifications:
AC IN:
120VAC ± 10%
DC OUT: 24VDC ± 10%
160 MA (Min.) DC Current
200 MV P-P (Max) AC Ripple On DC Output
AC/DC power supplies that meet the above requirements are available
from most telephone equipment supply houses.
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
BK-BR
1
8
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24AWG (1 Pair)
Station Cabling
Bridging
Clips
External Power Straps:
If the external power is installed, cut the external
power straps located inside the digital telephone
DDSS, DDCB, or PDIU-DS.
See Loop Limits at the front of this section for
external power requirements.
1597
Figure 10-5
Strata DK I&M
External Power for PDKU Digital Telephone Connection
5/00
10-7
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
MDF Block Number
Color Code
Designation
W-Bl
Bl-W
W-O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-Br
Br-W
W-S
S-W
R-Bl
Bl-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-Br
Br-R
R-S
S-R
Bk-Bl
Bl-Bk
Bk-O
O-Bk
Bk-G
G-Bk
Bk-Br
Br-Bk
Bk-S
S-Bk
Y-Bl
Bl-Y
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
T
R
PRW-T
PRW-R
KSU Slot Number
CKT
Number
Port
Number
Intercom
Number
Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic
Telephone Location
1
2
3
4
51
6
7
8
1. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028.
Note
Figure 10-6
10-8
Indicate if PDIU-DS, digital telephone (with or without RPCI-DI), DSS console (number
1~8), or DDCB is connected.
PDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
To RDSU W/Female
Connector
25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Station Cabling Jacketed Twisted Pairs (24 AWG)
Tip 1
Ring 1
RJ11
Not Used
Tip 2
(See Note)
RJ11
Ring 2
R
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
GN
654321
T3
R3
Not Used
T4
R4
Not Used
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
Standard
Telephone
Circuits 3 and 4
available with
optional RSTS
PCB.
Wire the same
as Circuits 1
and 2.
BK
Y
W
BL
Tip
Standard Telephone 1
Voice Mail Port Or
Similar Device
654321
TIP
Ring
RING
Standard Telephone 2
Voice Mail Port Or
Similar Device
Circuit 5 to DKT 5
or PDIU-DS
or DDCB
Circuit 6 to DKT 6
or PDIU-DS
Circuit 7 to DKT 7
or PDIU-DS
T8 (Voice/Data)
R8 (Voice/Data)
PT (Add Power)
PR (Add Power)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R8
PT8
T8
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
BR-W
Bridging Clips
1
PR8
RJ11
Not Used
6 5 4 3 2 1
DPFT
Power Failure
Transfer Box
(J1)
DG
(J1, 50)
DG
-24V
-24VDC
(J1, 25)
2 3 4 5
PR
TR
PT
GND
PR
(-)
T
GND
R
(-)
PT
Modular
Cord
66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
Digital
Telephone
1603
CAUTION!
Figure 10-7
Strata DK I&M
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU in Slot 18 of the
DK40i system.
RDSU Wiring
5/00
10-9
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
MDF Block Number
Color Code
Designation
W-Bl
T
Bl-W
R
W-O
Not Used
O-W
Not Used
W-G
T
G-W
R
W-Br
Not Used
Br-W
Not Used
W-S
T
S-W
R
R-Bl
Not Used
Bl-R
Not Used
R-O
T
O-R
R
R-G
Not Used
G-R
Not Used
R-Br
T
Br-R
R
R-S
PWRT
S-R
PWRR
Bk-Bl
T
Bl-Bk
R
Bk-O
PWRT
O-Bk
PWRR
Bk-G
T
G-Bk
R
Bk-Br
PWRT
Br-Bk
PWRR
Bk-S
T
S-Bk
R
Y-Bl
PWRT
Bl-Y
PWRR
Note
Figure 10-8
10-10
KSU Slot Number
CKT
Number
Port
Number
Directory
Number
1
(Standard)
2
(Standard)
3
(Standard)
(RSTS)
4
(Standard)
(RSTS)
Device/Standard Telephone/
Electronic Telephone Location
Indicate if separate BGM source
connected to Circuit 2.
DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports
004, 012, 020, and 028
5
(Digital)
6
(Digital)
7
(Digital)
8
(Digital)
Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc.
RDSU Station MDF Cross Connect Record
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Station Cabling
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Voice T1 (VT)
Voice R1 (VR)
Data T1 (DT)
Data R1 (DR)
VT
VR
VR
R
GN
DT
BK
Y
DR
OCAT
W
BL
OCAR
DT
Circuit 2
Strata DK I&M
VT
DR
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 3
DR
VT
VR
DT
6 5 4 3 2 1
Circuit 4
DR
1 2 3 4 5 6
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 5
DR
Modular
Cord
VT
VR
DT
Station
Circuit 6
DR
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 7
DR
VT
VR
DT
Electronic Telephone
Circuit 8
DR
Only if Electronic Telephone
Receives "Off-Hook" Calls
OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (OR)
OT
OR
Circuit 2
OT
OR
Circuit 3
OR
Notes
•
To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic
telephone must have an HVSU2 or the combined
HVSI and HVSU installed.
Circuit 5
•
Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for
electronic telephone to receive OCA.
Circuit 6
•
An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series
electronic telephones for headset or HESB, Loud
Ringing Bell option.
•
All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance
from PEKU to electronic telephone (1000 ft).
OT
Circuit 4
OT
OR
OT
OR
OT
OR
Circuit 7
OT
OR
Circuit 8
Not Used
66M150 Split Block
Figure 10-9
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24 AWG
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To PEKU
w/Female
Connector
1578
MDF Wiring/Electronic Telephone to PEKU
5/00
10-11
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To PEKU w/Female
Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN 38
GN-BK 13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Voice T1
Voice R1
Data T1
Data R1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Jacketed
Station Cable X
Twisted Pair
To
24 AWG
OCA
Circuit 4
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
Y
To
OCA
R1
6 5 4 3 2 1
T1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Circuit 5
Modular
Cord
Station
Circuit 6
Electronic
Telephone
Associated
with HDSS
Voice Pait - Not Used
Circuit 7
Data Tip 7
Data Ring 7
Voice Pait - Not Used
Circuit 8
Data Tip 8
Data Ring 8
OCA T1
X
OCA R1
Y
Circuit 4
Circuit 5
Circuit 6
R
GN
T8
T7
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
R8
Only if
Electronic
Telephone
Receives
Off-Hook Calls
Circuits 7 & 8 T/R
pair order must be
wired as shown.
BK
Y
W
BL
R7
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
Modular
Cord
Circuit 7
Circuit 8
Not Used
66M150 Split Block
DSS
EKT
SW1
Notes
• Place PEKU SW1 to HDSS.
• All cable 24 AWG max loop resistance: 20 ohms from
PEKU to HDSS (500 ft).
• See Program 29 to assign HDSS feature buttons.
• See Program 28 for telephone to HDSS assignments.
DSS Console
1579
Figure 10-10 MDF Wiring/HDSS Console and Associated EKT to PEKU
10-12
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To PEKU or PESU
w/Female Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN 38
GN-BK 13
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Circuit 1
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
2
1
Circuit 2
L1 L2
Not
Used
6 5 4 3 2 1
Door Phone A
MDFB (Rear View)
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
VR
22
22
R
GN
23
23
24
24
25
25
BK
Y
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Screw
Terminals
3 4
HDCB
Circuit 3
Modular
Cord
Circuit 4
Voice T5
Voice R5
Data T5
Data R5
2-Pair
Modular
Cords
See Note 1
Circuit 6
Circuit 7
Door Phone
MDFB
A B C HKSU
VT
DT
DR
W
BL
6 5 4 3 2 1
Circuit 8
MDFB
Door
Phone B
or Door
Lock
Control
2 3 4 5
OCA T1
OCA R1
MDFB
Door
Phone C
Circuit 2
Modular
Cord
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
See Note 1
See Note 2
Circuit 5
MDFB (Door Phone) Station Nos.
Port #
A
B
C
004
151
152
153
012
154
155
156
020
157
158
159
028
161
162
163
Circuit 6
Circuit 7
Circuit 8
Not Used
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
BK-BR
Bridging
Clips
Notes
1. On PEKU or PESU, cut W9. See Programs 39, 77-1, 77-2, and 79.
2. HDCB “B” output options:
SW1: Always in DOOR position.
SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone LOCK position;
“B” connects to door lock.
1580
3. Door phones may be connected to Circuit 5 on Ports 004, 012, 020,
and 028 only.
Figure 10-11 MDF Wiring-Door Phone/Lock to PEKU/PESU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-13
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To PEKU w/Female
Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Station Cabling (24 AWG, Twisted Pairs)
Bridging Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Voice T1 (VT)
Voice R1 (VR)
Data T1 (DT)
Data R1 (DR)
to Electronic Telephone 1
(Port 000)
VT2
VR2
DT2
Circuit 2 to Electronic Telephone (Port 001)
DR2
VT3
Background Music
Source Output
(600 OHMS; 1V RMS MAX)
VR3
DT3
DR3
Not Used
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 4 to Electronic Telephone (Port 003)
DR
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 5 to Electronic Telephone or HDCB
DR
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 6 to
Electronic Telephone
DR
VT
VR
DT
Circuit 7 to Electronic
Telephone or DSS
DR
VT
VR
DT
DR
Notes
•
A separate BGM source is available.
•
Program 10-2, button/LED 09 ON, for
BGM connection.
•
Program 19 for slot assignment.
•
Cut W5 jumper on PEKU.
•
Provide BGM to external page with
PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU.
•
Volume is adjusted at BGM source only
(not at PEKU).
Circuit 8 to
Electronic
Telephone
or DSS
OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (or) to Electronic Telephones that receive OCA
OT
OR
Circuit 2
OT
OR
Circuit 3
OT
OR
Circuit 4
OT
OR
Circuit 5
OT
OR
to Electronic Telephones
that receive OCA
Circuit 6
OT
OR
Circuit 7
OT
OR
Circuit 8
Not Used
66M150 Split Block
1581
Figure 10-12 MDF Wiring PEKU Background Music Connection
10-14
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
To PEKU W/Female
Connector
25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector
W-BL
Bridging
Clips
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Customer-supplied
Two-way amplifier
or
Line repeaters (see Note 1)
VT1
VR1
DT1
Circuit 1 to EKT
DR1
VT2
VR2
DT2
DR2
PEKU, Circuit 2 Voice Pair
Port A (CO Side)
Not Used
VT3
VR3
PEKU, Circuit 3 Voice Pair
Port B (Subscriber side)
Not Used
(See Note 2)
DT3
DR3
VT4
To 115 VAC ± 10 VAC
VR4
DT4
Circuit 4 to EKT
DR4
Circuit 5 to EKT
or HDCB
Notes
1. Refer to Manufacturer’s installation
documentation for amplifier or line repeater
pin numbering.
Circuit 6 to EKT
2. Connect to PEKU circuits only, do not connect
to PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU or PDKU
circuits.
VT5
VR5
DT5
DR5
VT6
VR6
DT6
DR6
VT7
VR7
DT7
DR7
Circuit 7 to EKT
or DSS
General Note
• Amplifier or repeater must have automatic gain
control and be registered FCC Part 68.
VT8
VR8
DT8
Circuit 8 to EKT
or DSS
DR8
OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (OR)
PEKU Slot
Position
LED 01, ON
2nd
LED 02, ON
3rd
Circuit 4
LED 03, ON
4th
Circuit 5
LED 04, ON
5th
Circuit 2
OT3
OR3
Circuit 3
OT4
OR4
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments:
Program 10-3
Button/LED
OT2
OR2
System Programs
OT5
OR5
OT6
OR6
PEKU
Circuit
A = 009
B = 010
A = 017
B = 018
A = 025
B = 026
A = 033
B = 034
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
Circuit 6
Program 10-1, button LED 19 and 20 ON.
Circuit 7
Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for
tandem connection.
Circuit 8
Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if
amplified DISA is required.
Not USED
Program 10-2, key LED 18 and 19 ON.
OT7
OR7
PEKU Port
Number
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
BR-BK
1
OT8
OR8
66M150 Split Block
1595
Figure 10-13 MDF Wiring/PEKU Amplified Two-CO Line Conference
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-15
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
MDF Block Number
Color Code
Designation
W-Bl
VT
Bl-W
VR
W-O
DT
O-W
DR
W-G
VT
G-W
VR
W-Br
DT
Br-W
DR
W-S
VT
S-W
VR
R-Bl
DT
Bl-R
DR
R-O
VT
O-R
VR
R-G
DT
G-R
DR
R-Br
VT
Br-R
VR
R-S
DT
S-R
DR
Bk-Bl
VT
Bl-Bk
VR
Bk-O
DT
O-Bk
DR
Bk-G
VT
G-Bk
VR
Bk-Br
DT
Br-Bk
DR
Bk-S
VT
S-Bk
VR
Y-Bl
DT
Bl-Y
DR
KSU Slot Number
CKT
Number
Port
Number
Intercom
Number
Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic
Telephone Location
1
See Note 1.
2
See Notes 1 and 2.
3
4
See Note 3.
5
6
See Note 4.
7
See Note 4.
8
1. Indicate if two-way amplifier or line repeater
2. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected (see Program 10-2 and 19); BGM connects to VT and VR, Circuit 3 only
(DT and DR not used).
3. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028).
4. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS Console number (1~8).
Figure 10-14 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record
10-16
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
1585
25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To PESU w/Female
Connector
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Station Cabling Jacketed Pairs (24 AWG)
Tip 1
Ring 1
Not Used
Tip 2
RJ11
Ring 2
R
Circuit 3
Not Used
Y
W
BL
Tip
Voice Mail Port or
Similar Device
Voice Mail Port or
Similar Device
R
Circuit 6
to EKT 2
VT
VR
DT
DR
BK
DT
DR
DR
VT
RJ11
VR
VT
DT
Ring
Standard Telephone 1
Standard Telephone 2
Voice T1 (VT) 5
Voice R1 (VR) 5
Data T1 (DT) 5
Data R1 (DR) 5
VR
BL
Ring
Tip
24
AWG
Circuit 4
Not Used
DT
Y
W
GN
BK
654321
(Port count
in software)
VR
GN
BK
654321
Not Used
OCAT
W
Circuit 7 to
EKT 3
VT
GN
Y
DR
BL
OCAR
654321
123456
Circuit 8 to
EKT 4
or BGM
(see Notes)
Modular
Cord
OT and OR:
Only if
EKT
Receives
OCA Calls
Station
EKT 1 or HDCB
See Program 77-1
Not Used
OCA T1 (OT) 5
OCA R1 (OR) 5
OT
OR Circuit 6
OT
OR Circuit 7
OT
OR Circuit 8
Strap Options:
W9 - Cut if HDCB is connected to Circuit 5
P90 - Ring Voltage Option Circuit 1 & 2):
L = Low Level (130VDC P-P)
H = High Level (190VDC P-P)
Notes
•
Two-ringers max may be connected (high or low) to Tip/Ring.
HDSS connection is not available with PESU; HDCB may be
connected to circuit 5, BGM to circuit 8 (see Program 77-1).
(Electronic telephone circuits 5~8)
•
Not Used
66M150 Split Block
Notes (Standard telephone circuits 1 & 2)
• All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance - 300 ohms from PESU
to standard telephone/VM port.
• Standard telephones may be on- or off-premises. Off-premises
connection is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack.
• Two ringers max per port.
CAUTION!
RJ11
R
•
•
•
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
W-BL
Bridging Clips
To receive OCA, the 6500-series EKT must have an HVSU2 or
the combined HVSI and HVSU installed.
Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for the EKT to receive
OCA.
An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series EKTs for
headset or HESB; Loud Ringing Bell option.
All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU to
electronic telephone (1000 ft).
To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in Slot 18 of the
DK40i system.
Figure 10-15 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record PESU Wiring Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-17
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
MDF Block Number
Color Code
Designation
KSU Slot Number
CKT
Number
Port
Number
Intercom
Number
Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic
Telephone Location
W-Bl
T
Bl-W
R
1
W-O
Not Used
O-W
Not Used
W-G
T
G-W
R
2
W-Br
Not Used
Br-W
Not Used
W-S
Not Used
NA
NA
S-W
Not Used
3
R-Bl
Not Used
Bl-R
Not Used
R-O
Not Used
NA
NA
O-R
Not Used
4
R-G
Not Used
G-R
Not Used
R-Br
VT
See Note 1.
Br-R
VR
5
R-S
DT
S-R
DR
Bk-Bl
VT
Bl-Bk
VR
6
Bk-O
DT
O-Bk
DR
Bk-G
VT
See Note 2.
G-Bk
VR
7
Bk-Br
DT
Br-Bk
DR
Bk-S
VT
See Notes 2 and 3.
S-Bk
VR
8
Y-Bl
DT
Bl-Y
DR
1. Indicate if HDCB or electronic telephone.
2. HDSS console number 1~8 is not allowed.
3. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected; BGM connects to VT and VR, circuit 8 only (DT and DR not used).
Notes
●
●
Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, electronic telephone, HDCB (allowed HDCB
port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028) or separate BGM source.
OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring.
Figure 10-16 PESU Station MDF Cross Connect Record
10-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams
25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector
To RATU PCB W/Female Connector
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Bridging Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
1607
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T1 (Voice/Data)
R1 (Voice/Data)
PC Attendant
Console #2
PC Attendant
Console #3
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24 AWG (2 Pair, See Note 1)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R1
T1
PT1
PR1
RJ11
6 5 4 3 2 1
PC Attendant
Console #4
2 3 4 5
PR
TR
PT
GND
PR
(-)
T
GND
R
(-)
PT
Customer-supplied
PC Attendant Console
1-pair
Modular Cord
to PC
COM Port
Customer-supplied
9-pin computer cable
9 ft. max. (female DB9
connectors on each end)
Handset
RATHC
Headset
2-pair modular cord
(RJ11 plugs on each end)
8-pair modular cord
(RJ45 plugs on each end)
RATI
(Rear Connections)
To AC
2
Outlet
150~200 W
2-pair Modular
4
(–22 dBv Output)
(–25 ~ –30 dBv
Audio Input –
Future Use)
Audio Plugs
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
GN-R
PC Attendant
3
Console Cabling
REC AUX
OUT IN
RJ11 RJ45
DB9 (Female)
Notes
1. RATI is wired with 1-pair wiring - maximum distance from KSU
(RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m).
2. PC Attendant Console and CRT require local AC power.
3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following:
• Cable splits (single or double)
• Cable bridges (of any length)
• High resistance or faulty cable splices
4. To tape recorder “REC” input.
5. Audio input is for future use.
Figure 10-17 PC Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-19
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector
To RATU PCB W/Female
Connector
Bridging Clips
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Console Cabling3
(-)
T1 (Voice/Data)
(GND) R1 (Voice/Data)
(-)
T1
(GND) R1
T2
R2
Attendant
PT2
Console #2
PR2
T3
R3
Attendant
PT3
Console #3
PR3
T4
R4
Attendant
PT4
Console #4
PR4
Jacketed Twisted Pairs
24 AWG (2-pair, See Note 1)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
R1
PT1
T1
PR1
RJ11
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
PR
TR
PT
GND
PR
(-)
T
GND
R
(-)
PT
2-pair
Modular Cord
9-wire Cable
W/DB-9 Male Plug
Not Used
EGA Color
Monitor
Or EL Display
Modular Plug
RJ11 Modular Jack
RS-232C Connector
(Not Used)
DB-9
Female
Jack
3-Prong
AC Plug
To 120VAC2
ATTENDANT CONSOLE #1
Notes
1. Console must be wired with 2-pair wiring - max. distance from KSU
(RATU PCB) is 1,000 feet (303 m).
2. EGA monitor or EL display require local AC power.
3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following:
• Cable splits (single or double)
• Cable bridges (of any length)
• High resistance or faulty cable splices
1606
Figure 10-18 Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram
10-20
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
Analog Devices Wiring
W-BL
26
BL-W
1
W-O
27
O-W
2
W-GN
28
GN-W
3
W-BR
29
BR-W
4
W-S
30
S-W
5
R-BL
31
BL-R
6
R-O
32
O-R
7
R-GN
33
GN-R
8
R-BR
34
BR-R
9
R-S
35
S-R
10
BK-BL
36
BL-BK
11
BK-O
37
O-BK
12
BK-GN
38
GN-BK
13
BK-BR
39
BR-BK
14
BK-S
40
S-BK
15
Y-BL
41
BL-Y
16
Y-O
42
O-Y
17
Y-GN
43
GN-Y
18
Y-BR
44
BR-Y
19
Y-S
45
S-Y
20
V-BL
46
BL-V
21
V-O
47
O-V
22
V-GN
48
GN-V
23
V-BR
49
BR-V
24
V-S
50
S-V
25
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
Jacketed Twisted Station Cable
24 AWG
Tip 1
Ring 1
Not Used
T2
R2
(See Notes)
R
GN
BK
Y
W
BL
Not Used
T3
R3
Not Used
T4
R4
6 5 4 3 2 1
Not Used
1 2 3 4 5 6
T5
R5
Not Used
Modular
Cord
T6
R6
Tip
Ring
Not Used
Standard Telephone,
Voice Mail Port, ACD/Auto
Attendant Digital Announcer,
or Similar Device
T7
R7
Not Used
T8
R8
Notes
•
An alternate BGM source can be connected to
Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU. An isolation
transformer may be required when connecting
BGM to RSTU or PSTU (see Chapter 12 –
Peripheral Installation, Alternate BGM Source to
RSTU).
•
See Table 10-1 for loop requirements.
•
Two ringers maximum.
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector
To RSTU2 or PSTU or PSTU2
w/Female Connector
Bridging
Not Used
DPFT
Power Failure
Transfer Box
(J1)
DG
(J1, 50)
-24 Volts
(J1, 25)
DG
-24V
1583
66M150 Split Block
Figure 10-19 MDF Wiring/Standard Telephone, Voice Mail, DPFT to RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-21
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Cable Lengths
MDF Block Number
Color Code
Designation
W-Bl
T
Bl-W
R
W-O
Not Used
O-W
Not Used
W-G
T
G-W
R
W-Br
Not Used
Br-W
Not Used
W-S
T
S-W
R
R-Bl
Not Used
Bl-R
Not Used
R-O
T
O-R
R
R-G
Not Used
G-R
Not Used
R-Br
T
Br-R
R
R-S
Not Used
S-R
Not Used
Bk-Bl
T
Bl-Bk
R
Bk-O
Not Used
O-Bk
Not Used
Bk-G
T
G-Bk
R
Bk-Br
Not Used
Br-Bk
Not Used
Bk-S
T
S-Bk
R
Y-Bl
Not Used
Bl-Y
Not Used
Note
KSU Slot Number
CKT
Number
Port
Number
Intercom
Number
Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic
Telephone Location
1
Indicate if separate BGM source.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc.
Figure 10-20 RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Station MDF Cross Connect Record
10-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs
Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs
Pair
Pin
Color Code
Lead Designation
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
W-BI
BI-W
W-O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-Br
Br-W
W-S
S-W
R-BI
BI-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-Br
Br-R
R-S
S-R
Bk-BI
BI-Bk
Bk-O
O-Bk
Bk-G
G-Bk
Bk-Br
Br-Bk
Bk-S
S-Bk
Y-Bl
Bl-Y
Y-O
R
17
O-Y
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
Spare
Spare
18T
43
Y-G
Spare
R
18
G-Y
Spare
19T
44
Y-Br
Spare
R
19
Br-Y
Spare
20T
45
Y-S
Spare
R
20
S-Y
Spare
21T
46
V-Bl
Spare
R
21
Bl-V
22T
47
V-O
Spare
Spare
R
22
O-V
Spare
Spare
23T
48
V-G
R
23
G-V
Spare
Spare
24T
49
V-Br
R
24
Br-V
Spare
25T
50
V-S
Spare
R
25
S-V
Spare
Function
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
TIP-TEL
RING-TEL
TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU
RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU
PSTU/RSTU PCB Position
#1
#1
#1
#1
#2
#2
#2
#2
#3
#3
#3
#3
#4
#4
#4
#4
#5
#5
#5
#5
#6
#6
#6
#6
#7
#7
#7
#7
#8
#8
#8
#8
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
1t
R
2T
R
3T
R
4T
R
5T
R
6T
R
7T
R
8T
R
9T
R
10T
R
11T
R
12T
R
13T
R
14T
R
15T
R
16T
R
17T
Figure 10-21 DPFT Connector J2/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Station Line Connection
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-23
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs
Pair
1t
Pin
26
Color Code
W-BI
Lead Designation
T
Function
PSTU/RSTU PCB Position
TIP-CO
#1
#1
R
1
BI-W
R
RING-CO
2T
27
W-O
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#1
R
2
O-W
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#1
3T
28
W-G
T
TIP-CO
#2
R
3
G-W
R
RING-CO
#2
4T
29
W-Br
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#2
R
4
Br-W
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#2
5T
30
W-S
T
TIP-CO
#3
R
5
S-W
R
RING-CO
#3
6T
31
R-BI
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#3
R
6
BI-R
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#3
7T
32
R-O
T
TIP-CO
#4
R
7
O-R
R
RING-CO
#4
8T
33
R-G
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#4
R
8
G-R
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#4
9T
34
R-Br
T
TIP-CO
#5
R
9
Br-R
R
RING-CO
#5
10T
35
R-S
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#5
R
10
S-R
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#5
11T
36
Bk-BI
T
TIP-CO
#6
R
11
BI-Bk
R
RING-CO
#6
12T
37
Bk-O
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#6
R
12
O-Bk
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#6
13T
38
Bk-G
T
TIP-CO
#7
R
13
G-Bk
R
RING-CO
#7
14T
39
Bk-Br
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#7
R
14
Br-Bk
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#7
15T
40
Bk-S
T
TIP-CO
#8
R
15
S-Bk
R
RING-CO
#8
16T
41
Y-Bl
T
TIP-PCOU/RCOU
#8
R
16
Bl-Y
R
RING-PCOU/RCOU
#8
17T
42
Y-O
Spare
R
17
O-Y
Spare
18T
43
Y-G
Spare
R
18
G-Y
Spare
19T
44
Y-Br
Spare
R
19
Br-Y
Spare
20T
45
Y-S
Spare
R
20
S-Y
Spare
Spare
21T
46
V-Bl
R
21
Bl-V
Spare
22T
47
V-O
Spare
R
22
O-V
Spare
23T
48
V-G
Spare
R
23
G-V
Spare
24T
49
V-Br
Spare
R
24
Br-V
Spare
25T
50
V-S
PFT DG
PFT GROUND (INPUT)
RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN50
R
25
S-V
PFT -24V
PFT -24V (INPUT)
RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN25
Figure 10-22 DPFT Connector J1/Terminal Sequence & Designations/CO Line Connection & DPFT Control
10-24
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
To
Network
T1
R1
T2
R2
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Y
W
BL
T2
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-Type or
Equivalent
6 5 4 3 2 1
PCOU
#4
#3
#2
#1
2 3 4 5
Modular
Cord
Same
5
4
3
2
R4
R3
T3
T4
CO3+4
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
12
BK
R2
5
4
3
2
R2
R1
T1
T2
PCOU
Pin-out
Network Jack: RJ14C
FIC: 02LS2
6-1
11
12
T1
6-1
11
GN
6 543 21
10
R
R1
6 543 21
10
T1
R1
T2
R2
CO1+2
1586
Figure 10-23 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to PCOU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-25
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
MDF Block
Number
CO Line
Number
PCB Type and
Cabinet Slot
Number
MDF Block
Number
CO Line
Number
PCB Type and
Cabinet Slot
Number
MDF Block
Number
CO Line
Number
PCB Type and
Cabinet Slot
Number
Figure 10-24 CO Line (RCOU/RCOS, RGLU2, RDDU, PEMU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU) MDF Cross Connect Record
10-26
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
To
Network
T1
R1
T2
R2
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Y
W
BL
T2
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-Type Or
Equivalent
6 5 4 3 2 1
RGLU or PCOU
#4
#3
#2
#1
2 3 4 5
Modular
Cord
Same
5
4
3
2
R4
R3
T3
T4
CO3+4
5
4
3
2
R2
R1
T1
T2
CO1+2
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
24
BK
R2
6-1
11
12
T1
6-1
11
GN
6 543 21
9
10
R
R1
6 543 21
9
10
T1
R1
T2
R2
PCOU
Pin-out
Network Jack: RJ14C
FIC: 02LS2 (PCOU), 02GS2 (RGLU2)
1598
Figure 10-25 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to RGLU2 or PCOU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-27
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
To
Network
T1
R1
T2
R2
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-type or
Equivalent
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
4
3
2
1
Modular
Cord
Same
5
4
3
2
R8
R7
T7
T8
Same
5
4
3
2
R4
R3
T3
T4
Same
5
4
3
2
R6
R5
T5
T6
5
4
3
2
R2
R1
T1
T2
8
7
6
5
7+8
3+4
5+6
1-6
14
15
BL
1-6
13
14
W
T2
1+2
6-1
13
Y
6-1
12
BK
R2
6 543 21
11
12
T1
6 543 21
11
GN
6 543 21
9
10
R
R1
6 543 21
9
10
T1
R1
T2
R2
Network Jack: RJ14C
FIC: 02LS2
RCOU
RCOS
1602
Figure 10-26 MDF Wiring/CO to RCOU/RCOS
10-28
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
RJ-11 2-pin
To
Network
or
PSAP
T1
R1
6
5
4
3
2
1
Ring
Bridging
Clips
Tip
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
T1
R1
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
GN
R1
T1
BK
Y
W
BL
T2
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
Ring
21
21
Tip
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
Ring
27
27
28
28
Tip
29
29
NB LED
30
30
CB LED
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
Ring
35
35
36
36
Tip
37
37
NB LED
38
38
CB LED
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
NB LED
44
44
CB LED
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
6 5 4 3 2 1
RMCU1A
RCMS1A (2/2)
4
3
CAMA #4
RJ11 2-Pin
Modular
Connector
Network Busy (NB) LED
Customer Busy (CB) LED
4
3
CAMA #3
RCMS1A (1/2)
Ring
Tip
4
3
4
3
CAMA #2
LEDs (indicates
trunk condition)
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
66M150 Split Block
R2
CAMA #1
Only one circuit is shown connected.
2798
NOTE: Make sure Tip and Ring are connected
properly, CAMA lines are polarity sensitive.
Figure 10-27 RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-29
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
Bridging Jumper Wires
R1
R
GN
R
T1
R2
BK
W
BK
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
W
GN
T1
R1
BK
T2
Y
R2
Dealer Supplied
Modular Block,
625-Type or
Equivalent
(See Notes)
BL
R
T1
T2
Y
GN
R1
R2
Dealer Supplied
Modular Block,
625-Type or
Equivalent
(See Notes)
BL
6 5 4 3 2 1
T2
Y
W
Dealer Supplied
Modular Block,
625-Type or
Equivalent
(See Notes)
BL
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5
CKT 7&8
1-6
R4
R3
T3
T4
Same
Same
CKT 3&4
6-1
Same
5
4
3
2
6 54 3 2 1
CKT 3&4
6-1
R4
R3
T3
T4
6 54 3 2 1
Same
5
4
3
2
Modular
Cords
1-6
4-Wire
Modular
Cord
4-Wire
Modular
Cord
Telco
RJ14C
Modular Jack
CKT 5&6
Telco
RJ21X
CKT 1&2
Pin-out
Network Jack: RJ14C/RJ21X
FIC: 02LS2 (Loop Start) OR 02GS2 (Ground Start)
Telco Jacks
RJ14C
CKT 1&2
Pin-out
RGLU/RCOU/RCOS/PCOU/TCOU
RCIU
RCIS
Installer Cross Connect Customer
Supplied Modular Jacks
4-Wire
Modular
Cord
Network
R2
R1
T1
T2
6-1
5
4
3
2
6 54 3 2 1
R2
R1
T1
T2
6-1
5
4
3
2
6 54 3 2 1
T1 LINE X
R1
T2 LINE Y
R2
1
RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord
2
RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord
RJ14C
Duplex Modular Jack (AA-104A-4 or Equivalent)
RJ21X
4-Wire Connector (267A2 Or Equivalent)
Telco RJ21X
1
RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord
2
RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord
Network
1608
4-Wire Single Modular Jack (RJ14C) from Telco
1. 4-wire modular jacks such as graybar part number AA-104A-4 could be used in place of the two modular jacks; or,
a T-connector such as graybar part number 267A2 Adaptor could be used as shown below:
2. Assign RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS circuits to the appropriate CO line using Program *50.
CAUTION!
RCIU1 cannot be used in DK40i. Install RCIU2 in slot 17 only of the
DK40i Expansion Unit; it must never be installed in slot 18.
Figure 10-28 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS MDF Wiring Diagram
10-30
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
DID and Tie Line Wiring
To
Network
T1
R1
T2
R2
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
66M150 Split Block
Y
W
BL
T2
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-Type or Equivalent
6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
RDDU
4
3
2
1
Modular
Cord
Same
5
4
3
2
R4
R3
T3
T4
5
4
3
2
R2
R1
T1
T2
J2
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
12
BK
R2
J1
6-1
11
12
T1
6-1
11
GN
6 543 21
10
R
R1
6 543 21
10
T1
R1
T2
R2
RDDU
Pin-out
Network Jack: RJ14C
FIC:
1605
Figure 10-29 MDF Wiring/DID CO Lines to RDDU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-31
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
REMU
#4
#3
#2
#1
To Network Jack
Same Pinout
as Line #1
8-1
Line #4
To Network Jack
Same Pinout
as Line #1
8-1
Line #3
To Network Jack
Same Pinout
as Line #1
8-1
Line #2
8-1
Line #1
To Network Jack
(USOC: RJ1CX)
LEAD
—
PIN #
SB
M
—
—
8
7
SG
T
—
—
6
5
R
—
4
E
—
3
4WR1
—
2
4WT1
—
1
1600
Figure 10-30 MDF Wiring REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II
10-32
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
To
Network
T
R
E
M
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
M
6 5 4 3 2 1
PEMU
2-Wire
#4
#3
#2
#1
1 2 3 4 5 6
*
*
*Not Used
Modular
Cord
66M150 Split Block
Same
Same
Same
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
*R
T
*M
*R
T
*M
*R
T
*M
*R
T
*M
#4
#3
#2
#1
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
14
15
BL
E
6-1
14
W
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-Type or Equivalent
*
6-1
13
Y
6-1
13
BK
6-1
12
*
6543 21
11
12
T
6543 21
11
GN
6543 21
9
10
R
R
6543 21
9
10
T
R
E
M
PEMU
Pin-out
Network Jack: RJ2EX
FIC: TL11M
1587
Figure 10-31 MDF Wiring/2-Wire Tie Line to PEMU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-33
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
CO Line Wiring Diagrams
To
Network
T
R
T1
R1
E
M
Bridging
Clips
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
T
R
T1
R1
E
M
R
R
GN
T
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
DK Wire Pair Functions
50
DK, Transmit
T, R
DK, Receive
T1, R1
BK
Y
T1
E
W
BL
M
PEMU
4-Wire
#4
#3
#2
#1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Same
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
R1
R
T
T1
M
6-1
#4
Same
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
R1
R
T
T1
M
65 43 21
6-1
#3
Same
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
R1
R
T
T1
M
65 43 21
6-1
#2
6
5
4
3
2
1
E
R1
R
T
T1
M
65 43 21
6-1
Modular
Cord
65 43 21
50
R1
Telco-provided
Modular Block,
625-Type Or
Equivalent
#1
Network Jack: RJ2GX
FIC: TL31M
66M150 Split Block
Signaling
PEMU
Pin-out
E, M
1588
Figure 10-32 MDF Wiring/4-Wire Tie Line to PEMU
10-34
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
This section covers wiring for the option interface PCBs, which includes paging, TTY, SMDR, and
serial interface features.
The wiring diagrams involving paging zones reference Table 10-2, shown below.
Table 10-2
External Paging Zones
External Paging Zone
Access Code
External Paging Zone
Access Code
Paging
All Call, External Page Zone
DK14/DK40/DK40i/DK424/DK424i (all processors)
Paging
All Call Page Zone
DK40i/DK40/DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D) and
DK424i (BCAU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU)
Zone A
Zone C
Zone B
Zone D
DK424 (RCTUE/F) and DK424i (B5CAU/B5CBU)
Note
Zone A
Zone E
Zone B
Zone F
Zone C
Zone G
Zone D
Zone H
Four-digit access codes are for RCTUE/F and B5CAU/B5CBU only. Zones E-H require a second PIOU
PCB.
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-35
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
PIOU 25PR.
Connections
MDF 66M
Block
PG.OUT 1
PG.IN 1
PIN
COLOR
15 . S-Bk
40 . Bk-S
PIN
30
29
PG.OUT 2
PG.IN 2
42
.
.
O-Y
Y-O
34
33
PG.OUT 3
PG.IN 3
19
.
Br-Y
38
44
.
Y-Br
37
PG.OUT 4
21
46
.
Bl-V
V-Bl
42
.
DE.T
DE.R
32
7
.
.
R-O
O-R
13
14
SP.T0
38
. Bk-Gn
25
Mute
13
. Gn-Bk
26
V-S
Amplifier
Multi-zone
50
.
49
25
.
S-V
50
23
.
Gn-V
46
ALM T.
36
.
Bk-Bl
21
ALM R.
11
.
Bl-Bk
22
PEPU/PIOU PCB
PIOU
Only
PG.IN 4
17
Multi-zone Page
30W max./Composite Impedance
300 OHMS
Zone A or E
Zone B or F
All
Zone
Page
(#39)
Zone C or G
Zone D or H
41
Select Relay Function
with Program 77-1:
Door Lock Or
Amp. Control
BREAK
PI0
MAKE
600W (Duplex)
SP.R0
SW4 SP0
Page
or BGM
From
PCTU
SP1
VR1
8W
SP.T1
3 WATT SP.R1
PG.
Common
Door
Lock
Control
8Ω
Speaker
Alarm
System
(PIOU Only)
N.C.
P12
N.O.
BREAK
Alarm
Sensor
AMP.
Tape
Player
P11
NH T.
NH R.
34
9
.
.
R-Br
Br-R
17
18
Control
MAKE
External
Background
Music
Source
1589
Select Relay Function
with Program 77-1:
Night Relay Or
MOH Control
Note
MDF
Connections
All Wires Should
Be Jacketed 24 AWG.
Twisted Pairs
Night
Bell
To Music-on-hold
Input On PCTU PCB
P6 Connector.
See Table 10-2 for paging zone access codes.
Figure 10-33 MDF Wiring/PIOU or PEPU Peripherals (25-pair)
10-36
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
6
1
3-Pair
Modular
Cord Max.
50 Ft With
24 AWG
(cross-pinned)
PPTC
6
Programmable
RS-232 Port
TYSG
TYCD
TYDTR
TYDSR
TYTD
TYRD
SMSG
SMCD
SMDTR
SMDSR
SMTD
SMRD
PIOU
Card
TTY
(6-pin
Modular
Jack)
6-1
PPTC connects to:
Call Accounting Device or
Printer
PPTC
6-1
PPTC connects to any one
of these devices:
DKi Admin PC and DKi Backup
PC COM Port
External RM Modem
VM SMDI Port
MIS Device
SMIS PC COM Port
CCV PC COM Port
Insight DK PC COM Port
SMDR
(6-pin
Modular
Jack)
6
1
6
1
Station Message
Detail Recording
RS-232 Port
SW2
LED
CD4
1
(25-pair
Female
Amp.
Jack)
Notes
See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC.
See
PIOU/MDF
Drawing
in this
Section
2377
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
PIOU option settings:
SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or
1200 BPS.
SW2 —Sets the PIOU programming speed to be
300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY
jack).
LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN.
LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set
OUT.
SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the
IMDU or an external device connected
to the TTY modular jack.
MODEM — For IMDU operation.
— For ASCII terminal or
TTY
external modem.
W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell
or CCITT specification.
Figure 10-34 PIOU/TTY and SMDR Wiring (with PPTC Adapter)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-37
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
KSU Backplane
TBI
MDF
SPT
Page
and BGM
600
SPR
Break
Mute
Control
DET
W1 Make
DER
K1
Break
DE
Door Lock
Control
NH
MOH
Source Unit
NHT
W2 Make
K2
HESB
or
Page Amplifier
NHR
Night Bell
Normal Open
ALMT
Alarm
Sensor
W3
ALM
Facility
Alarm Unit
ALMR
Normal
Close
PIOUS
Relay Options:
• K1 (DE): Door Lock or Amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07
• K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05
• K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 Amp Maximum
Notes
•
•
All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.
Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed.
1591
Figure 10-35 PIOUS Page/Relay/Alarm Connections
10-38
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
1
6
3-Pair
Modular
Cord Max.
50 Ft With
24 AWG
(cross-pinned)
PPTC
1
PIOUS
CARD
Programmable
RS-232 Port
TYSG
TYCD
TYDTR
TYDSR
TYTD
TYRD
SMSG
SMCD
SMDTR
SMDSR
SMTD
SMRD
Station Message
Detail Recording
RS-232 Port
6
TTY
(6-Pin
Modular
Jack)
6-1
PPTC connects to:
Call Accounting Device or
Printer
PPTC
6-1
PPTC connects to any one
of these devices:
DKi Admin or DKi Backup
PC COM Port
External RM Modem
VM SMDI Port
MIS Device
SMIS PC COM Port
CCV PC COM Port
Insight DK PC COM Port
SMDR
(6-Pin
Modular
Jack)
6
1
6
1
SW2
LED
CD4
TB1 to MDF:
600 OHM
Page
Notes
See Figure 8-27 for futher details on the PPTC.
Door Lock/
Amp, Mute
PIOU option settings:
SW1 —Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or
1200 BPS.
SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to
be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY
jack).
LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN.
LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set
OUT.
SW3 —Sets the PIOU to operate with the
IMDU or an external device connected
to the TTY modular jack.
MODEM — For IMDU operation.
— For ASCII terminal or
TTY
external modem.
W4 — Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell
or CCITT specification.
Night
Relay/ MOH
Control
Alarm
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
2376
Figure 10-36 PIOUS SMDR/TTY Options and Wiring (with PPTC Adapter)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-39
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Modular Jack
6-wire Modular Cord - telephone type
(modular jack locking tabs on the same
side of each cord).
Toshiba PPTC PC COM Port
RSIU (plug-in motherboard)
Port 1
RSIS (piggy-back)1
serial interface subassemly
Port 2
RSIS (piggy-back)1
serial interface subassemly
Port 3
RMDS or RSIS (piggy-back)1
(2400 bps modem or serial interface)3
Port 4
MIS2
SMDI2
SMDR2
TTY2
Notes
1. The RSIU can be configured with up to three RSIS, or two
RSIS and one RMDS (in any position). Use Program 76 to set
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port types.
2. All RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports are system programmable to allow
up to four of any of the functions: SMDR, MIS, CCV, SMDI,
TTY, and remote modem.
3. When the RMDS is used as a modem, the modular jack is not
used. If the RMDS is used as an RS-232 interface port, the
modular jack is used.
ACD/MIS PC
Stratagy Voice Mail System
Station Message Detail Report
DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC
CAUTION! Do not plug CO line or
RSTU tip/ring into RMDS
or RSIU modular jack
RSIU
DKi Admin or
DKi Backup
PC
Remote
Modem
CO Line
Telephone
Network
CO Line
RS-232 Cable
RMDS
Flash
or ROM
and
RAM
Time
Switch
CO Line
Circuit
Strata DK
4274
CO line connects to RMDS port
(#19) via: DID, Auto Attendant,
DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing
assignments.
Figure 10-37 DK424 and DK424i RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Wiring Diagrams
10-40
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS
PPTC-9
2
3
6
4
1
5
(female)
Connect to PC 9-pin
COMX Port
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
DB9 Pinout
(front view)
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
20
Connect to PC 25-pin
COMX Port
3
2
6
20
8
7
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
PPTC25-MDM
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20
Connect to External Modem
2
3
20
6
8
7
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
Connect to:
• ASCII Terminal
• Printer
• Call Accounting Device
3
2
6
20
8
7
DB25
Pinout
(front and
side view)
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS
6
5
4
3
2
1
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
DK
Modular Jack Pinout
(front view)
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS
PPTC
(male)
DK
Universal Slot PCB
Wiring
DB25
Pinout
(front view) Jumper
Pin 4-5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
Modular Jack Pinout
(front view)
DB25
Pinout
(front view) Jumper
Pin 4-5
(male)
DK
Modular Jack Pinout
(front view)
PPTC-25F
(female)
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
DK
Modular Jack Pinout
(side view)
Jumper
Pin 4-5
2378
1. The above modular adapters can be used to connect PCs, terminals, and SMDR devices to WSIU, TSIU,
RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, PIOU, and PIOUS RS-232 ports.
2. PPTC will not connect directly into a 25-pin PC COM port because they are male gender.
3. All PPTC, PPTC9, PPTC25F connections require a 6-wire, telephone type modular cord (with modular jack
locking tabs on the same side of each cord.)
4. See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for connection the MLX-41 Caller ID interface box to the WSIU,
RS-232 port using PPTC-CLID14.
Figure 10-38 DK RS-232 Modular Adapter Pin Configuration
Strata DK I&M
5/00
10-41
Universal Slot PCB Wiring
Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams
10-42
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11
Station Apparatus
This chapter provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata DK systems and how
to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station
selection consoles and door phones also appear in this chapter.
Types of Telephones
The Strata DK systems can support digital, electronic and standard telephones.
Digital Telephones
Installation instructions for digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere in this manual apply
only to the Toshiba 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones. The 2000-series digital telephones
consist of four models:
DKT2010-S
DKT2020-S
The DKT2010-S is
a 10-Button
Digital
Speakerphone
The DKT2020-S is
a 20-button Digital
Speakerphone.
1867
1877
DKT2020-SD
The DKT2010-SD
is a 10-Button
Digital
Speakerphone
with Liquid
Crystal Display.
The DKT2020-SD
is a 20-Button
Digital
Speakerphone with
LCD.
3645
DKT2020-FDSP
Station Apparatus
DKT2010-SD
1869
Same as
DKT2020-SD with
Full-duplex
Speakerphone.
There are two 1000-series digital telephone models, the DKT1020-S and DKT1020-SD.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-1
Station Apparatus
Types of Telephones
Electronic Telephones
The electronic telephone instructions in this manual apply to the Toshiba 6500-series electronic
telephones. They consist of four models: the EKT6510-H, EKT6510-S, EKT6520-H, and
EKT6520-SD.
Note
Other electronic telephones that are compatible with the Strata DK systems are the 2000-,
3000-, and 6000-series telephones.
Important!
When you install 2000-, 3000-, or 6000-series electronic telephones, you must
calculate the system power factor using the tables provided in the appropriate
Configuration chapter to ensure that the system power supply is not overloaded.
Standard Telephones
500- and 2500-type standard telephones apply whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this
manual.
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
Strata AirLink™ wireless systems add
wireless telephone service to Strata DK16 and
DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, DK424 and
DK424i and many non-Toshiba telephone
systems. There is one handset model (shown
at right) that stores up to eight system and
handset IDs that are configured by your
System Administrator.
The handset has a two-line LCD that shows
alphanumeric information, including the idle
message, date, call duration, icons and
specific call activity.
Idle Message
Date
Time/Call Duration
Icon Display Area
Volume/Scroll Buttons
PWR
CALL
END
For installation instructions of the systems
and operation of the handset, see the Strata
AirLink Installation Guide and the Strata
AirLink Handset User Guide.
Scroll/Lock Buttons
3398
11-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Telephone Installation
Telephone Installation
This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the system. Before installing
any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes:
WARNING!
➤
Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
➤
Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
➤
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
➤
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
➤
If telephone, DSS console, door phone control box, or door phone wiring exits the
building, external secondary protection is required. See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot
PCB Wiring.
CAUTION!
When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are
within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right
(90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices
that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
Important!
For station apparatus secondary protection information, refer to the following:
DK14, see Figure 1-14 on Page 1-22; DK40i, see Figure 3-24 on Page 3-41;
DK424, see Figure 5-45 on Page 5-67; or for DK424i, see Figure 10-1 on Page 103.
The DKT2000 V.4 series telephones have DIP switches that enable use for the international
market. The DIP switches are located underneath the flexible button key strip on the DKT2000 V.4
series telephones (see Figure 11-1). On the DKT2001, the DIP switch is located on the base.
S
1
2
3
DIP Switches
4
Line 9
Line 8
Line 7
Do Not
Disturb
Line 17
Line 6
Line 16
Line 5
Line 15
Line 4
Line 14
Line 3
Line 13
Line 2
Line 12
Line 1
Line 11
Speed
Dial
Station Apparatus
ON
Intercom Line 10
3926
Figure 11-1
DKT 2000-series V.4 DIP Switches
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-3
Station Apparatus
Telephone Installation
Table 11-1 shows the correct country settings for the DKT2010-S, DKT2020-S, DKT2010-SD,
DKT2020-SD, DKT2001 V.4 telephones.
Note
Table 11-1
The default DIP switch settings are preset for the USA and Canada. Therefore, you do not
need to adjust any of these from the default factory settings for North America.
DKT International DIP Switch Settings
Dip Switch
Country
USA
Canada
(Default Setting)
DIP Switch Position
1
2
3
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
Mexico
ON
ON
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
ON
Taiwan
OFF
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
Hong Kong
Thailand1
ON
Singapore
Malaysia
Indonesia
Sri Lanka
India
China
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
3925
1. The DKT2000 V.4 is not compatible for Hong Kong and Thailand. Use the
V.4A or later versions in these two countries.
Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU)
To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a
digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a
DVSU. In a DK system with release 3 and above software, a DVSU is not required to receive OCA
in the telephone handset or headset. An additional wire pair is not required for digital telephones
that receive Speaker OCA calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000-series and 1000-series
digital telephones.
Notes
●
●
●
11-4
Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a DVSU and integrated data interface unit (PDIUDI, RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2) or DADMs at the same time.
Program 03, Code 62 or 64 must be set for the PDKU and Code 28 for the RDSU for
telephones that are to receive Speaker OCA and Program 31 LED 03 must be turned ON for
telephone ports.
DVSU is not necessary to receive handset OCA.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Telephone Installation
System Connection
Digital Telephones
The following provides information on how to connect digital telephones to the DK system.
Note
Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page
11-3.
Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair
jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for
digital telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system.
Digital telephones that are equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or ADMs should have
two-pair (or external power) to function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital
telephones supported by systems that must operate with battery reserve power (see Chapter 5 –
DK424 Installation, Table 5-2 on Page 5-5).
To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular
station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular digital
telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.).
Note
Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges
(of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices.
Electronic Telephones
The following provides information on how to connect electronic telephones to the Strata DK
system.
Note
Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page
11-3.
Electronic telephones are connected to electronic telephone circuits in the DK40i Expansion Unit
on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) and the Standard/Electronic Telephone
Interface Unit (PESU) via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Two-pair
wiring, as a minimum, is required for telephone connection. However, three-pair wiring is
recommended for some upgrades, such as OCA.
If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the station cable run from the DK40i Base KSU to the
telephone must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters).
Standard Telephones
Station Apparatus
To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular
station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard two-pair modular electronic
telephone cord length is 7 feet (the maximum allowed length is 25 feet). See Chapter 10 –
Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.
The following provides information on how to connect standard telephones to the DK system.
Note
Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page
11-3.
Standard telephones connect to standard telephone circuits of the Standard Telephone Interface
PCBs: RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU, KSTU2 (DK40i only), and QSTU2 (DK14
only). Standard telephones connect to RSTU, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU via the MDF with
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-5
Station Apparatus
Telephone Installation
standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (See single-pair wiring Chapter 10 – Universal Slot
PCB Wiring for more details.)
The standard telephone cable’s overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms
maximum, (for PSTU, PESU, KSTU2, or QSTU2), 600 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with
-24VDC (no R48S), and 1200 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -48VDC (R48S installed on
RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU PCB), including the telephone resistance. This also applies to all devices
connected to standard telephone circuits.
A standard telephone connected off-premises via the telephone network should interface with
OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C lines (or equivalent) and connect to an RJ21X, FIC jack or equivalent,
(see wiring diagrams in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Table 5-3, “DK424 Network
Requirements” on Page 5-6).
Telephone Wall Mounting
This section explains how to mount digital and electronic telephones to a wall or other vertical
surface. See the manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on mounting standard phones.
Notes
●
●
Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DI2s cannot be wall
mounted.
Electronic and older digital telephones equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall mounted. 2000series digital telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2.
➤ To mount digital and electronic telephones
Refer to Figures 11-2~11-3 and the following steps.
Handset Hanger
Plastic Tab
1. Loosen the captive screws, and remove the
telephone base.
2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset
hanger from the base.
3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front
of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the
handset cradle.
4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and
secure it to the telephone with its four captive
screws.
11-6
1478
Figure 11-2
Removing the Telephone
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Telephone Installation
5. Connect the phone to the wall modular
connector with a cord approximately four
inches long (available at most telephone supply
companies).
6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the
base.
7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular
connector plate.
Handset
Hanger
1479
1480
Figure 11-4
Handset
Figure 11-3
Wall Mounting Base Rotation
Station Apparatus
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-7
Station Apparatus
Telephone Upgrades
Telephone Upgrades
Digital and electronic telephones can be upgraded for a number of features; there are no upgrades
for standard telephones. Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is
connected to and is not considered a station. See Table 11-2 for more information.
Table 11-2
Telephone Subassembly Upgrades
Subassembly
Host Telephone
Function
Capacity
DVSU1
2000- and 1000-series Digital
Telephones
Provides interface for digital telephone to
receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA).
Not required for Handset/Headset OCA.
HHEU
2000- and 1000-series Digital
Telephones. 6500- and 6005series Electronic Telephones.
Provides interface for headset and loud ringing
bell to telephone. Can be installed with DVSU,
RPCI-DI, or DADM.
RPCI-DI1
2000-series Digital
Telephones
Provides TAPI PC application and data calling
interfaces.
DADM1
2000-series Digital
Telephones
Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two
DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS,
System or Station speed dial, or CO line
appearances.
1 per
telephone
1 or 2 per
telephone
1. Only one of the following subassemblies allowed per telephone: DVSU, RPCI-DI or DADM.
Digital Telephone Upgrades
This section describes how to upgrade and configure 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones for
features and options.
TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades (RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI)
Both the 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones can be upgraded with an integrated data
interface unit to transmit and receive simultaneous voice and data calls. There are three versions of
the integrated unit:
♦
RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI2 for the 2000-series telephones
♦
PDIU-DI for the 1000-series telephones.
Asynchronous devices, such as PCs and terminals, can be connected to the standard RS-232
connector of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2. Station users are able to transmit and receive RS-232 data
over the single-wire pair of the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 equipped telephone.
TAPI/Data Communications Modes
The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: the TAPI or the data communications mode. The mode is
changed by sending the appropriate control signal to the RPCI-DI from the PC to which the RPCIDI is connected.
TAPI Mode
In the TAPI mode, the PC connected to the RPCI-DI can place telephone calls. The PC can also
receive Caller ID, ANI, and DNIS information received by the RPCI-DI telephone. When in the
TAPI mode, the RPCI-DI is designed to be compatible with Microsoft TAPI application programs.
For more information, see Chapter 15 – Computer Telephony Integration. If an RPCI-DI only
needs to support TAPI (and not data—see following Notes) it can be connected to any digital
telephone circuit.
11-8
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Telephone Upgrades
Data Communications Mode
In the data communications mode, data calls can be from a telephone with the 'DWD&DOO button
and disconnected with the 'DWD5HOHDVH button. Digital telephones can have a 0RGHP button
for reserving a modem or monitoring modem availability and status. These feature buttons are
assigned to telephones with Program 39. Data and voice calls can be dialed from a terminal or PC
using standard “AT” commands.
Notes
●
●
●
1000-series digital telephones with an RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 cannot be wall-mounted or
equipped with an Add-On-Module (ADM) or DVSU for Speaker OCA. A 2000-series digital
telephone with a PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI can support an HHEU at the same time, but cannot
support a DVSU or ADM and can be wall-mounted.
Only PDKU1 circuits 1~7 can support RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2s; all PDKU2 and Base Unit
digital circuits can support PDIU-DI2 and RPCI-DIs.
RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DI2s that support data communications mode, must be connected to
digital telephone circuits that support 2B channels. The digital circuits that support RPCI-DI
data communication are:
DK14 – all digital telephone circuits.
DK40i – all digital telephone circuits except those installed in slot 17 and 18 of the expansion
unit.
DK424 – see Tables 4-4 and 4-5 of the Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration.
DK424i – see Chapter 6 – DK424i
RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI2 Installation
See Figures 11-2, 11-5 and 11-6 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four screws on the digital telephone base and remove the base.
2. Insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into the connectors on the PCB in the telephone
(observing the red wire for correct positioning).
3. Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the phone. Install the PDIU-DI for 1000-series;
install PDIU-DI2 or RPCI-DI for 2000-series phones. Secure with the four captive screws.
Note
4. Remove the directory tray from the original telephone base and install it on the integrated unit
phone base. Squeeze the tray on its sides so it bows slightly to remove and re-install.
5. See Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation, Table 5-3 on Page 5-6 for loop limits. Install a two-pair
house cable (or external power) and a two-pair modular cord (supplied with PDIU-DI), if
required for distance.
Station Apparatus
RPCI-DI V2s require some modification when installed in DKT versions 1~3; RPCI-DI
V2s in DKT version 4 or higher do not require any modification.
RPCI, PDIU-DI1/PDIU-DI2 Programming
Program 39: Assigns the 'DWD&DOO, 'DWD5HOHDVH, and 0RGHP buttons.
Programs 20 and 22: RPCI and data interface unit assignments.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-9
Station Apparatus
Telephone Upgrades
RS-232 (Female)
DB-25 Connector
DIU & VSU
DIU & ADM
Perception
Strap (only cut
if installed on
Perception)
To P1 of
Bottom PCB
Digital
Telephone
Top Assembly
To P2 of
Bottom PCB
RPCI-DI V.2s have stand offs that
require cutting when installed into a
DKT V.1~V.3. Use a wire cutter to trim
the top pieces of the stand offs at the
center of the telephone base before
mounting.
Red
Wire
RPCI-DI or
PDIU-DI2 2000 Digital
Telephone Base
3751
Before
After
Do not cut the RPCI-DI stand offs when
installing on a DKT V.4 or higher.
Figure 11-5
Only RPCI-DI V.2s
have these stand offs
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 Installation into 2000-series Digital Telephone
F)
P
(S
D
B
U
0K
S
-2
0-
TO
T1
K
K
D
D
TO
RS-232 (Female)
DB-25 Connector
A
HHEU
IB
H
S
DVSU
PDIU
D
RE
PDIU/
DVSU
D
RE
Digital
Telephone
Top Assembly
Perception
Strap (only cut
if installed on Perception)
To P1 of
Bottom PCB
Red
Wire
To P2 of
Bottom PCB
Red
Wire
Important!
Do not connect DIU cables
to HHEU connector.
PDIU-DI PCB
Directory Tray
82
14
Notes
• A 1000-series digital telephone cannot support an
HHEU and a PDIU-DI at the same time.
• 1000-series telephones do not support RCPI-DIs.
Figure 11-6
11-10
PDIU-DI 1000 Digital
Telephone Base
PDIU-DI Installation into 1000-series Digital Telephone
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
The following provides information on how to connect the
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephones (SLTs) to the DK
system.
Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone
Installation” on Page 11-3.
The digital SLTs connect to the digital telephone ports via the
MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If
using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most
cases for DKT2001 model standard telephones to operate
effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system.
To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable
should be terminated in a modular station connector block
(RJ11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular DKT2001 model standard
telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.).
3532
Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any
length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices.
➤ To wall mount DKT2001 digital SLTs
1. Loosen the screws, and remove the
telephone base.
Handset Hanger
2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the
handset hanger from the base.
3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on
the front of the phone. The hanger fits
in the notch on the handset cradle.
4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees
and secure it to the telephone with its
four screws.
6. Route the cord into the hollow portion
of the base.
7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting
modular connector plate.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
3633
Figure 11-7
Removing the Telephone Base
Station Apparatus
5. Connect the phone to the wall modular
connector with a cord approximately
four inches long (available at most
telephone supply companies).
11-11
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
Installation
1. Set the DIP switches to match Figure
11-8. The DIP switches are preset from
the factory for the USA and Canada.
Refer to Table 11-1 on Page 11-4 for
other country settings.
2. If required to achieve maximum
distance (greater than 1000 ft.), install a
two-pair house cable (or external
power).
ON
1
2
3
4
ON
1
2
3
4
Programming
Program 03: Specify Code 61 to indicate a
station line PDKU2.
Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook
volume level for digital telephone handsets.
Program 38: Specify Code 21.
Program 39: Specify button 01 as a [PDN].
3482
Important!
Note
Do not program CO lines or
secondary line appearances
Figure 11-8
DKT2001 DIP Switch Settings
onto button 01 or in any
other position. Since the
system assigns CO lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any CO line
appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ).
If the 6SHHG'LDO6HOHFW button is removed, the key becomes the 6SHHG'LDO
6HOHFW button. While on an outside call, the user must press then to activate the and DTMF tones for the duration of the call.
Program 92-5: Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital
telephones.
Also, refer to the Numerical Programming Listing in the Strata DK Programming Manual for
other station-related programs.
11-12
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
DVSU Upgrade Installation
Red
Wire
See Figures 11-2 and 11-9~11-12 and
follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the
telephone base and remove the base.
Red Wire
2. Loosen the four captive screws on the
metal plate to the standoffs inside the
base. Remove and discard the plate.
3. Position the DVSU PCB on the
standoffs), and secure with the four
provided screws.
4. If installing the DVSU into a 2000series digital telephone and then
connect the DVSU wire plugs to the
DVSU connectors on the PCB inside
the telephone.
1483
Figure 11-9
DVSU Installation for Digital
...or if installing the DVSU into a
Telephones
1000-series digital telephone and
connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCBs inside the telephone.
5. Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws.
W101
W102
RED P1
DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM
RED P6 RED P2
P3
HHEU
EX.POW
W204
RED
HHEU
EX.SP
RED
W204
W204
W101
W102
EX.POW
P1
RED
BEEP
W203
HHEU
W201
W202
EX.SP
1484
Figure 11-10
Strata DK I&M
DKT2010-S Strap and Connector
Locations
5/00
Station Apparatus
W203
Carbon
P2
Carbon
W201
W202
BEEP
RED P6
W409
DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM
HS-BOV
EX.POW
1485
Figure 11-11
DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and
DKT2020-SD Strap and Connector
Locations
11-13
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
Ex: Power
DKT1020H
DKT1020SD
HHEU
W303
W302
Carbon
W301
Carbon
W101/W102-1020H
Beep
W301-1020H
W304-1020SD
W202
HHEU
W201
W203
Carbon
Ex: Power
0
T1
D
0K
-2
1O
T
K
D
K
D
W101/W102-1020SD
-S
B
U
(S
P
F)
S
TO
DVSU
A
N
H
IB
H
1020SD Room
Noise Switch
HHEU
Red Wire
DVSU
DVSU
Ex. SP Strap
W204-1020H
W305-1020SD
Red HHEU
Wire
1486
Figure 11-12
Red
Wire
DVSU
1000-series Digital Telephone Strap and Connector Locations
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)
The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) for the
Loud Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be connected to both series of digital telephones.
Notes
●
●
●
●
●
11-14
There are two types of HHEUs: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the
HHEU2.
Both 2000- and 1000-series digital telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3 or V.4
HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation
only.
Only digital telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is
identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall
mounting.
A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the
HESB.
1000-series digital telephones cannot be equipped with the HHEU (any type or version) and
the integrated data interface unit (PDIU-DI) at the same time, but 2000-series digital
telephones can support an HHEU and a RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 at the same time.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
HHEU Upgrade Installation
See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-14 and
follow these steps:
Component Side of HHEU
SW601
(HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)
R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the
telephone base, and remove the base.
OCA
(HHEU1 V.4
or HHEU2)
2. Use a screwdriver or other suitable
tool to remove the plastic tab on the
back of the base. (The HHEU
modular connector for the headset is
accessed through this opening.)
3. If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the
SW601 switch on the HHEU to
headset for the headset or loud bell
application.
P601
HHEU
V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have
this switch, because they are
automatically set for the headset/loud
bell application.
1487
Figure 11-13
4. Connect the HESC-65A cable to
P601 of the HHEU (both HHEU1A
versions and the HHEU2 have P601) if
the Loud Ringing Bell option is
required.
Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral
Installation for HESB installation
procedures.
HHEU Installation for Digital Telephones
Feed Through
for HESC-65(A) Cable
To HESB
Block
1488
5. For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset
is connected to the HHEU, cut both
sides of the R607 resistor, then remove
the resistor to eliminate electrical
contact.
HESC-65 Cable
or
HESC-65A Cable
HHEU
P601
Station Apparatus
Do not cut the R607 resistor if
connecting an HESB to the HHEU
for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a
headset is also installed on the
HHEU.
Note
SW601
...or
For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: if
only the headset is connected to the
HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap.
Note
Strata DK I&M
Figure 11-14
HESC-65A Cabling
Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud
Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU.
5/00
11-15
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
6. Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided
screws.
Note
See Figures 11-10~11-12 for Steps 7~8.
7. For 2000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU
connector on the PCB in the phone.
...or for 1000-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU to the HHEU
connector on the PCB of the phone.
8. For 2000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU (for Loud
Ringing Bell), locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the telephone and cut the strap.
...or for 1000-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU, locate and
cut the EX.SP strap on the upper PCB in the phone.
9. For 2000-series digital telephones: If a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut
the HHEU strap on the PCB in the phone.
...or for 1000-series digital telephones: a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and
cut the HHEU strap on the upper PCB in the phone
Note
If the HHEU PCB is removed from the phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for
proper telephone operation.
10. Reinstall the telephone base; secure with the four captive screws.
➤ To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell
1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB.
2. Adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the
telephone.
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps
If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone,
two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut.
➤ To cut the straps
Note
You do not need to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU.
See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base.
2. For 2000-series digital telephones, and cut the W201 and W202 carbon straps.
...or
For 1000-series digital telephones, cut the carbon straps (W301 and W302 on the DKT1020SD; W201 and W203 on the DKT1020-H).
3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
11-16
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
Beep Strap
A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone.
➤ To eliminate the beep sound
See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws from the telephone base and remove the base.
2. Cut the beep strap.
3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only)
High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models
to cut off frequently.
➤ To make the 1000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 1000-series digital telephone speakerphone base (Figure
11-2), and remove the base.
2. For the 1000-series speakerphone model (DKT1020-SD), see Figure 11-12, and locate the
room noise switch. Push the switch carefully to the H (high) position (for low sensitivity)
when there is high background noise in the area surrounding the telephone.
3. Reinstall the telephone base.
➤ To make the 2000-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise
➤ Hold down 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▲ button. The less-sensitive level will be set after
the third flash of the Mic LED.
➤ To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level
➤ Hold down the 0LF button, then press the 9RO ▼ button. The normal level will be set after the
third flash of the Mic LED.
Note
Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option
Using a 2000-series digital telephone, the busy override and camp-on ring tones can be sent over
the telephone handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. Using a 1000-series digital telephone,
the tones sound only over the speaker.
Station Apparatus
On 2000-series digital telephone speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the
Mic LED flashes at the in-use rate when the speakerphone is used. When set to normal
sensitivity, the Mic LED is on steady when using the speakerphone.
➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset of the DKT2010-H model
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base (Figure 11-2), and remove the base.
2. Install a strap in the HS-BOV W409 location (see Figure 11-10).
3. Reinstall the telephone base.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-17
Station Apparatus
DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/
2020-S/2020-SD
➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▲ button.
➤ To block the tone over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/2020-S/2020-SD
➤ Hold down the 5HGLDO button and press the 9RO▼ button.
Note
For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the speaker OCA strap or R607 is
cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the telephone. (See “Loud Ringing
Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)” on Page 11-14)
External Power Straps
Digital telephones equipped with options such as integrated data interface units and ADMs require
two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance from the
KSU. Two-pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for
digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with reserve power. (Table 5-2
on Page 5-5.)
Each digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when
the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC/DC power supply.
➤ To cut the straps
See Figures 11-2 and 11-10~11-12 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base.
2. Depending on the telephone, locate the W101 and W102 external power straps and cut them.
3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
Note
Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for external AC/DC power supply
ordering information and installation instructions.
DKT2000 ADM Installation
See “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on Page 11-35.
11-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Electronic Telephone Upgrades
Electronic Telephone Upgrades
This section describes how to upgrade and configure electronic telephones for features and
options.
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI)
Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined
HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These
telephones also require three-pair wiring to receive speaker OCA, instead of the standard two-pair.
Telephones making speaker OCA calls do not require an upgrade or extra wire pair.
Notes
●
See Notes in Figure 11-6 on Page 11-10.
●
Handset OCA is not available on electronic telephones.
HVSU2 Upgrade Installation
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base.
2. Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws.
3. Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the PCB in the telephone.
To HVSU
Connector (P2)
On Main PCB
Inside
Telephone
R-UP (6510-H,
6510-S, 6520-S)
HVSU2
Room Noise
To HHEU
Connector
P1
RED
P1
HI
P2
Beep
Strap
Carbon
RED
R-UP
(6520-SD)
Red Wire
To HVSU
Connector, P2
HHEU Strap
W203
1489
Figure 11-15
HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones
Strata DK I&M
5/00
1490
Station Apparatus
Carbon Straps
W201
W202
11-19
Station Apparatus
Electronic Telephone Upgrades
HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15~11-16 and follow these
steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the
telephone base and remove the base.
To P2 HVSU
Connector on
Main PCB
Inside Telephone
P5
HSVI
HVSU
2. Align the P5 connector on the HVSI
subassembly with the receptacle on the
HVSU subassembly.
Apply firm, even pressure to the PCBs
to ensure that the connectors mate
properly (they should click).
Note
Exercise care when assembling the
HVSU to the HVSI to prevent
damage to the connector pins; also,
verify that the HVSU is aligned
with the silk-screened image on the
HVSI.
1491
3. Position the HVSU/HVSI subassembly
on the standoffs inside the base, and
secure with the two screws provided.
Figure 11-16
HVSI/HVSU Installation for
Electronic Telephones
4. Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly
wire plug to the P2 connector on the
electronic telephone PCB.
5. Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
11-20
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Electronic Telephone Upgrades
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)
The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) and/or a
headset to be connected to the electronic telephone. The HESB serves as a loud ringing bell when
connected to a telephone.
Notes
●
●
●
●
There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the
HHEU2.
Only electronic telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is
identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall
mounting.
A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in an electronic
telephone to the HESB. Refer to Chapter 12– Peripheral Installation for HESB installation
procedures.
All HHEU versions and types, except for V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Speaker Offhook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI).
HHEU Upgrade Installation
Component Side of HHEU
See Figures 11-2, 11-14, 11-15 and 11-17
and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the
telephone base and remove the base.
2. Using a screwdriver or other suitable
tool, remove the plastic tab on the back
of the base. The HHEU modular
connector for the headset will be
accessed through this opening.
4. Connect either the HESC-65 or HESC65A cable to P601 of the HHEU if the
Loud Ringing Bell option is required.
Refer to Chapter 12– Peripheral
Installation for HESB installation
procedures.
SW601
(HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3)
To P1, HHEU
Connector of
Telephone
PCB
OCA (HHEU1
V.4 or HHEU2)
P601
HHEU
1492
Figure 11-17
HHEU Installation for Electronic
Telephones
Station Apparatus
3. If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the
SW601 switch to the HEADSET
position for HESB and/or headset
connection. This switch is not on either
the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2,
because the operation is automatic with
these subassemblies.
R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)
5. For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of
the R607 resistor on the HHEU and remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact.
Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing
Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU.
Note
...or
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-21
Station Apparatus
Electronic Telephone Upgrades
For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the
speaker OCA strap.
Note
Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the loud
ringing bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU.
6. Position the HHEU subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two
screws provided.
7. Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to the P1 connector on the electronic telephone
PCB.
8. Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB.
Note
The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone.
9. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
Adjust (HESB) Loud Ringing Bell Volume
1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB.
2. Adjust the volume control on both the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the
telephone.
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps
If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500-series
electronic telephone, two straps inside the telephone must be cut.
➤ To cut the straps
Note
It is not necessary to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU.
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base.
2. Locate the carbon straps, W201 and W202 and cut them.
3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws.
Beep Strap
A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad button or feature button is pressed on an electronic
telephone.
➤ To eliminate the beep
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps:
1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone and remove the base.
2. Locate and cut the beep strap on the telephone PCB.
3. Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws.
11-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection
Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only)
High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone models
(the EKT6510-S, EKT6520-S, and EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently.
➤ To make these telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent the cut-off
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps:
1. Remove the four captive screws on the base to the telephone, and remove the base.
2. Locate the room noise switch on the PCB inside the telephone, and push it carefully to the HI
(high) position.
3. Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws.
Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only)
For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic telephones only, the handset receiver volume can be
increased six decibels (dB) by cutting a strap inside the telephone.
➤ To cut the strap
See Figures 11-2 and 11-15 and follow these steps:
1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone, and remove the base.
2. Locate the R-UP strap on the PCB inside the telephone and cut it.
3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in place using the four captive screws.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System
Connection
The Strata DK40i can support up to three DSS consoles
DK424 systems configured with RCTUA can support up to three DSS consoles,
♦
DK424 RCTUB and DK424i B1CAU support up to four DSS consoles
♦
DK424 RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F and DK424i B2CAU/BU, B32CAU/BU, B52CAU/BU up to
eight consoles.
There are two types of consoles: the Digital DSS
(DDSS) and the Electronic (HDSS) console. The
DDSS console can be connected to designated digital
telephone circuits, and the HDSS console can only be
connected to designated PEKU circuits. This section
provides instructions on how to install both types of
consoles.
Station Apparatus
♦
DDSS Console Connections
The DDSS console, which can operate with a digital
telephone (preferably an LCD model), can connect
only to circuit 8 of a PDKU digital telephone circuit.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
1872
11-23
Station Apparatus
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection
Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet, 303
meters) is used for the connection.
To accommodate the DDSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be
terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11). Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB
Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details.
Notes
●
●
DDSS console cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any
length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices.
See the appropriate Installation chapter for secondary protection information and loop limits.
CAUTION!
When installing the DDSS cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are
within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right
(90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices
that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
DDSS Console Configuration
An RDSU will not support a DDSS.
DDSS Programming
Program 03: Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS consoles.
Program 28: Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones.
Program 29: Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles.
HDSS Console
HDSS Console Connections
The HDSS console must be connected to the data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU with
standard two-pair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accommodate the connection, the
instrument end of the HDSS console cable should be terminated in a modular station connector
block (RJ11). Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details.
If using 24 AWG cable, the overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the
HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet (152 meters). The HDSS console can operate with either
an electronic or digital telephone (preferably an LCD model).
CAUTION!
11-24
When installing the HDSS console cable, do not run the cables parallel if they
are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at
right (90°) angles only. Avoid running HDSS console wire pairs near devices
that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Door Phone (MDFB)
HDSS Console Configuration
The following considerations should be made when installing an HDSS console:
♦
A PEKU PCB is required.
♦
Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS console (always circuits 7 and 8).
♦
The PESU does not support the HDSS console.
HDSS Programming
Program 03: Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS
console.
Program 28: Assigns HDSS console to a telephone.
Program 29: Assigns individual button functions for the HDSS console.
Door Phone (MDFB)
This section provides installation instructions for the Door
Phone (MDFB). Door Phones can be installed can also with
Door Phone/Lock Control Units (see following section).
♦
DK14 can have up to 6 door phones
♦
DK40i can have up to nine door phones
♦
DK424 and DK424i can have up to 12 door phones
1873
Lock Control Unit and Door Phone
DDCBs or HDCBs can only connect to slot 11/port 004, slot 12/
port 012, slot 13/port 020 and slot 14/port 028. DDCBs can only
connect to circuit 5 (a PDKU or RDSU PCB and HDCBs can
connect only to circuit 5 of a PEKU or PESU PCB).
DDCBs and HDCBs cannot connect to the RSTU2, PSTU, or
KCDU.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
1874
Station Apparatus
This section provides installation instructions for the Digital
(DDCB) or Electronic (HDCB) Door Phone/Lock Control
Units. Each DDCB or HDCB can support as many as three
MDFBs or two MDFBs and one door lock.
11-25
Station Apparatus
Lock Control Unit and Door Phone
DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling
For DDCB, HDCB, and MDFB wiring/interconnecting details and door lock control installation
procedures, refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. If using 24 AWG cable, the length of
the cable run from the Strata DK to the MDFB (via the DDCB or HDCB) must not exceed 1,000
feet (305 meters).
●
●
DDCB or HDCB cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any
length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices.
See Chapters 1, 3, 5 or 7 for Strata DK14, DK40i, DK424 or DK424i secondary protection
information and loop limits.
DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting
External Power Straps
(DDCB Only)
The DDCB and HDCB is designed to be
mounted on a wall or other vertical
surface.
➤ To mount the units
1493
1. Locate the two mounting holes on
the right-hand side on the DDCB or
HDCB (see Figure 11-18).
KSU
Jack
2. Remove the side cover from the
DDCB or HDCB to expose the two
left-hand mounting holes.
MDFB
Jack
A~C
3. Position the DDCB or HDCB
adjacent to the Base KSU with
regard to wiring needs.
KS
DO
PH OR
ON
E
4. Secure the DDCB or HDCB to the
mounting surface with four one-inch
panhead wood screws.
A
B
Mounting
Screws (4)
C
Note
Figure 11-18
11-26
U
See Table 3-2 regarding external power
requirements.
Door Phone (DDCB or HDCB)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Lock Control Unit and Door Phone
MDFB Wall Mounting
Base
1. Remove the screw from the bottom
of the cover. Detach the cover from
the base and metal frame (see
Figure 11-19).
Metal Frame
2. Position the metal frame and base
to the mounting surface and secure
with two one-inch panhead wood
screws.
3.25
inches
3. Attach cover to the metal frame and
base and secure with the screw
which was removed in Step 1.
MDFB Volume Control Adjustments
1. Remove the screw from the bottom
of the MDFB cover.
2. Detach the cover from the base and
metal frame.
Two Wall
Mounting Holes
Door Phone
1494
Figure 11-19
Door Phone (MDFB)
3. The volume level is changed by a
screw adjustment on the back of the
MDFB. Turn the screw with a flatheaded screwdriver while ringing
the MDFB or while on a call with
it. The volume level will change as
the screw is turned.
Door Phone/Lock Programming
Program 39: Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to digital telephones.
Program 77-1: Assigns DDCBs or HDCB to ports, door phone ringing over external page during
the NIGHT mode, and door lock activation time.
Program 77-2: Busy out unused MDFB positions, identifies which DDCBs support the door lock
option, and sets the door phone to ring one or five times.
Each DDCB/HDCB door lock assignment will reduce the system door phone capacity by
one (see Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for HDCB, DDCB, and PIOU/PIOUS door
lock installation information).
Program 79: Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assignments.
Program *79: Assigns which [DN] flashes on telephones assigned in Program 79.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Note
11-27
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
Cordless Digital Telephones
Toshiba offers two cordless digital telephone models, the
DKT2104-CT and the DKT2004-CT. These cordless digital
telephones bring mobility and productivity to office
telephones. Greater call access cuts down on leaving
messages and playing “telephone tag.” The compact designs
of both the DKT2104-CT and the DKT2004-CT offer easy
portability and mobility within the office complex.
Both the DKT2104-CT and DKT2004-CT feature digital
900 MHz technology and represent state-of-the-art design
and engineering.
The DKT2104-CT and DKT2004-CT telephones operate
from the same digital station port on the PDKU2 as the
DKT2000-series digital telephone which may or may not be
attached. They cannot receive Group Pages or All Call
Pages. They can be attached to a Toshiba DKT2000-series
corded digital telephone or used as a stand-alone.
1876
DKT2004-CT
The DKT2004-CT either attaches to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital telephone or is used
as a stand-alone. It provides many sophisticated Strata features:
♦
900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum technology
♦
LCD provides information such as User Name, DNIS and Caller ID
♦
Four programmable buttons for feature, multiple line or feature access
♦
Headset jack (headset optional)
♦
Handset volume adjustment
♦
Conference/Transfer (&QI7UQ) button
♦
Message Waiting LED
♦
+ROG button
♦
20 Speed Dial number memory (in addition to 40 station speed dials)
Precautions
Before you read anything else, please observe the following:
WARNING! Toshiba does not represent this unit to be waterproof. To reduce the risk of
fire, electrical shock, or damage to the unit, do not expose this unit to rain or
moisture.
DKT2004-CT Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery Warning
11-28
♦
This equipment contains a Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery.
♦
Cadmium is a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer.
♦
The Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery contained in this equipment may explode if
disposed of in a fire.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
♦
Do not short circuit the battery.
♦
Do not charge the Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Battery used in this equipment in any
charger other than the one designed to charge this battery as specified in this Guide. Using
another charger may damage the battery, or cause the battery to explode.
Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium Batteries Must Be Recycled or Disposed of Properly
♦
Residents of Minnesota should contact 1-800-225-PRBA for information concerning
reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries.
♦
Residents outside of Minnesota should contact their local authorities for information
concerning reclamation and disposal of Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium batteries.:
WARNING! To reduce risk of fire, use only Model EXP9580 or EXP9586 batteries.
CAUTION!
To power your Toshiba DKT2004-CT Cordless base unit, use only UL Listed
AC Adapter Model AD-9500 Class 2 Power Supply.
Ratings are:
Input:
120VAC 14W
Output: 0VDC 500mA
Important!
Charge your battery for 10 hours before using your new Cordless Digital Telephone.
DKT2104-CT
The DKT2104-CT works with Strata DK telephone
systems (except Strata DK24/56/96, Release 3) and
provides you with reliability, long life, and
outstanding performance. Some of its features are:
900 MHz Digital Narrow Band technology
♦
30 Simultaneous channels
♦
LCD that wraps using 2 lines, total of 32
characters
♦
Four displayed operation modes, including
Message Waiting (MW)
♦
+ROG, 06* (LCD icon), &QI7UQ, and 0XWH
buttons
♦
Headset jack (headset optional)
♦
Five handset ring modes, including a vibration mode
♦
Simultaneous charging of handset and spare batteries
♦
Wall-mount or desktop unit with wall-mount plate, and belt clip included.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
♦
11-29
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
Cordless Telephone Installation (DKT2004-CT and DKT2104-CT)
Important!
Your telephone system must be programmed for Auto Preference for your TALK
button to work. If there is a shared digital telephone, you receive internal system
dial tone automatically after picking up the handset of your deskset. For example, in
a DK system, Program 32 must have a setting other than “00.” It is best to set Auto
Line Preference to access Intercom dial tone.
➤ To install the cordless telephone
1. Select a location for your cordless digital telephone. Avoid excessive heat or humidity. For
wall mounting, refer to the following section.
2. Place the cordless digital telephone’s base unit on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120VAC
outlet and within reach of the digital telephone line connection to your Strata DK system.
3. Keep the base unit and handset away from sources of electrical noise (motors, fluorescent
lighting, etc.).
Important!
Place the cordless telephone to the right of the DKT. If placed on the left of the DKT,
the cordless antenna will pick up a tone due to its close proximity to the DKT
speaker and electronic parts.
➤ To mount on a wall
1. Select a wall location near a 120VAC outlet and within
reach of the Strata DK digital line connection.
2. Place the wall plate (shown at right) against the wall, and
with a pencil, mark the position of the screws.With a
punch tool, punch “starter” holes in the wall.
3. Align the wall plate and screws on the wall where the
“starter” holes are and tighten down the screws.
4449
4. Ensure that the wall-mount plate is placed on the wall so
that the “feet” are at the bottom when you are looking at
the inside of the plate.
5. Snap the Base Unit onto the plate.
4507
11-30
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
Telephone Cord Connection
There are two telephone line jacks on the back of the base unit of your cordless digital telephone:
“Line In” and “Line Out.” You can connect the cordless digital telephone to both the telephone line
and a Strata DK digital telephone.
➤ To connect cords for use as a stand-alone telephone
➤ Connect the modular jack labeled “Line In” to the telephone wall jack.
...or
➤ To connect cords for use with a desk telephone
1. Unplug the telephone line cord from your desk telephone.
2. Connect this cord to “Line In” of your cordless telephone.
3. Using the two foot modular cord that came with your cordless telephone, connect the jack
labeled “Line Out” to the desk telephone.
Connect and Apply Power to Base Unit
The AC adapter furnished with this telephone may be equipped with a polarized line plug (a plug
having one blade wider than the other). This plug fits into the power outlet only one way. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug still does not fit,
contact your facilities coordinator about replacing the obsolete plug. Do not alter the shape of the
blades on the polarized plug.
➤ To connect the cordless telephone using the AC adapter
1. Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base unit (see Figure 11-20).
Use only the AC adapter supplied with your cordless digital telephone.
1145
CAUTION!
AC Adapter
Modular
Cords
Line Out
to DKT
See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot
PCB Wiring
Station Apparatus
5232
Line in to Digital Telephone Circuit
(DK14 KSU; DK40i Base KSU or
KCDU, or DK40i, DK424, DK424i
PDKU2 or RDSU)
Figure 11-20 Cordless Telephone AC Adapter
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-31
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
Cordless Telephone Connectors
2. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC
wall outlet.
3. Route the power cord where it is not a trip
hazard, and where it will not become chafed and
create a fire or electrical hazard.
4. Wrap the power cord around the notch on the
bottom of the base unit (see Figure 11-21).
5. Check to see that the power LED is on,
indicating the telephone has power.
6. Before using your cordless digital telephone, be
sure to raise the antenna to the vertical position.
1175
Figure 11-21 Line Out Cord
Attach/Remove Belt Clip to Handset (optional)
➤ To attach the belt clip to the handset
1. Snap the tabs of the belt clip into the notches on the sides of the handset.
2. Use the belt clip to attach the handset to your belt or pocket for convenient portability.
➤ To remove the belt clip
1. Pry one tab at a time from the notch on the side of the handset.
2. Carefully lift the belt clip off.
The belt clip is designed to fit snugly onto the handset.
Handset Battery Pack Installation
1. Place a charged battery pack onto the handset so that it slides easily along the ridges.
If your battery is not charged, see “Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack” on Page
11-32.
2. Slide the battery pack up onto the handset until it clicks into place.
You are now ready to configure your cordless digital telephone.
Removing and Charging Your Battery Pack
Before using your new cordless digital telephone, the battery must be charged continuously for 6
to 8 hours.
➤ To remove the handset’s battery pack
1. Press in on the battery pack release latch.
2. Slide the battery pack off the handset.
Note
11-32
You may have to pull hard to slide the battery pack off, when the handset is new.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
➤ To charge the DKT2001-CT handset’s battery pack
1. Place the handset on the base unit.
2. Make sure the CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, check to see that the AC adapter is
plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the base unit.
➤ To charge extra battery packs
1. Position the battery pack so the inner side is facing toward the top of the base unit.
2. Slide the battery pack into the charging compartment until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the BATTERY CHARGE LED lights. If it does not light, make sure the AC adapter
is plugged in and that the battery pack is seated into the charger.
Note
Charge the standard 400 mAh battery pack without interruption for 6-8 hours. Charge the
optional 730 mAh extended battery pack without interruption for 8-10 hours.
➤ To charge the DKT2104-CT handset’s battery pack
Important!
Before using your handset, the battery must be continuously charged for 10 hours.
1. Place the handset in the Charger Unit (shown at
right).
2. Ensure that charge 1 LED lights. If it does not,
make sure that the AC adapter is plugged in and
that the handset is making good contact with the
Charger Unit.
NAL
RY TERMI FIRE
BATTE
FROM
THE
AWAY
RY
SHORT
NOT
RY PACK THE BATTE
● DO
BATTE
RGE
THE
TO RECHA
● KEEP
USE
MBER
EVERY
AFTER
PACK
RGERECHA
ACID
RY.
D LEADLE BATTE
SEALE
PILLAB OR
NONS
LED
ABLE
RLY.
BE RECYC
MUST
OF PROPE
SED
DISPO
LTD.
RY CO.,
GE BATTE
STORA
JAPAN
IN JAPAN
MADE
Pb
● REME
:
CAUTION
BAT
GEABLE
RECHARBT-9000
EL
Ah
MOD
500m
DK 4V,
3. Slide the spare battery in the rear slot of the
Charger Unit (shown at right) until it clicks into
place.
TERY
4. Make sure that the top (marked with plus and
minus signs) faces down toward the bottom of
the Charger Unit.
5. Ensure that charge 2 LED lights. If it does not,
make sure that the AC adapter is plugged in and
that the handset is making good contact with the
Charger Unit.
Charging Extra Battery Packs
The base unit of your cordless digital telephone is equipped with a battery charger for charging an
extra battery pack. This compartment has a latch that keeps the battery pack in place during
charging.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
4479
11-33
Station Apparatus
Cordless Digital Telephones
Tips on Extending Battery Pack Life
All rechargeable nickel cadmium batteries can develop a “memory” (reduced charge capacity)
caused by repeated charge and discharge cycles. Batteries that have developed this effect do not
operate to their fullest capacity.
➤ To avoid memory effect
➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged before recharging. For
example, use the handset off the base all day. Only replace the handset on the base at night
after a full day of use. Do not “top off” the charge after using the battery for a short time.
➤ To erase memory effect
➤ Operate the unit until the battery pack is completely discharged, then recharge it fully. Repeat
this process at least three times.
LCD Low Battery Indicator
When the battery pack in the handset is low and needs to be charged you see this message on the
display and the handset beeps. Table 11-3 shows symptoms.
Table 11-3
Low Battery Symptoms
On a Call...
In Standby Mode...
Only the 7$/. key operates.
None of the keys operate.
Handset beeps once every three seconds
Handset beeps once.
Complete your call as quickly as possible
Cannot make call.
Replace battery pack.
Replace battery pack before making a call.
➤ To restore your battery capacity
➤ Return the handset to the base unit for charging or replace the handset battery pack with
another charged one.
11-34
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
Digital Add-on Module Installation
Digital Add-on Module Installation
Install one or two DADM 2020s to a 2000-series digital telephone (only).
♦
DK14 supports up to 8 DADMs
♦
DK40i supports up to 12 DADMs
The number of DADMs supported by the DK424 depends on the common control PCB:
♦
RCTUA supports 12 DADMs
♦
RCTUB and B1CAU supports 40 DADMs
♦
RCTUC/D B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU supports 120 DADMs
♦
RCTUE/F and B5CAU/BU support 200
DADMs
The DADM provides DSS buttons, speed dial
buttons and CO line buttons.
Notes
♦
See the appropriate system Installation
Chapter for loop length and secondary
protection requirements.
♦
DADMs cannot be installed on telephones that
have RPCI-DI on OCA/DVSU installed.
➤ To install DADMs
1870
See Figure 11-22 and follow these steps:
1. Loosen the four captive screws on the 2000series digital telephone base and remove the
base.
2. Remove the base handset hanger.
3. Loosen two captive screws on DADM and remove bases.
4. Put the DADM supplied cable through the telephone and DADM bases.
6. Install base of DADM and telephone– tuck DADM cable into DADM and telephone base, as
necessary, for proper length.
7. Secure DADM to telephone base with DADM connecting plate (using four screws).
8. If required to achieve maximum distance, install 2-pair house cable (or external power) and 2pair modular cord, supplied with DADM. (See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.)
Station Apparatus
5. Connect DADM cable connectors to P1 of DADM and P1 of DKT2000 telephone.
9. If a second DADM should be installed, connect P1 of the second DADM to P2 of the first
DADM with the DADM connecting cable.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-35
Station Apparatus
Digital Add-on Module Installation
(Smaller Connector)
4-Screws
P1
P 2 (No
Connection)
4-Screws
1
1
10
Second DADM
12
DADM Connection
Plate (provided
with DADM)
DADM Base
DADM Cable
(Supplied with DADM)
Remove Handset
Hanger
Black Wire to Pin 1
First DADM
P1
P2
1
10
Telephone
Base
1
Black Wire
to Pin 1
12
1
(Larger Connector)
DIU & ADM
P1 of Bottom PCB
2000-Series
Digital Telephone
DADM2020
DADM2020
2000-Series DKT
View of Bottom
1495
Figure 11-22 Digital Add-On-Module
ADM Programming
ADMs are programmed in Program *29.
Important!
To activate the ADM, Program *29 must be entered for each telephone port
equipped with an DADM.
See the Strata DK programming record sheets in the Strata DK Programming Manual for button
defaults.
11-36
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console
The PC attendant console (DK-PCATT) requires a customer-supplied, IBM-compatible PC. A
VGA or SVGA monitor and a COM port dedicated to the PC attendant console is required.
Toshiba recommends the following for the PC attendant console: Pentium processor/100 MHz, 16
MB RAM, 1.44 MB floppy drive, 200 MB hard drive, and a mouse. A tower that sits on the floor
is provides better monitor visibility (as opposed to a desktop model). Microsoft® Windows® 95
software must be resident on the PC. Windows 3.1 will work, but Windows 95 is recommended.
Important!
After the PC attendant console is installed in Windows 95, you can find your old
program groups by clicking the Start button (formally Program Manager) and then
selecting Programs. Your groups appear as folders. To manage files in Windows 95,
click the Start button, select Programs, and then click Windows Explorer (formally
File Manager). Your directories appear as folders.
See Table 11-4 below for Attendant Console Capacities.
Table 11-4
Attendant Console Capacities
Processor PCB
Number of Attendant
Consoles Supported
RCTUB2, RCTUBA/BB, or B1CU
2
RCTUC1/D2, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE2/F3,
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU, or B5CAU/BU
4
RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1
0
Hardware Installation
The RATU PCB can support up to four Attendant Consoles in any combination. (See “RATU
Installation” on Page 9-26.)
Notes
●
The maximum distance from the Strata DK to either attendant console is 1000 ft. (303 m).
●
Attendant console cable runs must not have the following:
●
Cable splits (single or double)
●
Cable bridges (of any length)
●
High resistance or faulty cable splices
See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for attendant console wiring.
See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation or Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation for loop length and
secondary protection requirements.
CAUTION!
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
●
●
When installing the PC or conventional attendant console cable, do not run the
cables parallel to AC power if they are within three feet of an AC line. AC
power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid
running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as
neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
11-37
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
➤ To install the PC attendant console
See Figure 11-23 and follow these steps:
1. Connect the RATI to the PC COM port a with a standard RS-232 cable.
2. Use one-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. If
you need to use a long cable, use two-pair for more power.
3. Plug in the handset cradle to the RJ45-jack.
4. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the handset base.
5. After programming the Strata DK system, install the PC attendant console software and
complete the Telephony Setup per the instructions on “PC Attendant Console Software
Installation” on Page 11-40.
POW
DTR
DSR
RATI (Front View)
Carbon Jumper
RATI PCB
DB9-FEMALE
(To PC COM Port Cable)
RJ11-JACK
(To RATU Modular Cord)
Headset Jumper
RJ45-JACK
(To RATHC Modular Cord)
REC OUT
(To Tape Recorder "RECORD" Input)
AUX IN
(Not Used)
14
97
Bottom Panel
Figure 11-23 RATI Assembly/Disassembly
Notes
●
Do not cut HEADSET jumper unless you are connecting two headsets.
●
Cut CARBON jumpers if a carbon handset is connected to the RATHC handset cradle.
●
11-38
“REC OUT” can be used to monitor or record the attendant console talkpath. Both the
attendant and connected party will be monitored or recorded. The record level output from the
attendant handset or headset is approximately 3 dB below the connected party record level.
Use a 1/8” mini audio jack.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
●
●
“AUX IN” can be used to send audio to the attendant and connected party. The audio level to
the attendant is approximately 10 dB below the audio level sent to the connected party. Audio
sent to the outside party is limited to–15 dBv (CO Tip/Ring). Use a 1/8” mini audio jack.
See Figures 10-5 and 10-18 in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RATI cable wiring
information.
PC Attendant Console Programming
Program 03: Code 51 assigns the RATU PCB attendant console cabinet slot number.
Important!
The RATU PCB takes up four station ports in software; each attendant console will
be assigned one of the ports in consecutive order. Toshiba recommends installing the
RATU PCB in the next highest slot number following the last station PCB installed–
do not skip slots. The first port number will be the next consecutive port number
following the last station port installed.
Program 15: If the attendant console is used to set-up trunk-to-trunk (two CO-line or tandem)
connections with loop start lines, set Program 15-5 appropriately; if the CO sends the AR-Hold
signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Detect. If the CO does not send the AR signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to
Ignore. Loop start trunk-to-trunk calls remain on attendant hold loops only if AR-Ignore is set.
Program 58
♦
58-1: Sets the attendant console overflow time for each console.
♦
58-2: Sets the console display for EL or CRT (EGA) and enables or disables console call
waiting tone for each console. (Not used for the PC attendant console).
♦
58-4: Sets the console Answer key priority for each console.
♦
58-5: Sets the console overflow destination for each console.
Program 59: Assigns attendant console Flexible Buttons (Keys) for each console.
Attendant Console Load Share Programming
Program 81~89: Assigns CO lines (loop, ground, and DID) to share the incoming call load
between consoles. (Tie lines load share on Dial “0” calls only, without the use of Programs 81~89.)
All incoming CO lines (including DID lines) to be distributed between two or more Attendant
Consoles should be assigned to ring each console in Programs 81~89.
Note
Delay ring assignments do not apply to DID lines.
Programs 71 and 72: Can be used to provide an alternative assignment of DID calls using Program
*09. Program 71 assigns the dialed number to ring at different locations during each Night Mode
(Day, Day2, Night). DNIS tags can be added for personalized identification of calls. Program 72
provides external forwarding of calls listed in Program 71.
Station Apparatus
Program *09: Assigns the user company’s main listed [DN] (last four digits) to the attendant
console if DID lines should ring the console. If the DID lines are assigned to ring multiple
attendant console ports in Programs 81~89, DID calls will be distributed between the consoles.
Only one console (any one) should be assigned with the main listed [DN] in Program *09.
Program *17: Assigns each CO line to an attendant console as the DID line intercept position as
required. (Intercept calls do not load share.)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-39
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Attendant Console Load Share Programming Example
The user’s company DID line [DN] is 583-3700; this number and other loop start lines should ring
in a load sharing manner to each of the Company’s two Attendant Consoles in the Day, Day 2, and
Night modes.
Attendant consoles one and two are connected to RATU ports 024 and 025 respectively and should
load share 583-3700 calls and other CO line calls. Program the DK as shown below:
♦
In Programs 81, 84, and 87, assign all CO and DID lines to ring ports 024 and 025.
♦
In Program *81, *84 and *87, assign all CO lines to flash the [PDN] of port 024.
♦
In Program *09 or 71, assign digits 3700 to port 024, and assign any other selected DID
extension number(s) to port 025–note that when the DID extension number assigned to either
console is dialed, calls will load share between consoles.
PC Attendant Console Software Installation
Step 1: Install the Software
The PC attendant console requires the installation of software on an IBM-compatible PC which
has been connected to the RATI. See “To install the PC attendant console” on Page 11-38.
➤ To install the software
1. Turn on the PC and open the Windows Program.
2. Insert Diskette #1 in drive A (or B).
3. Run A:\setup (or B:\setup) from Windows. The installation process will proceed and request
you to remove Diskette #1 and insert Diskette #2 as the program is decompressed and
installed.
A new program group will be added to your Windows Program Manager for the PC Attendant.
This will include three icons for running the PC Attendant, PCATT BACKUP, and TELEPHONY
SETUP (see screen below).
Step 2: Add the Driver
Before the PC attendant console can be used, the driver for the interface to the RATI must be
installed and Telephony Setup must be established. The following steps may be skipped if this
driver was previously installed.
1. Click the Telephony Setup
Icon or respond to the “Go
to Telephony Setup box”
at the end of the
installation process.
1021
11-40
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
2. From the Telephony
dialog box, click the
Driver Setup... button.
1022
3. In the Telephony Drivers
dialog box, if “ATT Telephone
Telephony SP” is shown in the
driver list, go to Telephony Setup
below. Otherwise, click the Add
button to display the Add Dialog
screen.
1023
4. From the Add Drivers dialog box,
if “ATT Telephone Telephony SP”
is in the list, then select it (it should
be highlighted) and press Add.
1403
Step 3: Set Up the Telephony Driver
1. From the Telephony Drivers dialog box, click the Setup button.
2. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration dialog box, set the COM port used for the RATI
interface (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
5. If “ATT Telephone Telephony SP” is not listed, press Add and type
c:\windows\system\att.tsp in the edit box. Click OK to return, select it in the list and
press Add.
11-41
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
3. Choose the processor type for the
connected DK424 system (RCTUB
or RCTUC/D).
4. Select the DK software version of
the system (R2, R3 or higher).
5. Enter emergency numbers as
programmed in Program 44-91~93
of the DK424.
6. Click the Default Configuration
button. This will set all the
parameters to match the default
values of the DK424.
Important!
It is extremely important
to match the parameters
set in the DK424 with
those in the Telephony
Setup or the PC attendant console will not know how to operate properly. Before
Step 7, go through each of the following telephony setup programs. ALL changes in
these following screens must match the corresponding values in the programming of
the DK424.
1024
7. The Default Configuration button will close the DK424 PC Attendant Configuration screen.
To make changes, select Setup again, then continue.
Default Key Assignments
From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, the Configure Keys button takes you to the DK
PC Attendant Key Configuration screen.The default key assignments are defined for R2 and R3.
These key assignments must match Program 59 of the DK. The Default Config button on this
screen sets the default keys only, whereas the Default Config button on the previous screen sets the
system database defaults.
➤ To assign PC Attendant keys
1. From the PC Attendant
Configuration dialog box, select
the key that you want to change.
The Key Type drop-down box
shows a list of key names that can
be selected for that button. The
three-digit program codes are
shown in front of the button for
convenient programming. If the
programming telephone is next to
the PC attendant console, you can
look at the codes on the PC
Attendant screen while you
program.
1026
2. Click OK after making your
selections.
11-42
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Access Codes
Access Codes are used by the DK424 for dialing features. The access codes (dialing plan) must
match to allow the PC Attendant to dial the correct code to activate certain features. This is
normally left at default, but if Program 05 is modified, corresponding changes are needed here. If
no changes were made to Program 05, skip these steps.
➤ To change access codes to match Program 05
1. From the DK424 PC Attendant
Configuration screen, click the
Access Code button.
2. In the Access Code dialog box,
click OK after making your
selections.
1025
Class of Service
The Class of Service settings should
reflect the call states and features
which are anticipated to be used the
most often.
1. From the DK424 PC Attendant
Configuration screen, click the
Class of Service button.
2. In the Class of Service dialog box,
click OK.
1028
DNIS Trunks
To allow the DNIS feature to work properly, the PC attendant console needs to know whether
trunk ports are being used for DNIS number translation or for CO line circuits. This assignment
must follow Program 17 LED 05 in the DK424. (LED ON requires the line to be marked as
DNIS.)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
These contain two items from
Program 10 for setting the
operation for Tone First or Voice
First when calling a [DN] on the
system and for setting the system to
support two or three Night Transfer
modes. The Class of Service for the
port assigned to the PC attendant
console must match Program 30 of
the DK424.
11-43
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
➤ To set DNIS trunk identification
1. From the DK PC Attendant
Configuration screen, click the
DNIS button.
2. From the Class/ANI DNIS Trunk
Assignment dialog box, click OK
when done.
1029
➤ To exit Telephony Drivers and Telephony Setup
1. From the DK PC Attendant Configuration screen, click Close to exit the Telephony Drivers
box.
2. Click Close again to exit the Telephony Setup box.
PC Attendant Setup
After Telephony Setup has been completed, then a series of items needs to be configured within
the main program. System Settings in the main program can be easily changed since they do not
require a corresponding change in the DK424 in order to function. Most of these items are found
under the Main Menu heading of Setup.
➤ To access System Settings
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
2. Click OK or enter a password.
Initially, you can click OK, without
entering a password. Store a password
if you need to ensure that these settings
cannot be changed without
authorization. Once a password is
entered, you must enter that password
to proceed.
1030
System Settings
Once the password screen is entered,
the System Settings menu is presented.
The two menu items, System Code
Settings and Change Station User
Name, allow the Attendant to change
System Administration settings in the
DK424. Within System Settings, the
Attendant can customize the labels for
only three menu items: Door Phone,
Door Unlock, and Paging.
The following sections cover the main
settings needed to make the console
work.
11-44
1031
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Console Settings
The first selection is Console Settings.
This screen defines the PC attendant
console main operating features,
including:
♦
Auto Hold and Auto Dialing
♦
Account code length expected by
the DK424
♦
Pilot number for Voice Mail
♦
Prefix digits needed to access a
mailbox for message taking
♦
Voice Mail ID codes for message
answering
♦
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
1032
More details about these settings can be
found in the Strata DK PC Attendant
Console User Guide.
Line Settings
Each line and line group within the system can be renamed to allow for easy identification. For
example, a private line for John Smith can be marked “John’s Pvt Line”. These identifiers are
unique to the PC attendant console.
In the Lines dialog box, you can change the names that appear in the Active Call window. The
Active Call window names are different from the names that appear in the PC attendant console
selection windows.
The Attendant can also define a default line or line group to make dialing more efficient. The
default line or line group can be used with the Directory to identify a Tie line group for easy
transfer of calls. (See “Setting up the Directory” on Page 11-48 later in this section).
➤ To change CO line and names
Station Apparatus
1. From the menu bar, select Setup,
Settings... and OK to access the
System Settings dialog box. Then
select Default Line Settings.
2. From the Lines dialog box,
highlight the Line or Line Group to
be changed.
3. Select the corresponding edit box
and enter a new name.
1033
4. Repeat for all lines or line groups
that change names.
User Buttons
The user buttons of the PC attendant
console can be customized with features used most often by the Attendant. User buttons can be set
to immediately invoke a feature or to open a dialog box associated with the feature. Each button
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-45
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
can be programmed with Speed Dial or Feature buttons. (See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console
User Guide for instructions on clearing buttons.)
➤ To change user buttons
1. From the System Settings dialog
box, select User Buttons.
2. From the User Buttons dialog,
select the button to be changed.
3. Select either Autodial or Feature to
change the button.
4. Enter a feature code for the list by
selecting from the pull down list or
selecting the Digits box and
entering a number.
1034
5. Select Label to change, if
necessary.
6. Select the next button to change
and repeat the process.
7. Select the OK button when all
changes have been made.
Answer Prompts
Answer Prompts can be entered so that when new calls are presented and answered by the
Attendant, the prompts will appear in the information window. Any currently recorded prompts are
listed in the Answer Prompts box (shown below) and two selections on the left allow linking the
prompts to a DNIS tag or CO line.
Note
DNIS applies to R3 and up only.
The DK424 identifies calls to the Attendant position by using the default CO line indication. It can
also attach a tag that was recorded in Program 71 for each DNIS number translated by the system.
When lines are marked as DNIS in the Telephony Setup (see “PC Attendant Console Software
Installation” on Page 11-40), the PC attendant console uses the DNIS tag to select the prompt
instead of the line number. The button marked DNIS Text... is used to record the DNIS Tags which
should match those listed in Program 71-5.
Toshiba recommends entering DNIS tags when they are programmed into the DK system. This
enables the Attendant or System Administrator to create prompts as needed. Even if some DNIS
lines are not scheduled to ring at the console, the calls to be forwarded to the Attendant and
answers prompts may be used later.
The Answer Prompts can have approximately 110 characters. The edit window, shown below, is
the same size as the window on the main screen in order to view the message as it will display.
11-46
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
➤ To write an Answer Prompt
1. From the System Settings dialog
box, select Answer Prompt.
1035
2. From the Answer Prompt dialog,
select the Prompts...button.
3. Select the New button.
4. Type in a new prompt message in
the Prompt box.
5. Select the New button again to
enter another prompt or OK to save
those entered.
1036
Station Apparatus
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-47
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
➤ To write a DNIS Answer Prompt
1. From the System Settings dialog
box, select Answer Prompt.
2. Select the DNIS Text... button.
3. From the DNIS Text dialog box,
select the Add button.
4. Type in the Name Tag as entered in
Strata DK System system
programming.
5. Select the Add button to enter
another prompt or the OK button to
save those entered.
1037
➤ To link a CO line or DNIS tag with an Answer Prompt
1. Click on a line or DNIS tag.
2. Highlight the Prompt.
3. Press OK.
➤ To remove an Answer Prompt from a CO or DNIS line tags
➤ Click to remove the highlight.
See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on other Answer Prompt
options.
Setting up the Directory
The directory is a central part of the PC
attendant console. Information in the
directory is used for the following:
♦
Auto Dial
♦
Auto Transfer
♦
Transfers to Voice Mail
♦
Recording an individual’s status
♦
Recording messages for people
without phones or for transferring
to Voice Mail
♦
Recording individual’s work departments so that when a caller asks for someone in “Sales,” a
list of department members will appear
1038
This is also a place to store information about different individuals and how they may be reached,
for example, pagers, home office, car phones, fax, etc. It can also be used to indicate location,
work schedule and supervisors of people if needed.
Multiple entries of the same information is allowed.
For example, two people may share the same [DN]. A call to John Smith will ring station 204 and
if Sandy Johnson has the same [DN], her telephone will also ring. The same person may be entered
twice. For example, John Brady may be entered with [DN] 204 and with a [PhDN] 504.
11-48
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
When there are multiple entries, Auto Dial (includes Auto Transfer) is disabled. In the first
example, where two people shared the same [DN], the system would pause if the [DN] is entered.
At this point, the Attendant can enter a name and as long as there are no name conflicts, the
console will now Auto Transfer. When the system pauses, other calls can still be handled by Auto
Dial if there are no conflicts.
It is important to enter names in the same format, otherwise, the directory search function will not
work and the individual will have to be selected manually. In other words, avoid entering first
names for some people and first and last names for others. For example, if I created an entry for
Pat L and another for Pat Long, the first entry would never be selected because the console will
look for a match to Pat Long. If an “o” is entered after the “L”, the console will select Pat Long.
Avoid using abbreviations in the initial entry.
Use the “Dept” field for grouping people who need to be reached by function. Directory entries
with this field left blank will not show in the “Dept Select” feature. Assigning a consistent list
allows for all people within a group to show on the list together, offering the Attendant a method to
choose the person that can best serve the caller.
See the Strata DK PC Attendant Console User Guide for instructions on adding entries into the
Directory.
Establishing the Speed Dial List
The Speed Dialing list must be established before the list will show in the Dialing window. This
can be done in one of two ways.
Method 1
With the first method, you transfer a Speed Dial list that was previously entered into the DK
system to the PC attendant console. Once you have completed the following procedure, the PC
attendant console will store the numbers to match those stored in the system.Then, when the
Attendant uses this Speed Dial list, the PC attendant console dials the code for speed dial and the
DK system uses the number it has in memory.
➤ To transfer the DK Speed Dial list to the PC attendant console
1. If the Speed Dial list has been
entered into the DK system, then
select each speed dial entry.
2. Press the Modify button.
Note
Station Apparatus
3. (optional) Enter a name for the
number.
This name is stored in the PC
attendant console only and is
not downloaded into the DK
system Speed Dial Memo.
Method 2
1039
With Method 2, you enter a list of
Speed Dial names and numbers from
the console. The entered list will
automatically re-sort and display alphabetically by name. A second sort is performed by dialed
number which also searches for names that are the same.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-49
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Do not enter extra spaces after either the first or last names and do not put the full name in only
one box. The system searches the names by putting together the First and Last name by adding a
space between the first and last.
The system also adds a comma and space after the last and before the first. The Attendant can type
names using either first or last name which will be automatically dialed if there is a matching
name, but the name must match exactly, including any spaces and commas.
[DNs] are treated as a separate match, thus calls proceed with either a [DN] or name match.
➤ To enter Speed Dial numbers
1. Enter each number and name from the console.
2. Click the Save button.
Using LCD Messaging
LCD Messaging uses the system messages and the personal messages (if enabled).
➤ To display the messages currently programmed in the DK system
1. Select each message number and press the Retrieve Msg button.
2. Press the Modify or Save button.
3. Press Close.
See the Strata DK PC Attendant
Console User Guide for more
instructions on the messaging features.
1040
Backup/Restore Configuration
After all the data parameters are entered, the system should be backed up to a floppy diskette for
restoring the operation later if needed. This backup diskette can be used to set up additional PC
Attendant Consoles to operate with the same directory and settings as the first. This saves time
when creating additional consoles and ensures that the buttons and operation of one console
matches the next.
11-50
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
➤ To backup or restore PC attendant console setup data
1. Double-click on the PCATT
BACKUP icon.
1021
2. From the PC Attendant Backup and
Restore dialog box, select Backup
or Restore.
3. Enter the appropriate directories.
4. Select the Start Backup or Close
buttons.
Windows Control Panel
Several items within Windows have an
effect on the operation of the PC
Attendant console. These controls are
within the Main Program Group under
the topic of Control Panel.
1041
Choose Color Dialog Box
Windows allows the screen to use a variety of colors. PC Attendant console uses the color settings
to determine the highlight, title bar and text color of many parts of the program. Choose a color
scheme that provides the type of contrast best suited to the user.
Action
The screen will show each window currently open,
including the Program Manager.
2. From the Main Program
Group, choose Control
Panel.
3. From the Control Panel,
choose Colors.
4. Select a color setting from
the list.
Station Apparatus
1. Switch to Program
Manager (Alt+Tab).
Description
A dialog box showing the current color settings and
example colors is shown. Using the mouse or Arrow keys,
the color settings can be viewed and changed.
5. Press the OK button when
done.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
11-51
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Choose Desktop Dialog Box
The Desktop defines whether or not the Alt+Tab key combination can be used to switch between
open applications on the desktop. The Desktop screen controls: cursor blink rate, whether a screen
saver is used, and the timer to invoke the screen saver. Toshiba recommends using a screen saver
since this protects the video monitor. When calls come into the PC Attendant when the screen
saver is displayed, ringing is heard, but the screen saver remains on until the user takes an action.
“Activate on Incoming” does not affect the screen saver.
Action
1. Switch to Program
Manager (Alt+Tab).
Description
The screen will show each window currently open,
including the Program Manager.
2. From the Main Program
Group, choose Control
Panel.
3. From the Control Panel,
choose Desktop.
4. Look at Applications and
make certain that “Fast
Alt+Tab” operation is
enabled. And choose a
screen saver pattern and
delay time for the pattern
to employed.
A number of settings are possible within the desktop
control. Only the “Fast Alt+Tab” operation and screen
saver patterns are used with the PC Attendant.
5. Press the OK button.
Choose Keyboard Dialog Box
Two controls can be used on the keyboard, the first is the delay needed to hold a key down before
the character will repeat and the second is the speed of repetition once the key repeats.
Action
1. Switch to Program
Manager (Alt+Tab).
Description
The screen will show each window currently open,
including the Program Manager.
2. From the Main Program
Group, choose Control
Panel.
3. From the Control Panel,
choose Keyboard.
11-52
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
PC Attendant Console
Action
4. Choose the Delay before
Repeat and Repeat Rate
speed desired.
Description
The slide controls offer two speed settings. This affects the
rate of change the Vol Up/Vol Dn keys respond to
when a key is held down to adjust the volume. The slower
the repetition, the easier it is to distinguish level change.
This rate also affects scroll rate for the Arrow keys used in
the directory and other lists. Toshiba recommends starting
at mid-points of each setting before making adjustments.
5. Press the OK button when
done.
Choose Mouse Dialog Box
Under the title Mouse, two settings affect the speed of the mouse and the speed of the double click
needed to make a selection. If you are currently using a mouse, these settings should be
appropriate and need not be changed. If the mouse is new to you, Toshiba recommends each
setting to be a slower speed for easier operation. Once you gain experience with the mouse, you
can use faster settings.
Action
1. Switch to Program
Manager (Alt+Tab).
Description
The screen will show each window currently open,
including the Program Manager.
2. From the Main Program
Group, choose Control
Panel.
3. From the Control Panel,
choose Mouse.
4. Choose the Tracking and
Double Click speed
desired.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Station Apparatus
5. Press the OK button when
done.
Two speed settings are possible using a slide control.
Slower operation is for beginning users while faster
tracking and double click speeds are for experienced users.
The control buttons can also be changed to allow for lefthanded users of the mouse.
11-53
Station Apparatus
Conventional Attendant Console
Conventional Attendant Console
A Strata DK system configured with RCTUB2 or RCTUBA/BB can support two Attendant
Consoles, and systems with RCTUC1/D2 or RCTUC3/D3 can support four Attendant Consoles.
The RCTUA1, RCTUA3, RCTUB1, or RCTUC/D1 do not support Attendant Consoles.
PC and conventional Attendant Consoles require RCTUB2 or RCTUC/D2 R 2 processors or
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3 R3 processors.
The conventional attendant console can be configured with a Toshiba-supplied base (ATT BASE1) and an Electroluminescent (EL) or EGA Color CRT.
Installation
Refer to “Hardware Installation” on Page 11-37 and the following steps.
➤ To install the conventional attendant console
1. Plug in the EL or CRT display to the base with a nine-pin cable, which is supplied with the
display.
2. Plug in the EL or CRT display to a commercial three-prong AC 117V outlet.
3. Use two-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location.
4. Plug in the handset to the base RJ45-jack (see Figure 11-23).
5. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the base.
Conventional Attendant Console Programming
Follow the same programming instructions provided for the PC attendant console. See “PC
Attendant Console Programming” on Page 11-39. Software Installation and Windows instructions
do not apply to the conventional console.
11-54
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
12
This chapter provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata DK
Systems. Information in this chapter applies to all systems, unless stated otherwise in text.
Instructions include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring
requirements, and programming considerations. Peripheral equipment is connected to system
PCBs. See Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs installation and configuration information and the
appropriate installation section.
Power Failure Options
In the event of a power failure, Strata DK uses these options:
Reserve Power
For information on the Reserve Power Option, see the appropriate installation chapter.
DK14/DK40i Single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer
DK14 and DK40i have a built-in single-line Power Failure Emergency Transfer (requires loop
start lines). See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation and Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for detailed
information.
DK40i/DK424 Power Failure Transfer Unit
An optional Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) can be installed that automatically connects up to
eight selected CO lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure.
The DPFT enables normal operation of the selected CO lines and standard telephones when the
system is in service. When power is restored, each telephone is independently reconnected to
system standard telephone circuit ports after it is finished with its direct CO line call. The DPFT is
normally installed on the MDF.
Figure 12-1 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-1
Peripheral Installation
Power Failure Options
To RSTU/PSTU-T1
RDSU/RSTS
J2-27
J2-26
To RSTU/PSTU-R1
RDSU/RSTS
J2-2
J2-1
To TEL-T1
To TEL-R1
Telephone Current
Detector
To RCOU/PCOU-T1
To RCOU/PCOU-R1
J1-27
J1-26
J1-2
J1-1
To CO-T1
To CO-R1
J1-50
DG (Input)
Relay
RSTU or PSTU
Control
-24V (Input)
J1-25
1498
Notes
•
•
Figure 12-1
Representation of first of eight circuits.
Conditions shown with AC power (-24VDC) off.
DPFT Circuit Diagram
Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation
1. Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF.
Note
See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring, DPFT/MDF interconnecting tables.
2. Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for DPFT connector J1, male for
DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to two 66-type quick-connect blocks.
3. Connect the CO lines selected for emergency use to the DPFT J1-block “CO-TIP” and “CORING” terminals.
4. Connect the RCOU, RCOS (or PCOU) circuits related to the emergency CO lines to the DPFT
J1-block “RCOU-TIP” and “RCOU-RING” terminals.
5. Connect the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2-block
“TEL-TIP” and “TEL-RING” terminals.
12-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
6. Connect the RSTU, RDSU/RSTS or PSTU standard telephone circuits related to the
emergency standard telephones to DPFT J2-block “PSTU/ RSTU-TIP” and “PSTU/RSTURING” terminals.
7. Connect the DPFT to the RDSU/RSTU/PSTU DG and -24V terminals (See Chapter 10 –
Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RSTU/PSTU and RCOU/PCOU wiring/interconnecting
details). The -24V (Pin 25) and DG (Pin 50) ground terminals are available on the KSTU2,
RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU only, not on the PESU.
➤ To test the operation of the DPFT
1. Turn the system power switch Off.
2. Verify that CO dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT.
3. Call back to each telephone using an outside line.
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM)
Options
Strata DK systems provide an MOH option for CO, E&M Tie and DID lines, as well as telephones
connected to the system. A variety of BGM options are also provided. (See Figure 12-2.)
MOH Option
The DK14 and DK40i KSU or DK424 and DK424i processor PCBs supports an external,
customer-provided music source – such as a tuner, compact disc player, digital music source,
cassette downloader digital source or tape player – for MOH. The DK14 KSU, DK40i Base KSU,
PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU each has a relay contact on it that can be configured to automatically
turn the source on when a CO line or station is placed on hold. MOH source and MOH relay
contact specifications are as follows:
BGM or MOH Source Specifications
♦
Input Impedance: 600 ohms or 8 ohms
♦
Input Voltage (recommended levels)
Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)
Relay Contact Specifications
♦
Voltage: 24VDC maximum
♦
Current: 1 amp maximum
Important!
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar
organization, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature
of this telecommunications system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
12-3
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
➤ To install the MOH option
1. Connect the external music source to the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 RCTU, RCA jack
(see Figure 12-1).
2. Rotate the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424, DK424i processor PCB’s volume control (VR1)
to adjust MOH volume: clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise decreases volume.
Listen to the CO line on-hold when setting MOH to the proper volume.
3. If MOH relay control is required, access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to On to configure the
MOH/Night Transfer Control relay for the MOH function. This feature requires the
installation of a DK14 KSU, DK40i KSU, or PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB.
4. If using the MOH control feature with a PIOU or PEPU, set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug P11
to the MAKE or BREAK position as required:
♦
MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated.
♦
BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is
activated.
...or
If using the MOH control feature with a PIOUS, solder PIOUS jumper W2 to the MAKE or
BREAK position as required:
♦
MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is in
the hold condition.
♦
BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is
in the hold condition.
5. MOH (CO line or intercom hold) is applied from the RCTU through the KSU’s backplane to
DID lines, Tie lines, CO lines, electronic, digital, and standard telephones on hold.
6. MOH is also applied through the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424, DK424i processor PCB’s
Page/BGM control to provide BGM to electronic/digital telephone speakers and external page.
12-4
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
See MDF Tip & Ring
Wiring Diagrams (Chapter 8)
Twisted Pair
24 AWG.
DK14/DK40i KSU or RCTU
VR1
MOH/BGM
Volume Control
Music
MOH RCA
Jack
On/Off
Control
(24 Volt
Max)
CO Line and
Station PCBs
Music-OnHold
Max.
Music-OnHold
Source1
DID Lines
TIE Lines
Backplane
Stations
Page or
Background
Music
Page/BGM
Control
Digital and
Electronic
Telephone
Speakers
Station PCBs
DK14/DK40i Base KSU
600Ω
Note
BGM or MOH Source Specifications:
• Input Impedance: 600W OR 8W
• Input Voltage:
Recommended Levels,
Min. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)
CO Lines (Loop)
CO Lines (GND)
600Ω
RCA
Jack
Digital and
Electronic Telephone
BGM Dial Code
#481-ON
#480-OFF OR Tel Set Music (BGM)
MOH over BGM
Port 000 Only:
#491-ON, #490-OFF
NHT/NHR,
if Using PIOUS
PIOU/PEPU/PIOUS
SP0
600Ω
SW4
SP1
Backplane
( ) PIN No.s of PIOU/PEPU
Amphenol Connector
MOH/NT
Relay Contact
Jumper Plug
(Make or Break)
Optional
External Page/
BGM Outputs
(38) HESB or
Amplifier
(13)
&
Speaker
3 Watt
amp.
(50)
Speaker
(25)
Volume
VR1
(See Note)
SW4:
Optional Page Output
External BGM Dial
Switch 600Ω OR
Code from
(9) 3-Watt 8Ω.
Electronic & Digital
Telephones
MOH or
B
Port 000 Only:
Night Transfer
#491-ON
(34)
Control
#490-OFF
Relay
M
(MOH over BGM)
P11
Select
MOH
Prog. 77-1, 05
Note 3-watt amp and SW4 are available with
PIOU and PEPU only; PIOUS provides
600 ohm output only.
W2, IF
Using PIOUS
(See Figure 10-8)
Relay Contact Specification:
24 VDC Max.
1 amp, Max.
Music-on-Hold and Background Music (same source) Functional Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Figure 12-2
4253
12-5
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
BGM Options
The BGM options allow music to play over optional external speakers (external page system) and/
or digital and electronic telephone speakers. BGM can be configured in three ways:
Configuration A – One Music Source
This configuration enables BGM and MOH to share the same music source (see Figure 12-3).
With this configuration, the MOH/BGM music source is connected to the RCA jack on the DK14
or DK40i KSU, or DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. The music source is sent to CO lines/
stations on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speakers, and to the external page system via the
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU optional PCBs. Station Port 000 must dial to send MOH over BGM
and to disable the option.
DK14/DK40i
KSU or RCTU
MOH
MOH/BGM
Source (SHARED)
600Ω, 0-1 Volt RMS
CO Lines and
Stations On-Hold
BGM Page
Electronic/Digital
Telephone Speaker
MOH RCA Jack
VR1 (Volume)
(BGM: #481 ON/#480 OFF)
DK424 Only
PIOU
PIOUS
PEPU
To External
Page System
DK14/DK40i KSU
(BGM when Page is idle,
8Ω or 600Ω Output)
600Ω
RCA Jack
Figure 12-3
Note
To External
Page System
4254
MOH/BGM Music Source Configuration A
Telephone users can turn on BGM at their station by pressing the 7HO6HW0XVLF (%*0)
button; or by pressing [PDN] + ( turns BGM Off).
Configuration B – Alternate Background Music Source
This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the MOH RCA jack of the DK14
KSU, DK40i KSU or RCTU, (as in Configuration A) and a separate BGM source to be connected
to a PEKU (circuit 3), PESU (circuit 8)
...or
KSTU2, QSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU (circuit 2) PCB (see Figures 12-4 and 12-5).
With this configuration, the MOH source is sent only to CO lines/stations on hold, while the BGM
source is sent directly to electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via
the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU or DK14 and DK40i BGM 600 ohm RCA jack.
12-6
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
RCA Jack
QSTU2, KSTU2,
RSTU, RSTU2,
RDSU, or PSTU
(CKT 2)
Tip (28)
BGM Music
Source
600Ω Output
or 8Ω Output
High Level
Output
Input
Ring (3)
4246
BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:
• Input Impedance: 600 OR 8 ohms
• Input Voltage:
Recommended Levels
Min. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)
Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)
Phone Line
Line Isolation Transformer
(Dealer supplied)
See Program 19 for Slot Assignment
Figure 12-4
DK14/DK40i/DK424 Alternate BGM Source to Standard Telephone Port Connection
DK14/DK40i
KSU or RCTU
MOH
MOH Source
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU
25-Pair Connector
VT = P28, W-GN
VR = P3, GN-W
Slot XX*, Circuit 2
** PESU 25-Pair Connector
VT = P40, BK-S
VR = P15, S-BK
Slot XX*, Circuit 8
Alternate BGM Source:
Digital/Electronic
Telephones and
External Speakers
DK14/DK40i 600Ω
RCA Jack
BGM/PAGE
DK424
To External
Page System
PIOU
PIOUS
PEPU
BGM
VT
VR
CO Lines and
Stations On-Hold
QSTU2, KSTU2,
RSTU, RDSU,
PSTU, PESU
or PEKU
in Slot XX*
4299
* Program 19 Assigns Slot XX
Figure 12-5
DK40i/DK424/DK424i Alternate BGM Source Configuration B
Strata DK I&M
5/00
(BGM: #491 ON/#490 OFF)
(BGM when Page is Idle,
8Ω or 600Ω Output)
Electronic/Digital
Telephone Speaker
(BGM: #481 ON/#480 Off)
Backplane Wiring
Installation Wiring
Peripheral Installation
** PEKU 25-Pair Connector
VT = P30, W-S
VR = P5, S-W
Slot XX*, Circuit 3
MOH
RCA
Jack
VR1 (Volume)
12-7
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
Configuration C – Three Music Sources
This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the RCA jack of the DK40i KSU or
DK424 or DK424i processor PCB (as in Configuration A). The digital or electronic telephone
BGM source is connected to a PEKU, PESU, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU PCB (as in
Configuration B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the external page speakers via the PIOU
PCB (see Figure 12-6). This option is not available on DK14.
When a separate BGM source is connected to the PIOU, two customer-supplied amplifiers are
required to drive the external speakers.One amplifier drives the speakers for BGM when page is
idle and the other amplifier drives the speakers during page. The PIOU switches BGM or page to
the external speakers via zone relays. (The PIOUS and PEPU do not provide zone relays; therefore
Configuration C is not possible with these PCBs.)
DK14/DK40i
KSU or RCTU
RCA Jack
CO Lines and
Stations On-Hold
MOH
MOH SOURCE
KSU BGM 600
RCA Jack
RSTU/RDSU/PSTU1
VR1 (Volume)
25 Pair Connector
VT = 28, W-GN
VR = 3, GN-W
SLOT XX2, Circuit 2
BGM/Page (DK424 backplane)
PESU 25-Pair Connector1
VT = P40, BK-S
VR = P15, S-BK
Slot XX2, Circuit 8
Cut W7 on PESU
Program 10, LED 10/On
Electronic/
Digital Telephone
Alternate
BGM Source
VT
VR
PEKU 25-Pair Connector
VT = P30, W-S
VR = P5, S-W
Slot XX2, Circuit 3
Cut W5 on PEKU
Program 10, LED 09/On
Electronic/Digital
Telephone Speaker
* KSTU2, RSTU1,
RDSU1,
PSTU1, PESU1,
or PEKU
in Slot XX2
(BGM: #481 On/#480 Off)
Page
Amplifier
600Ω
External Speaker
BGM Source
Page
Page
or BGM
P23
BGM
BGM
PIOU Only
To External
Page Speaker
Zone Relays
Activate with Page
Amplifier
(BGM When Page is Idle)
Notes
Backplane Wiring
Installation Wiring
1. An isolation transformer may be required if
connecting BGM source to a standard telephone port.
2. Program 19 assigns BGM Slot number.
4300
Figure 12-6
12-8
DK40i/DK424/DK424i Alternate Music Source Configuration C
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options
➤ To install the MOH/BGM as BGM
1. Ensure that the MOH option is installed in accordance with To install the MOH option on Page
4 on Page 12-4 (see Figure 12-2).
2. The output of the RCTU page/BGM control is applied through the backplane to the output
select switch (SW4) on the PIOU or PEPU. Set the SW4 switch to either SPO or SPI, as
required:
♦
SPO – Directs external page and non-amplified BGM to the HESB or external amplifier
(pins 13 and 38).
♦
SPI – Directs external page and BGM through the on-board 3-watt amplifier to the
external speaker output (pins 25 and 50).
The PIOUS provides non-amplified BGM/page output only (SPT and SPR).
See Figure 12-8.
Note
3. When using an HESB or external amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the HESB
or amplifier volume control.
4. When using the internal amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust the volume using the volume
control (VR1) on the PIOU/PEPU PCB.
Alternate BGM Source Installation
A BGM source can be connected to a station PCB (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU,
PEKU, or PESU) to send music to all electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page
system via a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU. The BGM source is separate from the MOH source
connected to the DK424 or DK424i processor PCB. An isolation transformer is needed to connect
a music source to one of the above standard telephone circuits (see Figure 12-4).
➤ To connect the BGM source to the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU, RDSU, PEKU or PESU
See Figures 12-4~12-6 and follow these steps:
1. Access Program 10-2. If the BGM source is connected to circuit 3 on a PEKU, set LED 09 to
On. If the source is connected to circuit 8 on a PESU, set LED 10 to On. If connecting BGM to
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU or PSTU, LED 09 and 10 should be Off.
2. Using Program 19, identify (assign) the BGM slot.
3. If connecting the BGM source to a PEKU or PESU: Connect the PEKU tip and ring of circuit
03 to the 600 ohms or 8 ohms output of the BGM source or connect the BGM output to circuit
8 of a PESU.
...or
If connecting the BGM source to a QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU: Connect circuit
2 of the RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU to a customer-supplied isolation transformer and BGM
source.
The isolation transformer protects the BGM source from potentially damaging QSTU2,
KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU voltage. Some music sources which are designed for
telephone system applications may have this protection built-in and do not require the
transformer. (Consult the documentation provided with the music source.)
4. If the BGM source is connected to either a W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB, cut the
strap. There is no strap to cut on the QSTU2/KSTU2, RSTU2/PSTU or RDSU.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Note
12-9
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
5. Using the BGM source’s volume control, adjust the BGM volume to the desired level while
listening to BGM via a telephone speaker and/or the external page speakers. When BGM is
sent to external speakers via a PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU PCB, use the external amplifier
volume control to balance the BGM and page volume levels.
External BGM Installation
The external BGM options are closely associated with the external paging options. See “External
Page Options” on Page 12-26 for external paging amplifier installation.
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Two relays are provided on the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs to control the operation of
peripheral equipment:
♦
External Page/Door Lock Relay
♦
Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay
Note
Only the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will
provide the relay control function.
Each relay can be configured to provide one of two possible control functions and as normally
open (MAKE) or closed (BREAK). Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as follows:
Voltage: 24VDC maximum
Current: 1 amp maximum
CAUTION!
Note
To prevent relay damage, do not connect relays directly to 120VAC power
source.
See the Strata DK Programming Manual, as necessary, when instructed to program the
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU in the following paragraphs.
External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)
The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB may be programmed for either the external page function or the
door lock control function. (See Figures 12-7 and 12-8.)
When configured in Program 77-1 for the external page function, the relay controls an external
music source connected to the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU to provide BGM over external speakers.
When a paging announcement is made over the external speakers, the external page relay mutes
the BGM.
When configured in Program 77-1 for the door lock control function, the relay controls an external
door lock. When a door lock button at a digital or electronic telephone is pressed, the door lock
control relay unlocks the door for three or six seconds, as specified in Program 77-1 (LED 20).
12-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for External Page Mute Option
1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to Off to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the
external page function.
2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the jumper plug P10 on the PIOU or PEPU jumper plug to the
MAKE or BREAK position as required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is
activated.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is
activated.
...or
If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W1 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as
required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when external page is
activated.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when external page is
activated.
3. See Figures 12-7 and 12-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU to the MDF as required for the external paging function.
PIOU/PEPU PCB
PIOU 25 PR.
Connectors
PIN NO.
Color
MDF 66M
Block
PIN NO.s
32
7
.
.
R-O
O-R
13
14
SP.T0
600Ω (Duplex)
SP.R0
38
.
Bk-Gn
25
13
.
Gn-Bk
26
8Ω
SP.T1
3 Watt SP.R1
50
25
.
.
V-S
S-V
49
50
Select Relay Function
with Program 77-1
Door Lock or External
Page Control
Break
DE.T
P10
DE. R
Make
SW4 SP0
SP1
Page or
BGM from
RCTU
or DK
KSU
VR1
Break P11
Door
Lock
Control
Page
Amplifier
Control
NH.T
NH.R
34
9
.
.
R-Br
Br-R
Speaker
Tape
Player
8 ohm
Speaker
17
18
Make
Note
MDF
Connections
All wires should
be jacketed 24 AWG
twisted pairs
Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections
where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously.
Figure 12-7
PIOU/PEPU Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Night
Bell
To Music On-Hold
Input on RCTU PCB
or DK KSU
1507
Peripheral Installation
Select Relay Function
with Program 77-1:
Night Relay or
MOH Control
12-11
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
KSU Backplane
TBI
MDF
SP.T
Page
and
BGM
600
SP.R
Break
DE.R
Break
DE
Door
Lock
Control
NH
MOH
Source
Unit
NH.T
W2 Make
K2
Mute
Control
DE.T
W1 Make
K1
Page
Amplifier
NH.R
Night Bell
Normal Open
ALM.T
Alarm
Sensor
W3
ALM
ALM.R
Facility
Alarm
Unit
1508
Normal
Close
PIOUS
Notes
• All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.
• Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable;
do not connect both options simultaneously.
Relay Options:
• K1 (DE): Door Lock or amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07
• K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-Hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05
• K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 amp Maximum
Figure 12-8
12-12
PIOUS Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Lock Control Function
Only one door lock control is available using an optional PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)
and only the optional PCB with the lowest Program 03 Code (41, 42, or 43) will provide
the door lock function.
Note
1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to On to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the door
lock control function (see Figure 12-9).
2. Set Program 77-1 LED 20 to Off for a three-second door lock activation time, or set LED 20 to
On for a six-second door lock activation time.
3. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or
BREAK position, as required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock
button is pressed.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock
button is pressed.
...or
If using a PIOUS, solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK
position, as required:
♦
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s door lock
button is pressed.
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s 'RRU
/RFN button is pressed.
4. See Figure 12-9 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the
MDF as required for the door lock control function.
PIOU/PEPU
Note
assigned to digital and
electronic telephones in
Program 39 with Code 71.
DET
B
M
25-Pair
Amphenol
PIN 34, R-BR
17
P10
To Door Lock
PIN 9, BR-R
DER
18
See Program 77-1,
LED 07, 20
for Relay Options
Door Lock 0 Button
K1
MDF
PIOUS
Break
MDF
Make
K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 amp Max.)
DE
To Door Lock
DER
Terminal on Front Edge of PCB
1509
Figure 12-9
Door Lock Control Option (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
DET
W1
12-13
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Door Lock Control with DDCB and HDCB
In addition to the option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU), each DDCB and HDCB can
provide one door lock control.
♦
DK14 provides two door lock controls on DDCB only.
♦
DK40i provides three door lock controls. The DK424 support DDCBs and HDCBs.
♦
DK424 RCTUA provides four door lock controls.
RCTUB, BA/BB, C/D, E/F and all BCU PCBs provide five DDCB/HDCB door lock
controls.
DK40i and DK424 DDCBs connect only to digital circuits (always circuit 5 on a PDKU or
RDSU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. DK14 DDCBs connect to ports 002 or
003 only.
HDCBs connect only to electronic circuits (always circuit 5 on a PEKU or PESU) associated
with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 (see Table 12-1).
Table 12-1
DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide
DK14/DK40i KSU or
RDSU/PDKU/PEKU/PESU
DDCB/HDCB
Number
Port
Number
DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 1
1
004
DK14 Door Lock 1
1
002
DK14 Door Lock 2
2
003
DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 2
2
012
DK40i/DK424/DK424i Door Lock 3
3
020
Unlock Door 3 (DRLK 3), Code 74
DK424/DK424i Door Lock 4
4
028
Unlock Door 4 (DRLK 4), Code 75
Important!
Program 39 Button Assignments
Unlock Door 1 (DRLK 1), Code 72
Unlock Door 2 (DRLK 2), Code 73
Each DDCB/HDCB door lock control reduces the maximum door phone capacity by
one.
Configure Each DDCB/HDCB for the Door Lock Control Function
1. DK40i, DK424 and DK424i: connect PDKU circuit 5 (T/R and PT/PR) to the DDCB HKSU
modular jack (see Figures 12-9 and 12-10).
DK14: connect applicable digital telephone circuit (logical port 02 or 03) to the DDCB KSU
modular jack. See Figure 12-7 and Figure 10-2.
2. Connect the door lock wire pair to the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4).
3. Set SW1 to the DOOR position.
4. Set SW2 to the LOCK position.
5. SW3 inside the DDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock
button is pressed: if SW3 is in the “1-2” position, the relay closes when the button is pressed;
if in the “2-3” position, the door lock relay opens when the button is pressed.
Note
SW3 comes from the factory in the “1-2” position.
6. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds and enable the PDKU or
RDSU ports for DDCB connection.
7. In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for door lock operation.
12-14
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
8. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to stations per the customer’s record sheet.
9. Check each telephone door lock button from each station: the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3
and 4) will momentarily open or close (three or six seconds) when the button is pressed.
HDCB Installation (DK40i and DK424 only)
1. Cut jumper W9 of the particular PEKU or PESU that will connect to the HDCB. (See Figure
12-10 and Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.)
2. Connect circuit 5 VT/VR and DT/DR pairs to the HDCB HKSU modular jack.
3. Connect the door lock wire pair to the HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4).
4. Set SW1 to the DOOR position.
5. Set SW2 to the LOCK position.
6. W3 inside the HDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock
button is pressed: if W3 is in the “solid-line” position, the relay will provide a closure when
the button is pressed; if in the “dotted-line” position, the door lock relay will open when the
door lock button is pressed.
7. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds, and enable the PEKU
and PESU ports for HDCB connection.
8. In Program 77-2, enable the HDCB B-jack for door lock operation.
9. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to the desired stations per the customer’s record sheet.
10. Check each door lock button from each station: The HDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will
momentarily close (three or six seconds) when the appropriate door lock button is pressed.
Note
The HDCB W2 strap is not used with Strata DK424 systems. The strap provides an alarm
function with other Strata systems.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-15
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Relay
Control
Contact 1
DDCB or HDCB
A
2
3
4
5
DK14 KSU,
DK40i KSU, (See Chapter 8—
Wiring Diagrams)
PDKU,
RDSU,
DK14 (Ports 002, 003)
PEKU,
DK40i/DK424 (Ports 004,
012, 020)
or
DK424 (Port 028)
PESU
B
3
RJ11
3
4
2 Relay Contact
5 to Customer
Supplied
RJ11
Device 3
3
4
C
RJ11
3
Door Lock
Control
Contact2
to
HDCB KSU Jack
to
PIN 3 / 4
DT (35) / DR (10) to
PIN 5 / 6
VT (34) / VR (9)
1
4
2
3
1
MDFB
Door Phone
A
MDFB
Door Phone B
or
Door Lock Control
MDFB
Door Phone
C
4
4
HDCB WIRING CHART
PEKU or PESU
1
2
2
DDCB Wiring Chart
PDKU or RDSU
to
DDCB KSU Jack
DT (34) / DR (9)
to
PIN 3 / 4
PT (35) / PR (10)
to
PIN 5 / 6
4301
See Chapter 8—Wiring for PEKU, PESU, PDKU or RDSU pin-out information.
See DK14 and DK40i Installation chapters for appropriate pin-out information.
Notes
1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the ringing, talk, or monitor state.
2. See External Page/Door Lock Relay Options on Page 10-14 and DDCB and HDCB/DRLK
Assignments Guide on Page 10-19.
3. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do not connect relay contacts to 120
AC commercial power.
Figure 12-10 Multiple Door Lock Control Options (DDCB/HDCB)
Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU
Night Transfer/Night Relay option may be programmed for either the Night Relay or the MOH
relay function. (See Figures 12-7 and 12-8.)
Note
Only the PIOU/PIOUS, or PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42 or 43) will
provide the Night Transfer (NT) or MOH relay control function.
When configured for the NT function with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the system is in the
Night mode. The relay can be programmed to activate continuously when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU
button (only) is set for the Night mode (for indirect answering machine control), or to pulsate at
one-second On/three-seconds Off (for a night bell) when incoming CO lines ring (Night Transfer
1~4 = tenant 1~4 CO lines) per Program *15 and 77-3.
When configured for the MOH function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any time a CO line
is on hold. In this configuration, the relay is normally used to control the MOH source.
12-16
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for Night Transfer
1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to Off to configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night Transfer
function (see Figures 12-7 and 12-8).
2. In Program 77-1, set LED 06 to provide continuous or pulsating relay activation:
♦
Off – Programs the relay for continuous activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button
(only) is set in the Night mode.
♦
On – Programs the relay for pulsating activation when the 1LJKW7UDQVIHUa button
for tenant 1~4 is set to the Night mode and a CO line rings.
CO lines must be enabled in Program 78 for the Night Transfer pulsating relay function.
Note
3. Set in Programs 87, 88, and 89 the CO lines that will activate the relay (when the system is in
the Night mode).
4. Assign, in Program 39, the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU buttons to telephones that should be able to set
the Strata DK system into the Night mode.
5. Assign in Programs 29-1~29-4 a 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button on all direct station selection
consoles that are to transfer the Strata DK system into the Night mode.
6. If tenant operation is required, set in Program *15 the CO lines for tenant 1 through tenant 4
operation. DK40i and the DK424 RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenant assignments,
RCTUC/D provides four.
7. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or
BREAK position, as required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is
activated.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is
activated.
...or
If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as
required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night relay is
activated.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when night relay is
activated.
8. See Figures 12-7 and 12-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU to the MDF as required for the night relay function.
Note
Door phones programmed to ring over external page in the Night mode do not activate the
Night Transfer feature, per Program 77-1.
1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to On to configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH relay
function (see Figures 12-8 and 12-9).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Configure PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for MOH Relay Control
12-17
Peripheral Installation
Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control
2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or
BREAK position, as required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on hold.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is on
hold.
...or
If using a PIOUS, solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as
required:
♦
MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on
hold.
♦
BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line is on
hold.
3. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the MOH Relay function.
DK14 KSU and DK40i KSU Relay
The DK40i KSU Relay can be programmed for one of three options:
♦
BGM mute
♦
Night transfer
♦
MOH source control
These options are set in Program 77-1 (LED 05 and 06). Only one option is allowed per
installation. However, in the DK40i, these options can be supplemented with PIOU/PIOUS relay
options. Electrical specifications for the DK40i base relay contacts are:
Voltage:
24VDC maximum
Current:
12-18
♦
1 amp maximum
♦
Normally open – closed when activated
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
Strata DK systems provide three options utilizing an HESB:
♦
Loud Ringing Bell
♦
Amplified Speaker
♦
Talkback Amplified Speaker
System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. See the following
installation procedures for the hardware requirements for each option.
Loud Ringing Bell Option
The loud ringing bell option enables the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without
the use of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first and signal tone can be amplified on all
electronic and digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs and HESB. (See Chapter 11 –
Station Apparatus.)
The HESB automatically turns Off once the ringing call or voice first has been manually answered
from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems.
Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Digital Telephones
1. Connect a jumper between terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block (Figure
12-11).
2. Connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block.
3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable in the telephone per Chapter 11 – Station
Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4.
Note
HESB connections made in Steps 4~6 can be accomplished using the HESB VOICE
modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block.
4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A
using a modular block.
5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65A
using a modular block.
6. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A
cable using a modular block.
7. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2.
8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power
source.
Important!
If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-19
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
HESB (Rear View)
Volume Control
(+)
(-)
Internal Wiring:
TBI
1
2
3
4
Jumper Wires:
TB1
2-10
TB2
4-5
(L2)
Voice
6
1
3
4
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
654321 654321
Not Used Not Used
115 VAC
± 10 VAC
maximum
HACU-120
115VAC to
12 VDC
24 AWG
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
from
Digital
Telephone
to HESB
TB2
1 2 3 4 5
12V
0V
Power
Supply
MDF
66 Block
Jumpers
Voice
Door Phone
12V 0V
Station Cabling
Tip
Ring
PT
PR
25-Pair
Cable
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
24 AWG
DK14 & DK40i
KSU or PDKU
(CKT 1~8)
or
RDSU
(CKT 5-8)
R
GN
R
(+)
GN
(-)
BK
Y
BK
Y
W
BL
W
BL
654321
654321
123456
123456
Modular
(L2)
HESC-65A
Cable
Station
OCA
Strap
(-) Green
(L2) Yellow
(+) Red
+
R607
Do Not
Cut
P601
HHEU
(V.3 or .4)
1000 or 2000 Series
Digital Telephone
Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into
base of DKT per HHEU installation information in
Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus
4302
Important!
See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU
jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB.
Figure 12-11 HESB/Digital Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring
12-20
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
Installing the HESB Loud Ringing Bell in Electronic Telephones (DK40i and DK424 Only)
1. On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7, and connect
another jumper between terminals 5 and 8 (see Figure 12-12).
2. On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5.
3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A (or HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per Chapter 11 –
Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4.
Note
HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 can be made with the HESB VOICE modular jack
instead of the TB1 terminal block.
4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable
using a modular block.
5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65
cable using a modular block.
6. Connect terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s
modular block (VOICE TIP).
7. Connect terminal 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s
modular block (VOICE RING).
8. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2.
9. Plug power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC, 60Hz power source.
Important!
●
●
Make sure the AC power is within the specified limits shown in Step 9. If AC voltage is not
within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem.
Cut the EX-SP and HHEU straps on telephones and do not cut the OCA strap or R607 on the
HHEU (see Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for details).
Testing the Loud Ringing Bell Option
1. Test the AC input voltage. See Step 9, above.
2. Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell. Ringing will be
heard over the HESB.
3. Use a small, slotted screwdriver to turn the volume control on the back of the HESB to the
desired level and adjust the ring volume control on the telephone.
4. If ringing is heard at the station, but not over the HESB, check the following while the station
is ringing:
Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the HESB
TB1 terminal block. Voltage indication should be 4.5~5VDC.
Note
Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential
across terminals 1 and 2.
♦
If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to
the HESB have been made properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block may have been reversed).
Important!
Strata DK I&M
5/00
See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU
jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB.
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-21
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
HESB (Rear View)
Volume Control
(+) (Red)
(-) (Green)
VOICE Tip
VOICE Ring
Internal Wiring:
Jumper Wires:
TB1
5-8
6-7
TB2
4-5
TBI
1
2
3
4
Voice
6
1
3
4
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Jumpers
654321 654321
Not Used
HACU-120
115VAC 115VAC to
± 10VAC 12VDC
maximum
Power
Supply
MDF
66 Block
24 AWG
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
from
Electronic
Telephone
to HESB
Voice
Door Phone
12V 0V
Modular
Connectors
May Be Used
TB2
1 2 3 4 5
12V
0V
Station Cabling
Voice Tip
Voice Ring
Voice Tip
Voice Ring
Data T1
Data R1
25-Pair
Cable
PEKU
(CKT 1~8)
or
PESU
(CKT 5~8)
Jacketed
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
24 AWG
OCA
Tip
R
GN
R
(+)
GN
(-)
BK
Y
BK
Y
W
BL
W
BL
OCA
Ring
654321
654321
123456
123456
1513
Modular
Cord
Station
Electronic
Telephone
6500-Series
Green
Red
HESC-65 or
HESC-65A
Cable
3
(-)
2
1
(+)
P601
HHEU
Figure 12-12
OCA
Strap
Do Not
Cut
R607
Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card
into base of DKT per HHEU installation
information in Chapter 9 – Station Apparatus
HESB/Electronic Telephone with Loud Ringing Bell Wiring
Amplified Speaker Option
The amplified speaker option enables the HESB to be configured as a paging speaker. The HESB
is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600-ohm page output to provide an amplified external
speaker.
➤ To install the HESB amplified speaker option
1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure
12-13).
2. Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
4. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block.
12-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
5. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block.
6. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38)
to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
...or
Connect the PIOUS, DK14 or DK40i KSU 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3
and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
7. Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and
connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.
8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC, 60Hz power
source.
9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position.
If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem.
Important!
➤ To test the amplified speaker option
1. Make an external page. The page should be heard over the HESB.
2. Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired level.
DK14 & DK40i KSU
BGM
RCA Jack
PIOUS
MDF
TB1
MDF
SPT
600Ω
Page
Output
SPR
SPT (38, BK-GN)
PIOU or PEPU SPR (13, GN-BK)
600Ω
Page
Output
Jacketed
Twisted
Pair
24 AWG
Block
Pin NO.s
1
25
Note
Only one interface PCB
(PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU)
may provide amplified
speaker output.
26
50
25-Pair Cable
MDF
66 Block
Volume Control
Jumper Wires:
TB1
1-2
5-8
6-7
Modular
Connector
May Be Used
TB2
3-4
5-6
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
654321
654321
Not Used
Internal Wiring:
TBI
3
4
Voice
Voice
3
4
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6
Note
•
12V 0V
VDC
Jumpers
HESB (Rear View)
Power
Supply
115 VAC (± 10 VAC) to 12 VDC
Figure 12-13 HESB/Amplified Speaker Wiring
Strata DK I&M
5/00
4303
Peripheral Installation
The 600 ohm page output sends
three types of signals during
system operation:
• Voice page
• Background music
• Night ringing
Door Phone
12V 0V
12-23
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
Talkback Amplified Speaker Option
The talkback amplified speaker option enables a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a
telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU 600 ohm (duplex) output and is used as the amplifier and speaker.
A door phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as a microphone to provide
talkback operation. (The MDFB push-button is inoperative, and the unit serves only as a
microphone for talkback and not as the normal door phone.)
Note
The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU 600 ohm is a two-way (duplex) page output compatible
with most commercially available talkback amplifiers – door phone not required for
talkback.
➤ To install the HESB talkback amplified speaker
1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure
12-14).
2. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block.
3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block.
Note
HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and
door phone modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block.
4. Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L1 of the MDFB.
5. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB
6. Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 1 of the MDFB.
7. Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 2 of the MDFB.
8. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38)
to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
...or
If using a PIOUS, connect the PIOUS 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and
4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position.
10. Connect the HACU-120’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and
connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.
11. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 117VAC 60Hz power source.
Important!
If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem.
➤ To test the talkback amplified speaker
1. Make an external page. Page will be heard over the HESB.
2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this
application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door
phone.)
12-24
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options
MDFB (Rear View)
DK14 & DK40i KSU
BGM
RCA Jack
MDF
Door Phone
Talkback
Microphone
1
PIOUS
TB1
L1 L2
MDF
Jacketed
Twisted
Pair
24 AWG
SPT
600Ω
Page
Output
SPR
Duplex
MDF Block
Pin Numbers
PIOU or
PEPU
600Ω
Page
Output
2
SPT (38, BK-GN)
1
25
SPR (13, GN-BK)
26
25 Pair Cable
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
24 AWG
<Duplex>
MDF
66 Block
Volume Control
L1 L2 1 2
Jumper Wires:
TB1
1-2
TB2
3-4
5-6
TB1
Modular
Connector
May Be Used
Internal Wiring:
654321
Voice
4
3
Door Phone
4
3
2
5
TBI
4
3
TBI
7
8
9
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Voice
654321
Door Phone
12V 0V
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6
12V 0V
Notes
HACU-120
• The 600 ohm duplex page output is
compatible with most
commercially available talkback
amplifiers. – MDFB not required.
5/00
4304
Power
Converter
115VAC ± 10VAC to 12VDC
Figure 12-14 HESB/Talkback Amplified Speaker Wiring
Strata DK I&M
HESB (Rear View)
Peripheral Installation
• Only one interface PCB (PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide
talkback amplified speaker.
Jumpers
12-25
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
HESB Wall Mounting
Some applications may require that the HESB is mounted on a wall or other vertical surface.
➤ To wall mount the HESB
1. Find a suitable location on the mounting
surface for the HESB (see Figure 12-15).
2. Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw
into the mounting surface.
One Wall
Mounting
Hole
3. Hang the HESB from the screw.
1516
Figure 12-15 HESB Wall Mounting
External Page Options
Strata DK systems equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB offer a variety of external paging
options, each of which includes a BGM option. The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB with the lowest
Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) is required to support these options:
♦
Paging with BGM (same amplifier) – available with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU
♦
Zone Paging with BGM (separate amplifiers) – available with PIOU
♦
Zone Paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers) – available with PIOU
External Page Option Installation
All paging connections are made via the PIOU or PEPU Amphenol connectors or the PIOUS TB1
terminal to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Paging (Single-zone) with BGM (Same Amplifier)
Paging and BGM are amplified by a common customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the
external page access code is dialed, the external page control relay is activated, which applies a
short (or opens the contacts) to the amplifier mute control to mute the music.
➤ To install External Page (single zone) with BGM (same amplifier)
1. Connect input 1 from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU or
PEPU; or connect to SPT and SPR of the PIOUS (see Figure 12-17).
2. Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal to pins 7 and 32 of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect
to DET and DER of the PIOUS.
3. Connect the music source to input 2 of the paging amplifier.
4. Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier output.
5. Verify that the PIOU or PEPU P10 jumper plug is in the MAKE position or that the PIOUS
W1 jumper wire is in the MAKE position.
12-26
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
PIOU/PEPU
600Ω
B
P10
External Page/
Door Lock Relay
(See Program 77-1)
SPT (38)
25
SPR (13)
26
DET (32)
13
External
Paging Amp
Output
Night Ring
and Page
from KSU
Backplane
MDF
Input 1
66 Block
Pin Numbers
Mute 2
M
DER (7)
14
Input 2
PIOU/PEPU Pin
Numbers
25-Pair Cable
BGM
Music
Source
KSU Backplane
PIOUS
600Ω
Break
W1
K1
Make
TB1
SPR 600
Input 1
SPT
External
Paging Amp
Output
Night Ring
and Page
from KSU
Backplane
MDF
P10 DET
DER DE
Mute 2
Input 2
External Page/
Door Lock Relay
(See Program 77-1)
Note
BGM
Music
Source
The PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code
(41, 42, or 43) will provide External Page options.
1517
Figure 12-16 DK Page and BGM Using the Same Amplifier (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
Refer to Table 12-2 with Figures 12-17 and 12-18.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-27
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
Table 12-2
Paging Zones and Access Codes
Zones
Access Codes DK40i,
DK424 (RCTUA, RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D) and DK424i
(B1CU, B2CAU/BU,
B3CAU/BU)
Access Codes DK424 or
DK424i (RCTUE/F or
B5CAU/BU equipment
with a PIOU)
All Call Page and
External
#39
#39
All Call Page
#30
#30
1
#35
#351
2
#36
#352
3
#37
#353
4
#38
#354
5
Not Available
#355
6
Not Available
#356
7
Not Available
#357
8
Not Available
#358
RCTUE/F and
B5CAU/BU More
than 1 PIOU
Zone Paging with BGM (Separate Amplifiers)
Provides multiple-zone paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the
PIOU, where it is switched to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU Relays K1 through K4. The
relay selected is determined by the access code dialed by the station user. Default access codes are:
Table 12-3
Relay Access Codes
PIOU Relay Access Codes
DKT LCD Display
K1/zone 1 = or K1/zone 5 = External Paging A or E
K2/zone 2 = or K2/zone 6 = External Paging B or F
K3/zone 3 = or K3/zone 7 = External Paging C or G
K4/zone 4 = or K4/zone 8 = External Paging D or H
See Program 90 in the Strata DK Programming Manual.
EXT + ALL CALL PAGE or RCTUE/F
Note
Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maximum at 300 ohms. Zones 5~8 (LCD display
E~F) for a second PIOU installed when using an RCTUE3/F3 processor only (see Figure
12-6).
An all zone page code () is also available as an option (see Program 10-2). When the All Page
code is dialed, all four or eight relays are activated to permit simultaneous paging to all speaker
zones and all digital and electronic telephone speakers.
➤ To install the page and background music features on the same amplifier
1. Connect the input from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see
Figure 12-17).
2. Connect the BGM music source to the music amplifier input.
3. Connect the paging amplifier output to the “M” contact’s PIOU relays K1~K4 and the “C”
terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers.
4. Connect the BGM music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to
“C” of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers.
12-28
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
66 Block
Pin Numbers
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
24 AWG
MDF
PIOU
B
K1
PGOUT 1 (15)
30
A
PGIN 1 (40)
29
C
Zone 1 / Zone 51
M
B
K2
PGOUT 2 (17)
34
A
PGIN 2 (42)
33
C
PGOUT 3 (19)
38
37
A
PGIN 3 (44)
PGOUT 4 (21)
PGIN 4 (46)
42
41
A
Zone 2 / Zone 6
M
B
K3
Zone 3 / Zone 7
C
M
B
K4
M
Zone 4 / Zone 8
C
Paging Amp
SPR (13)
26
PG
Common (23)
46
600Ω
Output
25
Input
SPT (38)
Speaker
Common
Line
C
Music Amp
BGM Music Source
(To External
Speaker Only)
Output
PIOU Pin
Numbers ( )
25-Pair Cable
Input
Night Ringing
and/or Page
from KSU
Backplane
Optional
Connection
1518
1. Zones 5~8 are available only to DK424 systems equipped with a RCTUE/F common control
unit and more than one PIOU. Set zones 1~4 (first PIOU) with Program 03 Code 41, and
zones 5~8 (second PIOU) with Program 03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not used).
Notes
●
See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options.
●
Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines.
●
The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night
Ring options.
Figure 12-17 PIOU Zone, Page/BGM/Night Ring (Separate Amplifiers)
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-29
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
Zone Paging with BGM (Multiple Amplifiers) DK40i and DK424 Only
Provides multiple-zone paging capability (same as “External Page Option Installation” on Page
12-26) but separate amplifiers are used for each zone.
➤ To install zone and night ringing with multiple amplifiers
1. Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see
Figure 12-18).
2. Connect the music source to the music amplifier input.
3. Connect the paging amplifier outputs to “M” of the PIOU Relays K1~K4 and to “C” of zone 1
through zone 4 speakers.
4. Connect the music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to the
“C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers.
5. Connect zone 1 through zone 4 speakers “A” terminal to the “B” contact of the PIOU relays
K1~K4, respectively.
12-30
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
External Page Options
MDF
PIOU
B
K1
PGOUT 1 (15)
30
PGIN 1 (40)
29
66 Block
Pin Numbers
Jacketed
Twisted Pair
24 AWG
Zone 1 / Zone 5
C
M
PGOUT 2 (17)
34
PGIN 2 (42)
33
Amp
1
Output
Input
B
K2
A
Zone 2 / Zone 6
C
M
PGOUT 3 (19)
38
PGIN 3 (44)
37
Amp
2
Output
Input
B
K3
A
Zone 3 / Zone 7
C
M
K4
PGOUT 4 (21)
42
PGIN 4 (46)
41
Amp
3
Output
Input
B
A
Zone 4 / Zone 8
C
M
600Ω
SPT (38)
25
SPR (13)
26
PG
Common (23)
46
PIOU Pin Numbers ( )
25-Pair Cables
Amp
4
Output
Input
Night
Ringing
or Page
from KSU
Backplane
A
BGM Music
Source &
Amplifier
C
Output
C
Zones 5~8 are available only
to DK424 systems equipped
with a RCTUE/F common
control unit and more than
one PIOU. Set zones 1~4
(first PIOU) with Program 03
Code 41, and zones 5~8
(second PIOU) with Program
03 Code 42 or 43 (if 42 is not
used).
1519
Notes
●
See Table 12-2 on Page 12-28 for paging access codes.
●
See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options.
●
Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + to pick-up night ringing CO lines.
The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and
Night Ring options.
Figure 12-18 PIOU Zone Paging and Night Ringing with Multiple Amplifiers
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
●
12-31
Peripheral Installation
Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference
Night Ringing over Selected Page Zones
In systems shared by 1~4 tenants, each tenant’s CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate
PIOU external page zones. This feature can also be used in one-tenant systems.
With shared systems, for example, Tenant 1’s night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring
PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while Tenant 2’s lines could be programmed to ring zones 3
and 4. In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just
selected zones.
Note
For DK424 only: any RCTU provides four tenants.
Programming CO Lines to Ring Selected PIOU Page Zones
Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, Tenant 1 through Tenant 4, that will night ring over PIOU
external page zones.
Program *15: Assigns CO lines to Tenant 1 through Tenant 4. Lines are initialized as Tenant 1.
Note
For DK424 only: RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenants, RCTUC/D and RCTU E/F
provide four.
Program 77-3: Assigns Tenant 1 through Tenant 4 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external
page zones.
Program 39: Assigns appropriate 1LJKW7UDQVIHU and 7HQDQW3LFNXS (for Tenant or NonTenant systems) buttons to electronic and digital telephones.
Note
Any station can pick up CO lines that night ring over external page zones by pressing the
[PDN] and dialing .
PIOU Zone Paging Installation
See “External Page Option Installation” on Page 12-26, paragraph 4 and Figure 12-17 for
installation instructions.
Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference
Customer-supplied two-way amplifiers can be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem (DISA,
External Call Forward) and/or conference calls. Amplified Conference is not available for the
DK14.
DK40i Information
Up to two amplifiers per Strata DK40i System can automatically connect to any two CO line
conference.
DK424 Information
As many as four amplifiers (4-RCTUB, C/D, and /F and all BCUs; 3-RCTUA) can be installed to
support up to four of these calls simultaneously. If three amplifiers are installed, three
simultaneous calls can be supported. If all amplifiers are in use, then subsequent two-CO line
tandem calls and/or conference calls will be unamplified. Each amplifier is connected to two
designated PEKU station ports and will automatically be switched into a two-CO line connection
established between any CO lines in the system.
12-32
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference
Amplified Talk Path
Figure 12-19 provides a functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified conference connection. (A
tellabs 7206 amplifier is used here.) The talk path for the connection is as follows: outside party 1
– public telephone network – CO PCB, CKTX – RCTU or BCU – PEKU, port A – into AMP, Line
in, – AMP, Line out – PEKU, port B – RCTU or BCU – CO PCB, CKTY – public telephone
network – outside party 2. This path is two-way so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is
amplified in the reverse direction.
Note
Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified to/from a system telephone when it is
connected into a two-CO line conference.
Amplifier Requirements
♦
Customer-supplied amplifier (two maximum for DK40i and four maximum for DK424 and
DK424i).
♦
Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and must provide automatic gain control.
♦
Each amplifier requires two PEKU station ports.
♦
See the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier grounding
instructions.
➤ To connect a two-way amplifier to the Strata DK system
1. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 2 on the designated PEKU
PCB to one input of the customer-supplied two-way amplifier. In the example in Figure 12-19,
this is CKTA (CO Side A) of the amplifier. (See the Amplified Two-CO Line Conference
wiring diagram in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.)
2. At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR, port B) of circuit 3 on the designated PEKU PCB
to the other input of the amplifier. In Figure 12-19, this is CKTB (subscriber side B) of the
amplifier.
3. Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117VAC (standard) wall outlet.
4. Set the gain and other amplifier options per the manufacturer’s installation documentation.
Amplifier Programming
♦
Program 10-1: LEDs 19 and 20 must be On.
♦
Program 10-2: LED 18 must be On.
♦
Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate PEKU PCB ports for amplifier connection. Only
enable the ports that will be connected with the amplifier(s).
♦
Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO lines for Two-CO line tandem connection.
Note
Strata DK I&M
Program 78-2: Enables appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
LED 19 in Program 10-1 should be On if it is certain that an amplifier will always be
available for two-CO line conference connections (four maximum, simultaneously). If this
LED is On and a two-CO line connection is established without an external amplifier, the
Strata DK424 station may be unbalanced and may receive a hum noise. LED 19 provides
additional station amplification when external amplifiers are switched into two-CO line
connections.
12-33
Peripheral Installation
Two-CO Line External Amplified Conference
Tellabs 7206
Amplifier
(See Notes)
Strata DK40i/DK424
CO PCB
Outside
Party 1
Outside
Party 2
24AWG
25-Pair
Cable
PEKU
PCM
Conference
Switch
T
CO Line
R
RCTU
CKT, X
MDF
VT(2), P28/W-GN
T
TA
VR(2), P3/GN-W
R
RA
Port A
DT(2)
(CKT 2)
Public
Telephone
Network
Not Used
DR(2)
T
CO Line
R
CKT, Y
24AWG
Twisted
Pair
VT(3), P30/W-S
T
TB
VR(3), P30/S-W
R
RB
Port B
DT(3)
(CKT 3)
Not Used
DR(3)
PEKU,
PDKU,
RDSU,
RSTU,
PESU, or
PSTU
Any CO line will be
switched into the
conference; see
programming notes
for tandem and/or
DISA CO lines
System
telephone
that sets up
2-CO line
conference
call
Programming Notes
117VAC
60Hz
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments:
Program 10-3
PEKU Port Conf.
Enable Button/LED
PEKU Slot
Position
LED 01, ON
12
LED 02, ON
13
LED 03, ON
14
LED 04, ON
15
Tellabs Power Adapter
Tellabs
Case
PEKU Port
Number
PEKU
Circuit
A = 009
B = 010
A = 017
B = 018
A = 025
B = 026
A = 033
B = 034
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
CKT2
CKT3
• Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20 ON.
• Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for
tandem connection.
• Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if
amplified DISA is required.
• Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19 ON.
Duplex
AC Plug
Notes (Amplifier)
•
•
•
•
All amplifier equipment is customer or dealer-supplied.
Available in single and multiple configurations.
For information regarding the Tellabs 7206 two-way
amplifier:
http://www.tellabs.com
1(800) 445-6501
Install in accordance with tellabs technical manual
Through Signalling Configuration.
4245
Figure 12-19 External Amplified Two-CO Line Call Functional Wiring Diagram
12-34
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
An SMDR printer or call accounting device may be connected to the system to provide a hardcopy record of station activity. The Strata DK system can record incoming, outgoing, and
transferred calls, as well as Account Code entries and names and telephone numbers of answered
DNIS, ANI, Caller ID, E911 and ISDN calls. Call record data is printed out at the completion of
each eligible call. SMDR format is ASCII-formatted, 8-bits, no parity, 1-stop bit.
To support the SMDR printer/call accounting device option, a Strata DK system must be equipped
with a PIOU, PIOUS,...or
♦
For DK424 and DK424i only, a RSIU/RSIS, PIOU, and PIOUS
♦
For DK40i only, TSIU
♦
For DK14 only, WSIU
Connection of the printer or call accounting device to the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or
DK424i), TSIU (DK40i), or WSIU (DK14) PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular cord
(seven feet maximum) and a PPTC connector adapter (Figure 12-21, “PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable
Connections”).
Note
PIOU, PIOUS will be 300 or 1200 bps (see Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs); RSIU/RSIS
(DK424 or DK424i), TSIU (DK40i) and WSIU (DK14) can be 1200~9600 bps (see
Program 76).
The PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424), or TSIU (DK40i) contain a call record buffer which
stores call record data (up to 50 calls) when the printed or call accounting device is turned Off, or
when no device is connected to the SMDR port. No further call records are stored after the buffer
is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational, “ERROR BUFFER
OVERFLOW” prints out to indicate the buffer was full, and that some call information may have
been lost.
Note
If PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i) or TSIU (DK40i) are assigned as
SMDR simultaneously in programming, RSIU/RSIS or TSIU will operate as SMDR – not
PIOU, PIOUS. A display of the customer database (Figure 12-22 on Page 12-41) can also
be printed using the SMDR RS-232 port by running Program 97.
To program SMDR, use Program 60. The SMDR port is active only on the PIOU or PIOUS with
the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43), or the RSIU or RSIS Port programmed with code x2 in
Program 76-1.
SMDR sends out special names for the following types of calls:
♦
MSS – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls to stations. MSS prints only on DISA
calls that are answered after the threshold time (set in Program 60-2). If the call is answered
before the threshold time, the call will register as a normal incoming call and the MSS/transfer
portion of the call will not print out.
The call threshold time – the length of time that a call must be in progress before it is
registered by SMDR – can be set for either 1.0 or 10 seconds in Program 60-2.
♦
MODM – Prints on calls to the RMDS or IMDU remote maintenance modem (Station #19).
♦
DISA – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls in which CO lines are accessed for
trunk-to-trunk outside calling.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Note
12-35
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
Figure 12-20, “SMDR Output” shows a sample SMDR printout and describes the contents of each
column. The following examples show call record samples and describe the sequence of events
that generated the call records.
If a subaddress for a call is received or sent on an ISDN call, it is included in the SMDR.
Subaddresses may/may not be received/sent on all ISDN calls.
1
10
20
40
08:14
00:00;22
001 MODM
08:15
00:00;18
00;00
003
200D
08:16
00:00;28
00;08
003
DISA
08:16
00:00;15
* 001
DISA
08:17
00:00;25
003
MSS
08:18
00:00;12
003
205
08:19
00:00;22
003
202
08:19
00:00;16
205
50
60
205
80
90
100
110
120
DISA Call to IMDU
Outgoing DISA Access by Incoming DISA 01
Incoming DISA and Access CO 03 Outgoing
205 Answers DISA Call 12 Seconds After DK Dial Tone
00;06
First Digit (varies)
Last Digit (always this column)
500
08:20
00:00;34
1234567890123456789
003 C 200
200
08:22
00:00;22
7145933700
08:23
00:00;40
7145833700
F
G
First Digit
Last Digit
1234567894563210
1993021977
K
L
093772981
2890
205
4567897
123456987
sw
004 D 200
002
70
MM/DD/ YY, Every Fifty Call Records and at Midnight
11/06/97
001
30
A B C D E
H
I
J
M
A
= Non-ISDN call established, then network disconnects. A = ISDN call established, then DK disconnects. + = ISDN Field Number 1
call established, then network disconnects. S = Start of E911 call. E = End of E911 call.4
B
CO Line Number (001~144).
C
C = Caller ID Call; D = ANI or DNIS Call.
Field Number 5
D
[PDN] of the Station (1~4 digits)2 making/answering a call.
Field Number (7~10)3
E
Primary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/answered the call (1~4 digits). Blank if call is made Field Number (12-15)3
from a CO line button.
F
Time of Day (HH:MM:SS).1
1
Field Number (2~4)3
Field Number (17-21)3
Field Number (23-30)3
G
Call Duration (HH:MM:SS).
H
CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS).
Field Number (32-36)3
I
Station to which the CO line was transferred (1~4 digits).
Field Number (38-41)3
Telephone Number
Field Number (43-63)3
ANI/DN,6 Format:
7145833730 3846
5
Incoming (1~20 digits)
ANI (10 digits), DNIS (2~5 digits), Caller ID Number or ID Code
●
J
●
●
Outgoing Number (1~20 digits)
E911 Station ID (Prg *12)
Field Number (43~52)
K
DNIS NAME5 (0~16 characters); Caller ID Name5 (0~16 characters), or Account Code6 (4~15 digits); LCD User Field Number (65~80)3
Name on E911 Calls
L
Outgoing Subaddress on ISDN call.
Field Number (82~101)
M
Incoming Subaddress on ISDN call.
Field Number (103~122)
1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 1 or 10 secs. (set by Program 60-2) to generate a call record printout.
2. “MSS”: designates a DISA or CF–External CO call to an unanswered station or answered after 1 or 10 secs. (threshold) per
Program 60-2. The call registers as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time. DISA calls always register
5~6 seconds ring before answer duration time.
3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes.
4. A “*” in the first column indicates a disconnected call by the CO Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic Release signal.
Loop start CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled before the CPC is dropped.
5. Answered calls ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data transmits using the SMDR port. Abandoned calls data is not transmitted, but can
be stored in station memory. See Program *51 and *52.
6. See Program 60-1.
7. Strata DK sends a Carriage Return (CR) and Line Feed (LF) ASCII symbol after each line of data.
General Notes
The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit.
Special dial printout: Tone = “T”, Long pause = “L”, Flash = “F”, Pause = “P”
“DISA”: designates a DISA or CF–External call through the system via CO-to-CO connection.
“MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem.
Figure 12-20 SMDR Output
12-36
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
SMDR Printout Examples
Note
SMDR printout “time of day” and month/day/year (MM/DD/YY) is the same as the
system clock time/date set by the station connected to Port 000. SMDR MM/DD/YY
prints out each time 50 call records are generated and at midnight each day.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines
Note
DISA station calls print out as MSS or DISA.
Example 1 – Ring, No Answer DISA Call
Call Sequence A
♦
Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.)
♦
Line 003 returns internal dial tone to caller after one or two ring cycles (5~6 seconds).
♦
Caller does nothing. DH 200 rings but is not answered.
♦
After 32 seconds, call is disconnected.
♦
Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59.
Printout A (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;32 00;06
Printout A (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS
04:59 00:00;25 00;05
Example 2 – DISA Internal Station Call
Call Sequence B
♦
Outside caller rings CO line 003. (CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.)
♦
Line 003 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds).
♦
Caller dials 203.
♦
After 48 seconds from start of call, station 203 answers.
♦
Printout B prints after station 203 answers the call at 4:32.
Note
MSS will not print if the call is answered before the threshold time set in
Program 60-2.
Printout B (Release 1 and 2): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203
Printout B (Release 3 and above): 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203
Example 3 – DISA Outgoing CO Line Call
Note
DISA CO line calls print out as DISA.
Call Sequence C
Outside caller rings CO line 001. (Line 001 is programmed as DISA.)
♦
Line 001 returns intercom dial tone after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds).
♦
Caller dials #7003 to access CO line 003 (outgoing).
♦
Caller dials the DISA security code and receives CO dial tone.
♦
Caller dials the telephone number and converses when the call is answered.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
♦
12-37
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
♦
Caller hangs up.
♦
The call releases, and Printout C prints after the call disconnects at 12:22.
Notes
●
●
If the CO provides the Calling Party Control or Auto Release (AR) signal (see Program 15-0
and 15-3), the call disconnects when either party hangs up. A “*” will follow the CO line
number in Release 1 and 2 and precede the CO line number in Release 3 on the printout if the
call is disconnected by the CPC or AR signal.
If the CPC or AR signal is not sent, the CO lines will remain seized until the DISA disconnect
timer releases the call (see Program 12).
Printout C
Auto Release signal: (Release 1 and 2)
003 MSS 12:20 00:00;02 00:06 (outgoing)
003* DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing)
001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming)
Auto Release signal (Release 3 and above)
003 MSS 12:20 00:00;03 00:05 DISA (outgoing)
*003 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing)
001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming)
Disconnect Timer (Release 1 and 2)
001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming)
003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing)
Disconnect Timer (Release 3 and above)
001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming)
003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing)
Note
The “MSS” entry prints out only if the call was connected after the SMDR threshold, 1.0
or 10 seconds. The threshold is set in Program 60-2.
SMDR Programming
Program 03
♦
The SMDR output is provided by the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest code assigned (41, 42,
or 43).
♦
If using RSIU or RSIS PCB (DK424) in slot 11 for SMDR, set Program 03 code 49 for slot 11.
Notes
●
●
12-38
WSIU (DK14) and TSIU (DK40i) do not require a Program 03 slot assignment.
RSIU/RSIS (DK424) Program 76-1 code x2 overrides PIOU/PIOUS SMDR assignments and
code 49 for RSIU/RSIS.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
Program 60
♦
Item 1: Selects Caller ID, ANI and DNIS or Account Code to be sent out the SMDR Port.
♦
Item 2: Selects the minimum duration (1.0 or 10 seconds) of calls that will be registered by
SMDR. Any call that lasts less than the set time will not be recorded.
♦
Item 3: Selects the records of outgoing calls or outgoing and incoming calls to be printed.
♦
Item 4: Selects the digit length of Account Codes (4 to 15 digits).
♦
Item 5: Allows only long distance call records to be printed.
♦
Item 6: DISA security code.
♦
Item 7: Credit card calling digit length.
Program 76
♦
If WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i), or RSIU/RSIS (DK424) is used to interface to the SMDR
device use Program 76 to make the appropriate WSIU, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS SMDR
programming assignments.
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation
1. Connect the interface cable and the PPTC or PPTC9 adapter from the WSIU (DK14), TSIU
(DK40i), PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i), or SMDR port to the SMDR printer
or call accounting device DB25 or DB9 connector. (See Figure 12-21 and PIOU, PIOUS,
RSIU, or RSIS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more
details.)
2. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to the appropriate bps rate WSIU (DK14), TSIU (DK40i)
– 1200~9600 bps), (PIOU/PIOUS – 300 or 1200 bps, RSIU/RSIS (DK424 or DK424i) as
determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device (Program 76 set WSIU/
TSIU, RSIU/RSIS bps rate).
3. Set the printer or call accounting device to no parity/8-bits/one stop bit.
4. Use Program 60 to set the system for the required SMDR printer/call accounting device
options (See the following section and the Strata DK Programming Manual).
Note
Only the PIOU/PIOUS with the lowest code in Program 03 (41, 42, or 43) or RSIU/RSIS
with Program 76-1 code X2 will provide the SMDR output.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-39
Peripheral Installation
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options
Basic Connection
DK14, DK40i or DK424
WSIU or
TSIU or
RSIU or
RSIS or
PIOU or
PIOUS
DB25 or DB9
Plug
3-pair
Modular
Modular
Cord (7 ft. max)
Jack
Printer
SMDR
Modular
Jack
or Call
Accounting
Device
Data Format:
• ASCII
• 8-bits
• No parity
• 1-stop bit
50 ft. max
24 AWG Wire
Twisted Pair Toshiba
Modularized PPTC1A-5M (25 pin), PPTC-25F, or PPTC9 (9-pin)
RS232, Modular Adapter
Basic Wiring
PIOU, SMDR Jack
Modular Pin No.
PPTC1A-5M Adapter
Modular Pin No.
DB25 Pin No.
RS-232
Lead Name
1 to
6 to
3
RD
2 to
5 to
2
TD
3 to
4 to
6
DSR
4 to
3 to
20
DTR
5 to
2 to
8
CD
6 to
1 to
7
SG
4 Jumper to 5
RTS to CTS
4305
Figure 12-21 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections
12-40
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
System Database Printout Using SMDR Port
System Database Printout Using SMDR Port
If a printer is connected to the SMDR port, customer program information stored in the DK14,
DK40i or DK424 RCTU or DK424i BCU RAM may be printed out for reference (see Figure
12-22).
Program 97
Enables system program data to be printed via the SMDR port. See Program 97 record sheet.
♦
Notes
An SMDR printer must be connected to the SMDR port to use the printout option selected by
Program 97.
●
Call record data is lost when program data is printed out with Program 97.
●
Program Number
Port Number
## System Programming ##
1: SELECT (LED ON)
40
3
1111111
1111111
1111111
3 32
1 111111
1 111111
1 111111
2
1
1
1
40
3
81 001-249 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000
0000000
3 32
0 000000
0 000000
0 000000
2
0
0
0
81 000
## END OF PRINT
5 24
1 111
1 111
1 111
111
144
5 24
0 000
0 000
0 000
000
144
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
0
0
0
0
3
7 16
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
7 136
7 16
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
7 136
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
9 8
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
9 128
9 8
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
9 128
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
CO Line Numbers
Lines 41 ~ 80
Lines 81 ~ 120
CO Line Numbers
##
1523
Figure 12-22 PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS SMDR Port Data Dump Example
Voice Mail Options
Strata DK systems can support a Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, VP or customer-supplied voice
mail system.
Voice mail integration is provided by Strata in-band tones and/or on DK424 (only) the Simplified
Message Desk Interface (SMDI) output of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS SMDI port.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Voice mail systems connect to standard telephone circuits (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/
RSTS, PSTU or PESU). The number of circuits required by each device depends on the
customer’s voice mail requirements, such as the number of voice mail users. To support voice
mail, DK14 KSU must have QCRU3 installed, DK40i KSU must have K4RCU3 or K5RCU
installed and a DK424 RCTU must have an RRCS installed.
12-41
Peripheral Installation
Voice Mail Options
The PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU must be set with Program 03, code 43 or for RSIU/RSIS Program 03,
code 49 and Program 76-1 with code x4 to provide SMDI output. See the SMDI section for more
details about SMDI installation and operation.
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems
Strata DK systems are designed to support the full range of features offered by the Toshiba
Stratagy and/or VP systems. It provides various call routing, message handling, and information
management features, including:
♦
Auto Attendant
♦
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
♦
Message Waiting Indication
♦
Voice Mail Control from Digital and Electronic Telephones
♦
System Monitoring
♦
Feature Integration
A block diagram of voice mail-to-QSTU2, KSTU2, -RSTU2, -RDSU/RSTS, or -PESU connection
is shown in Figure 12-23, “Voice Mail Block Diagram”.
Note
The RRCS must be installed on the RCTU; BRCS on the BCU; and K4RCU3 on the
DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU to allow VM DTMF dialing.
For installation procedures, see:
♦
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for QSTU2
♦
Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KSTU2
♦
Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs for RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU
RCTU
RRCS 4, 8, or 12
MDF
DK14/DK40i
Base KSU
QRCU3 or
K4RCU3
Voice Mail
Machine
QSTU2 (DK14),
KSTU2 (DK40i)
RSTU2/RSTU/PSTU
(CKT 1~8)
or
PESU (CKT 1 & 2)
or
RDSU/RSTS
(CKT 1~4)
25-Pin Cable
(8 circuits per PSTU/RSTU,
2 or 4 circuits per RDSU/RSTS
2 circuits per PESU,
4 circuits per KSTU2)
Standard Telephone
Circuit Tip & Ring
(1 Pair PerVM Port)
4306
Figure 12-23 Voice Mail Block Diagram
12-42
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Voice Mail Options
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or Toshiba VP Programming
Some features of Strata DK system programming were designed for Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK
or VP systems, and do not necessarily apply to customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems.
These programming features are:
Answer (A) Tone
The Strata DK stations send an answer tone to Stratagy or VP when the station answers a VP or
Stratagy call.
Disconnect (D) Tone
The Strata DK stations send a disconnect tone to Stratagy or VP when the station hangs up while
connected to Stratagy or VP. [(D Tone is also sent to release the Stratagy or VP/Auto Attendant
port when an outside loop start CO line caller hangs-up and the CO provides a Calling Party
Control (CPC) or Auto Release (AR) disconnect signal per Program 15-0 and 15-3. Ground start
CO lines will send “D” tone to VM ports anytime an outside caller hangs up.]
Notes
●
●
●
D Tone will not operate in all areas, because some COs fail to provide the CPC or AR signal
on loop start lines.
Both A and D Tones provide more efficient Stratagy or VP port use. Always enable these
options. Both options are enabled by accessing Program 31, and setting LED 15 On.
The CPC or AR signal of some COs is not reliable and may occur during a CO line voice
connection, causing the call to disconnect. If this occurs, disable CPC /AR Hold and CPC/AR
Voice Mail calls on all CO loop start lines with Programs 15-0 and 15-3.
Recall (B) Tone
Stations send a recall (B) tone to Stratagy or VP whenever Stratagy or VP answers a transfer
(camp-on) recall from stations that did not answer a Stratagy or VP blind transfer. (The B tone
notifies Stratagy or VP that the call is a recall and not a new call, allowing Stratagy or VP to
respond with the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to operate, QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2,
RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20 turned On in Program
31.
See “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 12-43 below for more
information.
Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems
Strata DK systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied voice mail
messaging systems. Depending on the voice mail system used, some of the features available with
Toshiba Stratagy or VP (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on
Page 12-42) may be available with the customer-supplied system.
Voice mail (VM) QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU port programming is
accomplished using Programs 31 and 10-2. (See Strata DK Programming Manual for more
details.) VM programming features are as follows:
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming
12-43
Peripheral Installation
Voice Mail Options
VM Groups
This feature groups VM QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU ports together so
that message waiting set/cancel signals appear to originate from the lowest port in the VM group.
All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set in the same VM group (Program
31, LEDs 05~08). The same ports set in the Program 31 VM group should also be set in the
designated VM Distributed Hunt Group in Program *40.
Message Waiting (MW) Set/Cancel
If the VM machine has the ability to dial a code and the appropriate station numbers to set or
cancel the message waiting LEDs on digital and electronic telephones, you can use Program 10-2,
LED 04 to instruct the VM machine to set or cancel a MW LED. See the Strata DK Programming
Manual for more information.
Note
Only dial codes and are set in the VM device configuration; the VM device dials
the station number automatically to set/cancel the MW LED.
No Conference VM
Prevents undesired three-party connections during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set
for No Conference (Program 31, LED 09).
Privacy Override Deny
Prevents stations from overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls (Program 31, LED 18).
End-to-End Signaling
Enables VM port DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for end-to-end signaling (Program
31, LED 17).
Note
The RRCS -4, -8, or -12 must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU to enable Endto-End Signaling.
Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes
Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to station mailboxes. All VM
ports should be set to receive auto ID code (Program 31, LED 16).
Voice Mail Program Checklist
Prior to Programming
Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system parameters to “D” = Strata DK (any model). See
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK, or VP documentation for other parameter settings.
Programming Strata DK for Voice Mail
12-44
♦
Program 92: Initialization clears voice mail auto dial codes.
♦
Program 03: Verifies that a RRCS is installed on the RCTU, K4RCU3 or K5RC4 is installed
on the DK40i KSU, or the QRCU3 is installed in the DK14 to enable the VM device to send
DTMF tones. Also sets PIOU, PIOUS (code 43) or RSIU/RSIS (code 49) to enable the SMDI
port (see Program 76 if installing RSIU or RSIS SMDI port).
♦
Program 04: Assigns station Intercom or Directory numbers [DN] to VM ports (initialized
numbers recommended).
♦
Program 05: First digit of special codes and (initialized numbers recommended).
♦
Program *09: Sets DID extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program 71 is not used.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Voice Mail Options
♦
Program 10-1: If the system is first set for voice, program the VM device to dial the suffix “1”
after station numbers.
♦
Program 10-2: If LED 04 On for set/cancel operation and LED 06 On for the VM to detect 80
millisecond tones. Also set DTMF Tone return or No DTMF return options (LED 11 and 20).
♦
Program 10-3: Sets SMDI options.
♦
Program 13: If the VM device is the message center, set the lowest standard telephone port in
the Program 31 VM group as the message center.
♦
Program 31: Turn LEDs 04, and 15~20 On, and LED 05, 06, 07 or 08 On for the QSTU2,
KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP and
Stratagy VM ports. Turn LED 09 On for VM Auto Attendant “Supervised Transfer” operation;
turn LED 09 Off for VM Auto Attendant “blind transfer” operation and/or VM two CO-line
tandem connection with release 3.2. Do not set these options for telephone station ports.
Note
A, D, and B Tones should be enabled only for VM devices that respond to these tones.
Program *32: Sets lowest standard telephone port if the Program 31 VM group as message
center for stations using VM.
♦
Program 33: Sets the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and PESU ports that are
connected to the VM ports to a hunting sequence, starting with the lowest port hunting to the
next highest port, etc. The last hunt should be to an attendant station. Only use Program 33 if
you ar not using Program *40 to set up a VMDA group.
♦
Program *34: Turns Off LED 01 to disable camp-on BOV tone to a VM port.
♦
Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be On for stations to receive the message waiting
indication (flashing LED) from a VM device. This program also turns On LED 03 for standard
telephone ports that must support standard telephone message waiting lamps. It is advisable to
turn Busy Station Transfer (LED 20) On for all VM/Auto Attendant ports, and to turn Busy
Station Ringing (LED 19) On for all stations that must never be detected as busy when called
by the VM/Auto Attendant port. Also turn LED 03 Off to disable standard telephone MW
signal to VM ports.
♦
Program 36: Sets Fixed Call Forward to VM [DN] per customer requirements.
♦
Program 37: Sets the transfer recall timer for the VM ports to 11~999 seconds minimum to
allow Call Forward-No Answer to work on VM transferred calls. Station users can
individually set CF-NA ring time from 8~60 seconds.
♦
Program 39: Sets the VM-related buttons on the digital and electronic telephones that will be
used to communicate with the VM device.
♦
Program *40: Sets VM standard ports into a Distributed Hunt Group (same ports set as
Program 31 VM group).
♦
Program 71 (1-3): Sets Tie/DID/DNIS extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports if Program
*09 is not used.
♦
Program 71-4: Sets the DNIS VM ID code (for Inband Integration only, not SMDI).
♦
Program 76: Sets RSIU RSIS or TSIU SMDI port.
♦
Programs 81~89: Verifies that the ringing assignments to the VM devices are set per customer
requirements.
♦
Programs 16, 40, 41, 45~48 and 50~56: Verifies that outgoing CO line access is allowed on
VM ports to allow the VM beeper notification feature to operate.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-45
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Voice Mail System Installation
1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in
the system per Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs.
2. Connect the VM system to the selected KSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU or PESU
standard telephone port. (See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring Chapter 3 – DK40i
Installation or Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation.)
3. Program the Strata DK system for the required VM features. (See “Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy
DK, or VP Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 12-42, paragraph 3 and “General Voice Mail
(Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 12-43.)
4. For DK424, ensure that an RRCS -4, -8 or -12 is installed on the RCTU, and verify that the
RCTU code in Program 03 is for RRCS operation.
...or
For DK40i, K4RU3 is installed on the KSU.
For DK14, QRCU is installed.
5. Perform additional VM system programming as applicable (See customer-supplied
installation/programming manuals).
Note
Some VM devices may ring trip when called; in this case, set the square-wave ring voltage
jumper to L (low position) on the PSTU2, KSTU2, PESU or PSTU2 PCB connected to the
VM device. This is not necessary on RSTU2 and RDSU/RSTS PCBs because they have a
sine-wave ring generator.
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
The Strata DK supports two types of Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone
users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same digital station port and wire pair
while communicating on a voice call.
One unit, called the integrated DIU (RCPI-DI, PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2), becomes part of the digital
telephone, replacing the telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small self-contained unit called the
stand-alone DIU (PDIU-DS). Each RPCI or PDIU is powered by the digital port to which it is
connected (see Figure 10-4 on Page 10-6 for wiring requirements).
The RPCI-DI can operate in two modes: Telephony Application Program Interface Mode (TAPI)
or Data Communication mode. The RCPI operating mode is controlled by the PC connected to the
RPCI-DI. This section only covers the RCPI-DI data communications mode. See the PC/DIU User
Guide for information on changing the RPCI-DI mode.
Notes
●
●
“Digital Ports” include the PDKU and RDSU digital station ports.
2000-series digital telephones require RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 and 1000-series telephones
require PDIU-DI and are not compatible with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2.
Both RPCIs and DIUs can be connected to standard Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS232 asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are divided into two categories: data
communication equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE). Common DCE devices are
modems and some printers; common DTE devices are personal computers, ASCII terminals, and
some printers.
12-46
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI operate like a DCE and connect directly to DTE devices using
standard RS-232 cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs are configured, the PDIU-DS
can either operate like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate like a DCE device and
connect to DTE devices. In most applications, DTE and DCE devices exchange data between each
other via the standard RS-232 cable connection.
When in the data communications modes, RPCIs and DIUs can function with DCE and DTE
devices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However, keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a
PC or terminal connected to a RPCI or DIU) is limited to 9600 bps. RPCI or DIU data
transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the RPCI or DIU receives once it is in the
command state; if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer (default) mode, the
transmission speed is transparent and can be up to 19.2 kbps.
Important!
To use the RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT commands, communications
software or a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used. AT
commands cannot be issued from the computer’s operating system prompt.
RPCI-DI Dual Mode
RPCI-DI can operate in the data communication or Telephone Application Program Interface
(TAPI) mode.
♦
When in the Data Command mode, send the HEX (fØ), enter ALT (Hold) + 240 to the RPCI to
switch it to the Data Communications mode. (Unplugging the telephone cord and then
reconnecting it also resets the RPCI to the Data Communications mode.)
♦
When in the TAPI mode, send (ATCØ) to the RPCI to switch it to the Data Command mode.
In the TAPI mode, a constant stream of data is sent from the RPCI to the PC COM port.
♦
RPCI-DI mode switching should be performed automatically by the application programs
running on the PC connected to the RPCI-DI.
(See Chapter 15 – Computer Telephony Integration for instructions on configuring your PC for
TAPI software.)
Common DIU Connections
The block diagram in Figure 12-24 illustrates common RPCI and DIU data communications
connections. In this example, RPCI-DIs or PDIU-DIs are connected to PCs (PC1 and PC2), and
PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial printer and modems. PC users can transfer files internally,
print files on the same printer, and access the modem pool to send/receive data to/from an external
personal computer or dial up data service.
Installation instructions for these devices are provided, starting from “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIUDS SW1 DIP Switch Information” on Page 12-59 through “PDIU-DS Disassembly and
Assembly” on Page 12-64. Call paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls are provided in
“RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests” on Page 12-65, paragraph
2 through paragraph 6. Step-by-step data calling procedures are provided in the PC/Data Interface
User Guide.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the RPCIs and DIUs.
This is accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a digital telephone dial pad or from a PC
keyboard using standard AT dial commands. RPCI-DIs and PDIU-DIs share the same intercom or
[PDN]/ports with the digital telephone to which they are connected, while PDIU-DSs have their
own. The intercom and data call LEDs on the digital telephone initiates a voice or data call,
respectively. When dialing from a keyboard with AT commands, ATD is typed for voice calls, and
ATDD for data calls.
12-47
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Portable PC 1
Strata DK40i/DK424 KSU
2
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI
(200)
RS-2321
MDF
Digital
(Port 000)
Portable PC 2
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI
(201)
1
RS-232
MDF2
Dial-up
Computer
Service
Digital
(Port 001)
Serial
Printer
MDF2
1
TOSHIBA
Telephone
Line X
DIGITAL
(Port 003)
1
RS-232
DIU
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
PDIU-DS
(203)
RS-232
Line Z
2
MDF
MODEM
(208)
MDF
RSTU2
PSTU
RDSU
RSTS
(Port 008)
Modem
Public
Telephone
Network
CO
LINE 1
DIGITAL
(Port 004)
1
RS-232
DIU
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
PDIU-DS
(204)
Modem
Pool
MDF2
Modem 1
(219)
Telephone
Line Y
Standard
Telephone
RS-2321
RSTU2
PSTU
RDSU
RSTS
(Port 009)
Modem
DIGITAL
(Port 005)
1
RS-232
DIU
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
PDIU-DS
(205)
Portable
2
PC
4307
1. RS-232 cable and connector information is provided in Figures 12-26 to 12-32.
2. See Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation and Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for PC, data interface and modem MDF
station wiring.
Figure 12-24 DK Data Communications Installation Example Block Diagram
12-48
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
EIA Interface Leads (Signals)
Both DIUs operate with 10 standard EIA RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data
is transmitted and received. RPCIs and DIUs connect to serial data devices with standard RS-232
cables, available from telephone supply stores (see Figures 12-24~12-29 and 12-30). The RPCIDI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS requires 10 signals for some applications, but can function with eight using
modular cords and connectors with RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If uncertain which
signals are necessary for an application, all 10 should be connected.
See Figure 12-32, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information” for more
information.
Important!
♦
The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI is always a DCE device; the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE,
depending on how its internal jumpers (1~9) are configured.
♦
In the descriptions below, when a signal is On, its potential is about seven volts positive
relative to signal ground (pin 7); when a signal is Off, it is about 7 volts negative relative to
the signal ground (pin 7).
Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1)
The FG signal (EIA circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which is bonded to the PDIU-DI/
PDIU-DS PCB. If required by local codes, the FG should be connected to external ground.
Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7)
The SG signal (EIA circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and
data device signals and must be wired for all applications.
Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2)
DTE devices transmit and DCE devices receive data on the TD lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the
DTE device can transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and DTR signals (all discussed
below) must be On. The TD signal is Off in the idle state.
Receive Data (RD, Pin 3)
The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead (EIA circuit BB); the DTE
receives data on the RD.
Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4)
Some DTE devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to the DCE device when they are ready to
transmit data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP
switch SW1-4 should be set On to inform the RPCI or DIU. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may
use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these cases DIP switch SW1-4 should be Off.
Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
The DCE device sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which indicates that it is prepared to
transmit data to the line side. The DCE device sends this signal only when it receives the RTS
signal from the DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy
type flow control; in these cases, DIP switch SW1-4 should be Off.
12-49
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6)
When connected to the communication channel and prepared to exchange control characters to
initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal (EIA circuit CC) to the DTE
device. If the PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set On, DSR will be On continuously; if the switch is set
Off, DSR follows DTR (if DSR is On, DTR is On, etc.) SW1-2 should be Off in most cases.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8)
The DCE device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when receiving the carrier signal on the line
side. Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE devices require that the DCD be On. If the
carrier signal is removed by the remote end or lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE
notifies the DTE device by an Off condition with the DCD signal. The PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is
set On to set the DCD On continuously. If set Off, the DCD signal will only be On when
connection between two DIUs is established and Off when a connection is not established. SW1-2
is set Off when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR signals for Ready/Busy flow control.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20)
The DTE device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to the DCE device, prompting the DCE
device to open the communication line. The line is closed and the call disconnected when the DTE
device quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent any time to indicate that the DTE is ready
to transmit or receive data. DIP switch SW1-2 should be set Off in most cases.
Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22)
The RI signal (EIA circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE device. Whenever the DCE
device receives a ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI signal On. If RPCI or DIU DIP
switch SW1-3 is set On, the RI signal will be continuously On if ringing; if the switch is set Off,
the RI signal will be one second On/three seconds Off when the RPCI or DIU detects ringing
signal.
12-50
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI
(Functions like a DCE)
Personal Computer or
Toshiba Portable (DTE)
Pin Designations
COM Port
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pin Designations
7
8
PDIU-DI
Pin #
9
DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI
Name
Name
Rear view of asynchronous (serial)
communication interface connector (DB9)
of PC or Toshiba Portable.
DB9 Female
Connector
DB9 Male
Connector
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
22
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
RI
Rear view of RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DB25,
RS-232 female connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB25 Female
Connector
DB25 Male
Connector
22
20
22
20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB9
Pin #
Name
DB25
Pin #
1
DCD
8
2
RD
3
3
TD
2
4
DTR
20
5
SG
7
6
DSR
6
7
RTS
4
8
CTS
5
9
RI
22
PC modem style (serial) DB25
to DB9, RS-232 cable. Pin to
pin connections are
confiqured as a straight cable,
not as a null modem cable
(50 ft max, 24AWG; customersupplied).
Notes
Some RS-232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers.
The computer receives data on Pin 2 (RD) and sends data on Pin 3 (TD).
Figure 12-25 RPCI-DI to 25-Pin to 9-Pin COM Port
Strata DK I&M
5/00
1527
Peripheral Installation
•
•
12-51
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
PDIU-DI
Pin #
Name
1
2
Personal Computer
or ASCII Terminal
(Functions like a DTE)
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI
(Functions like a DCE)
DB25 Pin Designations
DB25 Pin Designations
3
4
5
6
7
20
8
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
Rear view of personal computer
or ASCII terminal DB25,
RS-232 connector
PDIU-DI
Pin #
22
RI
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
20
22
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
Name
Rear view of RPCI-DI or
PDIU-DI DB25, RS-232
female connector
DB25 Male
Connector
6
RI
DB25 Female
Connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20
22
22
20
20
22
22
20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB25 Female
Connector
DB25 Male
Connector
DB25
Pin #
Name
DB25
Pin #
8
DCD
8
3
RD
3
2
TD
2
20
DTR
20
7
SG
7
6
DSR
6
4
RTS
4
Note The PC/ASCII terminal
5
CTS
5
receives data on Pin 3
(RD) and transmits data
on Pin 2 (TD).
22
RI
22
1
FG
1
RS-232 Cable
PC modem style (serial) DB25
to DB25 (M/F) RS-232 cable
(50 ft max, 24 AWG, customer
-supplied).
1528
Figure 12-26 RPCI-DI/PDIU/PDIU-DS to 25-Pin to 25-Pin COM Port
12-52
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
PDIU-DS
(Configured in the "Connect to DTE" Mode:
P1 ~ P9 = A-B SO PDIU Functions like a DCE)
Toshiba Serial Printer
(Functions like a DTE)
DB25 Pin Designations
Printer
Pin #
Name
1
2
3
4
5
FG TD RD RTS
N/C
6
22
20
8
DSR SG DCD DTR
Rear view of printer
or ASCII terminal DB25,
RS-232 connector.
8 7 6
7
DB25 Pin Designations
PDIU-DS
Pin #
22
RI
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,
RS-232 female connector
DB25 Female
Connector
6
7
8
20
22
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
4 3 2 1
RI
DB25 Female
Connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20
22
20
20
22
20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB25 Male
Connector
DB25 Male
Connector
DB25
Pin #
Name
DB25
Pin #
8
DCD
8
3
RD
3
2
TD
2
20
DTR
20
7
SG
7
6
DSR
6
4
RTS
4
N/C
CTS
5
N/C
RI
22
1
FG
1
RS-232 Cable
Notes
•
•
The printer receives data on Pin 3
(RD) and transmits data on Pin 2
(TD).
The PDIU-DS should be in the
connect-to-DTE mode (P1 ~ P9
are strapped A-B), so that it
transmits data on Pin 3 (RD) and
receives data on Pin 2 (TD).
(50 ft max, 24 AWG;
customer supplied).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Figure 12-27 PDIU-DS to Toshiba Printer, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections
1529
12-53
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
PDIU-DS
(Configured in the "Connect to
Modem" Mode, P1 ~ P9 = B-C,
So it functions like a DTE)
Hayes-Compatible Smart Modem
(Functions like a DCE)
Modem
Pin #
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20
8
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
Rear view of modem DB25
connector
22
PDIU-DS
Pin#
RI
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22
RI
Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector
DB25 Female
Connector
DB25 Female
Connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22
20
22
20
22
20
22
20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB25 Male
Connector
DB25 Male
Connector
DB25
Pin #
Name
DB25
Pin #
8
DCD
8
3
RD
3
TD
2
2
RS-232 Cable
(Open)
20
The following commands
should be sent to the modem:
ATS0=1: Auto Answer
ATE0: Disable character echo in
command state
ATQ0: Modem returns result codes
AT&C1: Track presence of data
carrier
AT&D2: Hang up and assume
command state with DTR on
to off transition
20
8
FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR
7
DTR
20
SG
7
(Open)
6
DSR
6
(50 ft. max., 24 AWG,
customer-supplied)
4
RTS
4
For PDIU-DS port:
5
CTS
5
22
RI
22
1
FG
1
Program 20: LEDs 01, 04, 17
ON. All other LEDs OFF. LED
02 should be set ON after the
AT commands
1530
Notes
●
●
●
Modem receives data on pin 2 (TD) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD).
The PDIU-DS must be in the Connect to Modem mode (P1~P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits data on
pin 2 (TD) and receives data on pin 3 (RD).
For the above cable modifications, modem AT commands, and Program 20 settings are required for
proper call release when modems disconnect. With this configuration, the PDIU-DS “READY” light will not
light until modems at both ends establish communication (DCD is detected).
Figure 12-28 PDIU-DS to Hayes-Type Smart Modem, RS-232 Connector/Cable Connections
12-54
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Connection Example 1
Digital Telephone
PDIU-DI Base
or
RPCI-DI Base
Personal Computer (PC) or
Toshiba Portable
1
Type 1 Modular Adapter
1
Type B Modular Cord (Crossed)
(50 ft max, 24AWG)
1
Type 2 Modular Adapter
IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.
Connection Example 2
Personal Computer (PC)
Digital Telephone
PDIU-DI Base
or
RPCI-DI Base
1
Type 3 Modular Adapter
1
Type A Modular Cord (Straight)
(50 ft max, 24AWG)
1
Type 2 Modular Adapter
IMPORTANT! Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.
Connection Example 3
Stand-Alone DIU
PDIU-DS
Toshiba P321SL or Similar
Standard Type Serial Printer
1
Type 2 Modular Adapter
1
Type A Modular Cord
(50 ft max, 24AWG)
Type 2 Modular Adapter
4333
1. See Figure 10-31 for detailed pin-out information of modular cords and adapters.
Notes
●
●
●
Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem.
Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications
(auto-dialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is
normally required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figure 12-24 on Page 12-48 and Figure 12-27 on
Page 12-53).
In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (P1 ~ P9, strapped A-B).
All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied.
Figure 12-29 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cable/RJ45 Adapter Connections
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
●
12-55
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Type 1
RJ45 TO DB9 (Female) Adapter
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
N/C
RJ45
DSR
RTS
RD
DCD
TD
GND
CTS
RI
6
7
2
1
3
5
8
9
Lead
Name
DB9
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
TYPE 2
RJ45 TO DB25 (Male) Adapter
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N/C
RJ45
Lead
Name
DB25
CTS
SG
DTR
TD
DCD
RD
RTS
DSR
RI
5
7
20
2
8
3
4
6
22
2
1
N/C
RJ45
Lead
Name
DB25
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20
TYPE 3
RJ45 TO DB25 (Female) Adapter
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
CTS
SG
DTR
TD
DCD
RD
RTS
DSR
RI
5
7
20
2
8
3
4
6
22
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
20
RJ45 Straight Through
Front
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TYPE A
RJ45 Flat Modular
Cord (Straight)
1
Front
1
RJ45 Cross Pinning
Front
TYPE B
RJ45 Flat Modular
Cord (Crossed)
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
Front
8
Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer-supplied)
1
1532
Figure 12-30 RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cords and RJ45/RS-232 Adapter Pin Connections
12-56
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
PDIU-DS (Front View)
PDIU-DS (Rear View)
Modular jack for
connecting 1- or 2-pair
to digital circuit
DIU
READY
CONNECT
1234
DNTA
ON
POWER
Connect LED
Ready LED
Power LED
SW1: See Notes for
Switch Options
A-B
B-C
See Notes
DTE
MODEM
RTS
RD
TD
FG
CTS
DSR
SG
DCD
Perception
13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P5
P1
P2
P7
P4
P3
P6
P8
P9
ABC
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
RI
DTR
P1 ~ P9 located on PCB inside
of PDIU-DS Unit (see Notes).
RS-232, DB25
(Female) Connector
Signal Direction and Function of P1 ~ P9
PDIU-DS Connected to DTE
Signal
Abbreviation
Signal Name/
Function
PDIU-DS
Pin NO.
Signal
Direction
Function:
A-B
(DTE Mode)
PDIU-DS Connected to DCE
Function:
B-C
(Modem Mode)
Signal
Direction
FG
Frame Ground
1
SG
Signal Ground
7
TD
Transmit DATA
2
DTE
DIU
P1
Modem
DIU
P1
RD
Receive DATA
3
DTE
DIU
P2
Modem
DIU
P2
RTS
Request to Send
4
DTE
DIU
P6
Modem
DIU
P6
CTS
Clear to Send
5
DTE
DIU
P7/P5
Modem
DIU
P7/P5
DSR
Data Set Ready
6
DTE
DIU
P4
Modem
DIU
P4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
20
DTE
DIU
P3
Modem
DIU
P3
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
8
DTE
DIU
P8
Modem
DIU
P8
RI
Ring Indicator
22
DTE
DIU
P9
Modem
DIU
P9
1533
Notes
Mode select (P1~P9) “A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE).
●
Mode select (P1~P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE).
●
Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU-DS in Strata DK Systems.
●
●
See Figure 12-32 for SW1~4 DIP switch options and Figure 12-33, “DK PDIU-DS
Disassembly/Assembly Diagram” to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DS.
Some RS-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer.
Figure 12-31 PDIU-DS Jumper Plug Options/RS-232 Connector Information
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
●
12-57
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
DIP Switch Options
The RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a four-control DIP switch which can be
configured for signaling options. The switch is located on the bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the
back panel of the PDIU-DS (see Figure 12-32).
SW1-1
Normally, this switch is set On to disconnect devices from RPCIs or DIUs automatically. The
connection is maintained if data is exchanged between the device and the RPCI or DIU within
eight to nine minute intervals. If SW1-1 is Off on the called and calling DIU, data calls will remain
connected until released manually.
SW1-2
This switch is placed in the On position when the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured
like a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR On continuously. If SW1-2 is Off, DSR follows DTR and
DCD will be On only when the DIU is connected on a data call to another DIU. SW1-2 should be
Off on a RPCI DIU when it is connected to a personal computer that uses a communications
software program to establish data calls with AT commands; and whenever PDIU-DS is connected
to a modem.
SW1-3
The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal
to the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the RPCI or PDIU is receiving an incoming call.
SW1-3 should be On for the DIU to send RI steady, and Off to send at one second On/three
seconds Off intervals.
SW1-4
This switch is placed in the On position if the computer does not output the RTS signal or when
connected to a modem that tracks the DCD signal (modem set with AT&C1). Sometimes, the DTE
device may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SW1-4 should be Off.
In this case the DCD signal of the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the called DTE and the
DCD signal of the called DTE is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In this case a signal
which stops the DTE from transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should be cross-connected to
the RPCI’s or DIU’s DCD signal. Consult the DTE device or application software documentation
to determine which type of flow control is required. If the DIU-DS is connected to a modem that
tracks carrier detect (AT&C1) SW1-4 should be On.
12-58
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
OFF
DIP Switch
1234
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI (Bottom View)
Access from Bottom
— Outside of PDIU-DI
DIP Switch SW1 Back View
(Access from Back
— Outside of PDIU-DS)
1234
DNTA
Directory Tray:
Remove from original
Telephone Base and
Install on PDIU-DI Base
DB25 Connector (Female)
For DTE or DCE RS-232 Cable
Connection
ON
PDIU-DS (Rear View)
Modular Connector for
Digital Port Connection
PDIU-DI Digital Telephone Base
PDIU-DI and -DS SW1 DIP Switch (1 ~ 4) Functions
General Notes
•
•
•
•
See Subsection “EIA
Interface Leads (Signals)”
and “DIP Switch Options”
for more details regarding
SW1 option settings.
When a PDIU-DS is
connected to a modem that
tracks the DCD signal
(AT&C1) SW1(4) must be
ON.
If using Toshiba Personal
Computers and Toshiba
Printers using X-ON/XOFF flow control, set
SW1(4) ON on PDIU-DIs
and -DSs.
SW1(2) should be off when
PDIU-DS is connected to a
modem.
Switch
Function
Initial
Position
Forced hang up when DIU does not detect
space signal on TD or RD for about 8 to 9
minutes
On: enable (auto-disconnect)1
Off: disable
OFF
SW1
(2)
DCD, DSR control
On: continuous on
Off: DSR depends on DTR (DCD is on
during communication state)
OFF
SW1
(3)
RI control
On: RI is on continuously during ringing
state
Off: RI is 1 sec ON/3 sec OFF during
ringing state
OFF
SW1
(4)
RTS control
ON: DTE doesn't have RTS signal
Off: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy
flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD)
OFF
1534
1. RPCI or DIU port must have LED 02 On in Program 20 to enable auto disconnect.
Figure 12-32 RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
SW1
(1)
12-59
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI to PC Installation
The RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE device; it transmits data on the Receive
Data lead (RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead (TD). Most personal computers
function as a DTE device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and receive data on the RD lead.
Note
The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device
using a specially configured RS-232 cable or adapter; but this application is rarely
required.
➤ To install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to a DTE device, PC, or ASCII terminal
1. Install the digital telephone that is to be equipped with RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI per the
instructions in Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus and the drawing in Chapter 8 – DK40i/DK424
Universal Slot PCB Wiring.
2. Install the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI under the digital telephone per the instructions in Chapter 11
– Station Apparatus.
Note
The RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIUDS, it has no internal jumpers.
3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI’s DB-25 female
connector and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial communications port connector
(COM port).
Important!
Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communication port interface documentation
for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer.
The number of EIA RS-232 signals required (8, 9, or 10 wires) depends on the
application. When EIA signal requirements are not known, connect the 10 EIA
signals listed in “EIA Interface Leads (Signals)” on Page 12-49. Figures 12-32 and
12-30 provide diagrams for connecting RS-232 cables between PDIU-DIs and PCs/
Toshiba portables.
4. Set the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. See Figure
12-32, “RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, PDIU-DS SW1 DIP Switch Information”.
RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI Programming
Configure the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI for DTE-type connection in Program 20 and the data button
assignments of the digital telephone connected to the PDIU-DI in Program 39.
♦
12-60
Program 20
♦
The port number entered for the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI in Program 20 is the port number of
the digital telephone to which the RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI is connected.
♦
LED 01: Should always be On for RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI ports.
♦
LED 02: Should be On for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports, unless the PC user will never uses
RPCI or DIU AT commands (other than ATDD, ATDT, and ATD) and never requires the
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI to send result codes to display on the PC display screen. Frequently,
it is difficult to determine the full extent of these requirements; so Toshiba recommends
turning LED 02 On. See the PC/Data Interface User Guide for DIU AT commands and
result codes.
♦
LEDs 03 and 04: Should be Off for RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI ports.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
♦
♦
LED 05: Should be On if the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access
codes to make external calls or to insert a pause following RPCI DIU access of an outside
line.
♦
LED 10: Enables Caller ID and ANI information to be sent from RCPI-DI to the
connected PC.
♦
LED 11: Enables DNIS information to be sent from the RCPI-DI to the connected PC.
♦
LEDs 17~20: Used to establish data security groups. RPCI and PDIU stations are only
allowed to make calls to RPCI and PDIUs in the same assigned data group.
Program 39: The following data call buttons can be assigned digital telephones equipped with
PDIU-DIs: 'DWD&DOO, and 0RGHP. Assign 6' buttons to data devices as required. Do not
assign '66 buttons to data devices; '66 buttons are used for voice calls only.
PDIU-DS to Printer Installation
Strata DK enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connected to stand-alone
data interface units (PDIU-DSs). Digital telephones equipped with RPCI or PDIU-DIs can share
access to these printers. Serial printers operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the vendor;
the PDIU-DS can be connected to either type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE device.
(The PDIU-DS comes from the factory configured as a DCE device.)
➤ To connect the PDIU-DS to a serial printer
Notes
●
●
Only serial printers (not parallel) that conform to EIA RS-232 signaling requirements can be
connected to PDIU-DSs.
In rare applications, it may be desired to connect printers to PDIU-DIs. See the printer’s
installation instructions.
1. Consult the serial printer’s documentation and determine if the printer operates as a DCE or
DTE device. Also, see Figures 12-31 and 12-33.
If the printer is a DCE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and configure it to operate like a
DTE device by placing the jumper plugs (P1~P9) in the “B-C” (MODEM) position.
Reassemble the PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom label for future reference.
If the printer is a DTE device: You may not need to disassemble the PDIU-DS, since it comes
factory-direct configured as a DCE device. However, if uncertain, disassemble the PDIU-DS
and verify that jumper plugs (P1~P9) are in the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble the PDIUDS and mark “A-B” on the bottom label for future reference.
2. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in
Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus.
3. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Figures
12-27 and 12-29 for an example printer cable connection).
5. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the application. See Figure 12-32 for DIP switch
locations.
Note
Strata DK I&M
If using Toshiba computers and printers with X-On/X-Off flow control, set SW1-(4) “On”
on the DIU connected to the computer and DIU connected to the printer.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
4. If Steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS light when the
printer is turned on and ready.
12-61
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Important!
Check the printer’s serial documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The
requirements vary with each manufacturer.
PDIU-DS Programming
♦
♦
Program 20: Configures the PDIU-DS to connect to a serial printer (see Strata DK
Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets).
♦
LED 01: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports.
♦
LED 02: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers.
♦
LED 03: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type printers.
♦
LED 04: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports.
♦
LED 05: Should be Off for PDIU-DS ports connected to printers.
♦
LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to enable or disable digital telephones
equipped with PDIU-DIs access to PDIU-DS ports connected to a printer. DIU stations
can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group.
Program 22: Configures PDIU-DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS connected to the same
printer/server.
PDIU-DS to Modem Installation
Strata DK enables asynchronous-type (not synchronous) modems to be connected to PDIU-DSs.
This enables RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI equipped digital telephones that are connected to personal
computers, terminals, and other devices to share access to a modem or modem pool.
Important!
Modems must be “smart modems” that respond to AT commands and return result
codes. Modems are customer-supplied.
A modem(s) can be accessed internally for outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data
calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIU-DSs that are connected to them must be
configured to operate like a DTE device.
In the example shown in Figure 12-24 on Page 12-48, the line side of the two modems are
connected to RDSU/RSTS, RSTU2, PSTU, or PESU ports to establish a modem pool; however,
the line side of modems can be connected directly to a dedicated CO line.
If modems are connected directly to telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of CO line
voice calls to system modems (data call) do not function as described in the PC/Data Interface
User Guide.
For efficient operation and the best use of CO lines and modems, Toshiba recommends
configuring modems to RSTU2, PSTU or RDSU/RSTS standard station ports in a modem pool.
The RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIU-DS with standard RS-232 cables; the
PDIU-DS line side (RJ11 connector) always connects to its own individual digital port.
➤ To configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device
1. Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper plugs P1~P9 in the “B-C” position (MODEM).
2. Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on the bottom identification label for future
reference. (See Figures 12-31 and 12-32.)
➤ To install modems to PDIU-DSs
1. Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Chapter
10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.
12-62
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
2. Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure 12-29,
“RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Modular Cable/RJ45 Adapter Connections” shows an example
PDIU-DS to “smart modem” RS-232 connection.
Important!
All 10 PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should be connected to the modem. Consult the
modem’s documentation for correct RS-232 pin requirements; the requirements may
vary with each manufacturer.
3. Connect the line side of the modem to a RDSU/RSTS, RSTUS2, or PESU standard telephone
circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult the modem’s documentation to install it to a CO line).
Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring provides station port wiring information.
4. Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1~4) for the desired application. (See Figures 12-31 and
12-32.)
Note
If the modem tracks carrier detect (DCD, AT&C1), SW1(4) should be On, and SW1(2)
should be Off when PDIU-DS is connected to a modem.
5. Configure the PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous modem using Programs 20, 21, 22, 31
and 33.
PDIU-DS Programming
Note
♦
See the Strata DK Programming Manual for instructions and record sheets.
Program 20
♦
LED 01: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports
♦
LED 02: Should be On for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems, enabling the use of AT
commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to
modems connected to PDIU-DSs.
♦
LED 03: Should be set On for PDIU-DS ports connected to modems.
♦
LED 04: Should always be On for PDIU-DS ports.
♦
LED 05: Should be Off if the system is installed behind a PBX/Centrex that uses access
codes to place outgoing trunk calls.
♦
LED 06: Should be Off for DIUs connected to modems. The modem cable must be
modified per Figure 12-29 or Figure 12-37, or the PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs must be
set per the instructions in the DKi Admin/DKi Backup User Guide.
♦
LEDs 17~20: Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones
equipped with PDIU-DIs access to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a modem. DIU
stations can only make data calls to DIUs in the same data security group.
Program 21: For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign the digital, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, and
PESU ports that will be connected to the PDIU-DS and modem, respectively.
♦
Program 22/33: If more than one modem/PDIU-DS pair is configured as a system modem
pool, the PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each other in Program 22. The modem RSTU,
PSTU, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU ports should be set to hunt each other in Program 33.
♦
Program 31: LED 18 should be turned On for all RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU station ports
that are connected to modems. This provides data security by preventing executive or privacy
override of modem calls.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-63
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Modem Setup Recommendations
1. Always make sure the escape sequence of the telephone PDIU-DI is default (+++).
2. Send AT command ATS2=43 to PDIU-DI.
3. Use a modified modem cable for the connection (see Figures 12-29 and 12-37) or reset the
PDIU-DS internal jumper plugs per the instructions in the DK Admin User Guide.
4. Send the following AT commands to the modem pool modem: ATS0=1, ATE0, ATQ0,
AT&C1, and AT&D2.
PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly
To set the jumper plugs (P1~P9) on the PCB inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the
PDIU-DS must be disassembled.
➤ To disassemble the PDIU-DS
1. Remove the four non-captive
screws on the bottom of the unit
(Figure 12-33); these screws are
needed in Step 3 of the
assembling procedure.
2. Remove the bottom panel.
3. Remove the PCB inside the
PDIU-DS by lifting the back
panel from its side grooves.
Side Grooves
4. Turn the PCB over and set the
jumper plugs (P1~P9):
W3
Ex.
Power
Perception
W1
W2
♦
If the PDIU-DS is connected
to a DTE, set the plugs to
the “A-B” position.
♦
If the PDIU-DS is connected
to a DCE device, set the
plugs to the “B-C” position.
Note
DTE/Modem
Jumper Plugs
P1~P9
SW1
PDIU-DS
PCB
Bottom
Panel
Do not cut PDIU-DS
PERCEPTION jumper wire
for Strata DK installations.
➤ To assemble the PDIU-DS
1. Position the back panel to the
PCB (Figure 12-33).
2. Slide the back panel down into
its side grooves.
1535
Figure 12-33 DK PDIU-DS Disassembly/Assembly Diagram
3. Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the four non-captive screws.
Notes
12-64
●
Do not cut the Perception jumper wire for Strata DK installation.
●
Jumper wire is for Perception applications only.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
RPCI-DI/PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Data Communication Installation Tests
The following material provides tests for five RCPI/DIU data call applications:
♦
PC-to-PC
♦
PC-to-Printer
♦
Internal PC-to-External PC
♦
External PC-to-Internal PC
♦
PC Auto Dial Voice Call
These test routines only check the data communications mode of the RPCI-DI; they do not check
the RPCI-DI API mode. The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided as an
example. When performing the test, use the appropriate port and telephone numbers for the
system.
Each of these tests can be conducted with manual dialing from a digital telephone’s dial pad or AT
dialing from a personal computer’s keyboard; however, only the preferred method of dialing for
application is presented.
PC-to-PC Test with AT Commands
Note
See Figure 12-34, “DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands” for additional
information.
1. Set RPCI or DIU programming.
♦
Program 20: Ports 000 and 01. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 39: Ports 000 and 01. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons
should be provided.
♦
Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Registers.
2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with communications software and that the parameters
of each PC and its communication software are set to the same values (data transmission rate,
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).
Note
If using an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the Data
Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the data
communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240 while
holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode, ATC0
will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode.
3. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD201 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital
letters).
The data call LEDs light on DKT 200 and 201.
♦
PC 1 displays: CONNECT XXXX.
♦
PC 2 displays: RING.
PDIU-DIs or RPCI-DIs are now in the communication mode.
Note
Strata DK I&M
Typing from the PC 1 keyboard appears on the PC 2 monitor and vice versa.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-65
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
➤ To terminate the call
➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button.
...or
1. Type XXX from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK.
XXX = PDIU-DI escape sequence (see “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation” on Page 12-62).
2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 3.
PC 1 and PC 2 screens display, NO CARRIER. The data call LEDs on each DKT are Off.
Portable PC 1
Strata DK
RS-232
MDF
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI (200 )
Digital
(Port 000)
Portable PC 2
RS-232
MDF
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI (201 )
Digital
(Port 001)
1536
Figure 12-34 DK PC to PC Test Call Using AT Commands
PC-to-Printer Test using Manual Dialing
Note
See Figure 12-35 for additional information.
1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming.
♦
Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 20: Port 003. LEDs 01, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be
provided.
♦
Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Registers.
2. Make sure the PC is configured to print data from its serial port (the PC COM port connected
to DKT/PDIU-DI or DKT/RPCI-DI port 001). This is normally accomplished using the DOS
MODE commands.
12-66
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Note
If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the
Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the
data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240
while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX f0). If in the data communication mode,
ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode.
3. Using the manufacturer’s documentation, make sure the communication parameters (data
speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of the PC COM port match the printer’s serial interface
parameters.
➤ To connect the PC to the printer
➤ Press 'DWD&DOO + on the DKT.
CONNECT on the PDIU-DS lights. The connection between the PC and the printer is completed,
as shown in Figure 12-35. (PDIU-DS 203 is in the communication mode).
Note
If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the connection is not complete; press 'DWD5HOHDVH and
Step 3 again.
Operate the PC to print data as required.
Portable PC
Strata DK
RS-232
MDF
DKT/PDIU-DI
(201)
TOSHIB
Serial
Printer
A
RS-232
Digital
(Port 001)
MDF
Digital
(Port 003)
DIU
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
PDIU-DS
(203)
1537
Figure 12-35 DK PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual Dialing
➤ To terminate the call
➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button.
Note
See Figure 12-36 for additional information.
1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming.
Strata DK I&M
♦
Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Internal PC-to-External PC Test using AT Commands
12-67
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
♦
Program 21: Digital port 004 assigned with KSTU port 008.
♦
Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456), 'DWD5HOHDVH(454), and 0RGHP (455)
buttons should be provided.
♦
Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS S-Registers.
2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the
communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the
same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).
Note
With an RPCI-DI, you may need to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the data
communication mode before proceeding with Step 3.
3. To place the RPCI into the data communication mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock
On, and hold the Alt key down while typing 240 (this is HEX F0).
If the RPCI is in data communication mode, ATC0 switches back to TAPI mode.
4. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDD204 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital
letters).
♦
The data call LED on DKT 204 is On.
♦
The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 204 is On.
♦
The screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission
speed set by the communications software.
5. The PC 1 and PDIU-DS 204 are connected (PDIU-DS 204 is in the communication mode).
PC 1 is now linked directly to the RS-232 side of the internal modem and can issue AT
commands to the internal modem, which is now in the command mode.
Note
If Digital/PDIU-DS port 004 is the only DIU port connected to the modem (Program 20,
LED 03 On), the Modem LEDs on all DKTs is On.
6. From PC 1’s keyboard, type ATDT#70016744700 and press Enter.
♦
The internal modem (208) goes off-hook, dials #7001 to seize the CO line, and then dials
the external modem’s telephone number (674-4700).
♦
The external modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish
communications.
♦
If the modems send result codes, the screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where
XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication software.
7. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines above, to exchange data (file
transfers, type messages, etc.).
➤ To terminate the call
1. Press the telephone 'DWD5HOHDVHbutton.
2. Type +++ from PC2 keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK.
3. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 2.
12-68
♦
PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER.
♦
The data call LED on DKT 200 will turn Off.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
583-3700
Strata DK
MDF
Internal
Modem
(208)
QSTU2,
RSTU2,
RSTU, RDSU
or PSTU
(Port 008)
MDF
Public
Telephone
Network
CO
Line 1
Telephone
555-5555
Digital
(Port 004)
RS-232
(Modified)
DIU
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
RS-232
PDIU-DS
(204)
External
Modem
(Auto
Answer)
Portable PC 1
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI
(200)
RS-232
Portable PC 2
Digital
(Port 000)
MDF
1538
Figure 12-36 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using AT Commands
External PC-to-Internal PC Test
See Figure 12-37 for additional information.
1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming.
Program 20: Port 000. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 20: Port 004. LEDs 01, 02, 04, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
♦
Program 39: Port 000. 'DWD&DOO (456) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (454) buttons should be
provided.
♦
Internal modem: set the following AT commands: Auto answer (ATS0=1), disable
character echo in the command state (ATE0), modem returns result codes (ATQ0),
presence of data carrier (AT&C1), hang up and assume command state with DTR on-tooff transition (AT&D2).
♦
Settings for PDIU-DS: rear panel switches 1, 2 and 4 On; internal jumpers P1-P9 set to BC position.
2. Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a communications software package and that the
communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the
same values (data transmission rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-69
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
Note
If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the
Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the
data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240
while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode,
ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the TAPI mode.
3. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDT5833700 and press Enter.
♦
The external modem originates the call to internal modem.
♦
The internal modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish
communications. The ready light on the PDIU-DS turns On.
♦
If the modems send result codes, the PC’s screens display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX
is the data transmission speed set by the communications software.
4. The PC 2 is connected to PDIU-DS (204), as shown by the thick lines above (PDIU-DS 204 is
in the command mode). PC 2 can now issue AT commands to PDIU-DS 204.
5. From PC 2’s keyboard, type ATDD200 and press Enter (AT commands must be capital
letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (204) to dial and connect to PDIU-DI (200).
♦
The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS (204) is On; the Data Call LED on DKT 200 is
also On.
♦
The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data
transmission speed set by the communication software.
6. The PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines, to exchange data (file transfers,
typed messages, etc.).
➤ To terminate the call
➤ Press the DKT’s 'DWD5HOHDVH button.
...or
1. Type +++ from either PC keyboard. The PC screen displays, OK.
2. Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step 5 above.
12-70
♦
PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display, NO CARRIER.
♦
The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will turn Off.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
RS232 Cable Modification (See Figure 10-29)
PDIU-DS
2
3
4
Jumper Wire
5
6
7
MDF
8
20
Internal
Modem
(208)
DIU
(RS-232 Cable
See Figure 10-28)
POWER
TOSHIBA
READY
CONNECT
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
DSR Open
SG
DCD
Open DTR
Modem
2
Jumper Wire
3
4
5
6
7
583-3700
8
20
Public
Telephone
Network
Strata DK
Digital
(Port 004)
PDIU-DS
(204)
Telephone
Line
555-5555
RS-232
External
Modem
SW 2, 4 on
P1-P9 (B-C)
Portable PC 1
MDF
DKT/PDIU-DI
(200)
RS-232
Portable PC 2
Digital
(Port 000)
1539
Notes
●
●
When a PDIU-DS is connected with modified RS-232 cable, the READY LED will not light
until the External and Internal modem establish carrier detect.
See “PDIU-DS to Modem Installation” on Page 12-62, paragraph three and Figure 12-29 for
more details.
Figure 12-37 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using Direct CO Line Connection
PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test
There are many off-the-shelf, Windows compatible, desktop organizer software packages that
provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the terminal resident Starfish Sidekick®. It is used
in this section for test explanation purposes only. If you choose another auto dialer software
package, the detailed response may be different than that shown here.
Note
See Figure 12-38 for additional information.
1. Set the RPCI or DIU programming.
♦
Strata DK I&M
Program 20: Port 001. LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 On; all other LEDs Off.
5/00
Peripheral Installation
➤ To test a PC auto dial voice call
12-71
Peripheral Installation
PC/Data Communications Interface Units
♦
Program 39: Port 001. 'DWD&DOO (556) and 'DWD5HOHDVH (554) buttons are optional.
If the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial application, the 'DWD&DOO and 'DWD
5HOHDVH buttons are unnecessary.
2. Make sure that the auto dial application software is installed on the PC root directory and that
the communication parameters of the PC and application software are set to the same values.
Note
If using an RPCI-DI, it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from the TAPI mode to the
Data Communications Mode before proceeding with Step 3. To place the RPCI into the
data communications mode from the PC keyboard: Set Num Lock to On and type 240
while holding the Alt key down (this is HEX F0). If in the data communication mode
ATC0 will switch the RPCI-DI back to the API mode.
3. Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to
auto dial is installed within the application software (include the appropriate Strata CO line
access code prefixing each telephone number).
➤ To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC keyboard
1. Press the Alt and Ctrl keys simultaneously. The PC screen displays the Sidekick menu
window.
2. Press F5 twice (Sidekick prompts “search for INITIALS:” to display on the PC’s
screen).
3. Type the initials or name of the person or organization you wish to auto dial.
4. Press Enter. Sidekick finds and highlights the desired name/number.
5. Press Enter again.
♦
DKT/PDIU-DI 201 seizes the CO line and auto dials the selected telephone number.
♦
The LEDs of the DKT’s Data Call and CO line 001 buttons are On (if assigned in Program
39).
♦
Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback or busy tones are audible from the DKT’s speaker.
6. Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time after the phone number is dialed. Press the
Spacebar to release the 'DWD&DOO button, or remain on-hook and use the DKT’s
speakerphone.
Note
Speakerphone model only: pressing the Spacebar when using the speakerphone feature
disconnects the call.
➤ To terminate the call anytime
1. If off-hook, press the Spacebar and place the DKT handset on-hook.
2. If talking via the speakerphone, press the Spacebar.
12-72
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
DK Alarm Sensor
Standard
Telephone
Portable PC 2
Dialed Line
Strata DK
DKT/RPCI-DI or
DKT/PDIU-DI
(201)
RS-232
Digital
(Port 001)
Public
Telephone
Network
CO
LINE 1
MDF
MDF
1540
Figure 12-38 DK PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test
DK Alarm Sensor
The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit that can be set to detect a relay open or closed
condition from a facility alarm system. When the sensor is activated, all electronic and digital
telephones sound an alarm signal. The electronic/digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any
electronic or digital telephone with an $ODUP5HVHW button (see Program 39).
Alarm Sensor Options
Note
See Figure 12-39 for additional information.
Jumper plug P12 on the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition
from the facility alarm system.
➤ To detect an open or closed condition by the jumper plug P12
1. To detect a closed condition, set P12 to the N.O. position.
2. To detect an open condition, set P12 to the N.C. position.
Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition
from the facility alarm system.
➤ To detect an open or closed condition by soldering the W3 jumper wire
1. To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the normal open position.
Alarm Sensor Wiring
See Figure 12-39, and connect the facility alarm system relay contacts to the PIOU/PIOUS PCB.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
2. To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the normal closed position.
12-73
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
PIOU Pin Numbers ( )
25-Pair Cable
PIOU PCB
N.C.
Alarm
Sensor
P12
66 Block Pin Numbers
MDF
ALMT (36)
21
ALMR (11)
22
N.O.
Facility
Alarm
System
25-Pair Cable
PIOUS PCB
Normal Open
TB1
Twisted
Pair
MDF
ALMT
Alarm
Sensor
W3
ALMR
ALM
Facility
Alarm
System
Normal Close
1541
Figure 12-39 DK Alarm Sensor Block Diagram (PIOU/PIOUS)
Auto Attendant
Auto Attendant operates like an automatic station attendant or switchboard operator that quickly
and efficiently distributes calls to stations selected by callers. Incoming calls are greeted by an
external announcement device that offers callers a menu of station locations associated with a
number, such as 3 for Sales, 4 for Customer Service, etc. Callers pick the destination just by
dialing the single number associated with it. The call is then transferred to the station. Callers can
also dial the intercom number directly.
This feature is available from three separate sources.
♦
Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant
♦
Voice Mail device Auto Attendant
♦
External Auto Attendant
Note
Auto Attendant is licensed by Dytel, Inc. under United States Patent No. 4,975,941.
Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA)
A built-in Auto Attendant feature is programmed into the Strata DK system software. To enable
the built-in AA to function, RRCS or BRCS (-4, -8 or -12) DTMF tone receiver PCB (see Chapter
10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RRCS and RKYS installation instructions).
The customer must provide digital announcement device(s), on which the greeting and menu that
the callers hear are recorded. The digital announcement devices must connect to Strata DK
standard telephone circuits. There is a series of programs (explained later) in the Strata DK
Programming Manual Record Sheets, which are for the built-in AA feature exclusively, not the
other two AA feature applications. Callers must use a DTMF (tone) telephone to select AA dialing
options.
12-74
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
The built-in AA feature offers flexibility in answering calls. Calls follow the basic sequences
described below and illustrated in Figure 12-40, “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences”.
Sequence A
The call is answered directly after being transferred from the Auto Attendant. The caller calls in on
CO lines assigned for built-in Auto Attendant, receives a greeting along with a menu of dialing
options, and then dials an option of the intercom number. The call is then transferred to a station,
which answers the call.
Sequence B
The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an
optional secondary announcement, where it will receive a new announcement and the same or
additional dialing options. Some customers may not configure their AA system with a secondary
announcement; if so, their unanswered calls would follow sequence C or D.
Sequence C
The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an
alternate station(s) assigned in system programming, ringing assignments.
Sequence D
The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed back to the
primary announcement. This is probably the least desirable of the four sequences, since the caller
hears a repeat of the announcement he just received seconds earlier.
Note
In all of the above sequences, the call can first ring telephones selected in system
programming for 12 or 24 seconds, and then be routed to the Auto Attendant if not
answered by any of the ringing stations. This is called Auto Attendant delayed ring.
Caller Dials Auto
Attendant CO Line
Auto
Attendant Delayed
Ring
?
Yes
Ring Stations
Per Program 81~89
No
No
Primary Announcement
Greets Caller, Offers
Dialing Options
Station
Answers Before
Delay Timeout
?
Yes
Caller Dials Option
Caller Is Transferred
To Dialed Option
Sequence: A
Call Is
Not Answered
And Is Routed
To Secondary
Announcement
Call Is Not
Answered And
Is Routed To
Alternate
Stations
B
Figure 12-40 Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences
Strata DK I&M
5/00
C
Call Is Not
Answered And
Is Routed Back
To The Primary
Announcement
D
1693
Peripheral Installation
Call Is
Answered
Talk
12-75
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
Built-in Auto Attendant Programming
See Figures 12-40 and 12-41 for a comprehensive overview of built-in Auto Attendant (AA).
♦
Program 78 (61, 62, and 63): CO lines are assigned for built-in AA with this program. There is
no limit to the number of lines that can be assigned for AA, and each line can be set for any or
all of the ringing modes (DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT). See Programs 81~89 record sheet notes
in the Strata DK Programming Manual.
♦
Programs 81~89: Assign stations to ring if AA callers do not dial or AA calls are not
answered. Also, if not answered by a station set to ring during Immediate Ringing (or delay 2
ring), incoming calls can be set to ring built-in AA announcement ports on a Delayed Ringing
basis.
♦
Program 03: An RRCS (-4, -8 or -12) must be installed on the DK40i or DK424 RCTU or a
BRCS on the DK424i BCU for the system to interpret DTMF tones generated by the CO. Use
this program to tell the system that the common control unit is equipped with an RRCS.
Important!
♦
Program 25-1: If there are no RRCS or BRCS circuits or announcement devices available for
an incoming CO line built-in AA call, the call will transfer to alternative station(s) (Programs
81~89) after a time duration assigned with this program.
♦
Program 23: As many as four digital announcement devices for primary announcements, each
requiring one standard telephone station port (Figure 12-41), can be assigned. Callers receive
primary announcements (60 secs. maximum announcement time) – which consist of the
greeting along with the delivery of menu prompts – when they first call (they may also be
rerouted back to the announcement after reaching a busy or ring no answer station).
♦
Program 24: Transferred calls that are unanswered at stations can be routed to a secondary
announcement device (60 secs. maximum announcement time), which typically first informs
the caller that the option they dialed was unavailable and then presents them with either the
same options offered by the primary announcement device or some additional ones (Figure
12-41).
♦
Program 09: Tells the system where to transfer built-in AA calls after the caller has dialed in
response to the delivered menu options.
♦
Program 60-6: Enter a DISA security code to prevent users from making unauthorized
external calls via the AA DISA access (Dial *) feature.
♦
Program 26: There will be times when transferred AA calls are not answered after camping-on
to a busy station. This program tells the system when to end the camp-on and to route the call
to another destination (it could be a secondary announcement device or alternative stations per
program 10-3, LED 18). If a station has Call Forward set, the call forwards to the proper
destination instead of routing per AA Program 10-3, LED 18.
♦
Program 10-3:
♦
12-76
RKYS must also be installed on RCTU, RKYS does not need a Program 03 (or any
other) program assignment.
LED 18: Some customers may choose to configure their AA without a secondary
announcement device. In these arrangements, transferred calls that are unanswered can be
routed for normal ringing to some alternative stations set in Programs 81, 84, and 87, or
back to the primary announcement device. LED 18 should be On if the calls should be
routed to stations assigned in Programs 81, 84, and 87. It should be Off for the primary or
secondary announcement device option. If LED 18 is selected, see LEDs 16 and 17 for
disconnect timing options.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
♦
LED 15: If LED15 is On (and Music-on-Hold (MOH) is installed) the DK sends MOH to
callers when the AA routes a call to ring or camp-on a station. If LED 15 is Off the DK
send ring-back-tone to the caller.
♦
LEDs 16 and 17: Set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect, as a
safeguard, built-in AA calls that have not been answered by stations. This feature assures
that the loop start CO line that the call was made on is free for other calls if the caller
hangs up before the call is answered. The initialized disconnect setting is 40 seconds. The
other timing options available are 150 secs. and 350 secs. Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the
desired time as follows:
40 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = Off.
150 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = On.
350 seconds: LED 16 = On. LED 17 = Off.
Ground start lines disconnect automatically with this timer.
♦
Program 15: Selects Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail, AA or voice calls. This will
provide automatic release (if the calling party disconnects) without waiting for the safeguard
timer in Program 10-3.
Built-in Auto Attendant Installation
The built-in Auto Attendant feature only requires the installation of a feature key and customersupplied announcement devices to deliver announcements to callers. The feature does not require
the installation of any other devices.
➤ To install the customer-supplied digital announcement devices
Note
In Figure 12-41 and elsewhere in this manual, announcement devices are referred to as A1
and A2. A1 designates a primary announcement device, and A2 a secondary
announcement device. The prime marks following the designation distinguishes the
multiple announcers from each other.
1. Ensure that the PCB that will connect with the device is installed per:
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3
...or Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS
2. Connect the devices to the selected circuit per wiring diagrams:
♦
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QRCU3
♦
Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for the KSTU2, RSTU2, PESU, or RDSU/RSTS
♦
Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.
3. Ensure that the feature key is correctly installed per:
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation for the QKYS
♦
Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation for KKYS installation on K4RCU3
♦
Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs, see RRCS and RKYS on the RCTU or BRCS on the
BCU
4. Program the system per the instructions in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on
Page 12-75.
5. Record the message and dialing prompts on the announcement device per the device
manufacturer's instructions.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
♦
12-77
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
MDF
Strata DK
QSTU2,
KSTU2 (DK40i),
RSTU,
RDSU/RSTS,
PSTU
or
PESU
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A1
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A2
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A1'
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A2'
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A1''
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A2''
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A1'''
Digital
Announcer
To Standard Telephone Circuit
A2'''
Digital
Announcer
4308
See Programs 23 and 24 for Digital Announcement Assignements
Primary Auto Attendant (AA) Announcements (A1, A1', A1'', A1''')
Secondary AA Announcements (A2, A2', A2'', A2''')
Figure 12-41 Announcement Device Block Diagram
DK424 Built-in Auto Attendant ACD Applications
The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) groups in
two ways (see Flowchart 12-1 and text below):
♦
The DK built-in Auto Attendant can function to answer calls and send them to selected ACD
groups when the caller dials the digit assigned to an ACD group.
♦
A call that is waiting in an ACD queue can overflow to the built-in Auto Attendant to enable
the caller to choose another destination.
Note
Both options can be used simultaneously or independently. See Chapter 11 – ACD
Installation for ACD/Auto Attendant programming options.
Incoming Call
Auto Attendant
Built-in
Station
ACD Group X
ACD Group Y
ACD Queue
ACD Queue
Agent
Agent
Overflow
1543
Flowchart 12-1
12-78
Auto Attendant/ACD Application Flowchart
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
Digital Announcer Auto Disconnect
The DK built-in AA automatically disconnects digital announcers immediately after the caller(s)
dials a digit and are routed to a selected destination. Thus, the announcement device does not have
to play to the end before it is released. This feature requires a digital announcer that can recognize
a 100 milliseconds open circuit on the (RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS) loop and hang-up when it detects
the open on the loop.
Built-in Auto Attendant Block Diagram
A detailed block diagram which includes call flow patterns and associated programs is provided in
Flowchart 12-2.
ACD CO Lines
(Program 14-0)
Incoming CO Call to Auto Attendant
Program 78 (61,62,63)
Is
Auto
Attendant Delay Ring
Mode?
Program 81 ~ 89
To
Agent
ACD Group Queue
Auto Attendant Ring Control Using 1 Night Transfer
(NT) Button per Program 78, 81 ~ 89
Answer
Yes
Ring Stations For 12 or 24
Sec. Per Program 81 ~ 89
Talk
Overflow Option to AA
Programs 14-4, -5, and -6
No
No Answer
0
A1 +
RRCS or BRCS
Available?
No
(Caller Receives Ringback
Tone Before A1 Answers)
(Reserve A1 + RRCS or BRCS)
1
Timeout
Answer
Ring Telephones per
Program (81-89)
Talk
No Answer
Program 25: Wait
Timer (12-24 Sec)
1 Second Ringing
Queue Wait
A1 / RRCS
Becomes
Available
Ring A1
A1'
Caller Hangs Up
Disconnect CO Line
16-Second
A1 Answers Within
Time-Out
16 Seconds
(Faulty A1)
A1 Answers and Plays
Announcement
Announcement Ends
and Disconnects
4 Second Delay
Go to
5
Caller Does Not Dial
A1''
A1'''
Program 23
Primary Annoucement
Devices (A1, A1', A1'', A1''')
Assignments
KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU /
RDSU / PESU
(60 secs. maximum; RRCS, BRCS remains
for 4 secs. after announcement disconnects.
2
Caller Dials and
system checks
Program 09
on next page
Go to
A
on next page
1544
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart
Peripheral Installation
Flowchart 12-2
12-79
Peripheral Installation
Auto Attendant
A
Caller Receives Music-On-Hold or Ring Back Tone
per Program 10-3, LED 15 When Auto Attendant
Routes Call
Auto Attendant Routes Call (Program 09):
Dial
*
Camp-On Beep 10 IPS Fast LED
Flash LCD Camp-On Display
Dial Busy or
Ringing DN
DISA Mode
Internal
Dial Tone
Camp-On Timer
(Program 26)
(011-999S)
Dial: Wrong or Vacant
Number; or Dial a DND or
Ringing Station
ACD
Group
Dial Idle DN
Ring DN for 16
Seconds
(see Note)
Busy Station Becomes Idle
Talk
Time-Out
Overflow
To AA
Option
Go to
0
Figure 10-44
Check
Program 10-3
Program 10-3
LED 18 (On)
A1 + RRCS
Available?
15 Sec
No
Note
A2 In
System?
No
4
No
16 Seconds No Answer
3
Programs
14-4, -5, and -6
Answer
Yes
If the station has CF/NA set, the
station will ring for the CF/NA time
duration and then it will forward to
the forwarded destination. The
CF/NA destination station will ring
16 secs. and then route to if not
answered. A call will not forward a
second time.
Yes
No
5
A2 + RRCS or BRCS
Available?
(15 Second
Time Out)
(16 Second Wait for A2/RRCS, BRCS Available)
Yes
Yes
Go to
1
Answer
Yes
1 Second Queue
Wait
Ring Station per Program
(81, 84, 87) for 40/120/240
Sec. per Program 10-3
LEDs 16 and 17
Ring A2
Talk
No Answer
or Automatic
Release
A2 Answers Within
16 Seconds
Disconnect CO Line
A2''
A2'
Time-out 16 Seconds
(Faulty A2)
A2 Answers and Plays
Announcement
Go to
Flowchart 10-2
2
A2'''
Program 24
Secondary Annoucement
Devices (A2, A2', A2'', A2''')
Assignments
KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU /
RDSU / PESU
4
Go to
(60 Seconds Maximum; RRCS, BRCS Remains
4 Seconds After Announcement Disconnects)
1545
Figure 10-44
Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart (continued)
Non-built-in Auto Attendant
Alternatives to using the Strata DK built-in AA feature, are voice mail systems, such as Toshiba
Stratagy or VP, with an AA feature and non-voice mail AA as a stand-alone device.
Non-built-in Auto Attendant Programming
The Auto Attendant programs described in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on
Page 12-75 do not apply to the Non-integrated AA feature sources, but Strata DK Programs 03, 04,
10-1, 13, 16, 31, 33, 36, 37, 39, and 81~89 should be considered for proper operation.
Non-built-in Auto Attendant Installation
Non-integrated AA sources, such as voice mail devices and stand-alone units, connect to standard
telephone circuits (ports). See Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more information.
12-80
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation
Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation
Up to three PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs can be installed in a system to simultaneously provide:
maintenance terminal (or modem) interface, Management Information System (MIS) for ACD
interface, and RS-232 voice mail interface (Toshiba proprietary or SMDI).
Each of these interfaces are provided by the modular jacks on a separate PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU
(Figure 12-36). Interface assignments are made in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43). PIOU and
PIOUS Paging, SMDR, relay control, alarm sensor, and door lock functions will be active only on
the PIOU or PIOUS PCB which is assigned the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU
only provides the TTY interface for SMDI, local maintenance, or ACD MIS but not for SMDR,
built-in maintenance modem or system OA.
If TSIU or RSIU/RSIS is installed, functions enabled in Program 76 will operate as programmed
and the same functions programmed in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43) will not operate. For
more details regarding RSIU/RSIS/RMDS and TSIU installation, see RSIU installation in Chapter
9 – Universal Slot PCBs and Figure 10-36 on Page 10-39.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-81
Peripheral Installation
Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU Installation
RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port
3-Pair
Modular Cord
PIOU, PIOUS,
or RSSU1
TTY Jack
Maintenance Terminal,
Personal Computer,
Modem, or PDIU-DS
SMDR2 Jack
Maintenance Interface
PPTC-25F
or PPTC9 Adapter
Program 03
Code 413
RS-232 (DB-25 or DB-9) Serial Port
3-Pair
Modular Cord
COM Port
PIOU, PIOUS,
or RSSU1
TTY Jack
SMDR2 Jack
ACD/MIS
Personal Computer
MIS for ACD Interface
PPTC-25F
or PPTC9 Adapter
Program 03
Code 423
RS-232 (DB-25 or DB-9)4 Serial Port
3-Pair
Modular Cord
PIOU, PIOUS,
or RSSU1
TTY Jack
RS-232 (SMDI or Toshiba
Proprietary) for VM Interface
SMDR2 Jack
Voice Mail Device
PPTC-25F
or PPTC9 Adapter
Program 03
Code 433
1546
1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slot in any cabinet(s).
2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on
the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). RSSU does not provide
these features.
3. If set, TSIU, RSIU/RSIS Program 76 will override Program 03 code 41, 42, and 43.
4. VP100 and Stratagy use straight cables, VP200/300 require “null modem” connection. PPTC (25-pin) requires a “male-tofemale” gender changer.
Figure 12-42 Multiple PIOU/PIOUS (Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, RS-232 Voice Mail Integration)
12-82
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Peripheral Installation
Enhanced 911 Service (E911)
Enhanced 911 Service (E911)
The Toshiba Strata DK forwards 911 and 9+911 calls to designated ports to interface with external
third party adjunct translation equipment designed to handle them. The Strata DK provides up to
two QSTU2, KSTU2 or RSTU2 ports (standard telephone ports) to receive these calls and send
them to the third party E911 adjunct equipment along with the specific directory number of the
emergency calling station.
The Strata DK sends the telephone DN to the telephone company’s 911 tandem switch that
forwards the call to the proper Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) where it is matched up
with a central Automatic Location Information (ALl) database to provide enhanced information to
the PSAP dispatcher.
Interface between the third party adjunct equipment and the E911 tandem CO must be via special
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks. (Ordering of these specialized
trunks is done through a special ordering desk with your local phone company.)
Important!
●
●
DID numbers: In many cases, a DID service is the only way to provide a unique number
(CESID) for each station that is recognizable by the telephone company.
In order for this feature to be effective, 911 and 9+911 calls must be dialed from a DKT [DN]
or single-line telephone. 911 calls originating from a [PhDN] CO Line or Pooled Line button
bypass the adjunct equipment and go directly to the CO exactly as dialed.
E911 System Installation
1. Ensure that the QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS or PESU PCB is installed in the
system per Chapter 9 – Universal Slot PCBs or each DK14 and DK40i installation section.
2. Connect the E911 system to the selected QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, or PESU
standard telephone port. (See Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation, Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation,
Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details.)
3. Program the Strata DK system for the required E911 features. (See “E911 Programming” on
Page 12-83.)
4. Install E911 external system per the manuals supplied by the vendor selected and used for the
interface.
E911 Programming
Program *10: Selections 11 and 12 assign the RSTU port to be used for E911 Service. Selections
91 and 92 assign an inter-digit timer for valid dialing and a delay timer before the station number is
sent to external E911 equipment.
➤ Remove the [DN] assignment for ports assigned to E911 so that someone calling a station
number will not accidentally call 911.
Peripheral Installation
Strata DK I&M
5/00
12-83
Peripheral Installation
Enhanced 911 Service (E911)
12-84
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
13
ACD Installation
This chapter includes information on the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management
Information System (MIS) for:
♦
Strata DK424 and DK424i systems (applies to all common control units) and DK40i
♦
ACD and MIS is not available to the Strata DK14
Included in this chapter are installation instructions, ACD programming procedures and record
sheets.
Note
Only qualified service technicians and system programmers should install ACD/MIS.
ACD automatically routes incoming calls so they are equally distributed to a group of ACD
Agents. Figure 13-1 shows an example of how a typical ACD call is handled.
The Strata DK System provides many ACD functions and custom keys on for Toshiba DKT2000series telephones. For instance, the ACD Supervisor can monitor calls and assist Agents through
use of an LCD telephone, programmed especially for the Supervisor which shows ACD Agent and
Group information. Telephone instructions are provided in the Strata DK ACD Supervisor Guide
and Agent User Guide.
Incoming Call
Auto Attendant
(Built-in or External)
ACD Group X
ACD Group Y
ACD Queue
(No Overflow Assignment)
ACD Queue
Station
Agent PhDN
ACD PhDN
•
•
•
•
•
•
Distributed Hunt Group
Station PDN, PhDN or CO Line
Attendant Console
Another ACD Group
Auto Attendant
Announcement
1971
Figure 13-1
ACD Call Handling Example
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-1
ACD Installation
Installation
Installation
ACD for the Strata DK systems is provided through a feature key upgrade called RKYS for the
DK424 and DK424i or the KKYS for the DK40i. The RKYS or KKYS is a subassembly that
attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. See the “KKYS
Installation” on Page 3-24 or “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 5-48 or Page 7-42
forinstallation instructions.
Multiple Serial Port Installation
Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, and SMDI
With DK Release 3 or higher, the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS PCBs can be installed alone or in addition to
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU to provide:
♦
Maintenance Terminal (or modem) interface
♦
Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface
♦
SMDI
♦
SMDR
Related Programs
Program 03 (Codes 41, 42, and 43): Assigns PIOU and PIOU interface options. SMDR, page
outputs, SMDR, relay controls, alarm sensor, and door lock functions on PIOU or PIOUS will be
active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42,
or 43).
♦
Code 41: Enables Remote Maintenance.
♦
Code 42: Enables MIS/SMIS PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU Slot. The TTY port must have Code 42
set for its slot in Program 03 to support ACD/MIS.
♦
Code 43: Enables RS-232 Voice Mail Interface/SMDI.
♦
If the RSIU is to be used for ACD/MIS, the RSIU must be installed in the Strata DK Base
Cabinet, slot 11 and programmed with Code 49 in Program 03.
♦
The RSSU only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI. The RSSU does not provide SMDR, page,
alarm sensor or relay control.
♦
Program 76-1x3: Assigns the RSIU or RSIS port to provide MIS for ACD.
Notes
●
Program 76 assignments override Code 42 if programmed for PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU in
Program 03.
For more information on installation of the PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU and the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, see
Chapter 9 - Universal Slot PCBs and Chapter 12 - Peripheral Installation.
Wiring
Announcements/music patterns are played and sent to callers at programmed time intervals while
calls are waiting in an ACD queue. Announcement and music devices are connected to Strata DK
station ports and are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 14-3.
13-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
Installation
25-pin PC serial COM port uses PPTC25-f
9-pin PC serial COM port (DB-9)1
6-pin modular jack
Toshiba
PPTC9 adaptor
Personal
Computer for:
ACD
Insight DK
SMIS
CCV
Strata DK
ACD Installation
The ACD/MIS interface is provided by the TTY modular jack on a separate serial port (RSSU,
PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS), see Figure 13-2.
MIS RS-232 port
3-pair modular cord
(straight-wired, not cross-wired).
50 ft. max. for Insight DK
PC parallel
printer port
SRB00566
9353L9335
Sentinel key
(off-white color, comes with SMIS
software version V1.0 or higher)
RS-232 jack:
RSIU 2
RSIS2
TTY jack:
PIOU
PIOUS
or RSSU3
4277
1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slots in any cabinet(s).
2. Install RSIU in Slot 11 of Base Cabinet only.
3. If the PC COM port is a DB-25, a Toshiba PPTC25-F adapter is required in place of the Toshiba DB-9 adapter.
Figure 13-2
ACD Application Wiring Diagram
Digital announcement devices can be connected to DK standard telephone ports only; music
sources such as digital Music-on-Hold (MOH) devices, radio tuners, CD players, etc., can be
connected to standard telephone ports, electronic (not digital) telephone ports, or to the processor
PCB MOH jack. Refer to Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring diagrams on
connecting announcement/music devices:
♦
Digital announcers and/or music sources to standard telephone PCB ports: RSTU,
RSTU2, PSTU, PSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PESU. Digital announcement devices and music
sources can be assigned to any standard telephone port; they are not restricted to designated
Background Music (BGM) source ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). Announcement
devices are designed to connect directly to standard telephone ports. Do not use an isolation
transformer to connect digital announcers.
Important!
Most music sources (600 or 8 OHM) are not designed to be connected to telephone
line circuits like the Strata DK standard telephone circuits. When connecting these
devices to standard telephone circuits, an isolation transformer may be required
between the music source and the standard telephone circuit. Figure 12-4 shows
how to connect an isolation transformer.
♦
Music sources to electronic telephone PCB ports: PEKU, PESU. Music sources can be
assigned to any PEKU or PESU port; they are not restricted to designated BGM ports (see
Program 14-3 for assignments).
♦
Music source to DK MOH input: The MOH source connected to the RCTU or B_C_U MOH
jack can be sent to ACD Groups selectively via Program 14-3.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-3
ACD Installation
ACD Installation Guidelines
➤ To connect a music source to the processor PCB MOH jack
➤ See Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation, “Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM)
Options” on Page 12-3.
ACD Installation Guidelines
The following steps show how to install the Strata DK ACD feature.
Note
ACD is not provided with RCTUA3.
Step 1: Initialize the System
If installing a new processor PCB or if changing ROMs on the processor PCB (RCTU or B_C_U),
the processor PCB must be fully initialized by running Programs 91-9 and 03 per the
programming procedures in the Strata DK Programming Manual.
If the system has been previously initialized and installed, it is not necessary to re-initialize the
processor PCB when installing the ACD feature unless the processor PCB ROMs or flash memory
are changed to install ACD. If changing ROMs, DKi Admin or DKi Backup software is
recommended for downloading/uploading previously programmed customer data.
Step 2: Install the Feature Key
➤ To install the RKYS onto the Processor PCB
➤ Read the section titled “KKYS Installation” on Page 3-24 and “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades”
on Page 5-48 and Page 7-42 and refer to Figure 5-30 for installation instructions.
Important!
It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is
installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialization, and, before or
after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are
enabled immediately when RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for
Auto Attendant and ACD must be entered for the feature to operate.
Step 3: Install Related PCBs
1. Install PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU PCBs in the highest numbered slots in any cabinets.
2. Install the RSIU PCB in slot 11 of the Base Cabinet only.
Step 4: Connect COM Port Wires
➤ Connect Strata DK to the SMIS PC per Figure 13-2.
SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay Controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on the
PIOU or PIOUS PCBs will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the
lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). The RSSU PCB only supports TTY, SMIS, or SMDI.
Step 5: Install ACD/SMIS Interface
If installing a SMIS personal computer, a RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU or RSIS must be installed
(see Figure 13-2 for MIS RS-232 port installation).
13-4
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
ACD Installation Guidelines
Step 6: Set the MIS Channel
Agent calls are defined as ACD incoming, PBX incoming/outgoing, and external/internal calls to
and from the Agent’s [PhDN].
ACD Installation
If there are more than 1,000 Agent calls in a heavy-traffic hour, the MIS channel must be set higher
than 1200 bps. The next higher speed, 2400 bps, can handle up to 1,300 calls per hour. Strata DK
allows 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps for the MIS channel.
SMIS registers ACD and PBX calls:
♦
An ACD call is a call that is sent (directly or transferred) to the ACD group.
♦
A PBX call is a call that is sent to the Agent’s$&'&DOO button [PhDN] or a call originated
from an Agent’s $&'&DOO button [PhDN].
Based on a total system speed of 10,800 bps (9600 + 1200) for auxiliary serial channels and a
requirement of one channel each for SMDI, TTY, SMDR, and MIS, the installation should use the
lowest MIS channel speed for the expected amount of traffic.
CAUTION!
If the channel speed is not set high enough, the MIS buffer may overflow,
causing loss of data to MIS.
Step 7: Connect Announcement Devices
Connect the digital announcement devices that are used for each ACD Group (queue) to the
appropriate station ports. Digital announcers can be connected to any RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/
RSTS, PSTU, or PESU standard telephone ports.
See Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for MDF wiring to appropriate standard telephone
ports.
♦
Use Program 14-3, Code 1, 2, and 3 to assign digital announcers to standard telephone ports.
Use Program 14-3, Code 5 and Program 14-5XX to configure the queue announcement pattern
for each ACD Group.
Step 8: Connect Music Sources
Connect the music source for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station port or to the
processor PCB MOH jack. Music sources can be connected to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS,
PSTU, PEKU, or PESU station ports or to the processor PCB MOH jack. See Figures 12-3, 12-4,
12-5 and “Alternate BGM Source Installation” on Page 12-9.
See Chapter 10 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring for details.
Important!
If connecting a music source to RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PEKU, or
PESU standard telephone ports, an isolation transformer may be required as shown
in Figure 12-4 to protect the music source from excessive current/voltage.
Each ACD Group can have a separate music source or Groups can share music sources in any
combination.
Music source port assignments are made in Program 14-3, Code 4. Music source timers are set in
Program 11-5 (1, 2, and 3).
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-5
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
Step 9: Install ACD to Strata DK Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Integration
If ACD calls route to an ACD Group via the Strata DK built-in AA, install and program the AA
per “Strata DK Built-In Auto Attendant (AA)” on Page 12-74.
Auto Attendant “single digits” are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 09.
Step 10: Assign ACD to Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA Integration
If a Toshiba Stratagy or VP AA must answer calls and transfer CO lines to ACD Groups, assign
the CO lines to ring the Strata DK standard telephone ports connected to the Stratagy or VP AA in
Programs 81~89.
Also program the appropriate Strata DK station ports to interface with the Stratagy or VP ports in
Program 31.
Program the Stratagy or VP AA to hookflash and dial ;; to transfer calls to ACD Groups
(where XX = the ACD Group Number: 01~16).
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
ACD Programming
All types of DK lines can be routed to ACD Groups (ground/loop start, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI).
Lines can be assigned in programming to route directly to ACD Groups when they ring or dial into
the Strata DK system. All line types can be programmed to transfer into an ACD Group from any
telephone, attendant console, or built-in or external AA.
Use the ACD programming guidelines and flowcharts provided in Chapter 6 of the Strata DK
Programming Manual to configure the remaining ACD items per the customer’s requirements.
The following paragraphs describe differences in the operation and programming of ground/loop
start lines versus DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines used with an ACD system.
Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups
Ground/Loop Start Incoming Line Calls
Program 14-0: Used to make the line assignments to send calls directly to specific ACD Groups.
If a ground or loop start line is assigned to an ACD Group in Program 14-0, it routes per that ACD
Group’s call routing assignments.
ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH
*US buttons to Agent telephones. ACD CO /LQH or 3RROHG/LQH*US buttons can be assigned
to overflow destination telephones.
Note
Program 14-0 has priority over all other ringing assignments except Program 78 (61, 62,
and 63). If a line is assigned to ring an ACD Group in Program 14-0 at the same time the
line is assigned to ring the DK built-in AA in Program 78, the line routes to the AA.
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Incoming Line Calls
Program *09 or Program 71-1, 2, or 3: assigns DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI incoming digits to ACD
Groups and DID digits to ring designated station ports. ANI only lines must route to the same
ACD Group (see Program 71-1, 2, or 3 address 349 or 499).
13-6
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
If the incoming digits (XXXX) dialed from a Tie or DID line match the digits assigned to an ACD
Group, the call routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments.
ACD calls ring on Agent $&'&DOO [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH
buttons to Agent telephones. However, ACD DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI /LQH buttons can be assigned to
overflow destination telephones.
ACD Installation
Program 04 or Program 71-1: assigns Tie line digits to ring at designated station ports (see
Program 17, LED 05).
Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group
Ground/Loop Start Line Calls
Calls can be assigned to ring into the DK built-in AA in Program 78. Each ACD Group can be
assigned a unique one or two-digit AA dialing prompt in Program 09. Incoming calls on these
lines are answered by the AA. The caller then enters the one or two-digit number and is connected
to a specific ACD Group.
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI ACD Line Calls
Calls cannot be assigned to ring the DK built-in AA, so they cannot be transferred from the DK
AA to an ACD Group.
Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group
The external AA (Stratagy or VP) can be programmed to transfer calls to specific ACD Groups by
assigning one-digit dialing prompts to each Group.
To transfer a call into an ACD Group from an external AA, the user must hookflash and dial
;; (;; = ACD Group number 01~16).
Ground/Loop Start Line Calls
Calls can be assigned to ring external AA ports in Program 81~89. The external AA can be
programmed to transfer calls to particular ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialing prompts to
each Group.
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Line Calls
Calls can be assigned to ring directly into an external AA by assigning incoming digits to the AA
ports in Programs *09 or 71 for DID/DNIS/ANI lines and Programs 04 or 71 for Tie lines (see
Program 17, LED 05). Internal station to station [DN] calls cannot be transferred to ACD Groups.
Overflow From an ACD Group Queue
ACD Calls
ACD calls can be routed to overflow to a [PDN], [SDN], [PhDN], to normal CO line ringing
assignments, to another ACD Group, or to a Distributed Hunt [DH] Group (see Strata DK
Programming Manual, Flowcharts 6-3~6-10).
If the overflow [PhDN] or [PDN] is idle when overflow time occurs, an ACD call rings the
overflow destination [DN]. If it is busy, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD
queue until the overflow destination, an Agent telephone in the ACD Group, or a DH Group
member telephone becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to
become idle receives the call. In this case, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines operate the same as ground,
and loop start lines.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-7
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
Ground/Loop Start Lines
Lines can overflow from an ACD queue to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in
Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87; to the DK built-in AA or to an attendant console.
When the overflow time or point occurs, calls immediately exit the ACD Group queue and ring all
stations assigned to ring in Programs 81, 84, or 87 and *81, *84, and *87 (no delay ringing
assignment operates during overflow). Idle stations and [DNs] ring normally while busy stations
and [DNs] have a muted ring.
Auto Attendant
If the overflow destination is the DK built-in AA, calls overflow immediately when overflow time
occurs and are routed per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy, the call still exits the
ACD queue and queues onto the AA announcement port.
Attendant Console
If the overflow destination is the attendant console, calls immediately exit the queue and alert the
console whether the console is idle or busy. This applies to overflow queue time out (Programs 111 and 14-4) and overflow point (see Programs 14-3, 14-5, and Flowcharts 6-8~6-10).
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines
Lines cannot overflow to the DK CO line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87
and *81, *84, and *87, or to the DK built-in AA.
If the overflow destination is assigned as either the DK CO line normal ringing or built-in AA,
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the substitute destination [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. This
applies to overflow queue time out and overflow point destinations assigned in Programs 14-4/111, and 14-5, respectively.
If the overflow destination [DN] is busy when overflow time occurs, the ACD call does not
overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination [DN] or an Agent telephone
in the ACD Group becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to
become idle receives the call.
ACD Group Status
After Shift Mode
When an ACD Group is placed in the After Shift mode, calls are not sent to the ACD Group’s
queue or Agents, but are routed to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6. The After Shift
operation for each possible case is described below (also see Strata DK Programming Manual,
Flowchart 6-5):
13-8
♦
If the After Shift destination is idle, all line types ring the idle destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI
and ground/loop start lines operate the same.
♦
If the After Shift destination of an ACD Group is another ACD Group, and all Agents in the
destination Group are busy on calls or in the After Call Work Time mode, the call is placed at
the end of the destination ACD Group’s queue. If there are no Agents logged in for the After
Shift Group, the call is sent to that Group’s After Shift destination. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and
ground/loop start lines operate the same.
♦
If the After Shift destination is a [DN], the [DN] rings. If the station is busy, DID/Tie/DNIS/
ANI lines camp on to the [DN] while ground/loop start lines busy override ring the port.
♦
If the After Shift destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, ground/loop start lines
ring stations assigned to the ACD lines in Programs 81~89 (including delayed ringing
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
♦
If the After Shift destination is the DK AA, ground/loop start lines are answered by the AA
and routed after the caller dials a digit prompted by the AA. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not
route to the AA, but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2.
♦
If the After Shift destination is the attendant console, calls ring or queue onto the console
whether it is busy or idle. This applies to DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI and ground/loop start lines.
ACD Installation
assignments). DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines do not ring stations in the Normal Ring assignments
but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2.
All Agents Unavailable Mode
If all the Agents in an ACD Group become unavailable simultaneously, calls that would normally
ring into the ACD Group or enter the Group’s queue are routed to either the Group’s After Shift
destination, set in Program 14-6 or to the Group’s Overflow Point destination, set in Program 14-5
(see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-6).
The option of where to send calls when all Agents are unavailable is set system-wide for all ACD
Groups in Program 10-4, LED 04. All line types (ground/loop start and DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI)
follow this operation. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the After
Shift destination set in Program 14-6, (Program 10-4, LED 04 “Off”), calls to a Group whose
Agents are all unavailable are treated as if the ACD Group were in the After Shift mode.
If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the Overflow Point destination set
in Program 14-5 (Program 10-4, LED 04 “On”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable
are treated as if they overflowed from the Group’s queue even if the overflow destination is busy.
If the “All Agents Unavailable” overflow destination is another ACD Group, calls route to an idle
Agent, or are placed at the end of the overflow ACD Group’s queue.
Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment
If an ACD call rings an Agent telephone for the time specified in Program 11-2 and the call is not
answered, the call is routed to ring another idle Agent in the same ACD Group for that same time
duration (see Strata DK Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-7).
This continues until all idle Agents in that Group have been rung. If the call is not answered by an
Agent, the call then routes to the destination assigned in Program 14-5. Two consecutive Ring No
Answer (RNA) calls to the same Agent automatically places that Agent’s telephone in the
Unavailable mode. The RNA operation for possible cases is described below:
♦
If the RNA destination is an idle [DN], it rings when RNA occurs. If the RNA [DN] is busy
when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI calls camp on to the [DN] and ground/loop start lines
route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including
delay ring assignments).
♦
If the RNA destination is an ACD Group, the call rings an idle Agent in that Group when RNA
occurs. If all Agents in the RNA destination ACD Group are busy when RNA occurs, DID/
Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the destination assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start
lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87
(including delay ringing assignments).
♦
If the RNA destination is the DK Normal Ringing assignment, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route
to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route to the Normal
Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring
assignments). If the RNA destination is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines
camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines mute ring the busy
[DN].
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-9
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
♦
If the RNA destination is the DK built-in AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to the [DN]
assigned in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines route per the AA program assignments.
If the AA is busy when RNA occurs, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to the [DN] assigned
in Program *14-2 and ground/loop start lines queue onto the AA announcement port.
♦
If the RNA destination is the DK attendant console, RNA calls ring or queue on the console
whether it is busy or idle. This applies to ground, loop, Tie, DID, DNIS, and ANI lines.
ACD SMDR Printout Examples
Auto Attendant, DNIS, ANI, DID, and Tie line ACD calls can be identified on SMDR printouts.
Several SMDR printout examples noting ACD information are provided. (See Figures 13-3
through 13-10). However, Toshiba recommends using SMIS to track ACD call data rather than
SMDR. SMIS is designed to track ACD/PBX agent calls.
Loop and ground start line ACD calls can only be identified by line and station numbers. The ACD
tag is not applied. For detailed ACD call record reporting, Toshiba recommends using SMIS.
The Work Unit (or Stroke) count data, which is entered from the Agent telephone while on an
ACD call, is printed in the account code field of the SMDR output data (last 15 columns).
Note
13-10
If multiple Work Unit entries are entered on the same ACD call, SMDR only sends data
for the last entry. MIS or SMIS receives all entries made.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
ACD Installation
Identifies ACD call (not Group number)
Call answered by Agent Time
Ring before Queue + Queue Time
DID Seizure + Digits Received Time
009 ACD
009 204
500
14:30 00:02;03 00;04
14:31 00:00;26
204
Agent Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN]
Agent Talk Time Duration
Call Disconnect Time
Agent ACD Call [PhDN]
Agent Telephone [PDN]
DID Line Number
2023
Figure 13-3
DID Call to ACD Queue Example
ACD Call goes to Queue then rings Agent – Agent Answers
003 ACD
003 204
500
14:00 00:02;38 00;05
14:01 00:01;23
Time Agent answers call
Queue + Ring Agent Time
Ring Time, before First Announcement
Answers Duration
204
(Program 11-4 = 4 seconds)
Agent Primary Directory Number [PDN]
Agent Talk Time Duration
Time call is disconnected
Agent ACD call [PhDN]
Agent Telephone [PDN]
CO Line Number
00:05
02:38
01:23
Total time call is connected to
system is 4 minutes, 6 seconds
03:66
2024
Figure 13-4
Ground/Loop Start Incoming Call Example
DID ACD Call to ready Agent at Station 204
009 ACD
009 204
Figure 13-5
Strata DK I&M
500
10:53 00:00;16 00;06
10:53 00:00;40
204
Time Telephone (204) answers Line 9
Queue and/or Ring Telephone Time
Duration of Incoming Seizure
+ digits dialed
Primary Directory Number [PDN] of Called
Telephone
Talk Time Duration
Time call is disconnected
Agent ACD call [PhDN]
Talking Telephone [PDN]
DID Line Number
DID ACD Call to Available Agent Example
5/00
1999
13-11
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
007 MSS
007 203
500
10:36 00:00;26 00;03
10:37 00:01;12
203
Identifies DISA or Built-in AA call
Time call was transferred
Call connected to DISA or AA Time Duration
Ring before DISA or AA Answer
Time Duration
Caller dials 203, DISA or AA transfers to 203
Call connected to 203 Time Duration
Time 203 hung-up and call disconnected
[DN] that answered call
[DN] connected to Line 007
Line Number
Note: DISA callers cannot dial into an ACD Group.
Auto Attendant Transfers Call to ACD Group
007 MSS
Figure 13-6
500
10:38 00:00;26 ACD
2080
Incoming Built-in AA or DISA Call (non-ACD call) Example
203 Transfer Time
203 Talk Time Duration
203 Ring before Answer Time Duration
Indicates Call Transfer to ACD Group
A→ 003 203 203 13:10 00:00;10 00;03 ACD
204
B→ 003 ACD 204 13:10 00:00;06
[PDN] of telephone that
C→ 003 204 500 13:10 00:00;26
answers the ACD transferred call
204 Ring before Answer Time or
Queue Time
204 Talk Time
204 Discconnect Time
A→ [DN] 203 Transfer Line 003 to ACD Group 01 (Dialing
+
B→ [DN] 204 Answers Line 003 (Agent logged in and ready on 204)
C→ [DN] 204 Hangs up
Figure 13-7
003 204
)
2081
Transfer CO Line to ACD Group Example
500
14:13 00:01;05 00;10
Ring Duration Time before Agent answers
6 – 09 2 Rings
10 –13 3 Rings
14 –17 4 Rings etc.
Talk Time Duration
Call Disconnect Time
Agent ACD Call [PhDN]
[PDN] of Agent Telephone
ACD CO Line Number
2082
Figure 13-8
13-12
Direct Ground/Loop Start Line Call to ACD Agent (no Queue Time)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations
ACD Installation
Direct ACD call with ANI/Caller ID Number, answered by ACD Queue Announcer 4414. Call stays in queue until
Agent
button, [PhDN] 500 on Station 4403 becomes available. Agent answers call on
button [PhDN] 500, line 1 prints, services call and hangs up, line 2 prints.
Indicates
DNIS/ANI Line
018D
018
ACD
4403
4414
500
Agent [PDN]
ACD GRP Announcer Port
01:32
01:32
00:00;13
00:00;17
00;14
Button [PhDN]
on station 4403
Line Number
4403
*7145833700**
ANI/Caller ID Number Prints
On SMDR After Agent Answers
Station 4403 [PDN]
Direct ACD call with ANI, does not enter queue and is answered by Agent Station 4403 on
[PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up.
button
Indicates
DNIS/ANI Line
018D
4403
500
02:05
00:00;06
00;19
*7145833700**
Button [PhDN]
ANI/Caller ID Number Prints On
SMDR After Agent Hangs Up
Line Number
Station 4403 [PDN]
Direct ACD Call with ANI/DNIS, does not enter ACD queue and is answered by Agent station 4403 on
button [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up.
Indicates
DNIS/ANI Line
019D
4403
500
02:47
00:00;04
ACD Call Age
00;18
*7145833777*2222*
DR JONES
nt Button [PhDN]
Line Number
ANI No.
DNIS No.
DNIS Name
Agent [PDN]
Direct ANI/Caller ID Number call goes to queue and caller hangs up while in queue; the information below prints
on SMDR.
Indicates
DNIS/ANI LINE
018D
ACD
Line Number
4414
02:34
00:00;03
00;17
ACD Queue Announcer [PDN]
*7145833333**
ANI/Caller ID Number Prints
When Caller Hangs Up
Lost or Abandoned Calls ANI/Caller ID Number Storage
Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent: Abandoned call is stored on Agent telephone.
Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent. Agent does not answer and call goes to Ring No Answer
(RNA) destination telephone: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number is stored on RNA destination telephone.
Direct ACD call rings to ACD Group. Caller hangs up before ACD announcer answers: Abandoned Call ANI/Caller
ID Number is stored on telephone owner of ACD line which received the call (Program *52 assignment).
Direct ACD call is answered by ACD queue announcer: Abandoned call ANI/Caller ID Number information is
printed on SMDR as shown directly above.
0874
Figure 13-9
Strata DK I&M
ACD ANI/DNIS Printout Example
5/00
13-13
ACD Installation
Insight DK
Delay Ring to Built-in Auto Attendant — Dial ACD Group “1” Digit
Time caller dials “1”
Auto Attendant Announce Time Duration
Ring Duration Time before AA answer
Indicate AA sent call to ACD Group
003 MSS
003 ACD
003 204
500
14:47 00:00;10 00;16
14:47 00:00;03
14:48 00:00;42
ACD
204
Work Unit Entry appears in Acct Code Field
Agent or Overflow Destination Telephone
Primary Directory Number [PDN]
Agent ring before Answer Time Duration
Agent Talk Time Duration
Call Disconnect Time
CO Line Number
1998
Figure 13-10 Delay Ring to Built-in AA Example
Insight DK
The Insight DK™ and Insight DK Plus are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center
supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic
wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging. Insight DK and DK
Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running Microsoft ®
Windows® 2000, Windows 98, Windows 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), or Windows NT® with
Service Pack 3.
For more information, refer to the Strata DK Call Center Solutions General Description or other
Insight DK documents listed in Related Documents/Media of the Introduction.
Call Center Viewer (CCV)
Call Center Viewer™ is a software application designed for ACD supervisors which enables them
to view the calling states and activities of ACD Groups and Agents. With the Call Center Viewer,
supervisors can customize the ACD displays, set Call Waiting alarms, and send messages to Wall
Boards. The software works on a PC running Windows 2000, Windows 98, Windows 95, or
Windows NT.
This section discusses various combinations of connections between the Strata DK System and the
Call Center Viewer PC(s). The Call Center Viewer application can be configured to work directly
with the Strata DK, or with a SMIS PC, and/or with one Master PC plus additional PCs also
running Call Center Viewer application programs.
Application Overview
Call Center Viewer organizes and displays events reported by the Strata DK MIS port. This
application enables you to see the following:
13-14
♦
Number of Calls in Queue
♦
Number of Agents Available
♦
Number of Agents Busy
♦
Number of Agents Logged-In
♦
Number of Agents Unavailable
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
Call Center Viewer (CCV)
Individual Agent States and State Times
♦
Longest Call Waiting
♦
Strata DK Date/Time
♦
Wall Board Messages
Strata DK Requirements
ACD Installation
♦
The RKYS3 must be installed on the Strata DK processor PCB processor card in order for the Call
Center Viewer to work.
Host PC Requirements
The host PC does not have to be dedicated to the application, since the Call Center Viewer
application was designed for multi-tasking.
When the Call Center Viewer application connects to the Strata DK system, it functions as a
machine-to-machine interface, constantly updating call center data. The Call Center Viewer
application should be installed on a PC with the following minimum requirements:
♦
IBM-compatible Pentium 100 MHz personal computer
♦
Windows 2000 (64MB RAM), Windows 98 and Windows NT (32MB RAM), and
Windows 95 (16MB RAM)
♦
10MB available hard drive space for the application
♦
3.5” 1.44 MB floppy-disk drive
♦
One available serial communication ports (two if using Wall Boards)
♦
Parallel printer port (for activation key)
♦
VGA color monitor
♦
Keyboard and mouse
♦
Windows Graphics Accelerator
Increasing the PC’s processor speed and adding RAM will improve the host PC’s performance,
therefore boosting the performance of the Call Center Viewer application.
To ensure data integrity, Toshiba strongly recommends that both the host PC and CCV application
remain in continuous operation once the CCV application session begins.
When the CCV application starts, the objects are displayed in Tree View, including ACD Groups,
Agents, and Reader Boards.
Note
Strata DK I&M
The term “Wall Board” refers specifically to the physical Wall Board. The Call Center
Viewer software uses the term “Reader Board” in place of “Wall Board.”
5/00
13-15
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration
Following is an example of a typical Call Center Viewer display.
Main Menu
List View
Tree View
Status Bar
2097
Reference Information
Refer to the Call Center Viewer User Guide for software installation and operation instructions.
CCV Configuration
Considerations
The Call Center Viewer application can connect solely to the Strata DK280 or DK424 port, or in
parallel with other CCV applications, or with a Software MIS (SMIS) computer. The number of
CCV PCs and the hardware configuration determines the type of connectors needed.
Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem adapter
may be needed.
Connectors
This section describes the various connectors used with the CCV. Specific instructions for different
types of configurations appear later in this section.
on
C
"
"Y
er
w
ie
V
er
M
IS
en
t
lC
K
al
S
TE
R
D
C
The CCVY connector enables two-way
transmission between the Strata DK and a
host PC, or SMIS equipment, and oneway transmission to other PCs. Use the
CCVY to install multiple CCV PCs. (See
Figure 13-11).
ne
ct
or
Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY)
An example of CCV connections is
shown in Figure 13-18.
M
N
TR
2
M
N
TR
1
M
A
The CCVY enables only SMIS to send
ACK and NAK to the telephone system,
and not from the Call Center Viewer host
PC(s). The PC(s) only receive data on the
RXD lead from the Strata DK system.
23
80
Figure 13-11 Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY)
13-16
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration
PPTC Connector
To CCVY
2511
Standard Modular
Telephone Cord
(7 ft. maximum)
25 or 9 Pin
Connector
ACD Installation
A PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F is used to
connect a six conductor standard
telephone cord plug to connect the PC’s
COM port (see Figure 13-12).
PPTC
Figure 13-12 PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F Connector
There are three models of the PPTC
appropriate for this application. See
Figure 13-13 for pinout details for
connecting the Call Center Viewer with
equipment, such as Line Drivers and
Data Broadcast Units.
RSIU/RSIS/
RMDS/PIOU
6
5
4
3
2
1
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
RSIU/RSIS/
RMDS/PIOU
6
5
4
3
2
1
PPTC-9
9-pin Female
1
2
3
4
5
6
6 Conductor
Line Cord
6 Conductor
Line Cord
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
5
1
4
6
3
2
PPTC
25-pin Male
1
2
3
4
5
6
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
RSIU/RSIS/
RMDS/PIOU
6
5
4
3
2
1
6 Conductor
Line Cord
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
7
8
20
6
2
3
PPTC-25F
25-pin Female
1
2
3
4
5
6
SG
DCD
DTR
DSR
TD
RD
7
8
20
6
2
3
2513
Figure 13-13 PPTC Pinout Diagram
Line Driver
An RS-232 short-haul modem or Line
Driver is needed to boost transmission
for PCs located more than 50 feet from
the Strata DK System. A suitable Line
Driver is made by Black Box®
Corporation at (724) 746-5500, Model
ME764A-MSP (male) or ME764A-FSP
(female). See Figure 13-14.
2544
Figure 13-14 RS-232 Short-haul Line Driver
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-17
;y;y
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration Instructions
Line Drivers must be used in pairs. Figure 13-15 shows the connections between the two line
drivers.
+
G
RCV +
XMT
Pair 1
Twisted-pair Cable
Pair 2
+ RCV
- XMT
+
G
2547
Figure 13-15 Twisted Pair Connections
Instructions for connecting PCs more than 50 feet from the Strata DK are covered later in this
section.
Data Broadcast Unit
The Data Broadcast Unit (Figure 13-16)
enables you to connect more than three PCs
to with the Call Center Viewer application. A
data broadcast unit regenerates the RS-232
signal to accommodate multiple PCs.
2336
A suitable data broadcast unit to drive eight
PCs can be obtained from Black Box
Corporation at (724) 746-5500, model
number TL158A.
TXD CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 PWR
Figure 13-16 RJ-25 Data Broadcast Unit
This unit is powered by AC. If the Strata
DK424 system is equipped with reserve power, then a small PC-type uninterrupted power supply
can be used for full system operation in the event of a power failure.
Instructions for connecting multiple PCs to the CCV appear later in this section.
CCV Configuration Instructions
Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC
➤ Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to
the COM port of the host computer with an RS-232 cable. See Figure 13-17.
Strata DK
Wall Board
CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10
Host PC with Call
Center Viewer (CCV)
4076
Figure 13-17 Connecting Strata DK Directly to a CCV PC with Optional Wall Board
13-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration Instructions
Connecting the DK to a Stand-alone CCV PC, More than 50 Feet Away
2. Connect the other end of the Line Driver to the COM port of the host PC. Set the switch on
this Line Driver to DCE
Strata DK
ACD Installation
1. Connect the Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port (RSIU/RSIS, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB) to
the ME764-MSP Line Driver with an RS-232 cable (see Figure 13-18). Set the switch on the
Line Driver to DTE.
Host PC
Line Driver must be
less than 50' from DK
ME764-FSP
ME764-FSP
Line Driver
Modem
Line Driver
Modem
SW: Set to DTE Position
SW: Set to DCE Position
Plugs into 25-pin COM Port of PC
2402
4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
PPTC male connector
Figure 13-18 Connecting Strata DK to a CCV PC More Than 50 Feet Away
Connecting CCV and SMIS
Call Center Viewer monitors the data flowing between the Toshiba SMIS and the Strata DK. This
enables the CCV application PC to display information and work in conjunction with a SMIS
computer that is connected to the same Strata DK280 or DK424 MIS port.
The CCV application and the SMIS application must reside on separate computers because SMIS
requires a dedicated PC. The CCV provides the real-time status displays and connection of
electronic Wall Boards. SMIS is used to provide historical ACD reports. The CCV can run
concurrently with other Windows applications on other ACD Supervisors’ PCs.
➤ To connect the CCV to SMIS PC, less than 50 feet from the DK
1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU
PCBs). See Figure 13-19.
Depending on the configuration of the RS-232 port of the Strata DK System, a null modem
adapter may be needed
2. Use a six-conductor modular telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS”
port on the CCVY.
3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or
PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-19
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration Instructions
4. To connect up to two more PCs, use a six-conductor modular telephone cord between the
CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port(s) with a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the PCs.
Strata DK
6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector
DK MIS
MASTER
MNTR1
MNTR2
2425
CALL CENTER VIEWER "Y" CONNECTOR
PC with SMIS
Second PC
with CCV
Figure 13-19 Connecting Strata DK to SMIS and CCV PCs
Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs
If you are connecting multiple PCs with the CCV application, use:
One Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector (CCVY)
One six-conductor telephone cord per PC, plus one cord for the DK to CCVY connection
One PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F pin connector per PC
➤ To connect up to three CCV PCs to the Strata DK
1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU
PCBs). See Figure 13-20.
2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS”
jack on the CCVY.
3. Plug a six-conductor modular cord into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or
PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the Main Call Center Viewer PC.
13-20
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration Instructions
Strata DK
Wall Boards
TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10
ACD Installation
4. Connect the additional PCs the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port with a six-conductor line
cord. Use a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F on the PC end of the cord.
Master CCV PC
MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56
2427
CCVY
Connector
CCV PC#2
CUSTOMER SUPPORT CW:5 LCW: 3:15
CCV PC#3
6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector
Figure 13-20 Connecting Strata DK to Two or Three CCV PCs
Connecting the CCV to More than Three CCV PC
Use a Data Distribution Box when you are connecting more than three PCs using the CCV
software. You will also need the connectors listed on the previous page.
➤ To connect Strata DK to multiple CCV PCs
1. Install the CCVY connector into the Strata DK MIS port (RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, or PIOU
PCBs). See Figure 13-21.
2. Use a six-conductor twisted pair telephone cord to connect the DK MIS port to the “DK MIS”
port on the CCVY.
3. Plug a six-conductor modular plug into the “MASTER” port of the CCVY. Use a PPTC-9 or
PPTC-25F at the other end of the cord to connect to the SMIS or Main Call Center Viewer PC.
4. Make sure that the Data Distribution Box is strapped for DTE operation for every output port
(8). By using multiple data broadcast units, as many PCs as desired can be used, provided each
one has the Call Center Viewer application and key installed.
5. Plug in a six-conductor line cord to either the CCVY “MNTR1” or “MNTR2” port. connect
the other end to the Data Distribution box
...or
if the PCs are located more than 50 feet from the DK, use Line Driver Modem(s) to boost the
signal (see Figure 13-22). Use a a PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F to attach the recommended ME764MSP Line Driver modem. Connect the other end of the Line Driver modem directly into the
Data Distribution box.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-21
ACD Installation
CCV Configuration Instructions
6. Connect the additional PCs to the Data Distribution box with RS-232 cables or line cords with
PPTCs.
Strata DK
SMIS
Master CCV PC
Data
Distribution
Box
CCVY
2428
CCV
Slave PC1
or
PCs can be connected with a
PPTC and standard phone cord
or an RS-232 cable
CCV
Slave PC2
6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
RS-232 cable
PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector
PPTC male connector
Figure 13-21 Connecting Up to Three CCV PCs (Less than 50’ From the DK)
Strata DK
SMIS
Master CCV PC
2428
ME764-MSP
ME764-MSP
Line Driver
Modem
Line Driver
Modem
CCVY
Must be less than 50'
from DK
2232
CCV
Slave PC1
Data
Distribution
Box
Second LD can
be up to four miles from DK
CCV
Slave PC2
CCV
Slave PC3
4-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
6-conductor, twisted pair phone cord
RS-232 cable
PPTC-9 or PPTC-25F connector
CCV
Slave PC4
PPTC-25F connector
Figure 13-22 Connecting Multiple CCV PCs (More than 50’ from Strata DK)
13-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ACD Installation
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards
ACD Installation
Electronic Wall Boards can be connected to each supervisor’s PC to display call center status data
over head from the Call Center Viewer application. This provides visibility of important call center
event information to both supervisors and agents. The supervisor can also send custom, user
defined, text information to the electronic Wall Board. This can be used for general information,
motivational messages, etc.
One copy of the Call Center Viewer application supports a Wall Board network which can cover
all active ACD groups. The Call Center Viewer application works with Spectrum 200, 300 and 700
series electronic Wall Boards listed below. In the following table, “R” stands for a red display and
“C” stands for a three-color display: green, amber, and red.
Table 13-1
Wall Board Model and Part Numbers
Model
Toshiba Part Number
215R Master
TOS1512RM1
215R Slave
TOS1512RS1
215R Stand-alone
TOS1512RA1
215C Master
TOS1512CM1
215C Slave
TOS1512CS1
215C Stand-alone
TOS1512CA1
320C Master
TOS1023CM1
320C Slave
TOS1023CS1
320C Stand-alone
TOS1023CA1
330C Master
TOS1033CM1
330C Slave
TOS1033CS1
330C Stand-alone
TOS1033CA1
714C Master
TOS3417CM1
714C Slave
TOS3417CS1
714C Stand-alone
TOS3417CA1
Message Area Size
27” wide x 2.1” high
54” wide x 3.1” high
81” wide x 3.1” high
45.6” wide x 4” high
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards are available directly from Spectrum Corporation
(800-392-5050 or at Website: http://www.specorp.com). Spectrum provides technical support for
their products. Toshiba does not plan to sell, stock, or provide technical support for Spectrum Wall
Boards.
Multiple Wall Boards
Each Call Center Viewer PC can drive multiple electronic Wall Boards that function independently
from other supervisor’s Wall Boards. Wall Boards connect to each other using a twisted pair
Spectrum network. Up to 255 slave Wall Boards can be attached to one master Wall Board. The
total cable distance can be up to 10,000 feet.
Each supervisor can send custom messages to that supervisor’s Wall Board. The Wall Boards are
addressable so that multiple supervisors can use a group of Wall Boards connected to one PC to
send messages and ACD data differently to each Wall Board.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
13-23
ACD Installation
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards
13-24
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
14
Fault Finding
This chapter describes the procedures to diagnose faults in the Strata DK14 and DK40i Key
Service Unit (KSU) as well as the DK424 and DK424i systems. Faults are classified and then
cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and by performing operational tests in the sequences
by prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in “Fault Isolation Flowcharts” on Page 14-10.
Fault Classification
A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical
sequence (Flowchart 14-1 on Page 14-10).
The flowcharts assume that the fault was discovered and reported by a digital or electronic
telephone user. All faults, therefore, are classified according to the way they would appear at the
digital or electronic telephone.
Fault Clearing Procedures
Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associated
external equipment, such as wiring, MOH source, etc.
Important!
Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as
described in the Strata DK Programming Manual. It is very important to verify that
the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the
hardware.
Initialize the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) before testing new systems or when changing the
DK14 or DK40i KSU, or DK424 or DK424i processor PCBs.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-1
Fault Finding
Parts Return
Faults in the Strata DK40i, DK424 and
DK424i are cleared by replacing PCBs,
telephones (digital or electronic) or the
power supply, as instructed in the
flowcharts.
Five symbols are used in the flowcharts,
which are identified in Figure 12-1.
The flowcharts are sequentially
arranged to permit rapid fault
localization within the system. All fault
clearing must begin with the Fault
Classification Flowchart, which is
arranged in the correct fault locating
sequence.
Marking points of a
flowchart sequence.
Important notes affecting the
fault clearing procedure.
Question to be answered
YES or NO.
Progression TO or FROM another
flowchart location. Letters and
numbers denote the exact
entrance or exit points.
Statement of a required action.
1887
Figure 14-1
CAUTION!
Flowchart Symbols
When handling PCBs, do not:
Drop a PCB.
Stack one PCB on top of another.
Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by
touching the grounded cabinet.
Touch the PCB contacts with your fingers.
Important!
If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB, reinstall the original PCB in the
KSU/cabinet before trying another PCB.
Parts Return
1. Pack the part in a suitable container (original box is highly recommended). Use anti-static
containers for all PCBs and feature cartridges. Use plastic bags for digital or electronic
telephones, KSU/cabinet, etc.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage, never write on the part itself.
2. Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the unit
with string (not wire) so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair.
Note
14-2
Return tags are available from Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
KSU/Processor PCB Fault Isolation
KSU/Processor PCB Fault Isolation
The DK14 and DK40i KSU circuits, and DK424 and DK424i processor PCB (RCTU or B_C_U)
circuits may contain a “soft” fault due to an extremely high level of static electricity and/or
improper or no System Initialization.
If the KSU or RCTU is found defective during the fault finding procedures, attempt to clear a
“soft” fault before returning the DK14 or DK40i KSU, or the DK424 or DK424i processor PCB
for repair.
➤ To clear a “soft” fault
2. If the fault returns again, tag the defective KSU or processor PCB and return it for repair.
Fault Isolation Procedure
Fault Finding
1. Initialize the system, then re-program the system as necessary to test for the fault.
1. Test the power supply (see “Testing the System’s Power Supply” on Page 3-6). Test AC power
and ground per system installation section.
2. Verify that the BATT jumper plug on the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU motherboard, or the
DK424 or DK424i processor PCB, is in the On position.
3. If there are feature keys, verify that they are correctly installed:
♦
DK14: verify that the QKYS is correctly installed per Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation.
♦
DK40i: verify the KKYS option installation on the K4RCU3 per Chapter 3 – DK40i
Installation.
♦
DK424 or DK424i: verify correct installation of the RRCS or RKYS options on the
processor PCB per the Installation chapter.
4. For the DK14 and DK40i, skip to Step 6.
For the DK424, make sure the system power is Off. Then install an processor PCB in the
appropriate slot of the Base Cabinet:
DK424: If RCTUD is installed, install RCTUC in the “R11” slot of the Base Cabinet. If
RCTUBB is installed in the “RCTU” slot, install RCTUBA in the R11 slot of the Base
Cabinet.
DK424i: If B2CBU or B3CBU is installed, install its partner card, B2CAU or B3CAU in the
“Bl01” slot of the Base Cabinet.
5. DK424: If installing RCTUBA and RCTUBB, RCTUC and RCTUD, or RCTUE and RCTUF
connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation.
DK424i: If B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU or B5CAU/B5CBU is installed, connect them
together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 7 – DK424i Installation.
6. Verify that all PCBs are installed in proper slots per the Configuration chapter for the system.
7. Turn system power On; backup the customer database using DKi Admin or DKi Backup. For
the DK424, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on RCTUA3, RCTUBB, RCTUB, RCTUD,
RCTUE (RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC and RCTUF do not have heartbeat LEDs). For
DK424i, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on B1CAU, B2CAU, B3CAU or B5CAU
(B2CBU, B3CBU or B5CBU do not have heartbeat LEDs).
8. Run System Initialization Program 91-9 (two times) per Program 91-9.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-3
Fault Finding
DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test
9. Run Program 03, for all option PCBs installed per Program 03.
10. Run the processor RAM tests with Program 00 (Part 2).
11. Enter the customer database (manually or with DKi Admin or DKi Backup) and retest for
faults.
12. After performing the above steps, tag the defective PCB(s), Power Supply, or KSU, and return
for repair.
DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test
This test applies to the base and expansion cabinet RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies.
Cabinet PCBs may or may not be installed when beginning this test. Some steps in the test require
an AC/DC voltmeter that can measure up to 50VDC and 150VAC.
Notes
●
●
RPSU280 and RPSU424 power supplies are fit, form, and functionally the same. They can
be interchanged and mixed in DK280, and DK424 systems.
To test DK14 or DK40i power supplies, see their respective installation in
Chapter 1 – DK14 Installation or Chapter 3 – DK40i Installation.
➤ To test the Power Supply
1. Verify that the correct RPSU280 and RPSU424 jumper plug is installed in the jumper plug
socket. The plug with the wire must be installed on the Base Cabinet power supply and the
plug without the wire must be installed on all expansion cabinet power supply. One of each
plug is supplied in a plastic bag attached to each power supply.
2. Verify the power supply On/Off switch is in the On position.
Note
The Base Cabinet On/Off switch must be On to allow expansion cabinet power supplies to
operate.
Verify that the data ribbon cable is plugged into the base from all expansion cabinets.
Check AC power and ground per AC Power and Grounding Requirements in
Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation.
3. Ensure the AC power cord is plugged into the RPSU280 or RPSU424 AC IN connector and
the commercial AC outlet (or power strip (RPSB) if used). The green power LED indicator
will be on when AC power is connected to the power supply and the On/Off switch is On.
Take appropriate action to restore AC power if necessary.
Note
The green power LED indicates that AC voltage is present at the AC IN connector only
when the power supply On/Off switch On. This is helpful for battery backup systems—the
POWER indicator will be Off and the +5V and –5V indicators will be On when the
DK280 or DK424 is operating on reserve power (batteries).
4. Verify that the +5V and –5V green LED indicators are On. If one or both indicators are Off,
remove cabinet PCBs one at a time and check if +5V or –5V indicators turn on (it may be
necessary to turn power Off and On to restore ±5V). Replace defective PCBs causing a ±5V
fault.
Important!
14-4
If a CRCU PCB is installed on an RCTU PCB, ±5V will turn Off. Do not install
CRCU on RCTU. Only RRCS DTMF PCBs can be installed on RCTU.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test
5. Lightly press the three –24 circuit breakers to ensure they have not accidentally opened during
shipment. If a circuit breaker continues to “trip,” remove cabinet PCBs, one at a time, and try
to reset the circuit breaker. Replace defective PCBs if causing –24V fault. If breakers continue
to trip, go to Step 7.
6. Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power supply DC output voltages at the “DC OUT”
connector on the power supply. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the FG screw. Insert
the negative (red) meter lead tip into the DC out connector until it makes contact.
Make sure that +5V, –5V, and –24V are within the range specified in Figure 14-2. Do this test
with PCBs inserted; if a voltage(s) is not within specification, remove PCBs, one at a time and
recheck the voltage. (Power may have to be turned Off and On to restore a voltage.)
7. Unplug the cabinet DC power connector from the power supply “DC OUT” jack. Attempt to
reset -24V breakers per Step 5. If breaker cannot be reset replace power supply; if breakers
reset go to Step 8.
Fault Finding
Replace any PCB which causes a voltage fault. If voltage tests out of specification with all
PCBs removed from the cabinet, go to Step 7.
8. Check the power supply DC voltages measuring at the power supply “DC OUT” jack with the
black meter lead on the BATT “+” terminal. If the DC voltages are within specification when
the cabinet DC power connector is disconnected but not within specification when the cabinet
is connected, the cabinet is probably defective.
If the DC voltages are not within specification when the cabinet DC power connector is
unplugged, the power supply probably is defective. Replace the defective cabinet or power
supply per Chapter 5 – DK424 Installation.
Important!
+5VDC (white wire) cannot be checked with the DC out cable disconnected.
9. Using the DC voltmeter, check the RPSU280 battery charger as follows: Remove the battery
cable from the power supply “BATT” connector. Place the positive (black) meter lead on the
“+” BATT pin and the negative (red) meter lead on the “–” BATT pin. The allowed range is
(–26.3VDC ~ –27.8VDC). The “BATT” connector output of the RPSU424 is 0VDC unless
connected to good batteries. If BATT output is not within specification, replace the RPSU280.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-5
Fault Finding
DK424 RPSU280 Power Supply Test
Power Indicator LEDs (Green)
DC Out Cable/connector
DC OUT
R11
PCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
1
Base
Jumper
Plug
POWER
-24V 2
+5V
3
-5V
DKSUB
DKSUE
AC
Power
Cord
+
BATT
ON
OFF
R11
RCTU
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
–24VDC
Circuit
Breakers
DC VOLTAGE PINS
Red
Wire
No
Wire
Blue
Wire
White
Wire
Green
Wire
+5VDC
0VDC
–5VDC
+5VDC
0VDC
Green
Wire
Green
Wire
Yellow
Wire
Yellow
Wire
Yellow
Wire
0VDC
0VDC
–24VDC
–24VDC
–24VDC
DC VOLTAGE SPECIFICATION
–5VDC (–4.5 ~ –5.5),
Expansion Cabinet only
+
0
–24VDC (–26.3 ~ –27.8)
–
–26.3 ~ –27.8*
FG Wire
and
Spade Lug
24VDC Circuit Breaker
Assignments:
AC IN
ON/OFF Switch
Third Wire Ground or
Power Supply Daisy Chain
Ground to Next Power
Supply
BASE CABINET
24V-1
S15, S16
24V-2
S13, S14
24V-3
S11, S12
BATT (VDC)
–5VDC (+4.5 ~ +5.5)
FG
S16
EXP. CABINET
24-1
SX1, SX2
24-2
SX3, SX4, SX5
24-3
SX6, SX7, SX8
Base
Jumper Plug
Expansion
Jumper Plug
4252
*RPSU424 “BATT” is 0 volt unless connected to good batteries.
Figure 14-2
14-6
RPSU280 Power Supply Voltage Test Points / Circuit Breakers / Jumper Plugs
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Station Cable Continuity Check
Station Cable Continuity Check
Voltmeter Test
Use a voltmeter to check cable continuity between the DK40i KSU/DK424 cabinet, digital or
electronic telephone, DSS console, and the attendant console (DK424). Make tests at the modular
block. Refer to Tables 14-1 and 14-2.
➤ To perform the voltmeter test
2. Disconnect the digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, PDIU-DS, HDCB, or DDCB.
3. Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the wires of the two pairs to verify the readings
shown in Table 14-1 for digital telephone ports. Refer to Table 14-2 for electronic telephone
ports. The reading will be a plus or minus depending on meter lead placement.
Fault Finding
1. Refer to Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for appropriate MDF wiring diagrams in
Chapters 1 and 3.
4. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. See “Power Supply Removal
and Replacement” on Page 1-8, Page 3-19, or Page 5-11.
5. For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or electronic) cable, use an ohmmeter to make a more
precise check.
Table 14-1
Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Voltmeter
From
1.
2.
Strata DK I&M
To
Voltage
Pair
Wire
Color
Pair
Wire
Color
1
T
Green1
2
T
Black
0
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
242
1
T
Green
2
R
Yellow
242
1
R
Red
2
R
Yellow
0
1
T
Green
1
R
Red
242
2
T
Black
2
R
Yellow
242
The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10%
of each other.
Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power,
polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements.
5/00
14-7
Fault Finding
Station Cable Continuity Check
Table 14-2
Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Voltmeter
From
1.
2.
To
Voltage
Pair
Wire
Color
Pair
Wire
Color
1
T
Green1
2
T
Black
242
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
242
1
T
Green
2
R
Yellow
242
1
R
Red
2
R
Yellow
242
1
T
Green
1
R
Red
0
2
T
Black
2
R
Yellow
0
3
T
White
3
R
Blue
0
3
T
White
1
R
Red
0
3
R
Blue
1
R
Red
0
3
T
White
1
T
Green
0
3
R
Blue
1
T
Green
0
3
T
White
2
T
Black
0
3
R
Blue
2
T
Black
0
3
T
White
2
R
Yellow
0
3
R
Blue
2
R
Yellow
0
The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10%
of each other.
Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power,
polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements.
Ohmmeter Test
Check the continuity of the cable run between the KSU/cabinet and digital or electronic telephone
with an ohmmeter.
➤ To perform the ohmmeter test
1. Disconnect the DSS console, electronic or digital telephone.
2. At the MDF, remove the bridging clips.
3. At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red), the T
and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for PEKU/
PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers, see Chapter 10 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.)
4. At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The proper
readings are shown in Table 14-3 for digital telephones, DDSSs, DDCBs and Table 14-4 for
electronic telephones and HDSSs.
5. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. “Power Supply Removal and
Replacement” on Page 1-8 (DK14), or Page 3-19 (DK40i), or Page 5-8 (DK424).
14-8
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Station Cable Continuity Check
Cable Installation Test
If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are within limits, digital telephones, DDCBs, or DDSS
consoles may not operate.
➤ To perform the cable installation test
1. Cable runs for the above digital devices must be free of cable splits (single or double). Test for
and eliminate all cable splits.
2. Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will not operate if cable runs contain any type (short or
long) of cable bridge. Test for and eliminate all cable bridges.
4. For DK40i: See Table 3-9 on Page 3-38. Verify that your telephone is wired correctly (2-pair
or External power) for the options it supports (ADM, RPCI-DI, PDIU-DI, HHEU, DVSU,
etc.).
Table 14-3
Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter
From
Table 14-4
To
Voltage
Pair
Wire
Color
Pair
Wire
Color
1
T
Green1
2
T
Black
open
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
open
1
T
Green
2
R
Yellow
open
1
R
Red
2
R
Yellow
open
1
T
Green
1
R
Red
40 ohms2
2
T
Black
2
R
Yellow
40 ohms2
Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter
From
1.
2.
Strata DK I&M
Fault Finding
3. When installing the station cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 ft. of an AC power line.
AC power lines should cross at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire
pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
To
Voltage
Pair
Wire
Color
Pair
Wire
Color
1
T
Green1
2
T
Black
open
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
open
1
T
Green
2
R
Yellow
open
1
R
Red
2
R
Yellow
open
1
T
Green
1
R
Red
40 ohms2
2
T
Black
2
R
Yellow
40 ohms2
3
T
White
3
R
Blue
40 ohms2
3
T
White
1
R
Red
open
3
R
Blue
1
R
Red
open
3
T
White
1
T
Green
open
3
R
Blue
1
T
Green
open
3
T
White
2
T
Black
open
3
R
Blue
2
T
Black
open
3
T
White
2
R
Yellow
open
The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10%
of each other.
This is the maximum allowable reading for all digital and electronic telephone
cable runs except if connecting an HDSS console to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU,
then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms.
5/00
14-9
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
The following troubleshooting flowcharts are available to aid in fault isolation. Toshiba
recommends reading the previous text in this chapter before proceeding to Flowchart 14-1 on Page
14-10 to begin fault isolation.
Flowchart 14-1
Fault Classification
START
Please read
Chapters 2 and 3
before
proceeding.
Is the
system completely
non-operational?
1-1
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-2
No
Is it a station
no dial tone
fault?
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-3
No
Is it a CO
line no dial
tone fault?
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-4
Is it a
remote
maintenance
fault?
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-8
No
Is the fault
classified on
this page?
Yes
Go to
appropriate
Flowchart
14-1~14-12
No
Call your
technical support
group.
1879
No
Is a DSS
console nonoperational?
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-5
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-6
Yes
Go to
Flowchart
14-7
No
Is it a
voice mail/auto
attd fault?
No
Is it
an SMDR
fault?
No
1-1
14-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-2
Catastrophic Faults
START
Go to
Flowchart
14-1
No
Is the system
completely
non-operational?
Yes
Fault Finding
2-1
Test the Power Supply as described
in the Installation Chapter.
Also perform Hardware Fault
Isolation per this chapter.
2-2
Was the fault
isolated by completing
the system hardware
check?
No
Yes
2-3
Tag the defective
unit(s) and return
for repair.
END
2-5
Re-initialize the system
(Programs 91-9 and 03)
and re-check fault using
default program data (do
not enter customer
database).
2-4
Reprogram customer
database, one program
at a time, and check
to see if fault re-occurs.
2-6
Yes
2-7
Does the fault
re-occur after
entering customer
database?
No
END
Was the
fault cleared
after re-initializing
the system?
No
Yes
2-8
Call your
technical support
group.
1880
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-11
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-3
START
Station Dial Tone Faults
Check station wiring
per the Station Cable
Continuity Check in this
chapter.
3-1
Repair if necessary.
Is the fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
3-2
Replaceable Station
PCBs:
DK14: QCDU,
QSTU2
DK40i Base KSU:
KSTU2 and all PCBs
in the DK40i
Expansion Unit
DK424 or DK424i:
PEKU, PESU, PSTU,
RSTU, RDSU/RSTS,
Is the
faulty station on a
replaceable station
PCB?
Yes
Replace the PCB
and retest
3-8
No
No
3-3
Are the
faulty station(s)
only in the DK40i
Expansion KSU or only one
DK424 or DK424i
cabinet?
Yes
3-5
Is the fault
cleared?
Yes
3-4
Change the DK40i
Expansion KSU and
retest or check the
cabinet power supply
per the RPSU280
power supply test.
Then replace the
DK424 or DK424i
cabinet
Replace the defective
unit and return it to the
repair center
END
No
3-7
3-6
Replace the DK14 or DK40i
Base KSU. Or, test the DK424
or DK424i common control PCB
per the Fault Isolation section.
Initialize the
DK424/DK424i/DK40i system
(Prog: 91-9 and 03).
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
Go to
3-4
Retest.
No
Is the
fault
cleared?
No
Call your technical
support group.
1881
Yes
Go to
3-4
14-12
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-4
CO Line Dial Tone Faults
START
1. Check CO line wiring per Chapter 10.
2. Test central office line using a
standard telephone or butt set at the
TELCO block.
Repair as necessary.
4-1
Yes
END
No
Change the PCB
and retest.
4-3
4-2
Are all
faulty CO lines
on a replaceable PCB
(not including KSU
motherboard)?
4-4
Yes
No
No
Is the
fault
cleared?
4-7
Replaceable CO Line
PCBs:
DK14
QCDU
DK40i Base
KSU:
KCOU
TCOU
TDDU
TBUU
DK40i only:
KCDU
DK40i
Expansion
KSU/DK424/
DK424i:
RCOU
RCIU2
REMU
RDDU
PCOU
DK424/
DK424i only
REMU
RCOS
RGLU
RBUU
Yes
Fault Finding
Is the fault
cleared?
4-5
Are the
faulty CO lines
only in the DK40i
Expansion KSU or one
DK424/DK424i
Cabinet?
Replace the defective
unit and return it to the
repair center.
Yes
END
No
4-10
4-9
Change the expansion
unit and retest.
4-6
Change the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU or test
the DK424 or DK424i common control PCB
per the Fault Isolation section and initialize the
system (Prog. 91-9 and 03).
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
Go to
4-5
Retest.
No
Is the
fault
cleared?
No
Call your technical
support group.
Yes
Go to
4-5
Strata DK I&M
5/00
1882
14-13
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-5
DSS Console Faults
START
Note
DSS
console
type?
DDSS
DSS is not available on DK14.
5-0
Is the correct
PCB slot code entered
in Program 03?
HDSS
On PEKU connected
to HDSS, set SW1
to the DSS position.
Enter correct PCB slot
code using Program 03;
then turn power OFF
(for 5 seconds) and
then ON.
No
5-1
Yes
5-2
5-3
Refer to Chapter 10 and verify wiring:
Go to
5-0
Is the
fault
cleared?
• For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base
unit or PDKU (KCDU does not
support DDSS).
• For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of
PEKU (PESU does not support
HDSS).
No
Go to
5-3
Yes
END
Correct as necessary.
5-4
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
Test DSS cable with cable continuity
checks in this chapter.
Correct as necessary.
5-5
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
Call your technical
support group.
14-14
1883
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-6
Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant Faults
6-1
START
Check that the QRCU3 (DK14),
K5RCU (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424 or
DK424i) is installed correctly and
programmed with Code 92 in Prog. 03
(DK40i) or Code 92, 93, and 94 in
Prog. 03 (DK424 or DK424i).
This chart assumes
the VM/AA device
has no faults.
Yes
Is the
fault
cleared?
Fault Finding
Is VM/AA
integration completely
non-operational?
Yes
END
No
No
6-2
Check that VM/AA ports are connected to
standard telephone station ports correctly.
(Refer to QSTU2 (DK14), KSTU2 (DK40i
only). DK40i/DK424 RSTU2, PSTU, PESU,
and for the DK424 or DK424i, RDSU/RSTS
wiring diagrams in Chapter 10.)
Read “Voice Mail Options” in Chapter 10 and
the programming instructions for:
DK14/DK40i: 03 (Code 92, slot 00 for
K4RCU3) DK424: 03 (Code 92~94 for RCTU
PCB) DK14/DK40i/DK424/DK424i: 15-0 and
15-3 (Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09,
15~20). This explains system hardware and
programming options related to VM and
external auto attendant.
Correct if necessary.
6-4
Correct Hardware/System Programming as
necessary.
Is the
fault
cleared?
6-3
Is the
fault
cleared?
END
No
Yes
No
Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and
657) are stored correctly in users’ digital or
electronic telephones. Use operating
procedures in the manual for instructions.
END
Using a standard DTMF
telephone, check all standard
telephone circuits (QSTU2,
KSTU2,RSTU2, PSTU2, PESU).
Replace defective PCB if
necessary.
6-5
Is the
fault
cleared?
Other VM/AA related programs:
• 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones
• 13 – Message center
• 33 – Station hunting
• 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing
• 36 – Fixed call forward
• 37 – Ring transfer recall time
Yes
Yes
END
No
6-6
Call your technical
support group.
1884
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-15
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-7
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Faults
START
7-4
Read the SMDR
installation
instructions in this
chapter before
proceeding with this
chart.
This chart assumes
the SMDR device
has no faults.
No
SMDR data or
garbled data is
detected at the QSMU,
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS/
RSIU/RSIS SMDR port.
No
Verify that the PIOU/PIOUS, WSIU (DK14), or
TSIU (DK40i only) baud rate SW1 switch is in
the correct position (300 bps or 1200 bps) to
match the SMDR device baud rate. (Refer to
TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS installation in Chapter 7.)
If using RSIU/RSIS with DK424 or DK424i,
verify Program 76-1 for port assignment.
Verify baud rate in Program 76-2
Yes
Change as required.
7-5
7-1
No other faults are
classified. Call your
technical support
group for assistance.
No
SMDR
data records are
sent correctly but not
when the customer
requires.
Yes
7-2
Set SMDR options in
Program 60: Threshold
time, long distance
calls only, etc.
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
Verify that the SMDR device
communication parameters are set
for: 8-data bits, no-parity, 1-stop bit,
300 or 1200 bps. RSIU/RSIS 1200,
2400, 4800 and 9600
Change as required.
7-6
7-3
Call your technical
support group.
No
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
7-7
7-8
END
• DK40i/DK424/DK424i: The SMDR
port is the bottom modular jack
(TTY is on top) of WSIU (DK14) or
TSIU (DK40i only) /PIOU/PIOUS.
• DK424 or DK424i: SMDR can be
any jack on RSIU or RSIS. See
• Program 76.
The modular cord connecting to
the SMDR port must be 6-wires.
Check that the SMDR device
is wired correctly to the
WSIU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU/PIOU/
PIOUS SMDR port. (Refer to
PIOU or PIOUS wiring
instructions in Chapter 10.)
Fix as required.
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
Change the
PIOU/RSIU/RSIS/TSIU
PIOUS PCB.
7-9
Is the
fault
cleared?
Yes
END
No
Call your technical
support group.
1885
14-16
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
Flowchart 14-8
Remote Maintenance Faults
START
If a digital or electronic telephone
is in the Programming mode, it is
not possible to enter the Remote
Maintenance mode.
This chart assumes that the remote
terminal and modem have no fault and that
Remote Maintenance does not operate.
Fault Finding
Check that the baud rate switch (SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS) is set to match the remote
terminal baud rate (300 bps LED ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) .
DK40i: check that the WSIU, TSIU, IMDU, PIOU, or PIOUS is installed correctly.
DK424 or DK424i: check that the RSIU, RMDS, IMDU, RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS is installed correctly.
If using RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, check that Program 76 settings match DKi Admin/DKi Backup PC and
modem or remote terminal/modem.
Check that communication parameters of remote terminal are set to match the PIOU or PIOUS TTY
port or IMDY (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit).
8-1
External modem connected
to the WSIU, TSIU, PIOU,
PIOUS TTY port
8-2
Is Remote
Maintenance connection
via external modem on TTY
port or IMDU
modem?
IMDU modem installed on
PIOU or PIOUS
8-4
Check that the communication parameters of
the remote terminal are set to match the
IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit).
Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3
switch is in the MODEM position.
Check that the WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS SW3
switch is in the TTY position. For DK424 or
DK424i, check Program 76-1 and verify the
port is programmed as a 1 for TTY.
• Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in
Program 77-1.
• If required, assign CO lines for DISA or to
ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code
51~53.
• When calling IMDU or RMDS via DISA or
ring transfer, dial #19.
If calling RMDS or IMDU via DID lines, call
the sttion number assigned to Port 085
(RCTUB) or Port 245 (RCTUC/D) in
Program *09 or 71, 72 and 73.
Correct as necessary.
8-3
Is the
fault
cleared?
Correct above if necessary or
replace IMDU or PIOU(S).
YES
END
8-5
NO
Check that the modem or terminal connected
to the TTY port is wired correctly per the
WSIU/TSIU/PIOU/PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS, RSSU
MDF wiring in Chapter 10.
Correct above if necessary or replace WSIU,
TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, or RSIU/RSIS.
• The TTY port is the top modular
jack (SMDR is bottom) of the
PIOU/PIOUS.
• The modular cord connecting the
TTY port to the terminal or external
modem must be 6-wires.
• TTY can be any jack on
RSIU/RSIS—see Program 76.
Is the
fault
cleared?
Call your technical
support group.
1886
Strata DK I&M
5/00
14-17
Fault Finding
Fault Isolation Flowcharts
14-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
15
This chapter gives you information about Computer Telephony Integration (CTI). Currently, it
includes procedures for using a Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for Telephony
Application Programming Interface (TAPI) running under both Microsoft® Windows® 95,
Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 for Workgroups.
The Telephony Specification was jointly developed and copyrighted by Intel® and Microsoft. It
consists of both TAPI, used by applications, and the Telephony Service Provider Interface (TSPI),
implemented by other service providers.
Toshiba provides the TAPI connection through a Strata DKT2000-series telephone with a modified
Data Interface Unit. The Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for TAPI integrates into the
bottom base of a 2000-series telephone.
Computer Telephony
Integration
About Strata DK and TAPI
There are two separate modes of operation for the Toshiba TSPI depending on the type of Strata
DK telephone system that the DKT/RPCI-DI is connected to. Toshiba’s TSPI is configured using
the Telephony icon installed as part of TAPI in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel.
Windows Telephony is a component of Windows Open Services Architecture. This architecture
provides telephony services when connected to many different telephone switches. Therefore, an
application needs to know only the definition of the API (Application Program Interface) and not
its implementation.
The Strata DK TAPI Service Provider (DK TSPI) comes with each RPCI-DI. This device, along
with this software module, allows a Windows-based PC to interconnect with the phone system for
receiving and making calls. Any TAPI-compliant PC software becomes compatible with Strata DK
systems.
The disk set also contains a “middleware” software known as StrataLink. This application enables
other Windows-based software to also work with Strata DK systems.
Requirements
To use TAPI with the DKT Service Provider, you must have an IBM-compatible PC with 8 MB
RAM, running:
♦
Windows 95, Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11.
♦
Microsoft TAPI installed. (Most TAPI applications automatically install TAPI as part of the
normal installation process.)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
15-1
Computer Telephony Integration
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows
Step 1: Remove Previously Installed DKT TAPI Service Provider
Applications
Note
Refer to the appropriate operating system instructions:
Windows 2000
1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. Double click on the Telephony Control
Panel icon.
2. Double click on the Phone/Modem Options icon.
3. From the dialog box, select the Advanced Tab to select the devices.
4. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes.
Windows 98 or Windows NT
1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. Double click on the Telephony Control
Panel icon.
2. Double click on the Double
click on the Telephony
Control Panel icon.
3. Select Telephony Drivers
to select the devices.
4. A confirmation box asks if
you want to remove the
driver. Click Yes.
068win
Windows 95
1. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel.
2. Double click on the Telephony Control Panel icon. Highlight the Toshiba DKT TSPI. Click
Remove.
3. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes.
15-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows
Step 2: Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages
1. From the Windows’ Start button, select Run.
2. Enter A:\Setup.exe, then
follow the Installation Wizard
instructions.
2534
Computer Telephony
Integration
3. When the Package Selection
menu appears, select the
appropriate option to install
either software package or both
software packages
(recommended).
2527
4. When the Automatic Startup
menu appears, make sure that
“Add StrataLink to the Startup
Group” is checked.
5. Follow the remaining Installation
Wizard instructions to complete
the installation.
2530
Strata DK I&M
5/00
15-3
Computer Telephony Integration
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows
Step 2: Initialize StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider
➤ To initialize StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider
1. Press the Windows Start button,
select Programs, StrataLink,
and StrataLink.
2. Click “Enable TAPI”.
2662
The light above this box will be red at first, then yellow
as the TAPI Service Provider is initialized, and finally
green when initialization is complete.
3. Press Driver Setup to configure
the TAPI Service Provider.
4. Select the Com Port that will be
used to make the connection to
the desktop telephone.
5. You may type a name in the
Phone Name box. This name
appears in the application on
the PC.
6. Select phone type: 10- or 20key.
7. Select the switch type from the
drop-down menu.
8. Select the shared line
appearance to enable incoming
calls to act like a key system.
Leave it unselected for a
standard TAPI (PBX interface).
15-4
2695
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows
9. Click on Configure Keys to
define the functions assigned to
each of the telephone buttons.
10. Select a button.
11. Choose a function from the list.
12. Name the button to match the
name on the telephone. Repeat
for each button to be used (see
table).
Note
Strata Link uses the label to create the
customizing Trigger Rules. Unique button
names allows rules that apply individually
to that button. Buttons with the same name
will have the same rule applied. For
example, the two PDN buttons will follow
any rule If {Call Ringing} on PDN then
{Pop Goldmine}”. All other buttons will
not respond to this rule.
Computer Telephony
Integration
2696
13. Click OK.
Toshiba recommends the following assignments:
Table 15-1
DK Button Definitions
DK Button
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Use
PDN/Intercom
Primary Line
SDN
Secondary Appearance
PhDN
Primary Line
CO Line
CO Line
Speed
Speed Dial
All Others
Feature Key
15-5
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
This section provides important general information on StrataLink and how it operates. For
specific instructions on using StrataLink with a given software application, see the Application
Notes for that software.
Many Windows-based Computer Telephony software products either do not have a TAPI
compliant version of their product, or need the additional capabilities of a “middleware” software
to use their software with the Strata DK.
StrataLink is a “middleware” application that provides the multiple line and translation functions
for non-TAPI software applications. StrataLink provides the flexibility to interface multiple
applications and to be able to define the actions desired for each button on the connected phone.
StrataLink works with Toshiba’s TAPI Service Provider (TSPI) v2.26 or higher. Both the TAPI
Service Provider and the StrataLink application are included on the TAPI installation disks. Either
TSPI, StrataLink, or both can be installed. The installation program selects the appropriate TAPI
Service Provider for the PC’s operating system.
StrataLink Operation
StrataLink communicates with software applications using Microsoft Windows Open System
Architecture capabilities for Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). The specific messages are defined
as Actions in StrataLink. StrataLink contains a number of Actions for popular applications. The
user can select from this list or define new Actions for an application.
StrataLink also accepts DDE Execute commands. These commands enable dialing calls,
answering calls, holding calls, blind transfer of calls, and hanging up. Many of these commands
can be directed to specific telephone buttons or the TSPI can choose the button.
When using this interface for dialing, StrataLink also provides for button preferences to be used
for intercom, local, or long distance calls. It can include prefix digits prior to dialing the number
and automatically insert a “1,” if required for long distance calling.
Incoming calls are based upon events from the TAPI Service Provider. These events (Call Ringing,
Call Connected, Call Hold, Call Cleared) are used in the Triggering Rules that define what Actions
are needed and when. Filters can be used to qualify when an action should be taken.
Figure 15-1 shows how StrataLink is used with Windows applications to provide telephone
services with your desktop PC.
Microsoft Windows PC
DDE Link
Strata DKT
RS-232 Link
RPCI to COM Port
TAPI
Service
Provider
TAPI
DLL
(Windows)
StrataLink
2047
Figure 15-1
15-6
CT
Software
Application
DDE Link
Computer Telephony Connection Using Toshiba’s StrataLink
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
StrataLink has three basic functions. It:
♦
Accepts events from the telephone, applies filtering rules and conditions, and causes actions to
take place in the application
♦
Provides for outbound calling and call control from the application
♦
Provides tools for testing the interface and debugging or monitoring the call events
Incoming Call Events
Using Windows TAPI, StrataLink accepts the Strata DK commands and provides a selection of
Actions based upon call events (Triggers). Each Trigger can have one or more conditions applied
to control how, when, or if the Action should be performed. Each Action has a set of parameters
that can customize the application for the user. A list of Trigger events can be created for the
desired Action.
Provides Outbound Calling and Call Control
The Computer Telephony Software creates events for controlling the telephone. The events are
controlled using DDE exchanges originating from the application and received by StrataLink. In
some programs, the application software must be configured for this operation.
StrataLink provides several important testing and debugging functions. These tools enable the
installer to verify whether the link is functional. The installer can also use the TAPI link to view
the details of the information being passed. These tools reduce the guesswork in the
troubleshooting and operation verification.
Starting StrataLink
Computer Telephony
Integration
Tests, Debugs, and Monitors
The Main Screen for StrataLink is shown in Figure 15-2. This screen provides access to the main
menu, driver setup, the ability to enable/disable the TAPI link, and a testing interface with the
telephone. Most Setup items are located under Setup item from the Main Menu.
3544
Figure 15-2
Strata DK I&M
5/00
StrataLink Main Screen
15-7
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
➤ To install and set up StrataLink
1. Load the software by inserting Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive, and from Windows, selecting
Run…, typing A:\Setup.exe and pressing Enter.
2. Follow the instructions for installation.
3. Start StrataLink, enable TAPI and wait for the green light that indicates a communication link
with the TAPI Service Provider was successful.
4. Press Driver Setup to configure the driver if not previously done as part of the installation.
5. The Driver Setup selects the COM port, system type, and key definitions for the connected
phone. Be sure to assign meaningful labels for the keys on the phone as these are used for
creating the Triggering Rules.
6. Test the link with the phone using the Test section. Select the button to place a call, enter a
number to dial and press Dial.
7. Once the link has been established with the phone, go to Setup to establish the Preferences,
add or edit any new Actions.
Note
Actions can be tested using the Add/Edit Action and Show Test Params button.
8. Create Trigger Rules using the events expected from the phone and the desired Action.
9. Make several test calls to verify all the pieces are working and the installation is complete.
Preferences
Most application programs when attempting to dial using a DDE command are not able to specify
the line appearance for the call. A line appearance must be specified and can be different for the
different types of calls:
♦
Intercom Calls – dialing numbers with less than five digits.
♦
Local Calls – calls that match the local area code specified or calls with only seven digits.
♦
Long Distance Calls – any call with 10 or more digits (also indicate if a “1” needs to be added
when missing).
When an Intercom or [PDN] button is used to initiate calls, a prefix code is required to select an
outside line. Local and Long Distance calls have provisions for prefix digits to be dialed prior to
the number received from the software application.
Applications using DDE messages generally will dial the area code of the telephone number even
if it is a local call. By assigning a Local Area Code, StrataLink detects these calls, strips off the
Area Code of the telephone number, and dials using the “Local” appearance.
For example, if your Local Area Code is “714” and the application attempts to dial “714-5151234,” the program converts the number to “515-1234” before dialing.
It may be convenient to record a person’s extension number as part of the telephone number. When
dialed the 10 digit number is sent along with the extension number. As long as the number is stored
using any letter, such as “x,” all digits following are not dialed, e.g. “714-515-1234 x205” is dialed
as “515-1234”.
Some databases may not include a “1” as part of the dialed number. StrataLink can optionally
insert this missing digit by using the option “Add 1+ if Missing”. For example, if the application
attempts to dial a long distance call like “612-555-1234” (and your Local Area Code is “714”), this
option converts the number to “1-612-555-1234” before dialing.
15-8
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Incoming calls with Caller ID need to have the telephone number in a specific format for the
lookup function to work. Caller ID and ANI numbers are received from the telephone network as
10 digits. Many databases store the numbers in a more readable format using punctuation formats
by inserting hyphens, parenthesis, and spaces.
StrataLink provides a method for defining the format to present this number to the software
application. Any character other than “x” is included as part of the number, where “x” will be
replaced with the number received as part of Caller ID.
For example, if the international number plan is needed for the number, then a code for &H of
“1+(xxx) xxx-xxxx” is entered. When a number “6125551234” is received, it will be presented as
“1+(612) 555-1234”.
The Preferences dialog box is shown in Figure 15-3.
Computer Telephony
Integration
3542
Figure 15-3
Preferences Dialog Box
DDE Commands
StrataLink accepts a number of DDE commands for controlling calls. StrataLink, wherever
necessary, offers more than one format for each command. The commands supported include Dial,
Answer, Hangup, Transfer, and Hold/Unhold.
Table 15-2
DDE Commands
Dial a telephone number on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not
specified, the lowest button appearance (Intercom, Local, or Long Distance) is used.
Dial
[Dial, “Phone Number”, <appearance>]
...or [DialNumber (“Button Name”, “Outside Phone Number”)]
Answer a Ringing Call on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not
specified, the lowest appearance is used.
Answer
[Answer, <appearance>]
...or [AnswerCall ( )]
Hangup on a active call.
Hangup
[Hangup]
...or [DropCall ( )]
Hold
Strata DK I&M
5/00
To hold the active call.
[Hold]
15-9
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Table 15-2
DDE Commands (continued)
Retrieving a call from Hold. If the “appearance” isn’t specified, the lowest button
number with a holding line is answered.
Unhold
[UnHold, <appearance>]
Blind transfer a call to the designated number
Transfer
[Xfr, "Ext Number"]
…or Transfer, "Ext Number"]
Terminates the OA Client program.
Quit
[Quit]
<appearance>
This is a numerical value for the buttons on the attached phone. Buttons begin on the
lower left and count upward beginning with zero.
Telephone System Events
Trigger Rules and Conditions
The Trigger Rules are established by the installer or user so that specific Actions can be performed
when an event occurs. The Triggering event can be any number of things (e.g., Call Ringing, Call
Connected, Call Holding, or Call Cleared). See Figure 15-4.
2657
Figure 15-4
Trigger Rules
The existing Trigger Rules can be displayed, edited, deleted or new rules can be added. Multiple
rules can be created and active at the same time.
Each rule uses the names assigned in the TAPI Service Provider to determine their application to a
given event. Buttons with the same name use the same rule written for that name. For example,
creating a Triggering Rule for “Call Ringing” on a [PDN] with multiple appearances can be
written to apply only to the PDN name, such as “3351.”
Specific [PDNs] can be labeled for “Call Ringing,” while other appearances may require a screen
pop whenever a call is connected. These other appearances could have the rule “Call Connected”
using <any> button. This prevents screen pops for calls which are directly ringing a particular
telephone button, while providing screen pops when a call is answered on another button on the
phone.
15-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Add/Change a Trigger Rule
When adding or changing a rule, Filters and Conditions fields display on the Add/Change Trigger
Rule screen (see Figure 15-5):
3535
Add/Change Trigger Rule
Filters
When the triggering event occurs, it may need to pass specific filters or conditions before the
Action is performed. The Filters (see Figure 15-5) are:
♦
Caller ID – required/not required. If there is no Caller ID associated with a call, you may not
want to have an Action performed. The most common example is “Screen Pop” where you
may select “any Number” to not perform the action until a Caller ID number has been
received. To trigger an event anytime a call rings, regardless of whether Caller ID is present,
you need select “none Required.”
♦
Trigger Delay – a short delay, expressed in tenths of a second, that will occur prior to the
action. The delay is needed to allow the Caller ID or other information to be received prior to
performing the action.
♦
Appearance – the Trigger can be used on any line or a specific line. If the same Trigger
applies to some lines but not to others, the rule must be entered for each line to which the rule
applies. Buttons having the same name need only one rule, e.g., two buttons labeled 205 would
have the same action whenever either ring when a Trigger Rule for Call Ringing is created for
appearance 205.
Computer Telephony
Integration
Figure 15-5
Conditions
Conditions (i.e., Phone State, shown in Figure 15-5) include performing the action “if not talking”
or “if trunk number is available.” You may not want to have an Action performed while you are
talking on a call. Again, a common example is to screen pop only “If Not Talking”. This prevents
an Action from occurring until you are finished with the call or placed it on hold.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
15-11
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Actions and Parameters
Actions are set up by the installer to perform a specific function (e.g., Screen Pop Goldmine, Pop
Telemagic, or Beep My Pager). These Actions can then be used as part of a Trigger Rule and
performed when a specific event occurs. The existing Actions can be displayed (Figure 15-6),
edited, deleted or new Actions added.
3533
Figure 15-6
Add/Change Actions
Important!
Deleting or adding Actions without instructions from Toshiba or knowledge of your
program’s DDE commands is not recommended. Toshiba supports editing actions
that are based on Application Notes.
Add/Edit Action
When adding or editing an Action, the following fields are displayed (see Figure 15-7 and the
following text):
3543
Figure 15-7
15-12
Add/Edit Actions
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
Important!
Changes to these items without specific instructions in the program’s Application
Notes is not supported by Toshiba.
Action Name – Every event Action has a “Name” that you should set to describe the result the
action, such as “Beep My Pager.” This name is used in the Trigger Rules.
Type – Select the Action to be performed from the pull-down menu. Each Action has one or more
parameters that must be provided by the user/installer. These parameters often contain “tokens”
that enable the inclusion of real-time information (e.g., Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.).
The choices are as follows:
♦
♦
App Name – Used to set the DDE name of the application to receive the DDE event.
♦
App Topic – Used to set the DDE “Topic” for the application to receive the DDE event.
♦
DDE Execute String – This is the command executed by the application receiving this
DDE event. Typically this command includes token(s) so that real-time information is
included in the command string.
Show/Hide Test Params Button – When you set up an Action, it is always a good idea to
make sure the Action works correctly. The Show Test Params button exposes a set of
parameters (e.g., Calling Phone Number and Calling Name) that can be changed for verifying
the action defined.
➤ To execute the command, press the Do Test button.
The results of the action are displayed on the lower part of the window. Clicking on the open
part of the window clears the test results and the process repeated.
Computer Telephony
Integration
♦
DDE Execute – Sends a specific DDE command to the program you specify. This Action is
very flexible and can be used to communicate with many different types of programs for a
variety of purposes (e.g., Screen Pop). DDE Execute String parameters include:
Some parameters contain token(s) that enable the inclusion of real-time information (like the
Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The Tokens are described in Table 15-3.
Table 15-3
Tokens
Token
Note
Strata DK I&M
Function
&P
Caller Phone Number: Unformatted
&H
Caller Phone Number: Formatted 714-555-12341
&I
Caller Phone Number: Formatted (714)555-12341
&N
Caller Name
&L
Elapsed Time of Call (Seconds)
&C
TAPI Call ID
&R
Trunk (CO Line) Number
&E
Called Phone Number (DNIS)
&F
Called Name (DNIS Tag)
&A
Phone Button Number
&B
Phone Button Name
&D
Date: MM:DD:YY
&T
Time of Day: HH:MM
The format is defined using the Preferences dialog box.
5/00
15-13
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
TeleMagic Link
The TeleMagic program (from Telemagic, Inc.) communicates with StrataLink via a special link
called TeleMagic. The TeleMagic Link appears automatically each time StrataLink is accessed and
provides a means to set up and monitor communication between the two programs.
Important!
For this link to operate, the TeleMagic program must be loaded and operational.
If you select Auto Activate Link (see Figure 15-8), StrataLink automatically attempts to establish
the TeleMagic link periodically (every 30 seconds or so) until the connection is made. Once the
link is established, the Link Active light changes from Red to Green, dialing and Screen-Pop can
function. For Screen-Pop to work, the appropriate Trigger Rules must be set up.
3549
Figure 15-8
Telemagic Link
Pop TeleMagic
This instruction sends a “Pop” or “LookUp” command to TeleMagic with the configuration you
specify. This is used to Screen-Pop the TeleMagic contact manager when a call rings in. Pop
TeleMagic parameters are:
♦
Index Level – Tells TeleMagic the level on which to perform the search (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Leaving this parameter blank causes the search to occur on the level in present use.
♦
Index Name – Selects the TeleMagic index to be used for the search. For Screen Pop this is
typically “TelePhone #”, but since the Indexes within TeleMagic are programmable, this could
be set to any appropriate index. The TeleMagic Link must be operational before you can make
this selection.
♦
Search String – This should be set to whatever string should be searched for using the above
two parameters. For Screen Pop, this is typically the Calling Phone number which would be
the token &P.
Testing TSPI Link
The TAPI dialog box provides a method for verifying the TAPI Driver is setup and operational. To
check the driver, select an appearance (e.g., Intercom) and click on each of the Pickup, Dial, and
Hangup keys individually. To complete the test, you should repeat this procedure for each line
appearance.
To access the setup screen for the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider, click on the Driver Setup button.
The Configure Keys section of the screen should be programmed properly as they will be
15-14
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Computer Telephony Integration
Using StrataLink for CTI Connections
interrogated and used as the Appearances by StrataLink. Whenever you make configuration
changes to the TAPI Service Provider, it is recommended that you exit and restart StrataLink.
The Display section on the screen is the display found on the phone. This information is not
normally shown and can be activated by pressing Alt+O (See Figure 15-9).
Figure 15-9
StrataLink Main Screen
Show Events
Show Events opens a Debug Events screen which shows real-time events as they occur (see
Figure 15-10). The Display option enables you to choose which event you will monitor.
3541
♦
Computer Telephony
Integration
3544
Figure 15-10 Debug Events Screen Telephone System Events
Show Calls displays the Active Call Queue window (see Figure 15-11), which can be kept
open while other activities and functions are performed.
3540
♦
Figure 15-11 Active Call Screen
Strata DK I&M
5/00
15-15
Computer Telephony Integration
CTI Application Bulletin Contents
CTI Application Bulletin Contents
The list below gives you the current application bulletins available for understanding, installation
and operation of third-party software applications with your Toshiba telephone system.
As you get future updates and new bulletins, simply replace older ones with the updates and/or add
the additional bulletins. Updates and additions that may affect the list below will also include an
update to this Contents page.
♦
AB50-0013
September 15, 1997 Update for Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink
(Replaces AB50-0008, April 1, 1997)
♦
AB50-0012
September 15,1997
♦
AB50-0011
September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink
♦
AB50-0010
September 15, 1997 Using ACT! 2.0 with StrataLink
♦
AB50-0009
April 1, 1997
Using TeleMagic Enterprise V2.2 with StrataLink
♦
AB50-0008
April 1, 1997
Using Goldmine 95 with StrataLink
(use AB50-0013)
♦
AB50-0007
April 1, 1997
Using DayTimer Organizer V2.0 with StrataLink
♦
AB50-0006
April 1, 1997
Using Commence V2.0 with StrataLink
♦
AB50-0005
April 1, 1997
Golden Gate Pager Client/Server user StrataLink
♦
AB50-0004
April 1, 1997
This bulletin is obsolete. Refer to the new section
“Using StrataLink for CTI Connections” on Page 15-6.
♦
AB50-0003
April 1, 1997
TSPI Description V2.15
♦
AB50-0002
January 10, 1997
Installing ACT! Trial Size Demo Software
♦
AB50-0001
January 10, 1997
Using ACT! Phone Link with Strata DK
♦
Understanding Computer Telephony in a Business Phone System, April 1, 1997
Strata DK I&M
Computer Telephony
Integration
Note
TSPI Description V2.26
All of the above application bulletins have been sent to you in previous mailings. Place
them after this page. If you do not have these bulletins, they can be found on the Strata DK
Library CD-ROM.
5/00
15-16
ISDN Interfaces
16
This chapter covers information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate
Interfaces (BRI).
PRI Overview
♦
PRI is available on DK40i, DK424 and DK424i with Release 4.3 software and above.
For PRI services, the Strata DK uses an RPTU PCB to connect to a Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) PRI line using a UL listed (or CSA certified in Canada) Channel Service
Unit (CSU) in most locations in the U.S. Each RPTU provides 23B + D channels. The
B-channels support CO speech and data connections on the PSTN side only. The RPTU PCB
is shown in Figure 16-2 on Page 16-9.
♦
BRI S/T is available for DK40i and all DK424 or DK424i Release 4.1 and above processors
including RCTUA4, but not for any other DK systems.
For BRI S/T services, the DK424 or DK424i uses an RBSU PCB; the DK40i uses TBSU and
RBSU. Both the RBSU and TBSU provide two BRI S/T circuits to connect to the PSTN BRI
line using an external UL listed NT1; or, on the station-side, connect to:
♦
S-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-S)
♦
S-type Terminal Adapters (TA-S) with non-ISDN devices
ISDN Interfaces
BRI S/T Overview
Each TE-1-S and TA1-S device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data as
shown in Figure 16-1. The station-side BRI S/T circuits are point-to-multipoint.
A subassembly (RBSS) can be attached to the RBSU for two additional BRIs for S-type
station-side connections only. The RBSU PCB and the RBSS subassembly are shown in
Figures 16-8 and 16-9 on Page 16-17. The combination of RBSU and RBSS uses only one slot
to provide up to four BRI S/T circuits.
Note
Strata DK I&M
In DK424 or DK424i, each installed RBSU or RBSS circuit provides a 2B + D connection
and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit
application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. In the DK40i, each TBSU,
RBSU, or RBSS circuit uses two CO lines (no station ports) when configured for the CO
side and two station ports (no CO lines) when configured for the station side.
5/00
16-1
ISDN Interfaces
BRI U Overview
BRI U Overview
BRI U is available on all Release 4.3 processors for the DK40i, DK424 (including RCTUA4) and
the DK424i.
For BRI U services, the Strata DK40i, DK424, DK424i use the RBUU PCB. The DK40i can
also use the TBUU PCB. The RBUU provides two BRI U circuits that connect directly to
PSTN BRI lines; or, on the station side, connect to:
♦
U-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-U)
♦
U-type Terminal Adapters (TA-U) with non-ISDN devices
Each TE-1-U and TA-U device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data
depending on the device (see Figure 16-1). The station-side BRI U circuits are point-to-point.
A subassembly (RBUS) can be attached to the RBUU for two additional BRIs for PSTN and/
or U-type station connections. The RBUU PCB and the RBUS subassemblies are shown in
Figures 16-23 and Figure 16-24 on Page 16-31. The combination of RBUU and RBUS uses
only one slot to provide up to four U-type BRI circuits.
Notes
●
●
16-2
In DK424 or DK424i, each installed RBUU or RBUS circuit provides a 2B + D connection
and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit
application, even if the circuit is not actually connected.
In the DK40i, each TBUU, RBUU, or RBUS circuit uses two CO lines (no station ports) when
configured for the CO side and two station ports (no CO lines) when configured for the station
side.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
BRI U Overview
Strata DK ISDN Reference Model
A block diagram of the DK ISDN PCBs and reference points is provided in Figure 16-1.
Demarcation Point
DK40i, DK424, DK424i (NT2)
R
SLT
U
RSTU
DKT
PDKU
EKT
PEKU
RJ48C
8-wire
BRI
Loop
Termination
NT1
RJ48C
8-wire
BRI
Loop
Termination
CSU
(NT1)
RJ48C
8-wire
PRI
Office
Channel
Unit
RBUU/RBSU
TBUU (NT-1)
T
S
TE-1-S
(Voice or Data)
R
SLT
RBSU/RBSU
TBUS (NT)
(P-MP)
TA-S
PC
RBSU
TBUS (TE)
RPTU (TE)
Dealersupplied
CSU and NT1
U
TE-1-U
R
TA-U
PC
R, T, S, and U are ISDN standard reference points
4695
TE-1 = Terminal Equipment, Type 1
TA = Terminal Adapter
P-P = Point-to-Point
P-MP = Point-to Multipoint (passive bus)
Customer Premises Equipment
Figure 16-1
Office Channel Unit, or OCR, is
the CO Channel Service Unit
RBUU/RBUS
TBUU (LT)
(P-P)
(Voice or Data)
SLT
Telcosupplied
Jacks
ISDN
SWITCH
Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN)
ISDN Reference Model
System Capacity of ISDN Circuits
Table 16-1
Maximum Number of RPTU PCBs, Lines
Max. PCBs
Max. B
Channels
(Lines)
DK40i
1
12
RCTU
1
16
RCTUBA3/BB4
2
47
RCTUC3/D4
6
141
RCTUE3/F4
8
188
B1CAU
2
32
B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU
6
120
B5CAU/BU
8
188
Processor
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
The capacities of ISDN lines and stations for all DK systems are shown in Table 16-1.
16-3
ISDN Interfaces
BRI U Overview
DK424 ISDN BRI Capacities
For DK424 BRI Configuration information, refer to the following:
♦
RCTUA – Table 4-13 on Page 4-10
♦
RCTUBA/BB – Table 4-14 on Page 4-10
♦
RCTUC/D –Table 4-15 on Page 4-11
♦
RCTUE/F –Table 4-16 on Page 4-11
DK424i ISDN BRI Capacities
For DK424i BRI Configuration information, refer to the following:
16-4
♦
B1CU – Table 6-7 on Page 6-7
♦
B2CAU/BU – Table 6-8 on Page 6-8
♦
B3CAU/BU – Table 6-9 on Page 6-8
♦
B5CAU/BU – Table 6-10 on Page 6-9
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Interface Unit
RPTU Interface Unit
System:
DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.3
Circuits per PCB: 24 channels
Interfaces with:
ISDN PRI
Older Version(s): none
The DK40i, DK424 or DK424i Release 4.3 systems supports the RPTU according to the common
control units resident in the system.
The RPTU requires installation of a customer-provided CSU in most locations of the U.S. Refer to
“CSU Requirements” on Page 16-5 for CSU installation.
Testing procedures (local and remote loop back) are in “RPTU Loop-back Test” on Page 16-38.
The RPTU’s LEDs indicate a continuous status of its operation. They are shown in Figure 16-3.
Table 16-7 on Page 16-10 lists the functions for each LED.
Switches, jumpers, and interface connectors are described in Figure 16-1.
RPTU Overview
The RPTU is a DS-1 divided into 24 TDM channels using standard T1 electrical signal format.
The RPTU’s D-channel is typically the 24th channel and can control the signaling of 23 of its own
B-channels and 24 B-channels of another designated RPTU. Each RPTU can also use its own
D-channel for control.
The DK424 or DK424i, RCTUA provides 8 or 16 channels and DK40i provides 8 or 12 channels.
The 24th channel is still available for D-channel control for both systems.
Note
The Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) which carries alarm notifications, statistics,
and error indications is not available with DK Release 4.0 software.
ISDN Interfaces
The RPTU’s in-service bit rate is 1.544 mbps (± 4.6 ppm), but during a maintenance session, the
rate may vary ± 32 ppm. The RPTU provides Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) and ESF with
Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) and Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking in the
framing bits.
Extracting the Stratum-1 clock from the ISDN PRI, BRI, or T1 provider is the most common
method used to synchronize the RPTU PCB and the DK time switch to the public telephone
network. One RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, or RDTU T1 must extract the clock from the ISDN or T1
provider. The selected unit is designated as the “Primary” timing source in system Program *41-1.
In remote cabinet applications, the Primary clock source PCB must be installed in the Base
Cabinet (main location). For more information, refer to “Timing and Synchronization” on Page
16-39.
A dealer-supplied CSU must be installed between the ISDN PRI network line and the RPTU PCB
as shown in Figure 16-1. Some telephone companies supply the CSU and call it the Network
Interface Unit (NIU).
CSU Requirements
In the U.S., the CSU must be UL listed and comply with Part 68 of the FCC rules. It must also
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. In Canada,
the CSU must be CSA certified.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-5
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Interface Unit
The CSU is transparent to data, clock, and framing. It acts as a repeater, not a controller, for
timing. The CSU also acts as a signal regenerator and must be able to perform loop-back tests and
maintenance to both the network and DK RPTU. The CSU is the same type as used for T1 circuits
although it performs the function as NT1 for PRI ISDN in the ISDN reference model as shown in
Figure 16-1.
DK40i Slot Assignments
The RPTU is allowed in the slots shown in Table 16-2.
Table 16-2
DK40i Slot Assignments
Note
RPTU Allowed in
Slot
Leave Slot
Vacant
15
(see Note)
17
18
Slots 16, 17, and 18 can be used for other PCBs.
DK424 Slot Assignments
Up to eight RPTU PCBs can be installed in a DK424 or DK424i system providing up to 188 PRI
lines (B-channels). If RPTU (PRI) and RDTU (T1) PCBs are installed in the same DK424 or
DK424i, the maximum combined PCBs cannot exceed the numbers provided in Table 16-1. The
PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the DK424 or DK424i cabinets per Tables
16-2~16-4. The next highest slot adjacent to the RPTU slot must be vacant.
Program 03 defines which cabinet slots contain RPTU PCBs. The maximum number of cards and
lines is listed in Table 16-3.
Table 16-3
DK280 or DK424 Base Cabinet with BA3/BB4, C3/D4 with MBJU or DK280 Base with RCTUE3/F4
Cabinet
RPTU1/Vacant Slots2
No.
Type
1
DK280 or DK424
(base)
131/142
151/162
DK280
211/222
231/242
251/262
DK424
211/222
231/242
251/262
DK280
311/322
DK424
311/322
DK280
411/422
DK424
411/422
DK280
511/522
DK424
511/522
DK280
611/622
DK424
611/622
2
3
4
5
6
1. Allowed RPTU slots.
2. Slots must be vacant if using more than 16 channels.
16-6
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Interface Unit
Table 16-4
DK424 Base Cabinet with RCTUE3/F4 with MBJU Removed
Cabinet
RPTU1/Vacant Slots2
No.
Type
1
DK424 (base)
131/142
151/162
DK280
211/222
231/242
DK424
211/222
231/242
DK280
311/322
DK424
311/322
DK280
411/422
DK424
411/422
DK280
511/522
DK424
511/522
DK280
611/622
DK424
611/622
2
3
4
5
6
7
251/262
371/382
471/482
571/582
671/682
DK280
Does not have a seventh cabinet.
DK424
None
1. Allowed RPTU slots.
2. Slots must be vacant if using more than 16 channels.
DK424i Slot Assignments
Table 16-5
RPTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration
Slots
Needed
1~16
1
17~23
2
24~39
3
40~46
4
47~62
5
63~69
6
1~16
1
17~23
2
24~39
3
40~46
4
47~62
5
63~69
6
RPTU PCBs
Neededs1
RPTU cabinet slot
placement1
Base Cabinet
1
2
3
S103-RPTU
S104-vacant2
S105-RPTU
ISDN Interfaces
PRI Lines
Needed
S106-vacant2
S107-RPTU
S108-vacant2
Second through fifth cabinets
1
2
3
S_01-RPTU
S_02-vacant2
S_03-RPTU
S_04-vacant2
S_05-RPTU
S_06-vacant2
1. RPTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one
RPTU is needed, it can be installed in any RPTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is
supported by the installed processor.
2. The slot occupied by RPTU supports 1-16 channels; the slot adjacent to RPTU must be vacant
if channels 17 through 23 are needed.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-7
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Installation
RPTU Installation
Before installing a RPTU PCB into a DK system, a number of system programs should be run.
This enables the RPTU to function immediately upon insertion. It is recommended that you run
these programs in the order listed in the DK Programming Manual (refer to the ISDN section)
before beginning installation.
Refer to Worksheet 6 in the Strata DK I&M Manual – Chapter 6.
Also, see Figure 16-2 and Table 16-6.
➤ To install an RPTU PCB
1. Set the jumper wire plugs JP1 and JP2 (LB) to the Off position.
2. Turn the DK system power Off.
3. Insert the RPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot (see “Slot
Assignments” on “DK424 Slot Assignments” on Page 16-6) and apply firm, even pressure to
ensure proper seating of connectors.
4. After installing the RPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated,
a slight resistance is felt.
Note
16-8
For cabling information and requirements, refer to “Cabling” on Page 16-11.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Installation
Table 16-6
RPTU Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors
Switches/Jumpers/Connector
Description
SW1 (Line length adjustment switch)
Matches the RPTU impedance to the impedance of the
line (length between the CSU and the RPTU). Refer to
Table 16-8 on Page 16-11.
SW2 (Reset switch)1
Resets or initializes the RPTU firmware. Press this switch
to correct an out-of-service condition, or just prior to
connecting to the Network PRI.
JP1 & JP2 (Loop-back jumpers)
Makes loop-back tests of the cabling between the ISDN
Network switch, CSU, and RPTU.
J1 8-pin Modular Connector (RJ45)
Connects the RPTU to the CSU/network PRI ISDN line.
J2 6-pin Modular Connector (RJ11)
Connects the RPTU to a terminal or PC to monitor
D-channel data.
1. If this switch on the Primary Clock source RPTU is pressed (Program *42-1), the clock source will automatically
revert to the Secondary Clock source PCB (Program *42-2).
RESET
SW2
J2
RS-232C
CD1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
MCC
J1
ISDN (PRI)
JP1
JP2
RPTU1A
ISDN Interfaces
SW1
Backplane Connector
RPTU1
LEDs
RPTU1A
(front)
CD2
FSYC
AIS
RAB
LOS
RST
BSU
TS
V .1
2543
JP1 & JP2
Figure 16-2
RPTU PCB
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-9
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Installation
Reset Switch
(resets the software)
Not Used
RS-232C Connector
for Call-Data Monitor (RJ-12)
FSYC
AIS
RAB
LEDs
LOS
RST
BSY
TS
RJ-45 8-pin
(shielded)
Modular Connector (to CSU)
2747
Figure 16-3
Table 16-7
RPTU LEDs and Connectors
LED Functions
LED
FSYC
Frame Synchronization
On:
Frame alignment is lost.
Off:
Frame alignment is working properly.
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
On:
Receiving an alarm from the CO.
Off:
Circuit is working properly.
RAB
Remote Alarm
On:
Receiving a remote alarm from the CO.
Off:
Circuit is working properly.
LOS
Loss of Signal
On:
IC signal cannot be detected.
Off:
Circuit is working properly.
RST
Reset
On:
Off:
CPU is resetting the software.
Circuit is working properly.
BSY
Busy
On:
Off:
One or more B-channels are busy.
All B-channels are idle.
TS
16-10
Functions
Timing Signal
On:
Circuit is secondary timing source.
Off:
Circuit is not used for system timing.
Flashing:Circuit is primary timing source.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Installation
Cabling
To meet Part 15 of FCC Rules, ISDN PRI equipment must be connected using CAT5, Shielded
Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling between the CSU and the RPTU. CAT5 STP protects against cross
talk, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI), and/or Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). STP
protects ISDN signal data while being transmitted through the cable and keeps the cable itself from
emitting EMI and RFI.
To avoid ground loops, connect only the RPTU end of the shielded cable to ground.
The DK grounds the CAT5 cable shield between the DK and CSU at the RPTU RJ45
jack. You do not have to connect the CSU ground drain. The CSU ground should not
be connected to the cable shield.
Important!
Shield continuity must be maintained from the RPTU to the CSU, particularly if using extension
connecting cables. Keep the cable as short as possible between the CSU and the PRI Demarcation
jack, because there is no shield between the CSU and the Demarcation jack.
Toshiba provides a cable kit (Part No. RPRI-CBL-KIT), that contains all that you need to connect
the network ISDN jack to the network side of most CSUs and the equipment side of the CSU to the
RPTU PCB. Depending on the manufacturer, the CSU may use DB15 or modular jacks. If the CSU
is equipped with the modular jacks, the DB15/modular adapters are not used. If this is the case,
make sure the CSU modular jacks are not shielded jacks. Refer to Figure 16-3 for more
information.
A detailed pinout diagram for the RJ45 jacks (USOC RJ48C or RJ48X) and the modular cords/
adaptors is shown in Figure 16-2 on Page 16-9.
Cable Length
Table 16-8
SW1 Settings
SW1
Short
(0 - 150 ft.)
Medium
(150 - 450 ft.)
Long
(450 - 655 ft.)
1
On
Off
Off
2
Off
On
Off
3
Off
Off
On
4
Off
On
Off
5
Off
Off
On
6
Off
On
Off
7
Off
Off
On
8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
ISDN Interfaces
The distance between the RPTU and CSU or RPTU and other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE)
may vary (0~655 ft.). The RPTU must be equalized and its impedance must match the impedance
of the connecting cable. Set SW1 on the RPTU for the proper cable length as shown in Table 16-8.
Refer to Figure 16-2 for switch locations.
Notes
♦
The modular pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking
clip down.
♦
Shield continuity must be maintained between the RPTU and the CSU, particularly on
extension cords. Since there is no shield continuity across the CSU and network jack, the cable
should be kept as short as possible.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-11
ISDN Interfaces
RPTU Installation
Cable Installation
The RPTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba RPRI cable kit for connection of the RPTU to a CSU.
Install the kit as shown in Figure 16-3.
CSU
ISDN PRI
Network
Jack
RPTU
DB15
(female)
RJ45
DB15
(male)
D
A
E
B
C
2752
Item
Description
A1
Fifteen feet of CAT5 unshielded cable
B
One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to network jack)
C
One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to RPTU)
D1
Thirty feet of CAT5 shielded cable
E
One Ferrite core
1. Cable A and D are straight-pinned data cables, not cross-pinned
telephony cables.
CSU Local Power
Adapter
2753
Network
Interface
Jack
RJ48-C
or
RJ48-X
(8-pin
Modular)
1-T1
2-R1
34-R
5-T
67-Nu
8-Nu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
11
9
1
Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular
cord, straight-through pinning
(15 ft. CAT5, unshielded)
Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular
cord to DB15 female adapter
3-T1
11-R1
39-R
1-T
C
S
U
CSU
DB15
Male
3-T1
11-R1
39-R
1-T
CSU
DB15
Female
Dealer-supplied CSU
3
11
9
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-T1
2-R1
34-R
5-T
67-Nu
8-Nu
RPTU
8-pin
Modular
Jack
Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core
Toshiba-supplied 8-wire
modular cord, straight-through
pinning (30 ft. CAT5, shielded)
Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular
to DB15 male adapter
Network Jack/RPTU Modular Jack
Pin
Function
1
Tip – Receives from the network (NT – TE)
2
Ring – Receives from the network (NT – TE)
3
Not Used
4
Ring – Transmits to the network (TE – NT)
5
Tip – Transmits to the network (TE – NT)
6
Not Used
7
Not Used
8
Not Used
Figure 16-4
16-12
Detailed Pinouts for ISDN PRI Cabling
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Ferrite Core
Install the Ferrite core provided with the RPRI cable kit as shown in Figure 16-5. This core is
needed to comply with FCC requirements.
RPTU
Side View
ISDN PRI Jack
CAT5 Shielded Cable
Tie Wrap
Ferrite Core
FER-CORE-ISDN
2754
Note: The Ferrite core must be
as close as possible to the RPTU.
One Turn
Ferrite Core Installation
ISDN Interfaces
Figure 16-5
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
System:
DK424 or DK424i and DK40i, Release 4.1 and above
Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit)
Interfaces with:
ISDN BRI S/T when connected to the Public Network or a BRI S-type, TE-1, or TA devices
when connecting to ISDN station equipment
Older Version(s): none
The Strata DK424 or DK424i and DK40i Release 4.1 system supports the RBSU/RBSS interface
unit according to the common control units resident in the system shown in Table 16-1. The DK40i
only supports the TBSU.
RBSU/RBSS switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figures 16-8 and 16-9 on Page
16-17 and described in Table 16-9.
TBSU switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figure 16-33 on Page 16-43 and described
in Table 16-11 on Page 16-21.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-13
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
LEDs on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS show a continuous status of BRI operation. Refer to Table
16-10 on Page 16-19 for a list of each LED’s status.
Overview
The TBSU, RBSU and RBSS PCBs provide the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for DK40i and
DK424 or DK424i, Release 4.1. The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The
RBSU is the main plug-in PCB that plugs into the DK424 or DK424i cabinet slots and the DK40i
Expansion KSU slots.
The RBSS is an optional PCB that plugs onto the RBSU. Each PCB provides two ISDN BRI
circuits. Each BRI circuit provides 2 B-channels + 1D channel for voice/data/video applications.
An REBU PCB is a piggy-back PCB that plugs onto the RBSU and provides basic functions for
RBSU/RBSS circuits so it must always be installed on the RBSU. The REBU is not required on
the TBSU.
The TBSU and RBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN) BRI lines using an Network Terminator unit (NT1); or, on the station
side, they can connect to ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or Terminal Adapters (TA) as shown in
Figure 16-6.
TE devices include any ISDN device (telephone, fax, computer) that connects directly to S/T
ISDN BRI circuits. TA devices match the protocol of non-ISDN devices (telephone, fax,
computer) to the protocol of S/T ISDN BRI circuits.
The TBSU and RBSU circuits can be configured two ways:
♦
As BRI – TE circuits which connect to Telephone Network BRI lines using a NT1.
♦
As BRI – NT circuits which connect to ISDN TEs or TAs. These devices must be S-type
station devices.
Important!
The DK424 or DK424i and DK40i BRI circuits allocate line numbers and station
ports differently. In DK424 or DK424i, each BRI circuit consumes two line numbers
and two station port when configured as line-side or station side. In DK40i, each
BRI line circuit consumes two line numbers and no station ports; each BRI station
circuit consumes two station ports and no line numbers.
The RBSU connection options (BRI line or ISDN TE-1/TA devices) are selected in DK40i and
DK424 or DK424i customer database programming and option switches located on the TBSU and
RBSU.
The TBSU and RBSU circuits that connect to the ISDN network side requires a dealer-supplied
NTI interface box to convert the two-wire, U-interface BRI line from the telephone network to the
four-wire, T-interface of the RBSU circuit. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified
(Canada). The network BRI line connection is a point-to-point connection, which means that the
network BRI line can only be connected to one RBSU or TBSU circuit via the NT1 (T-reference
point).
RBSS circuits connect directly to S-type TE-1 or TA ISDN devices only. They do not support BRITE telephone network BRI line connections.
The TBSU, RBSU, and/or RBSS circuits that connect to the DK station side, (BRI-NT, Sreference point) allows direct connection of multiple ISDN (TE-1 or TA) devices. The S point of
the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS supports the Toshiba DK passive bus, also known as point-tomultipoint connection. The terminal-side (S-point) of the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit can
have parallel connections of up to two TE-1s or TAs maximum.
16-14
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
When multiple TE-1 and TA devices are installed on a single TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit,
the devices must share, or contend for, that circuit’s two B-channels. That is to say, a maximum of
two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between both devices connected to the same
BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B-channels is first come, first serve.
BRI-NT
(4-wire)
3336
..
1
.
2
TE-1
or
TA
TE-1
or
TA
BRI-TE
(4-wire)
BRI
(2-wire)
RX
RX
DK TBSU or
RBSU/RBSS
NT1
PSTN
RX/TX
TX
TX
S
T
U
S, T, and U are ISDN reference points.
TE = S-type Terminal Equipment
TA = S-type Terminal Adaptor
Figure 16-6
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Interfaces between the S/T Reference Points
Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information
The TBSU can only be installed in the DK40i Base KSU. The RBSU/RBSS can be installed in any
DK40i Expansion Unit slot and any DK424 or DK424i slot except the programming telephone
PDKU or PEKU slot. On DK424 or DK424i, each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits and
each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines (one port/line per
B-channel). Therefore, if the RBSU PCB is installed, the station port and CO line count will
increment by four ports and four lines at the RBSU cabinet slot.
On DK40i, TBSU and each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits. Each circuit reduces the
system capacity by two station ports or two CO lines. If the BRI circuit is configured as NT, the
circuit assumes two station ports. If the BRI circuit is configured as TE, the circuit assumes two
CO lines.
ISDN Interfaces
If the RBSU/RBSS is installed in a DK424 or DK424i slot, the station port and CO line count will
increment by eight station ports and eight lines at the RBSU/RBSS cabinet slot. RBSU and RBSS
PCBs can be installed in any combination so long as the number of RBSU PCBs is the same or
greater than the number of RBSS PCBs. See Tables 6-7~6-10, beginning on Page 6-7 for the
maximum BRI circuits allowed.
PS-1 Backup Power Option
The RBSU provides an optional backup power supply, R40S, that will supply backup power to TE
devices in the event of an AC power loss. This power backup option only applies to RBSU or
RBSS circuits that are configured in the NT mode. See Figure 16-10 to install the R40S.
Note
The R40S is not available for the TBSU.
Also the DK system must have battery backup to allow the R40S power backup function to
operate. The R40S power supply is an ISDN, PS-1 type power unit which means it supplies power
to TE devices on the RBSU/RBSS transmit and receive wire pairs as shown in Figure 16-7. This
power arrangement is also known as phantom power.
Each of the four circuits on RBSU/RBSS can be connected to share the R40S using option
switches on the PCBs (see Table 16-9). Before using the R40S as a backup power source, make
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-15
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
sure the TE devices do not require more power than the R40S can supply and the TE is compatible
with the ISDN PS-1 power arrangement. Figure 14-6 shows the power limits of the R40S.
RJ45 Pin Nos. on
RBSU or RBSS
NT circuit
TE
TE Device
Power sink
RBSU
Pin 3
RX +
Pin 3
Pin 6
RX -
Pin 6
Pin 4
TX +
Pin 4
Pin 5
TX -
Pin 5
RJ45 Pin Nos.
on TE device
R40S PS-1
Power
Source
4774
R40S Power Limits:
Voltage: 33.3VDC to 38.85VDC maximum
Current: 100mA maximum (25mA maximum per each RBSU/RBSS circuit)
Figure 16-7
16-16
Power Limits of the Backup Power Supply
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Installation
Step 1: Run Related Programs
➤ Run all ISDN programs related to TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits prior to installation of
the PCBs. This enables the circuits to operate immediately upon insertion. ISDN BRI
programs are explained in the Strata DK Programming Manual under the ISDN tab.
For the DK40i, make sure to run Program *60 to identify all station (NT) and CO
(TE) BRI circuits for each RBSU/RBSS and TBSU installed. Program *60 causes
station port and CO line shifting on PCBs installed in slots that follow the BRI
PCBs.
Important!
Step 2: Set Option Switches/Jumpers
➤ Set all option switches and jumpers on the TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS PCBs before plugging
the RBSS onto the RBSU or inserting the RBSU into the system. RBSU/RBSS switch/jumper
information and locations are shown in Figures 16-8, 16-9 and Table 16-9. TBSU switch/
jumper information is shown in Figure 16-12 and Table 16-11.
RBSU1A
RBSS
SW7
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
P4
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
SW2
SW5
SW9
SW8
SW6
SW6
J2
J7
P7
P2
J4
RBSS1A-CM V.1
RBSU1
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
SW3
J6
SW2
P6
SW5
SW4
J3
J5
SW1
P3
SW3
SW4
J1
P5
ISDN Interfaces
J2
TB3
SW1
F
2788
J3
P9
P8
PFT
contacts
TB1 TB2
RBSU1A-CM V. 1
2789
Figure 16-8
Strata DK I&M
RBSU PCB
5/00
Figure 16-9
RBSS PCB
16-17
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Table 16-9
PCB
RBSU/RBSS Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors
Circuit
Option
Switch
Type
All
SW 1
1
RBSU
RBSS
Circuit Type
TE
NT
Push-button
N/A
N/A
SW 2
Jumper
X
X
1
SW 3
Slide
On
Off
1
SW 4, 5
Jumper
N/A
On
2
SW 6
Jumper
X
X
Description
Resets firmware on all circuits of RBSU/RBSS.
Drops calls off the RBSU/RBSS.
Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1.
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.
Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit.
Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1.
2
SW 7
Slide
On
Off
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.
2
SW 8, 9
Jumper
N/A
On
Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit.
3 (NT only)
SW 1
Slide
On
Off
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.
3 (NT only)
SW 3, 4
Jumper
N/A
On
Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit.
4 (NT only)
SW 2
Slide
On
Off
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.
4 (NT only)
SW 5, 6
Jumper
N/A
On
Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit.
1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT.
Step 3: Install the REBS
Note
The REBS provides a basic part of the RBSU/RBSS circuit functionality; therefore, it
must always be installed on the RBSU (see Figure 16-10).
1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS.
2. Plug the REBS onto the RBSU.
Step 4: Install the RBSS
Note
If one or two additional BRI-NT circuits are required, install the RBSS (see Figure 16-10).
1. Align the four connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS.
2. Plug the RBSS onto the RBSU.
Step 5: Install the R40S
Note
If ISDN PS-1 backup power for TE devices is required, install the R40S (optional PCB)
(see Figure 16-10).
1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the R40S.
2. Plug the R40S onto the RBSU.
16-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
RBSU
Optional RBSS1A
REBS
(always install)
UP
UP
UP
UP
Two-circuit Subassembly
2761
UP
Optional PS-1 Power Supply
UP
R40S1A-CM V.1
R40S
Figure 16-10 Location of RBSU Plug-on PCBs
Step 6: Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet
Table 16-10 RBSU/RBSS LED Indications
LED
Indication
BSY
Circuit Busy
On – Any B-channel is in use.
Off – B-channels are idle.
TS
Timing Source
Blinking On/Off – The RBSU is extracting the clock from the BRI line and is the
Primary synchronization circuit for ISDN and T1.
On – The RBSU is the secondary (backup) synchronization circuit for the ISDN
and T1.
Off – The RBSU is not used for ISDN or T1 synchronization.
LOS
Loss of Signal
On – Clock timing cannot be detected from the line.
Off – Normal condition.
FS
Frame Alignment Alarm
On – Frame alignment cannot be established.
Off – Frame alignment is established.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
After setting the switches and jumpers and installing the plug-on PCBs as described in the
preceding paragraphs, the RBSU/RBSS PCBs can be installed in the appropriate cabinet slots.
Refer to RBSU/RBSS Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information on Figure 16-12. After the RBSU/
RBSS is installed in the DK424 or DK424i cabinet or DK40i Expansion Unit, the status LEDs and
connecting jacks are positioned as shown in Figure 16-13.
16-19
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Step 7: Install the TBSU or TBUU
-
+
Carefully align the TBSU or TBUU connector pins with P11 and P12 on the DK40i motherboard
and install the TBSU or TBUU into the DK40i Base Unit. Use the two supplied screws to secure
the TBSU or TBUU to the motherboard. Figure 16-10 shows the TBSU or TBUU mounting on the
DK40i and Figure 16-12 shows the TBSU switch layout. Table 16-11 shows the TBSU option
switches. The TBUU does not have option switches; all options are controlled by programming.
Install a TCOU, TBSU
or TDDU here
Install a TCOU, TBSU,
TBUU or TDDU here
4728
Figure 16-11 Installation of TBSU or TBUU into DK40i
16-20
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
ON
100
SW201
OFF
NT TE
SW200
SW1
Reset
ON
J2
100
SW101
Cct2
OFF
NT TE
CPU CUT
SHORT ROM
SW100
Cct1
J1
SW2
W2
IC7
CD9
CD10
CD11
CD12
IC6
TBSU1A
FS
LOS
TS
BSY
Cct1
J3
Monitor
Loop
Back
3795
PFT contacts
TB1 TB2
Cct2
Figure 16-12 TBSU Switch Layout
Note
It is normal for sockets IC7 and IC8 to be empty.
TBSU
Circuit
Option
Switch
Type
All
SW 1
Push-button
1
SW 100
Jumper
1
SW 101
Slide
2
SW 200
Jumper
2
SW 201
Slide
Circuit Type
TE
Description
NT
N/A
N/A
Resets firmware on all TBSU circuits. Drops calls off the
TBSU.
X
X
Causes the circuit1 to operate as TE or NT.
On
On
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.1
X
X
Causes the circuit2 to operate as TE or NT1.
On
On
Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit.2
ISDN Interfaces
Table 16-11 TBSU Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors
1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT.
2. SW2 is for factory use only
Circuit
Switch
Type
W2
Jumper
TBSU1A uses the internal
CPU ROM (IC20)
TBSU1A uses the external
ROM (IC6 and 7)
Future Use
SW2
Jumper
For factory loop back test.
Normal operation
Used for factory
inspection only. Do
not cut this jumper.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Short
Cut (remove)
Description
16-21
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Modular Jack Pin Configurations
BRI (S/T) Circuit Jack (TE or NT Mode)
The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit jack is a shielded RJ45 (8-pin modular) with Transmit
(Tx) and Receive (Rx) pin numbers as shown in Figure 16-13. The Tx and Rx pin numbers change
when the BRI circuit is configured with TBSU and RBSU/RBSS option switches for TE or NT
(Tables 16-9 and 16-11). If the R40S is installed on the RBSU, the PS-1 voltage is carried on the
Tx/Rx wires with polarity. (See Table 16-12).
The position of the TBSU BRI and RBSU/RBSS circuit jacks are shown in Figure 16-12 and
16-13 respectively.
Table 16-12 RJ45 Pins in the 8-pin Modular Jack
Pin
No.
TE
Side
NT
Side
PS1/R40S
Polarity
1
N/C
N/C
N/C
2
N/C
N/C
N/C
3
Tx
Rx
+
4
Rx
Tx
+
5
Rx
Tx
-
6
Tx
Rx
-
7
N/C
N/C
N/C
8
N/C
N/C
N/C
87654321
3048
Front View of RJ-45 Jack Cavity
Note: The RJ-45 pins are numbered as shown above.
Monitor Jack
The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS monitor jack is an RJ12 (6-pin modular). This jack provides an RS232 output that enables you to monitor the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit D-channel, layer-2
and layer-3 data. The monitor jack pin configuration and communication parameters are the same
as RPTU and RBUU which are shown in Figure 16-33 on Page 16-43. Figures 16-36 and 16-37 on
Pages 16-46 and 16-47, respectively, show examples of the TBSU or RBSU monitor jack output.
Figures 16-35 and 16-13 show the location of the TBSU and RBSU monitor jacks respectively.
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines
Power Failure Terminal Screws
TB1 and TB2 are the connecting points that interface a pair of dry contacts that can be used for
power failure switching purposes (see Figure 16-13 for the locations). When the DK system
(TBSU and RBSU) has power (from AC source or batteries) there is a short circuit across TB1 and
TB2. In the event of no power to the DK424 or DK424i, there is an open circuit across TB1 and
TB2. The specifications for TB1 and TB2 contacts are:
♦
Maximum switchable voltage: 30VDC
♦
Maximum switchable current: 80mA
♦
Short circuit resistance: Approximately 15 ohms
Grounding Terminal Screws
TB3 is a screw terminal that can be used to connect a ground wire to the RBSU PCB (see Figure
16-13 for the location). This ground enables the RBSU/RBSS to meet Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements. As of Release 4.1, RBSU complies with EMC requirements
without grounding TB3 on the RBSU, so it is not necessary to connect a ground wire to TB3.
16-22
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
BRI Wire Type Recommendations
CAT3 or CAT5 wire is recommended for ISDN BRI customer-premises wiring. While the ISDN
BRI signal works for some distance over almost any wire that is suitable for analog voice service,
better wire enables longer runs. CAT5 provides better 100-ohm impedance matching (at little extra
cost) between the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit and the station Terminal Equipment (TE-1).
Normally the CAT3 or CAT5 wiring does not have to be shielded when used for ISDN BRI
premises wiring. However, the RJ45 jacks on the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits are
shielded and provide a ground shield in the event that shielded modular plugs and cable are used.
Note
If using shielded cable and plugs, cable runs should only be grounded at the DK TBSU
and RBSU/RBSS, RJ45 jacks. To prevent ground loops, do not ground both ends of
shielded cable runs.
RBSU
CKT2
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
CKT1
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
RBSS
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
BSY
TS
LOS
FS
CKT4
CKT3
4th Circuit
2nd Circuit
RJ-45 8-pin (shielded)
Modular Connector
3rd Circuit
TB3 (FG)
1st Circuit
Reset Switch
(resets RBSU Firmware)
TB1 and TB2 (PFT)
2795
Figure 16-13 RBSU/RBSS Location of LEDs and Connector Locations
ISDN Interfaces
RS-232C Connector
for Call-Data Monitor
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI Cable Jacks and Connectors
In the U.S., the standard connector for ISDN equipment is the eight-pin RJ jack. Patch cables have
eight-pole plugs at both ends. The same pinout applies to both ends of an ISDN cable, which is the
practice of the data world. This means that a flat untwisted cable with an RJ modular plug at both
ends will have the locking tab of the plug on one end, “up;” and on the other end, “down,” as
shown in Figure 16-14.
Note
Strata DK I&M
This is the opposite of telephony “silver satin” cables which have locking tabs on both
ends facing the same direction. Telephony cables cause the pins at either end to crossover
while data cables provide a straight through pin-to-pin connection between modular jacks.
5/00
16-23
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
A cord of up to 10 meters connects the ISDN BRI RJ45 wall jack to the desktop TE-1 or TA RJ45
jack. Bellcore recommends that all TE-1 and TA devices be attached with the same standard cord
to ensure compatibility.
Locking Tab
3039
Four-pair Wire
RJ-45
Eight-pole Plug
Figure 16-14 Modular ISDN Data Cable
The standard pinouts for ISDN jacks is the TIA-568A or TIA-568B jack as listed in Table 16-13.
The variants A and B to the TIA specification are electrically the same, only the wire colors are
different. However, you should only use one type TIA jack in a customer installation because
mixing the two may cause certain wire pairs to be swapped which would result in line faults.
Table 16-13 TIA-568B (RJ45) Jack – ISDN Standard Interface Modular Connector Pinout (RBSU-NT mode)
Pin
Color
Name
Function
1
Green
T2
Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS)
2
Green/White
R2
Power 3 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS)
3
Orange/White
R3
RX+
4
Blue/White
R1
TX+
5
Blue
T1
TX-
6
Orange
T3
RX-
7
Brown
T4
- Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS)
8
Brown/White
R4
+ Power 2 (not used on DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS)
Notes
●
●
16-24
Pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking tab down.
TIA-568A swaps pair two with pair three, changing only the color of the wires on the pins.
Electrical performance is the same.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
DK BRI Circuit EMC Ferrite Core Requirement
To ensure that the DK BRI circuit meets the EMC requirements, it is necessary to run all wire
connecting ISDN BRI circuits (TE, LT mode and NT mode) through a Ferrite core. Use Toshiba
part number, FER-CORE-ISDN, to order the ferrite core. It is not shipped automatically with the
BRI circuit cards, it must be grounded separately. Figures 16-15 and 16-16 show how to dress the
wiring through the Ferrite core.
RBSU or RBUU
RBSS or RBUS
TBSU1A
or TBUU
ISDN
PRI Jack
FS
LOS
TS
BSY
FS
LOS
TS
BSY
CAT 3, 4,
or 5 Cable
CAT 3, 4,
or 5 Cable
4697
Tie
Wrap
4729
Tie Wrap
Ferrite Core
FER-CORE-ISDN
Ferrite Core
FER-CORE-ISDN
One Turn
Figure 16-15 BRI Circuit Ferrite Core Installation
Note: Locate the Ferrite core
as close as possible to
the TBSU or TBUU.
One
Turn
Figure 16-16 BRI Circuit Ferrite Core Installation
Connecting TBSU and RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode)
ISDN Interfaces
Note: Locate the Ferrite core
as close as possible to
the BRI modular jack.
The TBSU and RBSU only, not the RBSS, circuits can be connected to the network side of a BRI
line. The TBSU and RBSU circuits must be configured in the TE-mode (refer to option switches in
Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table 16-11 on Page 16-21 and Program *60).
In the U.S., the BRI line from the ISDN service provider is a two-wire U-type BRI line. This line
connects to the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit via a customer-provided NT1 as shown in Figure
16-17. The NT1 is necessary to convert the network BRI, two-wire, U interface to the TBSU or
RBSU BRI, four-wire, T interface. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada).
The NT1 is powered by local AC power via an AC adapter supplied with the NT1. The connection
between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit is a point-to-point connection, so the NT1 can
connect to only one TBSU or RBSU BRI TE circuit.
A 100-ohm Terminating Resistor (TR) is required on each end of the point-to-point connection.
The TR must be switched into the TBSU or RBSU TE circuit (refer to option switches in Table
16-11 on Page 16-21 and Table 16-9 on Page 16-18) and into the NT1 device.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-25
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Most NT1 devices have TR option switches; if the NT1 does not have TRs, two 100-ohm TRs
must be wired into the NT1 modular jack - one 100-ohm resistor across each pair (Tx and Rx).
Refer to the NT1 manufacturers documentation for the maximum loop length between the NT1
and the network jack. The maximum loop length between the NT1 and the TBSU or RBSU circuit
is 1650 feet.
RJ45 Pinout
(NT1 - S/T jack)
RJ45 Pinout
(TBSU or RBSU - BRI jack)
BRI
(four-wire)
TBSU or RBSU
TE-Circuit
Switch in
100-ohm TR
using RBSU
option switch.
BRI
(two-wire)
3
TX
RX
3
6
TX
RX
6
NT-1
Switch
in 100-ohm
TR.
4 RX/TX
4
RX
TX
4
5
RX
TX
5
5 RX/TX
3343
U
T
Note: T and U are ISDN standard
reference points.
Network
BRI-line
RJ-11 Jack
Local AC
Power
Demarcation Point
Figure 16-17 TBSU or RBSU to NT1 Point-to-point Connection
Connecting TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode)
S-type TAs and TE-1s can be connected to the station side of TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits.
TA and TE devices must be powered by local AC power using AC adapter supplied with the TA or
TE device. The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuits must be configured in the NT mode when
connected to TA and TE devices (refer to option switches in Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table
16-11 on Page 16-21 and Program *60).
The TA enables you to connect non-ISDN voice and data devices to ISDN BRI circuits. The TA
matches the protocol of existing interfaces (R-reference point) to the ISDN S/T protocol (see
Figure on Page 16-3). TA devices include asynchronous circuit-switched adapters that convert
RS-232 async data (like data from a PC COM port) to B-channel 64 kbps sync.
TAs also enable you to connect standard telephones and non-ISDN fax machines to receive and
make calls over ISDN circuits. TEs include any user device (telephone, fax, PC video conference
board) that is designed to plug directly into the ISDN (S/T) interface without the use of a TA.
There are two types of ISDN TA and TE-1 devices: the U-type and the S/T type. Most
manufacturers of ISDN station devices make both types. In DK424 or DK424i R4.1 and DK40i,
the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS station side, BRI-NT circuits only function with S/T type TA and TE1 devices. You cannot connect U-type TE-1 or TA devices to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT
circuits.
Also, connecting an NT1 to the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit to convert from S/T to U
interface is not supported to enable the use of U-type TE-1 or TA device on the station side of the
TBSU or RBSU/RBSS. U-type TE-1 and TA device interface is provided in the DK by the TBUU
and RBUU/RBUS BRI circuit only. TBUU and RBUU/RBUS will be provided in the DK424 or
DK424i and DK40i Release 4.3.
16-26
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
The TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit supports the National ISDN 2 (NI2) S-Interface
“passive bus.” It is called a passive bus, because it contains no logical functions. The TBSU and
RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT interface supports a point-to-multipoint connection on two twisted pairs.
Up to two TE-1 and/or TA devices can be connected to one TBSU or RBSU/RBSS, BRI-NT
circuit. Using standardized wiring and modular connectors, as explained in previous paragraphs,
maintains control of polarity. The pinout from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS circuit to a S-type TE1 or TA device is shown in Figure 16-18 and Table 16-12.
TBSU or RBSU
NT Circuit
Insert 100-ohm
TR using RBSU
and RBSS
option switches.
RJ45
Pinout
RJ45
Pinout
3
3
6
6
4
4
5
5
S-type, TE-1 or TA with
100-ohm TR or just a
100-ohm terminating
resistor across each pair
on a RJ-45 jack.
3344
BRI (four-wire)
3
6
4
5
To local
AC Power
S-type, TE-1s or TAs without
100-ohm terminating resistors
(maximum eight TE-1s or TAs per
RBSU/RBSS circuit).
To local
AC Power
As a parallel bus, the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT passive bus will accept TE-1 and TA
devices scattered on the bus; however, the locations of the TE and TA devices on the S bus is
limited by timing considerations. Specifically, the round trip propagation delay of a signal from the
TBSU or RBSU/RBSS circuit to one device must be within four microseconds of the delay from
the other device on the bus. That is to say, layer-1 frames from the TBSU and RBSU/RBSS must
be received within a two microsecond window. This says nothing about how large the delay can
be. In fact, it can be much larger, as long as the differences remain small.
ISDN Interfaces
Figure 16-18 TBSU and RBSU/RBSS NT Circuit Pinout on Passive Bus
To control electrical characteristics, a 100-ohm terminating resistor (TR) is required at both ends
of the passive bus. One resistor should be across the Tx pair and one across the Rx pair at either
end of the passive bus. Branch-type passive bus configurations, shown in Figures 16-19~16-22,
may only require a TR on the TBSU or RBSU/RBSS NT circuit side and not on the TE or TA
device side of the bus.
The TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits provide an option switch that allows the 100-ohm TR to be
switched into the circuit on the DK side of the bus (see Table 16-9 on Page 16-18 and Table 16-11
on Page 16-21). Most TE-1 and TA devices also provide option switches to connect 100-ohm
terminating resistors as shown in Figure 16-17.
If the TE or TA devices do not provide TRs, they may be permanently wired in place on a RJ45
jack at the far end of the bus. Only one terminating resistor on each pair should be on the far (TE)
end of the passive bus - do not switch in TRs on more than one TE-1 or TA device on the passive
bus.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-27
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
Important!
The correct placement of TRs on the Passive Bus is critical to ISDN BRI circuit
operation (see the following TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus configurations
section).
TBSU and RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations
The placement of S-type TE and TA devices on the BRI S-passive bus is critical for good TBSU
and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit performance. Figures 16-19~16-22 show four passive bus
architectures that are known to work. In all installations, follow the guidelines of any of these
passive-bus models using the wire, cables, and jacks described in the previous paragraphs.
TA and PC Com Port
x
' ma
360
TBSU or
RBSU/RBSS
NT-Mode
TR
RJ-45
360
3338
' ma
x
ISDN Telephone
Figure 16-19 Simplified Short-branched Passive Bus
TE-1 PC Card
*
TBSU or
RBSU/RBSS
NT-Mode
TR
850'
RJ-45
3339
RJ-45 with
TRs
* No more than 130' difference
between any 2 branches.
*
ISDN Telephone
Figure 16-20 Branched Passive Bus
16-28
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBSU/RBSS and TBSU Interface Units
82'
ISDN Telephone
TBSU or
RBSU/RBSS
NT-Mode
TE-1 PC Card
RJ-45
TR
TR
1650'
3340
Figure 16-21 Extended Passive Bus
490'
ISDN Telephone
TBSU or
RBSU/RBSS
NT-Mode
TE-1 PC Card
RJ-45
TR
640'
3341
Figure 16-22 Short Passive Bus
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
TR
16-29
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
System:
DK424i, DK424, and DK40i Release 4.3
Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit)
Interfaces with:
ISDN BRI U when connected to the Public Network or a BRI U-type TE-1 or TA devices
when connecting to ISDN station equipment
Older Version(s): none
The DK40i, DK424 and DK424i Release 4.3 system supports the RBUU/RBUS interface unit
(Figures 16-23 and 16-24) according to the common control units resident in the system. (Table
14-8). The DK40i R2 supports TBUU in the Base Cabinet.
LEDs on the RBUU/RBUS show a continuous status of operation. Refer to Table 16-14 for a list
of each LED’s status.
Figure 16-25 shows the location of the LEDs and connectors.
RBUU and TBUU Installation
Important!
The DK40i, Release 1 does not support the RBUU or TBUU interface.
Before installing an RBUU or TBUU PCB into a DK system, a number of system programs must
be run. Be sure to run Program *60 to identify all station (NT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits. Program
*60 causes port and line numbers to shift. We recommend running these programs in the order
listed before installation. This allows the RBUU to function immediately upon insertion beginning
with a self-check loop-back test and then normal operation. Before you can begin installation of
the RBUU, you may have to install the subassemblies.
The TBUU PCB is shown in Figure 16-26.
➤ To install the subassemblies (RBUS)
➤ Place the RBUS card (component side facing down) onto the RBUU connectors. Apply firm,
even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. The RBUS card should have been
installed at the factory.
➤ To install an RBUU PCB
1. Insert the RBUU (component side facing right) into the appropriate expansion unit slot and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors.
2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated,
a slight resistance is felt.
➤ To install a TBUU PCB
1. Insert the TBUU (component side facing right) into the DK40i Base Unit and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors.
2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated,
a slight resistance is felt.
16-30
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
RBUU1A
Secondary
Protectors
P12
P13
Circuit 1
J101
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 1
J201
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 2
Circuit 2
BSY
T S
LOS
F S
LED Indicators
Circuit 1
BSY
T S
LOS
F S
Circuit 2
DIN
Connector
J3
RS-232C
Monitor Output
P10
P10
RBUU1A
2799
Figure 16-23 RBUU PCB
RBUS1A
P12
ISDN Interfaces
P13
Circuit 3
BSY
T S
LOS
F S
Circuit 4
LED Indicators
BSY
T S
LOS
F S
J301
Circuit 3
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 3
J401
RBSU1A
Circuit 4
P11
P10
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 4
Secondary
Protectors
F
2800
Figure 16-24 RBUS Subassembly
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-31
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
RBUU1A
RBUS1A
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 1
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 2
BSY
T S
PSI
F S
LED Indicators
for Circuit 1
BSY
T S
PSI
F S
BSY
T S
PSI
F S
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 3
BSY
T S
PSI
F S
LED Indicators
for Circuit 2
LED Indicators
for Circuit 3
LED Indicators
for Circuit 4
RJ45 Modular
for Circuit 4
RS-232C
Monitor Output
4776
Figure 16-25 Location of LEDs and Connectors (RBUU/RBUS)
Table 16-14 RBUU/RBUS LED Indications
LED
BSY
TS
PSI1
FS
Definition
LED Off
LED On
LED Blinking
Busy
Port is in idle.
Port is busy.
Port is in test mode.
Time
Synchronization
Not CLK extraction port.
Secondary CLK
extraction port.
Extracting CLK port.
Port Status
Indicator
Port is in LT mode.
Port is in NT mode.
AIB is received by this
port.
Frame
Synchronization
Frame alignment is
established.
Frame Alignment error.
Port is trying to establish
frame alignment.
1. PSI is labeled LOS on Beta PCBs
16-32
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
IC3
Secondary
Protectors
J2
Cct2
IC1
Cct1
J1
J3
Monitor
4730
CO10
CO11
CO12
CO13
TBUU1A
BSY
TS
PSI
FS
CO14
CO15
CO16
CO17
Cct1
Cct2
Figure 16-26 TBUU Printed Circuit Board
TBUU and RBUU/RBUS Wiring Guidelines
DK BRI-U interface circuits can be configured to connect to an ISDN line circuit (NT mode,
Line-side) or to ISDN U-type terminal equipment TE1 or terminal adapters TA (LT mode,
station side).
♦
The configuration of DK BRI-U circuits is accomplished in Program *60 alone - no hardware
jumpers are required on the PCBs. Make sure you run this program along with Program 03
attempting to use the BRI circuits. Program *60 may cause line or station ports to shift on
circuits following the BRI PCBs.
♦
Install the Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core on each ISDN circuit card per Figures 16-15 and
16-16 on Page 25. The Ferrite core is not supplied with the ISDN circuit cards must be ordered
separately.
♦
For more information regarding the DK BRI-U interface, see “PRI and BRI Overview” at the
beginning of this chapter.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
♦
16-33
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
Line-side cabling
♦
The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the PSTN line-side.
♦
The wiring from the demarc to the DK BRI circuit should be made with CAT3~CAT5 twisted
pair wire.
♦
The pinout of the DK BRI-U circuit jack is shown below.
NT and LT Mode
NC
NC
NC
Tip
Ring
NC
NC
NC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BRI Pai
NC = No Connection
4732
RJ45 Jack
♦
DK BRI-U RJ45 Circuit Jack Printout
♦
The maximum distance between the PSTN BRI interface circuit and the DK ISDN BRI U lineside circuit (NT) is 18 kft. The Telco with the use of a repeater or fiber optic cable may extend
this distance.
♦
The U interface pair should go directly from the demarc jack to the DK interface PCB with no
bridge taps to different locations or should not have loading coils installed.
♦
BRI line-side cables should not be shielded.
♦
Each line-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16.
♦
In the USA, most BRI-U Demarc jacks are RJ11, but they may be RJ45 eight-wire jacks. In
Canada the BRI-U Demarc jack is usually RJ45.
♦
Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical.
♦
The ISDN BRI-U wire pair is usually on the center pair of the Demarc jack, pins 3 and 4 on
RJ11 and pins 4 and 5 on RJ45. Typical demarc jack wiring is shown below:)
6
5
4
3
2
1
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
4726
RJ11 Demarc Jack
Figure 16-27 Six-pin Modular Plug (RJ11)
16-34
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
RBUU/RBUS and TBUU Interface Unit
Table 16-15 Quad Cable with RJ11 Demarc Coding
Conductor
Pair 1
Pair 2
Color
Pin
Use
Red
3
Line 1
Green
4
Line 1
Yellow
5
Line 2/Power
Black
2
Line 2/Power
WHITE-GREEN
GREEN
WHITE-ORANGE
BLUE
WHITE-BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE-BROWN
BROWN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4727
RJ45 Demarc Jack
Figure 16-28 Eight-pin Modular Plug (RJ45)
Table 16-16 Four-Pair with RJ45 Demarc Jack Coding
Conductor
Pair 2
Pair3
Pair 4
T56A Pin
T56B Pin
Use
White-Blue
5
5
Line 1
Blue
4
4
Line 1
White-Orange
3
1
Line 2
Orange
6
2
Line 2
White-Green
1
3
PS3 plus power
Green
2
6
PS3 minus power
White-Brown
7
7
PS2 plus power
Brown
8
8
PS2 minus power
ISDN Interfaces
Pair 1
Color
Table 16-17 Three-Pair with RJ11 Demarc Coding
Conductor
Pair 1
Pair 2
Pair3
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Color
Pin
Use
White-Blue
4
Line 1
Blue
3
Line 1
White-Orange
2
Line 2
Orange
5
Line 2
White-Green
1
Line 3
Green
6
Line 3
16-35
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting
Notes
●
●
PS2 and PS3 are not used with the DK BRI-U interface PCBs.
Check with the BRI circuit supplier to determine the pin out of the demarc jacks because some
jacks may be wired with two or three BRI-U line circuits each jack.
Station-Side cabling
♦
The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the DK station-side.
♦
The maximum distance between the DK ISDN BRI-U, station-side circuit (LT) and the U-type
Terminal Equipment or Terminal Adapter is 18kft.
♦
The house wiring from the DK BRI circuit to the wall jack should be made with CAT3~ CAT5
twisted pair wire.
♦
Each station-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figures 16-15 and 16-16.
♦
The flat satin telephone cord that connects from the wall jacks to ISDN terminal equipment
should be no longer than 33 feet.
♦
BRI station-side cables should not be shielded.
♦
Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical.
♦
The U interface pair should go directly from the DK interface PCB to the U-type TE1 or TA
with no bridge taps or loading coils to different locations.
♦
The pin-out of the TBUU and RBUU/RBSU BRI jack is shown in Figure 16-26:
Call Monitor Jack Cabling
The pin-out for the BRI-U interface call monitor jack is provided in Figure 16-33 of this chapter.
ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting
BRI-U, LT Interface Terminal Loop Back Test
The DK provides a built-in loop back test to check the U-type, lSDN terminal connected to the
RBUU, RBUS, or TBUU circuit. The DK performs the 2B+D loop test using the eoc ISDN, layer
1 function. This tests the U-terminal and the wire connection from the DK to the BRI device; it
does not check the DK PCM highway or RBUU/RBUS/TBUU functionality.
1. Set DK BRI programs to enable the BRI circuit to function. Make sure to setup the BRI circuit
in the station-side, LT mode using Program *60.
2. Connect the U-terminal device to the DK BRI, RJ45 circuit jack. (see Figure 16-26).
3. Connect the DK TTY port (PIOU, RSIU, TSIU, etc.) to the COM port of a PC running a
communications application such as ProComm or Hyper Terminal, etc.
16-36
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting
4. Setup the com-port parameters for 7-bits, even parity, 1-stop bit and the appropriate speed.
DK System
Test data from DK sent to Terminal.
If 80% of sent data is returned test
passes.
RBUU
(LT Mode)
U-Terminal
device
(loop back)
1-pair BRI Circuit Line Cord
RSIU or PIOU
3-pair Telephone Cord
TTY Port
TTY Port
PC with Hyper
Terminal
Software
4733
Figure 16-29 DK TTY Port BRI Connection to PC
5. Press the Enter key on the PC keyboard
The DK responds with CODE
The DK responds with MODE
7. At the MODE prompt, type TEST and press Enter from the PC keyboard
The DK responds with T
ISDN Interfaces
6. At the CODE prompt, type the DK, 4-digit code (Program 00 code) from the PC keyboard
Make all entries from the PC keyboard in Capital letters.
Note
8. At the T prompt, type LBUU ss m and press Enter from the PC keyboard
Where ss=BRI PCB slot number and m=BRI circuit number (1-4).
Notes
●
●
The U-terminal must be idle, and remain idle, during the loop back test.
The DK sends 4 octets of data to the U-terminal during the loop back test: 0X00, 0XFF, 0XB2,
and 0X4D. These octets are sent to the B1, B2, and D channels 50 times. If the DK receives
80% of the sent data back, it assumes the test to pass. (i.e., the U-terminal and wiring is good.)
If The DK responds with:
## BUU LOOP BACK TEST ##
SLOT=ss CIRCUIT=m B1:OK B2:OK D:OK
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-37
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting
The above response indicates the test was passed and that the B1, B2 and D channels and the wire
connections for the tested device are operating properly.
b. If The DK responds with:
TEST FAIL
The test failure could be caused by:
♦
U-terminal is in busy state when the test was started.
♦
U-terminal is in TQ/ACB/ACD mode when the test was started
♦
The DK BRI PCB slot or circuit number was not entered correctly.
♦
U-terminal can not support loop back testingU-terminal, BRI PCB, or wiring is defective.
c. If The DK responds with:
TEST EXIT
Test exit could be caused by:
♦
The DK processor did not get test results from the BRI circuit within 5 second from start of the
test.
♦
U-terminal or BRI circuit was unplugged during the test.
♦
User made the exit request during testing
RPTU Loop-back Test
The RPTU has loop-back test jumpers that enable physical connections (cables/jacks/plugs)
between the RPTU, CSU, and the network PRI line to be tested (see Figure 16-30). The tests check
that the CSU receives and transmits the PRI signal properly in both directions. The test signals,
generated by the Network PRI provider, pass through the CSU and loop around the RPTU. The
RPTU sends the received test signal back through the CSU to the Network and the Network
detector checks for a valid signal.
Loop-back Test
1. Remove the PRI modular cord from the RPTU RJ45 jack and remove the RPTU from its card
slot.
2. Place the JP1 and JP2 jumpers to the LB-On position. Install the RPTU with the DK power Off
and the PRI modular disconnected from the RPTU RJ45 jack.
3. Turn the DK power On and connect the PRI modular cord to RPTU RJ45.
4. After the PRI line and RPTU are synchronized, have the CO generate the loop-back test sign
(all “1s” or “0s”).
CAUTION!
Do not have the CO do a QRS loop-back test, because the test signal may cause
the DK to drop all calls and/or stop operating.
5. If the loop-back test fails, perform tests to isolate the problem with an ISDN test set, such as
the Sunbird, ISDN, or Trend DUET. In this case, the network PRI line is disconnected and the
test set is connected to the CSU network input jack. For testing details, refer to the ISDN test
set operating procedures.
16-38
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
Timing and Synchronization
RPTU
CSU
CO ISDN
PRI Test
Signal
ISDN PRI
JP1
(RJ-45)
(LB-ON)
ISDN PRI
1.5MHz
line
Interface
LSI
Network
Jack
RJ-48C
or RJ-48X
JP2
(LB-ON)
Demarcation Point
2756
Figure 16-30 Loop-back Test
Timing and Synchronization
The Digital Network is connected by timing clocks that synchronize the network and have various
degrees of precision (stratum levels). There are four stratum levels – 1 is the highest and 4 is the
lowest. They are associated with the following sources:
Stratum – 1: Public Telephone Network clock
♦
Stratum – 2: #4 ESS Toll Switches
♦
Stratum – 3: #5 ESS Central Offices
♦
Stratum – 4: Digital PBXs
In the DK424 or DK424i, one PRI, BRI, or T1 PCB can be programmed to extract the Stratum
clock signal. It uses the signal as the DK system Primary clock reference. The clock provider
should be a reliable source, such as a Telco or common carrier (AT&T). All other PRI, BRI, or T1
lines connected to the DK424 or DK424i will be synchronized to the same clock provider. If the
PRI, BRI, or T1 are not synchronized to the same clock provider, the DK424 or DK424i could
experience “slip” problems.
ISDN Interfaces
♦
Timing reference assignments for PRI, BRI, and T1 are made with the Program *42 series. The
timing or synchronization program determines how the DK424 or DK424i digital voice or data
transmission path is synchronized with the far-end digital path. For proper PRI, BRI, and T1
operation, the equipment at each end of the line must be synchronized.
The DK processor time switch is synchronized as the slave to the PRI, BRI, or T1 line (Line 1 in
Figure 16-31). The DK424 or DK424i PRI, BRI, or T1 in any slot number can be assigned as the
Primary reference (Program *42-1, DATA=1 for this PRI, BRI, or T1).
If a malfunction occurs and Primary reference synchronization is lost, the DK424 or DK424i
automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the Secondary reference, provided that there is
another PRI, BRI, or T1 installed in the DK system. The Secondary reference PCB is assigned in
Program *42-2.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-39
ISDN Interfaces
Timing and Synchronization
DK40i, DK424 or DK424i
Processor PCB
* Primary/Secondary reference
PCBs are assigned in
Programs 42-1/ 42-2 and
can be an RDTU, RPTU,
RBSU, RBUU, TBUS or TBUU.
Synchronization
Circuit
Clock
SS1
Electronic
Telephone
PEKU
Standard
Telephone
RSTU
4773
*
Primary Reference PCB*
PDKU
DK424 Digital Transmission Voice Path
Digital
Telephone
*
Time
Switch
Synchronization
Circuit
Line 1
Prg *42-1-1
Digital Voice
Path
Public Switched
Telephone
Network (PSTN)
PRI, BRI, or T1
Secondary Reference PCB*
Synchronization
Circuit
SS2
Digital Voice
Path
Line 2
Prg *42-2-2
Synchronization
Circuit
Digital Voice
Path
Stratum-1
Clock
Source
Clock synchronized properly
with Stratum-1 Clock Source
Other RDTU, RPTU, or RBSU
SS3
AT&T or
other provider
PRI, BRI, or T1
Line 3
Prg *41-1[blank]
Prg *42-1[blank]
Other
PRI, BRI, or T1
provider
Other
Clock
Source
Clock not synchronized properly
with Stratum-1 Clock Source
Figure 16-31 Primary and Secondary References
Figure 16-31 shows the Primary reference PCB. The clock signal from Line 1 passes through
the PCB Software Switch (SS1) and the synchronization circuit of the RCTU PCB. The RCTU
clock passes the clock source through the time switch and synchronizes the DK424 or DK424i
digital transmission voice or data path.
The Secondary reference is activated if the Primary reference fails. The DK424 or DK424i
automatically switches over to the Secondary reference PCB by opening its synchronization
circuit (SS1) and closing the synchronization circuit (SS2). When this occurs, the digital voice
or data path of the DK424 or DK424i is synchronized to the Line 2 clock source.
If the path is not synchronized to the Stratum – 1 clock source, calls connected through that
path experience “slipping” or “jitter” in the digital voice or data path (channels). Figure 14-7
shows an unsynchronized signal from Line 3. The unsynchronized signal produces a clicking
or popping sound that is heard by the people connected through this path or causes data errors
on data transmissions.
16-40
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
Timing and Synchronization
RPTU Performance Monitoring
The performance of the RPTU can be monitored using the Data Dump Mode. This requires:
♦
RSIU, RSIS, PIOU, PIOUS or TSIU PCB TTY port.
♦
ASCII terminal or PC with communications software (such as ProComm).
♦
IMDU or RMDS modem or Hayes compatible modem for remote monitoring.
The RPTU monitoring feature provides a download of PRI errors detected as shown in Figure
16-32. This data can be stored to a file and/or printed when using a PC with communications
software.
There are no time parameters for the error report, so the time between error-count increments must
be monitored manually. The counter is reset after 15 registrations and begins again from zero.
Basically the error count of any error category should not increase within 24-hour periods.
➤ To dump the data (PRI ERROR DISPLAY) from a terminal or PC (local or remote)
1. Establish communications between the DK TTY port and the terminal or PC using a
communications software.
2. Enter the security code, and press Enter (or Return).
3. At the >MODE prompt, type DUMP (must be all caps), and press Enter (or Return). The >D
prompt displays on your screen.
4. At the >D prompt, type PRIERR and press Enter (or Return). The display (see Figure
16-32) shows all RPTU PCBs (PRI NO=1~PRI NO=8), even if the associated RPTU (1~8) is
not installed. The ERROR counter can only be reset by turning the DK Off and On.
➤ To exit the dump mode
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
➤ At the >D prompt, type QUIT, press Enter (or Return); the >MODE prompt displays.
16-41
ISDN Interfaces
Timing and Synchronization
PRI ERROR DISPLAY
PRIERR
PRI NO = 1
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 2
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 3
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 4
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 5
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 6
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 7
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
PRI NO = 8
SYNCHRO BIT ERROR
BIPOLAR VIOLATION
SLIP ERROR
CRC ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
= XX TIMES (1 TIME = 1024 ERRORS)
= XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 X 256 ERRORS)
= XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS)
= XX TIMES (1 TIME = 256 ERRORS)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES (XX = 00~15)
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
=
=
=
=
XX
XX
XX
XX
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
TIMES
Error Message
Action
Synchro Bit Error
Increments each time the RPTU detects 1024 synchronization bit errors.
Bipolar Violation
Error
Increments each time the RPTU detects 6.55 x 104 bipolar violations.
Slip Error
Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 slips.
CRC Error
Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 CRC-6 errors. The RPTU must be in the ESF
mode.
Figure 16-32 RPTU Performance Monitor Printout
16-42
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
The DK ISDN circuit cards provide an RS-232 monitor function that enables you to monitor the
ISDN D-channel call progress layer two and three messages (setup, connect, and release). This
data can be monitored live, saved to a file, and/or printed using a PC with communication
software.
The hardware connections and communication parameters for the ISDN monitor port are shown in
Figure 16-33. Once this connection is setup and established, call monitoring data continues to be
sent (on the fly) as PRI and BRI calls are originated or received.
Two sample printouts from the RPTU monitor are provided. Figure 16-33 shows typical ISDN PRI
start-up and synchronization sequences that occur at connection and power on. Figure 16-34
shows typical ISDN PRI outgoing call setup and release sequences. BRI monitor data is similar to
PRI monitor data.
The communication parameters for all call-monitor jacks are 9600 bps, 7, 1, even.
DK PRI or BRI PCB Monitor Jack
PC with communication
software - such as ProComm™
Call-monitor jack
PC DB9 or
DB25 Com port
Dealer-supplied 6-wire
telephone modular cord
(cross-pinned)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Call-monitor jack (RJ12)
pin numbering
ISDN Interfaces
RD
TD
DSR
DTR
DCD
SG
Toshiba PPTC9 or
PPTC25F
4696
Note
The RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, TBSU and TBUU ISDN interface PCBs each have a callmonitor jack. The pin numbering and communication parameters are the same for each
call-monitor jack. The call-monitor jack on each PCB provides data only for the circuits of
the PCB on which it appears.
Figure 16-33 Call-monitor Jack for the RPTU, RBSU, and RBUU
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-43
ISDN Interfaces
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
/*-------------------------*/
Copyright(C) 1997
TOSHIBA Corporation
All rights reserved
RPTU Ver.1G
[Reset]
/*-------------------------*/
<U1>00;00 016 Act.
(F1)
/*-------------------------*/
Copyright(C) 1997
TOSHIBA Corporation
All rights reserved
RPTU Ver.1G
[Reset]
/*-------------------------*/
<U1>00;00 016 Act.
(F1)
<U1>00;09 634 LOS
(F3)
<U1>00;12 109 Act.
(F1)
/*-------------------------*/
Copyright(C) 1997
TOSHIBA Corporation
All rights reserved
RPTU Ver.1G
[Reset]
/*-------------------------*/
<U1>00;00 017 Act.
(F1)
<U1>00;06 619 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
<U1>00;06 630 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;07 236 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
<U1>00;07 245 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;11 754 LOS
(F3)
<U1>00;14 228 Act.
(F1)
<U1>00;14 415 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
<U1>00;14 427 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;14 753 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
<U1>00;14 765 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;24 275 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0002
MT = SETUP(05)
04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9
33 30 30 31
<U1>00;24 292 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;28 315 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0002
MT = SETUP(05)
04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9
33 30 30 31
<U1>00;28 333 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000
<U1>00;43 812 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8002
MT = CONN(07)
[FRAME]SABME
[FRAME]UA
[FRAME]SABME
[FRAME]UA
P
F
P
F
[FRAME]SABME
[FRAME]UA
[FRAME]SABME
[FRAME]UA
[FRAME]INFO
P
F
P
F
[N(S)]000 [N(R)]000
83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33
[FRAME]RR
[FRAME]INFO
[N(R)]001
[N(S)]001 [N(R)]000
83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33
[FRAME]RR
[FRAME]INFO
..........p..583
3001
..........p..583
3001
[N(R)]002
[N(S)]000 [N(R)]002
2759
Figure 16-34 PRI Start-up and Synchronization Sequences
16-44
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
<U1>01;14 446
<U1>01;14 449
<U1>01;14 456
<U1>01;14 460
<U1>01;19 450
<U1>01;19 466
<U1>01;19 878
<U1>01;19 888
<U1>01;19 924
<U1>01;19 932
<U1>01;25 464
<U1>01;25 476
<U1>01;25 785
<U1>01;46 138
<U1>01;46 449
<U1>01;46 464
<U1>01;46 784
<U1>01;46
<U1>02;16
<U1>02;16
<U1>02;22
795
659
670
661
ISDN Interfaces
<U1>01;25 799
<U1>01;46 127
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
P [N(R)]004
Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
P [N(R)]002
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
F [N(R)]002
Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
F [N(R)]004
Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]004 [N(R)]002
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0003
MT = SETUP(05)
04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 ..........p..583
33 30 30 31
3001
Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]005
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]002 [N(R)]005
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8003
MT = CALL PROC(02)
18 03 A9 83 97
.....
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]003
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]003 [N(R)]005
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8003
MT = ALERT(01)
18 03 A9 83 97
.....
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]004
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]004 [N(R)]005
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8003
MT = CONN(07)
18 03 A9 83 97
.....
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]005
Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]005 [N(R)]005
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0003
MT = CONN ACK(0F)
Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]006
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]005 [N(R)]006
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8003
MT = DISC(45)
08 02 80 90
....
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]006
Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]006 [N(R)]006
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0003
MT = REL(4D)
08 02 80 90
....
Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]007
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]006 [N(R)]007
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 8003
MT = REL COMP(5A)
08 02 80 90
....
Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
[N(R)]007
Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
P [N(R)]007
Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR
F [N(R)]007
Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO
[N(S)]007 [N(R)]007
PD = Q.931(08)
CR = 02 0004
2760
Figure 16-35 PRI Outgoing Call Connect and Release
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-45
ISDN Interfaces
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
BRI Call Monitor
The call-monitor jack located on the TBSU and RBSU enables you to use a PC or ASCII terminal
to monitor the BRI, D-channel call setup, layer-2 and layer-3 data (refer to Figure 16-33 on Page
16-43 for information about connecting the monitor jack). Figures 16-36 and 16-37 provide
examples of BRI call setup message information that is available from the TBSU and RBSU callmonitor jack.
Figure 16-36 Outgoing Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor
16-46
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
PRI/BRI Call Monitoring
ISDN Interfaces
Figure 16-37 Incoming Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor
Strata DK I&M
5/00
16-47
ISDN Interfaces
SMDR Output for ISDN
SMDR Output for ISDN
See Figure 12-20 on Page 12-36 for a sample SMDR printout and descriptions of each column.
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
The ISDN Cause Code provides information on how an ISDN call is terminated when an ISDN
line disconnects. The Cause Code displays only when this feature is enabled on the LCD of DKTs,
EKTs and Attendant Consoles.
ISDN Cause Code is turned On/Off for each telephone or console in Program 35, LED 08. LED 08
On enables Cause Code Display.
Previously, “CO LINE HANG UP!” or “CALL TERMINATED” displayed when an ISDN line
disconnected. This display no longer exists for ISDN calls with DK Release 4.3 software. These
messages do display if a non-ISDN call is terminated. The new cause code display function
replaces this existing message with more specific and useful information (call reference number,
direction of disconnection, and the reason for call termination).
Users can chose the option to display this information or not on each individual telephone or
console. This option is turned On or Off in system programming
16-48
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
Explanation of the LCD Information
C A L L T E R M I N AT E D
CR=0001...CO=10
4778
Figure 16-38 shows ISDN Call Termination Fields; information changes. Table 16-18 provides a
definition of these fields. Cause code values are further defined in tables later in this chapter.
Disconnect Cause Code:
Provides the reason for call termination.
Refer to the Disconnect Cause Code
tables that follow in this section.
Call Reference
Disconnect Direction:
"CO" means the Central Office disconnected the call.
"DK" means the DK system disconnected the call.
The last three digits or are the call reference number.
This number is incremented and generated by the DK
as each call is made or received.
The first digit of the call reference number indicates if it was an outgoing call
made by the DK or an incoming call received by the DK. This digit is usually
a "0" or "8" and is interpreted as follows:
If the DK disconnected the call:
0 = the DK made the call (outgoing)
8 = the DK received the call (incoming)
ISDN Interfaces
If the CO disconnected the call:
0 = the DK received the call (incoming)
8 = the DK made the call (outgoing)
Figure 16-38 Call Termination LCD Display
The above figure shows how the information on the display changes according to the status of the
terminal when the line is disconnected. The content of each type of information is as shown in
Table 16-18.
♦
Call Reference Number – The number of the disconnected call displays in a field that is up to
four digits long. If the number is not four digits long, the numbers will start from the far left. In
case the call is disconnected before it is picked up, “NA (which stand for Not Available)”
displays on the left.
The highest bit of the call reference number indicates whether the call has been transmitted or
received. For example, if the DK disconnects the call and the call reference number is “0001,”
the call has been transmitted by the DK, and if the call reference number is “8001,” it means
that the call was received by the DK.
♦
Strata DK I&M
Reason for call termination – The reason is provided by a series of ISDN disconnection
messages exchanged when the line is disconnected. The cause value within the information
element of cause included in these messages will be used.
5/00
16-49
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
In case a valid cause value cannot be found when the line is disconnected, “NA (which stand
for Not Available)” displays. (See Tables 16-18~16-23 for valid cause code descriptions.)
Notes
●
●
●
●
On/Off of cause display function is set by programming each terminal (Program 35, LED 08).
This setting is only valid for ISDN lines (PRI, BRI (S/T) in TE mode, and BRI (U) in LT
mode). Loop start and ground start trunk call termination data displays just like the ISDN
line— the display format is the same as when cause display function is switched Off. (For
Loop start trunks, use Program 15-0, 3.)
In case of analog Tie and DID lines, the display information remains the same as before.
Even if soft keys are switched On, information on call termination displays instead of the soft
key's On status. However, the function of the soft key itself remains valid. For example, even
when the soft key's On status is not displayed, ABR registration can be enabled by pressing
[MODE] key on the terminal corresponding to the soft key's ABR position.
The cause display remains until some kind of operation (such as going on-hook, making a call,
receiving a call, etc.) changes the display. This is to prevent the display from being changed
until the System Administrator reads the information on call termination when the line is
disconnected in an unusual way. At this time, the busy tone that starts when the line is
disconnected will also continue generating.
Call Termination Examples
16-50
CALL TERMINATED
CR=8004
DK=NA
This is an example of the call being terminated because layer 2
stopped operating during the call. The call has be started by DK’s
reception through a PRI line.
CALL TERMINATED
CR=NA
DK=NA
This example shows when the DK side fails to actuate layer 2 through
PRI or BRI line when layer 2 stops operating. This is the only case
then “NA” is used for the call reference number.
CALL TERMINATED
CR=0005
CO=11
This example shows a call being terminated due to signal loss that
occurred during the call. The call has been started by the DK’s
transmission through a PRI line.
CALL TERMINATED
CR=8001
DK=11
This example shows a line disconnected due to 11H , “User busy,”
from the network side when the call from the DK side is made through
the PRI line. If ABR registration is enabled and the soft key is switched
On, the functions are valid even through they do not display on the
soft key.
CALL TERMINATED
CR=0002
DK=51
This example shows the line being disconnected by 51H, “Invalid call
reference value,” from the DK side after the system detects something
abnormal during the call. This call started from the DK through the PRI
line.
CALL TERMINATED
CR=0003
DK=NA
This example shows the call being terminated because there was no
response from the network side to the SETUP signal transmission
from the DK side through the PRI line.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
Disconnect Cause Code Tables
ISDN Cause Codes contain detailed information offered by ISDN’s layer 3 protocol when the
line is disconnected. Cause code definitions for ISDN PRI and BRI lines are shown in Tables
16-18~16-23.
Table 16-18 ISDN PRI Disconnect Cause Values
DK Cause
Values
5/00
01
Unallocated (unassigned) number
02
No route to specified transit network
03
No route to destination
06
Channel unacceptable
07
Call awarded and being delivered in an established channel
10
Normal Clearing
11
User busy
12
No user responding
13
User alerting, no answer
15
Call rejected
16
Number changed
1B
Destination out of order
1C
Invalid number format
1D
Facility rejected
1E
Response to STATus ENQuiry
1F
Normal, unspecified
22
Circuit/channel congestion
29
Temporary failure
2A
Switching equipment congestion
2B
Access information discarded
2C
Requested channel not available
2F
Resources unavailable, unspecified
32
Requested facility not subscribed
39
Bearer capability not authorized
3A
Bearer capability not presently available
3F
Service or option not available, unspecified.
41
Bearer capability not implemented
45
Requested facility not implemented
4F
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
51
Invalid call reference value
58
Incompatible destination
60
Mandatory information element is missing
61
Message type nonexisting
63
Information element nonexisting or not implemented
64
Invalid information element contents
65
Message not compatible with call state
66
Recovery on timer expiry
6F
Protocol error, unspecified
7F
Interworking, unspecified
ISDN Interfaces
Strata DK I&M
Disconnect Cause
16-51
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
Table 16-19 PRI National Standardized Cause Values
Values
Disconnect Cause
04
Vacant Code
08
Prefix 0 dialed in error
09
Prefix 1 not dialed
0A
Prefix 0 dialed in error
0B
Excessive digits received, call is proceeding
33
Bearer capability incompatible with service request
35
Service Operation violated
65
Protocol error, threshold exceeded
Table 16-20 PRI National Standardized Cause Values
Values
65
Disconnect Cause
Protocol error, threshold exceeded
Table 16-21 ISDN BRI Disconnect Cause Values
DK Cause
Values
01
16-52
Disconnect Cause
Unallocated (unassigned) number
02
No route to specified transit network
03
No route to destination
06
Channel unacceptable
07
Call awarded and being delivered in an established channel
10
Normal Clearing
11
User busy
12
No user responding
13
User alerting, no answer
15
Call rejected
16
Number changed
1A
Non-selected user clearing
1B
Destination out of order
1C
Invalid number format
1D
Facility rejected
1E
Response to STATus ENQuiry
1F
Normal, unspecified
22
Circuit/channel congestion
29
Temporary failure
2A
Switching equipment congestion
2B
Access information discarded
2C
Requested channel not available
2F
Resources unavailable, unspecified
Strata DK I&M
5/00
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
Table 16-21 ISDN BRI Disconnect Cause Values (continued)
DK Cause
Values
Disconnect Cause
32
Requested facility not subscribed
39
Bearer capability not authorized
3A
Bearer capability not presently available
3F
Service or option not available, unspecified.
41
Bearer capability not implemented
45
Requested facility not implemented
4F
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
51
Invalid call reference value
58
Incompatible destination
60
Mandatory information element is missing
61
Message type nonexisting or not implemented
63
Information element nonexisting or not implemented
64
Invalid information element contents
65
Message not compatible with call state
66
Recovery on timer expiry
6F
Protocol error, unspecified
7F
Interworking, unspecified
Table 16-22 BRI National Standardized Cause Values
Values
Disconnect Cause
Vacant Code
08
Prefix 0 dialed in error
09
Prefix 1 dialed in error
0A
Prefix 1 not dialed
0B
Excessive digits received, call is proceeding
1A
Misrouted call to a ported number
33
Call type incompatible with service request
35
Service operation violated
65
Protocol error, threshold exceeded
ISDN Interfaces
04
Table 16-23 BRI Network Specific Cause Values
Values
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Disconnect Cause
08
Call is proceeding
0D
Service denied
1C
Special intercept announcement
1D
Special intercept announcement; undefined code
1E
Special intercept announcement; number unassigned
1A
Misrouted call to a ported number
33
Call type incompatible with service request
35
Service operation violated
65
Protocol error, threshold exceeded
16-53
ISDN Interfaces
ISDN Disconnect Cause Code
16-54
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
Term
Definition
Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs
incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts.
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents.
The ACD supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which
allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents.
ACD/MIS
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS).
ADM
Add-on Module—See DADM.
Amphenol
Connector
A 25-pair connector typically used on a multi-button telephone set for interfacing cables to
many electronic key and PBX systems.
ANI
Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata
DK system over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance
telephone service companies.
BCU
Represents all of the DK424i processors. The DK424i processors are: B1CU, B2CAU/
B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU.
B2CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B2CAU/B2CBU.
B2CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU.
B5CAU/BU
Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B2CBU.
B-channel
Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an ISDN line at
64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is
a logical, rather than a physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI.
B8ZS
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution.
BGM
Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and
external speakers.
bps
Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation.
BRI
Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a
U-interface with RJ11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ45 four pair S/T interface
wiring.
CAMA
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting. A special trunk provided by the phone company
or the E911 Public Safety Answering Point Agency.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
AA
GL-1
Glossary
CESID~DKT
Term
GL-2
Definition
CESID
Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station or station
location which is sent to the CAMA trunk.
CCVY
Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector—Enables two-way transmissions between the Strata DK
and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and one-way transmissions to other PCs. There are four
ports on the Call Center Viewer Connector for one Strata DK, another master port, and two
additional ports.
CLASS
Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local
telephone companies.
CLID or CND
Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or name of the
calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines. This
feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies.
CO
Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone
service (CO lines, E & M Tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate
geographical area.
CO Line
A term used to define the Strata DK system hardware circuits that connect to the Central
Office network line pair. Each CO line, DID and Tie line circuit is assigned a CO line number
in system software.
CODECs
Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and
digital-to-analog conversions.
DADM
Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital telephones to
provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for
Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line access.
D-channel
Used in ISDN. This channel transmits call control information (out-of-band signaling) for Bchannels. The D-channel is a logical, not a physical channel.
DDCB
Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
DDSS
Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone
circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone.
DIL
Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular
extension or hunt group.
DID Line
Direct Inward Dialing line.
DISA
Direct Inward System Access—A feature that allows an outside party to access the Strata
DK system internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or
automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access
to outgoing CO lines for through system calling.
DK
Digital Key.
DKi Admin
Toshiba's customer database programming and upload/download software package for
Strata DK systems.
DKi Backup
Toshiba’s customer database upload/download software package for Strata DK systems.
DKT
Digital Telephone.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
DKT2000 series~HDSS
Term
Definition
Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models: two 10-button models with
handsfree answerback and/or LCD display and two 20 button telephones with speakerphone
or a speakerphone with LCD display.
DKSU14A
Strata DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply. Equipped with two loop start CO line
circuits and four digital telephone circuits built-in. Includes external page interface, MOH/
BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control.
DKSUB280,
DKSUB424 or
DK424i
Base Cabinet—Unit that houses the processor PCB (RCTU or BCU), as well as universal
slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The Base Cabinet also contains a power supply that
provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the base cabinet PCBs.
DKSUE280 or
DKSUE424
Expansion Cabinet—Optional unit that has six universal slots for station, line, and option
PCBs. The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all of the stations
and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs. As many as five expansion
cabinets can be added to the system.
DKSUB40i
Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply and battery charger. Equipped
with eight digital telephone circuits built-in, and no CO line circuits. Includes external page
interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control.
[DN]
Directory Number.
DNIS
Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata
DK over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone
companies.
DPFT
Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit—An optional backup unit that provides emergency
service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight standard telephones to
designated CO lines.
DSS
Direct Station Selection—Feature which allows a telephone user (as well as a DSS console
and ADM user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button.
DTMF
Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing.
DVSU
A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Offhook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA).
E911
Enhanced 911 operation that provides more complete locator information to the responding
agency.
EKT
Electronic Telephone.
ESF
Extended Super Frame.
EOCU
Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly—An optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone
Interface Unit (PEKU) or Electronic Telephone/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PESU)
that enables properly configured telephones (see HVSU2) to receive Off-hook Call Announce
(OCA) calls.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission—The federal agency which regulates the
telecommunication industry. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved.
HDCB
Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
HDSS
Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic
telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
DKT2000 series
GL-3
Glossary
HESB~LED
Term
GL-4
Definition
HESB
External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to
provide a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM)
speaker.
HESC-65A
A cable used to connect an HHEU-equipped digital telephone or an HHEU-equipped
electronic telephone to the external speaker box (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature.
HHEU
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a
6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be
connected to the telephone.
HPFB
Optional Reserve Power Battery Charger (DK14)—One or two can be connected to the
power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure.
HVSU2
Subassembly that fits into a 6500-series electronic telephone enabling it to receive Off-hook
Call Announce (OCA) calls. The telephone must be connected to an Electronic Telephone
Interface Unit (PEKU) or a Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU)
equipped with an Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly (EOCU) to receive OCA, and must
have three-pair wiring.
IMDU
Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on an Option
Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS) that allows the system to be connected with a remote
administration/maintenance terminal or DKi Admin/DKi Backup personal computer.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network.
K4RCU, K5RCU
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit—An optional PCB
installed on the TMAU motherboard. The K4RCU3A, K5RCU1A or K5RCU2A must be
installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard
telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit) and it is required
for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and DID. The K4RCU and K5RCU circuits are also
used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) feature and must be installed
to allow ABR to operate. K4RCU has four DTMF receivers and four ABR busy tone
detectors; K5RCU1A and 2A have five DTMF receivers and four ABR detectors.
KCDU
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK40)—The KCDU has two loop start CO line
circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital telephone circuits can support all
but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit integrated digital
telephone circuits: digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-D12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs, DDCBs and
RPCIs.
KKYS
Modular add-on keys (KKYS1~3) or integrated circuit that installs onto the K4RCU3 to add
features to the DK40i (auto attendant, ACD/MIS).
KSTU2
The optional PCB provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the
base unit. The KSTU2 supports the two-wire devices such as standard telephones, Auto
Attendant devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. The KSTU2 can also
support an alternate Background Music (BGM) source on circuit four.
LATA
Local Access and Transport Area.
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that
displays calling information.
LCR
Least Cost Routing.
LDI
Long Distance Information.
LED
Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards (PCBs), digital
telephones, and electronic telephones.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
LSI~PEKU
Term
Definition
LSI
Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed
circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design.
MDF
Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet.
MDFB
Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option.
MOH
Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold
on CO lines or the intercom.
NDTU
Toshiba 30-foot cable that connects the RDTU to the KSU.
NT-1
Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables
multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be
UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified (Canada).
OCA
Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA.
OPS
Off-premises Station.
PBTC
A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect customer-supplied batteries to a cabinet power
supply in a one- or two-cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the entire system.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public
telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO).
PCB
Printed Circuit Board.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation—A widely-used form of digital telephone switching.
PCOU
CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RCOU) that provides the
system with four loop start CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.
PDIU-DI2
Integrated Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone base so that the
telephone can be used for the transmission and reception of data between a terminal/
personal computer connected to the telephone and devices connected to other PDIU-DIs or
to modems, printers, and computers which are in turn connected to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI
is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing of voice calls without a modem; and,
access to outside dial-up data services and/or bulletin boards via modem pooling.
Note: Replaced by RPCI-DI.
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit—Used for modem pooling, printer sharing, and accessing
host/mainframe computer.
PDKU2
Digital Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight digital
telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can support data interface
units (stand-alone and integrated), a digital DSS console (DDSS), RPCI, ADM, and a digital
door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).
[PDN]
Primary Directory Number.
PEKU
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight
electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic telephones, a Background Music
source, a door phone/lock control unit (HDCB), an electronic DSS console (HDSS), and
amplifiers for two CO-line conference calls. The PEKU is also used with older Strata
systems.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
PDIU-DS
GL-5
Glossary
PEMU~QKYS
Term
GL-6
Definition
PEMU
E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of REMU) that provides the system
with support for four E & M Type I Tie lines. The PEMU is also used with older Strata
systems.
PEPU
External Page Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface
mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with external paging
functions.
PESU
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system
with a combination of two standard and four electronic telephone circuits. The standard
telephone circuits can support standard telephones and optional hardware peripherals, such
as voice mail devices and fax machines. Except for the electronic DSS console, the PESU
electronic telephone circuits can support the same stations and peripherals that the PEKU
does. The PESU is also used with older Strata systems.
[PhDN]
Phantom Directory Number.
PIOU
Option Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface for
optional hardware peripherals and upgrades.
PIOUS
The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one external
paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four.
PORT
A term used to identify a station circuit or CO line circuit location.
PBTC1A-3M
Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies
(102 cabinet installations).
PPTC
A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: an SMDR device, ASCII
maintenance terminal, or remote maintenance external modem.
PPTC
A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: the modular SMDR, SMDI,
MIS for ACD, Open Architecture (OA), maintenance ports of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU,
or RSIS to the DB-9 (PPTC-9) connector of a call accounting machine, DK Admin, DK
Backup personal computer (PC), SMIS personal computer or Open Architecture personal
computer.
PPTC-9
Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports, while PPTC connects
directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25, not a PC COM port male DB25.
PPTC-25F
Used to connect a Call Center Viewer PC or SMIS PC to the RS-232 Strata DK424 MIS port
on the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU.
PRI
Primary Rate Interface.
PSTU2
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a
built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional
hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background Music source, fax machines, etc.).
The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for 190V peak-to-peak or 130V
peak-to-peak. The PSTU2 is also used with older Strata systems.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network.
QCDU2
CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides one CO line (loop start) circuit
and two digital telephone circuits on each PCB. The QCDU2 interfaces with digital
telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI, ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIUDSs, but does not support a DDSS or DDCB console.
QKYS
Auto Attendant Feature Key (DK14)—Provides built-in Auto Attendant software without
Program 03 assignments and installs directly onto the QRCU3 PCB.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
QSTU2~RCIU2/RCIS
Term
Definition
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides two standard telephone circuits (ports)
and interfaces with standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, separate BGM source
connections, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines.
QRCU2
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (DK14)—Provides three circuits to receive DTMF
tones (required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s), and three circuits to detect
busy tone (required for the ABR feature).
RAM
Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system
configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily
revised in programming.
RATU
Attendant Console Interface Unit—Optional PCB that can support up to four attendant
consoles and/or PC attendant consoles.
RBDB
Battery Distribution Box—Interface used to connect reserve power batteries to systems with
three or more cabinets (also provides six RBTC1A-1.5M cables to connect RBDB to cabinet
RPSU280 power supplies).
RBSU
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two circuits, each of which provide two
simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D
transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control channel). Available for DK424 with Release 4.1.
RBSS
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBSU to provide two
additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or stationside connections only. Available for DK424 with Release 4.1.
RBTC1A-2M
Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution box (3 or
more cabinet installations).
RBUU
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two BRI “U” circuits. Each circuit provides
two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D
transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control) channel. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2.
RBUS
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBUU to provide two
additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or stationside connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS subassembly provides four BRI “U” circuits
in one card slot. Available for DK424 with Release 4.2.
RCMS
Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Subassembly—Enables the DK424 (Release 4.0
and above) to connect to one or two CAMA trunks. Two RCMS PCBs enable connection to
four CAMA trunks.
RMCU
Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Interface—Enables connection from the DK424
(Release 4.0 and above) to E911 locator services without third-party equipment. The RMCU
supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports.
RCCB
Conduit Connection Box—Device required for floor-mounted systems with three or more
cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the system. Cabling from
the AC power source and from the reserve power battery source can only be installed by a
licensed electrician.
RCIU2/RCIS
Four-circuit plug-in PCB/four-circuit piggy-back PCB, each of which receives and decodes
FSK Caller ID (CLID or CND) information from the Central Office ground or loops Caller ID
lines. Each RCIU/RCIS circuit works in conjunction with a DK424 RGLU/RCOU/RCOS line
PCB circuit.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
QSTU2
GL-7
Glossary
RCOS~ROMS
Term
GL-8
Definition
RCOS
Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly—Optional subassembly that attaches to the
RCOU PCB to provide four additional CO analog line circuits to the PCB. Supports Caller ID
when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.
RCOU
CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with four loop start CO
lines. An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for four more loop start
analog CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.
RCTU
Common Control Unit—The system’s controller PCB that contains the system's main
microprocessor and microprocessor bus, ROM, RAM, time switch logic, busy tone detectors,
system tones and MOH/BGM Interface. RCTUs include: RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB,
RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F. Each RCTU supports different station and line capacities. The
RCTU PCBs also provide interface for the optional RRCS PCB and RKYS key.
RDDU
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides four analog Direct Inward
Dialing line circuits. Supports ANI and DNIS.
RDSU
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides two standard
telephone and four digital telephone circuits in its basic configuration. An RSTS can be
attached to the RDSU for two additional standard telephone circuits.
RDTU
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides up to 24-digital channels that can
individually be assigned for loop start CO line, ground start CO line, E & M Tie line, or DID
line operation. Supports ANI and DNIS.
REMU
E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with support for four E & M
Type I or Type II, Immediate or Wink Start Tie lines. Supports ANI and DNIS.
RFIF
Floor Mount Installation Kit—Kit that is used to floor mount systems.
RGLU
Analog Ground/Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit—Provides four CO line circuits that can be
individually configured for loop start or ground start CO line operation. Supports Caller ID
when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.
RKYS
Feature Key Upgrade—Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the
system with optional features. There are four versions of the RKYS: the RKYS1, the RKYS2,
the RKYS3 and the RKYS4, each of which provides a distinct set of features.
RMDS
Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RSIU Optional
Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/
maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer.
RPCI-DI
Computer Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal telephone base and provides all the
functions of PDIU-D12. In addition, it can be switched to a second mode automatically and
used with a Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) software application.
RPTU
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Unit—Provides 1 data (control) channel and 23 bearer
channels.All B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be
individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie, etc., service operation.
Supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and RCTUE3/F4.
RRCU
Remote Cabinet Interface Unit—One pair supports up to two DK424 remote expansion
cabinets at one location.
ROM
Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software
engineers.
ROMS
Remote Cabinet Interface Unit Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RRCU that
enables two DK424 remote expansion cabinets to at one location.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
RPSB (1 and 2)~SSTU
Term
Definition
Power Strip—Interface between cabinet power supplies and the commercial AC power
source. The RPSB provides outlets for three power supplies. One RSPS is required for
systems with three or four cabinets, two or three RSPSs for five- or six-cabinet systems.
RPSU280
Cabinet Power Supply—Furnishes power to all of the stations and peripherals connected to
the cabinet PCBs. Each Base and optional expansion cabinet has a separate power supply.
RRCS
Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver—An optional upgrade to the system common control unit
(RCTU) that provides Dual-tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) receivers for system Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) CO lines, E&M Tie lines, DID, DNIS and ANI lines, Auto attendant
announcement devices, remote change of call forward-external destination, DNIS external
call routing, and stations and other peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits.
The RRCS comes in three models: the RRCS-4 (provides four DTMF receivers), the RRCS8 (eight DTMF receivers), and the RRCS-12 (12 DTMF receivers).
RSIS
Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—A subassembly installed on the RSIU optional
interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the following features: voice
mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer, external
maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer.
RSIU
Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides interface to any of the
following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local or remote DK Admin/DK
Backup Personal computer, built-in (RMDS) or external system maintenance modem, Open
Architecture personal computer. By itself, the RSIU PCB provides one interface port. With up
to three RSIU/RMDS subassemblies, it can provide up to four interface ports.
RSTU
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a
built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight-standard telephones or optional
hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background music source, fax machines, etc.).
The RSTU has a built-in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator. The RSTU also has connectors
for the R48S, which extends station loop length and is described in this section.
RSTU2
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB functionally identical to the RSTU.
RSTU2 also contains a 90-volt DC message waiting/generator/switching circuit to operate
standard telephone message waiting lamps.
RWBF1
Wall bracket Fixture—Bracket that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor
mount systems.
RFMF
Floor Mount Fixture—Fixture that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor
mount systems.
R48S
Optional 48V Power Supply—Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU or RDSU to
extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits (including the resistance of the phone)
from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms.
[SDN]
Secondary Directory Number.
SF
Super Frame.
SLT
Single-line Telephone.
SMDI
Simplified Message Desk Interface: RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or RSIU
modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration.
SMIS
Software MIS for ACD.
SSTU
Factory-installed sub-unit board that is “piggy-backed” onto the PSTU or PSTU2.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Glossary
RPSB (1 and 2)
GL-9
Glossary
S/T Interface~WSIU
Term
GL-10
Definition
S/T Interface
Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are
RJ45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network Utype BRI lines to S/T type interfaces.
TAPI
Telephone Application Programming Interface.
TA
Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal
that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ11 voice ports and RS-232C or V.35 or
V.449 data interfaces.
T1/DS-1
See RDTU.
TCIU1
Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK424.
TCIU2
Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK40.
TCOU
Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Board— An optional PCB providing four loop start CO line
circuits in the Strata DK40.
TDDU
Four-Circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit— An optional PCB providing four DID
line circuits in the Strata DK40.
TE
Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes,
computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type intefaces.
TSPI
Telephony Service Provider Interface.
TSIU
RS-232 Ports—An optional PCB that provides up to two RS-232 interface ports (modular
jacks) enabling the DK40 to connect to various hardware devices.
TTY
Flexible RS-232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS (ACD).
U Interface
A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with
different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line.
universal slot
Slots in a telephone KSU/cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs.
WSIU
Serial Interface Board (DK14)—Provides two serial ports for either a Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem, or Caller ID interface.
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
B
[DN]‚ [PDN]‚ [SDN], [PhDN], BCU xvii
B1CU PCB 7-46
B2CBU PCB 7-44, 7-47, 7-48
B3CAU PCB 7-49
B3CBU PCB 7-50
B5CAU PCB 7-51
B5CBU PCB 7-52
background music (see BGM) 9-18
base cabinet 4-2
base cabinet installation 5-7
base KSU (see key service unit)
base KSU PCB
K4RCU3 3-23
KSTU2 3-25
TCIU2 3-28
TCO 3-30
TDDU 3-33
TSIU 3-36
basic rate interface (see BRI, see also ISDN)
battery
DK14 reserve power battery/charger (HPFB)
1-7
removing and charging 11-32
battery backup
DK40i interface 2-5
BCU
installation procedures 7-44
BCU PCBs 7-46, 7-49, 7-50
beep strap 11-17, 11-22
BGM 2-5, 9-18, 12-3
alternate source installation 12-9
external installation 12-10
options 12-3, 12-6
single page zone 12-26
to connect source 12-9
BRCS 7-43
BRI 3-38
BRI circuit jack (TE or NT mode) 16-22
A
ABR receiver 2-5
ACD
installation guidelines 13-4
Strata DK built-in auto attendant 13-6
to voice mail or auto attendant 13-6
add-on modules
capacities 6-11
ADM 2-6
installation (DKT2000) 11-18
limits 3-40
amplified conference 6-10
amplified talk path 12-33
amplifier requirements 12-33
ANI 6-10
attendant console 11-54
interface unit 9-26
attendant position options 4-17
auto attendant 2-5, 12-74
built-in
ACD 13-6
ACD applications (DK424) 12-78
block diagram 12-79
DK14 1-18
installation 12-77
overview 12-74
programming 12-76
DK424 feature key 4-16
DK424i feature key 6-3
simultaneous announcements 6-10
auto dial (PC ) voice call 12-71
auto disconnect
digital announcer 12-79
auto preference 11-30
automated attendant (see auto attendant)
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
Variables
IN-1
Index
C~D
BRI wire type recommendations 16-23
built-in auto attendant
(see auto attendant, built-in)
busy override 11-17
BVPU
configuration 9-4
station
PDKU 10-8
PEKU 10-17
PESU 10-18
RDSU 10-10
RSTU2/PSTU 10-22
CTI 15-6
C
cabling
DDCB/HDCB/MDFB 11-26
call center viewer (CCV) 13-14
configuration 13-16
software installation 13-16
Y connector (CCVY) 13-16
call monitoring 16-43
call park orbits 6-10
caller ID 3-28, 6-10
interface 2-5, 9-27
lines (see also BRI, PRI lines)
CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/RCMS) 9-60
camp-on ring tone 11-17
carbon headset/handset strap 11-16
CCVY 13-16
CNIS
abandoned call numbers 6-10
CO line 2-4
digital interface unit 9-8
CO line digital telephone interface unit 1-13
CO lines
capacities 6-11
DK424i 6-4
groups 6-10
common DIU connections 12-47
compatibility
DK8/DK14 1-21
conference
two-CO line 12-32
conferencing 6-10
connecting to network side (TE-mode) 16-25
connecting to station devices (NT-mode) 16-26
cordless digital telephones 6-11
cordless telephone 11-30
connect to base unit 11-31
cord connection 11-31
handset battery pack 11-32
installation 11-30
cross connect record
RCOU/RCOS, RGLU, RDDU, REMU,
RDDU, RDTU 10-26
IN-2
D
DADM 11-35
data broadcast unit 13-18
data communication installation tests
external PC to internal PC 12-69
internal PC to external PC 12-67
PC to PC 12-65
PC to printer 12-66
PDIU-DI 12-65
PDIU-DS 12-65
RPCI 12-65
DDCB 2-5, 2-6
DDCB/HDCB 9-13, 11-25
assignments guide 12-14
cabling 11-26
programming 11-27
wall mounting 11-26
DDSS 2-5, 2-6
limits 3-40
DH 6-10
DID
lines 6-11
DID line circuit 2-5
digital
telephones
system capacities 6-11
digital add-on module (see DADM)
digital announcer auto disconnect 12-79
digital telephone
1000-series 11-10
circuits 2-5
connecting to system 11-5
limits 3-40
upgrade 11-8
beep strap 11-17
busy override/camp-on ring tone over
handset/headset 11-17
carbon headset/handset strap 11-16
external power strap 11-18
loud ringing bell/headset 11-14
microphone/speaker
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
D~D
Strata DK I&M
5/00
hardware 4-19
interface PCB options 4-16
network requirements 5-6
PCBs
PCOU2 9-36
DK424 and DK424i hardware compatibility 6-21
DK424 PCB
RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS
installation 9-27
RCOS 9-32
RDSU 9-40
DK424 PCBs
(see Universal PCBs)
DK424i
architecture 6-2
base cabinet 6-3
base cabinet installation 7-6
BCU programming 7-44
BRI configurations 6-7, 6-8, 6-9
configurations 6-5, 6-6
expansion cabinet 6-4
expansion cabinet installation 7-6
expansion cabinets 7-30
functional block diagram 6-18
interface PCB options 6-16
maximum line capacities 6-4
power requirements 6-39, 7-4
remote expansion cabinet unit 7-53
DKT2000 ADM installation 11-18
DKT2004-CT 6-11
DKT2010 strap/connector locations 11-13
DKT2104-CT 6-11
DNIS 6-10
door lock
control 12-10
DDCB/HDCB 12-14
relay options 12-10
door locks 6-11
door phone (see MDFB) 11-25
door phone/lock control unit (see DDCB/HDCB)
door phones 6-11
DPFT installation 12-2
DSS and MDFB 4-18
DSS console
configuration 11-24
system connection 11-23
DTMF
ABR receiver 2-5
receiver subassembly 6-3
receiver/ABR tone detector unit
Index
sensitivity adjustment 11-17
simultaneous voice/data 11-8
TAPI 11-8
telephone speaker off-hook call announce
11-4
digital telephone interface unit 3-38, 9-10
digital/standard telephone interface unit 3-38, 9-40
DIP switch options 12-58
direct station selection (see DSS)
DISA 12-37
distributed hunt 6-10, 9-37
DIU 12-46
common connections 12-47
limits 3-40
DK alarm sensor 12-73
DK14
PCBs
compatible with DK8 1-21
QCDU2 1-13
QRCU3 1-17
QSTU2A 1-15
WSIU 1-19
reserve power battery 1-7
secondary protection 1-22
wiring
to caller ID interface (WSIU) 1-25
to CO lines (KSU and QCDU) 1-24
DK40i
capacities
line and universal PCB slots 2-3
station and peripherals 2-3
system features 2-2
interface PCB options 2-8
PCBs
(see Universal PCBs)
installation in KSU 3-20
KSTU2 3-25
PCOU 3-30
RCIU2
installation 9-27
TCIU2 3-28
TDDU 3-33
TSIU 3-36
RCIU1/RCIU2 9-29
secondary protector diagram 3-41
system configuration 2-1
telephone circuits 2-9
DK424
base cabinet 4-2
DK280 compatibility 4-3
IN-3
Index
E~I
DK40i 3-23
tones 2-5
DTMF receiver unit 7-43
DVSU 11-4
installation 11-13
E
E&M tie line unit 3-38
E911 12-83
programming considerations 12-83
see RCMS
system installation 12-83
E911 CAMA trunk direct interface (RMCU/
RCMS) 9-60
EIA interface leads (signals) 12-49
electronic telephone
connecting to system 11-5
interface unit 3-38, 9-12
system capacities 6-11
upgrade 11-19
beep strap 11-22
carbon headset/handset strap 11-22
handset receiver volume-up strap 11-23
loud ringing bell/headset 11-21
microphone/speaker
threshold 11-23
off-hook call announce 11-19
EMC ferrite core requirement 16-25
enhanced 911 service (see E911)
EOCU 9-17
illustration 9-12
expansion cabinet installation 5-7
expansion cabinets 4-2, 5-21
expansion key service unit
connections 3-15, 3-16
mounting 3-15, 3-16
expansion KSU components (DK40i) 2-6
external
page zones 6-10
external page 12-10
installation 12-26
with BGM 12-26
interface unit 9-15
external speaker unit (see HESB)
catastrophic faults 14-11
CO line dial tone faults 14-13
DSS console faults 14-14
fault classification 14-10
remote maintenance faults 14-17
station dial tone faults 14-12
voice mail auto attendant faults 14-15
fax machine 2-5
four-circuit
DID line digital telephone interface unit 3-33
loop start CO line board 3-30
loop start CO line interface unit 9-32
standard telephone interface unit 3-25
functional block diagram 6-18
G
grounding terminal screws 16-22
H
handset OCA stations 6-11
HDCB 9-18
installation 12-15
HDSS console 9-12
connections 11-24
headset upgrade 11-14
HESB
amplified speaker
installation 12-22
installation test 12-23
external speaker unit 12-19
loud ringing bell 12-19
installation for DKT 12-19
installation for EKT 12-21
test 12-21
talkback amplified speaker 12-23
installation 12-24
wall mounting 12-26
HHEU 11-14, 11-21
installation 11-15, 11-21
HVSI 11-19
installation 11-20
HVSU 11-19
installation 11-19
I
F
fault finding 14-1
fault isolation 14-3
fault isolation flowcharts 14-10
IN-4
IMDU 9-21
Insight DK (DK424only) 13-14
installation 11-30
ADM 11-18
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
K~K
Strata DK I&M
5/00
PRI
RPTU
overview 16-5
testing and troubleshooting 16-13
RBSU/RBSS 16-25, 16-26
RBSU/RBSS premise wiring guidelines 16-22,
16-23
RPTU testing and troubleshooting 16-38
SMDR output 12-36
timing and synchronization 16-39, 16-43
ISDN
basic rate interface unit (RBSU) 3-38
subassembly (RSSS) 3-38
ISDN
BRI
RBSS PCB installation 16-18
RBSU/RBSS
capacity and cabinet slot information
16-15
PS-1 backup power option 16-15
REBS PCB
installation 16-18
R40S PCB installation 16-18
K
K4RCU 3-21
K4RCU3 2-5, 3-23
DK40i DTMF
receiver/ABR tone detector unit 3-23
K4RCU3 and K5RCU
configuration 3-23
illustration 3-24
programming 3-23
K5RCU 3-21
KCDU 2-6, 9-4, 9-8
configuration 9-8
installation 9-8
programming 9-8
key service unit
base to expansion unit connection 3-14
DK14 1-2, 1-5
components 1-12
DK40i 2-4
components 2-5
connectors 3-13
cords 3-13
KKYS 2-5, 3-21
KSTU2 2-5, 3-21, 3-25
configuration 3-25
Index
alternate BGM source 12-9
built-in auto attendant 12-77
DADM 11-35
DK alarm sensor 12-73
door phone 11-25
DPFT 12-2
E911 12-83
external BGM 12-10
external page 12-26
HDCB 12-15
MOH 12-4
MOH/BGM as BGM 12-9
multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU 12-81
PDIU-DI2 11-9
PDIU-DS to modem 12-62
PDIU-DS to printer 12-61
peripherals 12-1
RPCI-DI 11-9
SMDR printer/call accounting device 12-39
voice mail 12-46
interface leads
EIA 12-49
ISDN
BRI
RBSU/RBSS
cabinet installation 16-19
call monitor 16-30
installation 16-17
interface unit 16-13
led indications 16-19
leds and connectors 16-23
monitor jack 16-22
option switches, jumpers, and
connectors 16-18
overview 16-14
passive bus configurations 16-28
premise wiring guidelines 16-22, 16-23
RBUU
installation 16-30
RBUU/RBUS
interface unit 16-34
led indications 16-32
location of leds and connectors 16-32
station circuits TE-1 and TA 6-11
BRI, PRI channel lines 6-11
DK424 reference model 16-3
modular jack pin configurations 16-22
performance monitoring 16-46
IN-5
Index
L~P
wiring 3-25
L
line
capacities 6-4
lines
CO 2-6
station 2-6
lock control unit 11-25
loop limits 3-40
loop start line limits 3-40
loop/ground start CO line interface unit 3-38
loop-back testing 16-38
loud ringing bell upgrade 11-14
headset upgrade 11-21
M
MDFB 11-25
cabling 11-26
volume control 11-27
wall mounting 11-27
microphone/speaker
sensitivity adjustment 11-17
threshold 11-23
modem
setup recommendations 12-64
MOH 2-5, 12-3
installation 12-4
options 12-3
relay control 12-17
MOH/BGM
installation 12-9
motherboard
DK14 1-12
DK40i 3-20
multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU installation
12-81
music-on-hold (see MOH)
N
network requirements
DK424 5-6
night ringing
selected page zones 12-32
non-built-in auto attendant
(see auto attendant, non-built in)
O
OCA speaker 6-11
off-hook call announce 6-11
IN-6
unit (EOCU) 9-12
upgrade 11-19
off-premises stations 6-11
option interface unit 3-38, 9-21
P
P90 ring generator switch 9-18
page
single zone with BGM 12-26
paging
external zones 6-10
groups 6-10
max. simultaneous stations 6-10
PC
attendant console
system capacities 6-11
PC attendant console 11-37
wiring 10-19
PC auto dial voice call 12-71
PC interface unit 3-38
PC/data communications interface unit (see DIU)
12-46
PCB
circuits, interface options and connectors 4-12,
6-12
PCOU 2-7
controls, indicators, connectors 9-36
PCOU2 9-36
controls, indicators, connectors 9-36
illustration 9-36
installation(see RCOU installation)
PDIU-DI 11-8
data communication installation tests 12-65
PDIU-DI2 11-8
installation 11-9
PDIU-DS 2-5, 2-6
assembly 12-64
data communication installation tests 12-65
disassembly 12-64
installation
to modem 12-62
to printer 12-61
PDIU-DS 6-11
PDKU1/PDKU2 9-10
PDKU2 2-6, 3-38, 9-10
hardware options 9-10
illustration 9-11
programming 9-10
PEKU 2-6, 3-38, 9-12
controls, indicators, connectors 9-14
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
Q~R
Strata DK I&M
5/00
PSTU2 2-7
hardware option 9-58
illustration 9-58
installation 9-58, 9-60
Q
QCDU2
configuration 1-13
illustration 1-13
installation 1-13
programming 1-14
wiring 1-24
QKYS1 built-in auto attendant key 1-18
QRCU3
configuration 1-17
DTMF receiver/ABR tone detector unit 1-17
illustration 1-17
installation 1-17
programming 1-17
QSTU2
configuration 1-15
installation 1-15
programming 1-16
wiring 1-16
QSTU2/QSTS2
illustration 1-15
R
R40S 16-18
R48S 2-7
illustration 9-57
RATU 9-26
controls, indicators, and connectors 9-26
illustration 9-26
installation 9-26
RBSS 16-18
RBSU 6-12
overview 16-14
RBSU 4-12
RBSU/RBSS 16-13, 16-19, 16-22, 16-23
RBUU 6-12, 16-30
installation 16-30
RBUU 4-12
RCIS 9-27
programming 9-28
RCIU1 9-27
programming 9-28
RCIU1/RCIU2 9-27
RCIU2 2-7, 9-27
programming 9-28
Index
hardware options 9-12
illustration 9-14
installation 9-13
programming 9-13
PEMU (see REMU)
PEPU 9-15
installation procedure 9-15
programming 9-15
peripherals 2-4
installation 12-1
PESU 2-6, 3-38, 9-17
controls, indicators, and connectors 9-19
illustration 9-20
installation 9-18
programming 9-19
pickup groups 6-10
PIOU 2-6, 2-8
controls, indicators, connectors 9-24
PIOU/PIOUS 3-38, 9-21
hardware options
remote maintenance modem unit (IMDU)
9-21
installation 9-22
programming 9-22
PIOUS 2-6, 2-8
controls, indicators, connectors 9-25
power failure
DK40i transfer interface 2-5
options 3-17, 12-1
power failure terminal screws 16-22
power supply
DK14
PCB considerations 1-10
removal 1-8
replacement 1-9
DK40i
removal 3-19
replacement 3-20
wiring 3-17
processor PCB subassemblies 6-3
processor PCBs 6-2
program checklist
voice mail 12-44
programming considerations
E911 12-83
Stratagy 12-42
voice mail 12-43
VP 12-42
IN-7
Index
S~S
RCMS
installation 9-60
RCOS
controls, indicators, connectors 9-35
installation 9-32
RCOU 2-7, 3-38
illustration 9-34
installation 9-33
programming 9-33
RCOU/RCOS 9-32
RCTU
common control unit programming 5-51
RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUC3/D3,
RCTUE3/F3 5-46
RDDU 2-7, 9-37
DID line unit 3-38
illustration 9-39
installation 9-37
programming 9-38
RDSU 2-7, 3-38, 9-40
hardware options 9-40
illustration 9-42
installation 9-41
programming 9-41
R48S ring generator 9-40
RDTU 8-1, 8-2, 9-42
controls, indicators, and connectors 8-8
programming 8-3
RDTU2 6-12
RDTU2 4-12
REBS 16-18
relay control options 12-10
remote expansion cabinet unit 5-60, 6-16
remote expansion cabinets (DK424i) 7-53
REMU 2-7, 3-38
connectors, controls, indicators 9-45, 9-46
illustration 9-45
installation procedures 9-43
programming 9-44
reserve power
DK40i 3-17
installation
DK40i 3-18
RGLU2 2-7, 3-38, 9-47
connectors, controls, indicators 9-47
illustration 9-48
installation procedures 9-47
ring generator 9-40
RJ-45 pins in the 8-pin modular jack 16-22
RMCU 6-13
IN-8
illustration 9-62
installation 9-62
RMCU 4-12
RMCU/RCMS 9-60
programming 10-29
RMDS 9-49
ROMS1A 5-64
RPCI-DI 2-6, 6-11, 11-8
data communication installation tests 12-65
dual mode 12-47
installation 11-9
RPTU2 6-12
RPTU2 4-12
RRCS 6-3
RRCU 5-60, 5-63, 6-16, 7-53, 7-56
RRCU PCB 5-63
RS-232/modem interface unit 9-49
RSIS 9-49
RSIU 9-49
RSSU 2-6, 2-8, 3-38
RSTS 2-7, 9-40
illustration 9-42
RSTU2 2-7, 3-38, 9-57
illustration 9-59
installation 9-58, 9-60
RWIU 6-15
RWIU 4-15
S
serial interface board
DK14 1-19
DK40i 3-36
simultaneous voice/data upgrade 11-8
SMDI 2-5
SMDR 2-5
direct inward system access CO lines (see
DISA) 12-37
printer/call accounting device
installation 12-39
options 12-35
printout example 12-37
DISA internal station call 12-37
DISA outgoing CO line call 12-37
ring, no answer DISA call 12-37
programming considerations 12-38
speaker
OCA stations 6-11
speakerphone 11-17, 11-23
speed dial
system capacities 6-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Index
T~V
standard telephone 6-11
connecting to system 11-5
interface unit 2-5, 3-38, 9-57
standard telephone interface unit
DK14 1-15
standard/electronic telephone interface unit 3-38,
9-17
station and CO lines 2-6
station apparatus 11-1
telephones 11-1
station lines 2-4
station message detail recording (see SMDR)
strap
beep 11-17, 11-22
carbon headset/handset 11-16, 11-22
external power 11-18
handset receiver volume-up 11-23
Strata AirLink
interface unit 6-15
Strata AirLink
interface unit 4-15
Stratagy 12-42
programming considerations 12-42
StrataLink 15-6
StrataLink and TAPI for Windows 95 15-2
T
Strata DK I&M
5/00
U
universal slot PCB
KCDU 9-4, 9-8
PDKU2 9-10
PEKU 9-12
PEPU 9-15
PESU 9-17
PIOU/PIOUS 9-21
RATU 9-26
RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS 9-27
RCOU/RCOS 9-32
RDDU 9-37
REMU 9-43
RGLU 9-47
RSIU/RSIS/RMDS 9-49
universal slots 6-11
V
verified account codes 6-10
voice mail
options 12-41
program checklist 12-44
programming considerations (general) 12-43
SMDI 6-10
system installation 12-46
voice messaging
customer-supplied 12-43
Stratagy 12-42
Index
T1 interface unit 8-2, 9-42
T1/DS-1
lines 6-11
T1/DS-1 interfacing 8-1
talk path (amplified) 12-33
talkback amplified speaker (see HESB)
TAPI (see Telephony Application Programming
Interface)
TAPI upgrade 11-8
TBSU 3-27
TBUU 16-30
TBUU Printed Circuit Board 16-33
TCIU2 2-5, 3-20, 3-28
installation 3-28
programming 3-28
TCOU 2-5, 3-20, 3-44
hardware options 3-30
installation 3-30
programming 3-31
removal 3-30
replacement 3-30
TDDU 2-5, 3-20, 3-33, 3-44
programming 3-33
telephone
(see station apparatus)
battery backup 3-40
installation 11-3
wall mounting 11-6
telephones
DKT 6-11
EKT 6-11
telephony application programming interface
(TAPI) 15-1
telephony service provider interface (TSPI) 15-1
tenants 6-10
tie lines 6-11
toll restriction 6-10
TPSU16 3-19
TSIU 2-5, 3-21, 3-36
illustration 3-37
installation 3-36
programming 3-36
TSPI (see telephony service provider interface)
two-CO line external amplified conference 12-32
IN-9
Index
W~W
VP 12-42
programming considerations 12-42
W
wall boards 13-23
Windows 11-37
wiring diagram
2-wire tie line PEMU 10-33
4-wire tie line PEMU 10-34
CO line to MDF
PCOU 10-25
RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS 10-30
RCOU/RCOS 10-28
RDDU 10-31
REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II 10-32
RGLU2 or PCOU 10-27
CO/tie line 10-25
DK40i CO lines 3-44
DK40i KSU amphenol station/relay 3-42
DK40i secondary protector 3-41
external power to DKT 10-7
MDF 3-42
PDKU
DDCB/door phone/lock 10-5
DKT/DDSS 10-4
PIOU or PEPU peripherals 10-36
PIOUS
page/relay/alarm connection 10-38
station to MDF
PEKU
amplified two-CO line conference
10-15
background music 10-14
EKT/HDSS console 10-12
PESU 10-17
RDSU 10-9
RPCI-DI and PDIU-DS 10-5
RSTU/PSTU/RSTU2
standard telephone/voice mail/DPFT
10-21
Worksheets
DK40i 2-11
DK424 4-20
WSIU 1-19
installation 1-19
programming 1-19
wiring 1-25
IN-10
Strata DK I&M
5/00
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement